1 -p 



■.^^ 



0^ 



CO' 









A^^' 












^0 o. 



o 







v^^ 






.•.\^^ 









c-O 
o5 -^C. 






..-^"^ 



\0 o. 



"<^. S 



•/-_ 'J ' ^ . \ 



V . 



^^' 

^'^<^.. 









^^, .^^ 



,-^^' 









<>s> 



s- 



.0 






,i^' 






/ 



•ft 



r-^ .x^ 






,f' 



A- 
.is- 



.v 





'/• 


■\' 


>^: 


.^ 


% 


0^ 




•\^ "^ v^ ^ 









^^•^-r. 



s^^ "c^. 



,0^ 



"^-^ * N - ^ 



looo Questions 

MoritJ looo Questions. For the Entrance Exam- 
inations to the New York High Schools, the 
N. Y. Normal College, College of City of N Y., 
St. Francis Xavier College, West Point, An- 
napolis, and the Civil Service. 30 cents. 

A nswers to sxme. 50 cents. 

Recent Entrance Examination Questions. I'Or 
the New Vork Normal College, the College 
of the City of New York, St. Francis Xavier's 
College, Columbia College, the High Schools, 
Regents' Examinations, West Point, Anna- 
polis, and the Civil Service. 30 cents. 

A nswers to same. 50 cents. 

How to Prepare for a Civil Service F.xaminci- 
tion, with recent Kxamination Questions and 
the Answers. 560 pages. S3. 00. _,, _„ 

Craig's Com. School Questions vt\X.\\ Ans. *l-3"' 

Henry's Hi£k School Questionsvi\\.h Ans. »!•&"• 

SherrilCs New Nortn.Questionsviilh Ans. SI.jO. 

HINDS h NOBLE. Publishers 
4-5-6-12-13-14 Cooper Institute, New York Ciiy 

Schoolbooks of all publisJurs at one store 



$berriir$ 
new normal Question Book 

Revised and Eiilarzcd 
5J2 Pages Price, $1.50 

The chief purpose of the New Normal Question Book 
is that of preparing teachers for examinations. The 
questions are so arranged as to bring out the vital and 
difficult points of each subject. New Questions and 
Answers on Psychology and Pedagogy, also some Test 
Problems in Arithmetic, have been added. 

The Questions and Answers are by no means the all- 
important features of the book. The Appendix of Out- 
lines on Map Drawing, Percentage, Analysis in Grammar, 
Theory and Practice of Teaching, Topic Lists and hints 
and suggestions on various other subjects, such as the 
preparation of manuscripts and rules and regulations to 
be observed during examinations, must prove a mine 
of treasure to the teacher. 

The book contains Questions and Answers on the fol- 
lowing subjects: 

Arithmetic Civil Government 

Grammar English and American Literature 

Reading Psychology and Pedagogy 

United States History Theory and Practice of Teaching 

Physiology Orthography 

Physical Geography Test Problems 

Mathematical Geography Penmanship 

Political Geography Parliamentary Rules 

In order that the New Normal Question Book may 
find its way into the hands of every teacher and every 
school, we offer these special Club rates for introduction: 
Single copies, $1.50; two copies, $2.50; three copies, 
$3.50; four copies, $4.25; six copies, $6.00. Transpor- 
tation at our expense. Cash must accompany the order. 

We want one good agent in every county in the United 
States to sell these books. Write for our special terms to 
agents. Mention this advertisement. 

Nearly one hundred thousand copies have been sold 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers 

4-5- J 3- J 4 Cooper Institute - - New York City 

School Book^ of All Publishers at One Soie 



NEW COMMON SCHOOL 

QUESTION BOOK 

COMPRISING QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ^^^9 
ON ALL COMMON SCHOOL STUDIES 

BY 

ASA H. CRAIG 

ENLARGED EDITION FOR 1900 

RE-WRITTEN THROUGHOUT — MANY BRANCHES ADDED 
RE-SET FROM NEW TYPES, AND PRINTED FROM NEW PLATES 

ONE HUNDRED AND EIGHTY-NINTH THOUSAND 



Copyright 1872, 1879, 1887, by Asa H. Craig 

Copyright iSgi and 1893, by Arthur Hinds &= Co. 

Copyright 1899, by Hinds &= Noble 



HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers of 

^ Henrys High School Questions, $1.50 

"^ Shcrrill's New Normal Question Book, $1.50 

4_5_6_i2-i3-i4 Cooper Institute New York City 

Schoolbooks of all publishers at one store 



\ 



SCHOOL BOOKS 

of all publishers, new and sccand-hand. Send 
for Catalogue. 

DICTIONARIES 

French, German, Latin, Greek, Italian, and 
Spanish. Prices, $1,00 to $2.00. 

EXAMINATION QUESTIONS WITH 
ANSWERS 

Recent G)IIege Entrance Examination Questions 
with Answers (in press), $J.50. A Question 
Book on Common School and High School 
Subjects with Answers, $1.50. 1 00 1 Questions 
and Answers (U kinds), 50c. Recent Civil 
Service Examination Questions with Answers, 
$ 2.00. A Book Containing Original Valedictories, 
Salutatories, Orations, Es^ys, Compositions, etc., 
$1.50. 

TRANSLATIONS 5(> a)6 

Literal and Interlinear, 144 Volumes. Prices, 
50 cents and $1.50. 

HELPS FOR TEACHERS 

Mistakes in Teaching — How to Correct Them, 
by Miss Preston's Assistant, $1.00. Composition 
Writing Made Easy, 75c. New Dialogues and 
Plays, $J.50. A New Speller, 25c. Page's 
Theory and Practice of Teaching with Questions 
and Answers, 50c. German Texts with V ocabu- 
laries, 50c. Completely Parsed Caesar, Book I. 
Tin press), $1.50. How to Become Quick at 
Figures, $ 1 .00. Gordy's New Psychology, $ i .25. 
A Text Book on Letter Writing, 75c. How to 
Punctuate Correctly, 25c. A Book of Synonyms 
and Antonyms, 50c. Debates (Both Sides of 
Live Questions Fully Discussed), $1.50. A New 
Speaker, $J.OO. Teachers' Class Register, 50c. 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers 

Ne'ver too busy to ansiver questions 
4-5-i3-I4 Cooper Institute New York City 

TV^O COPIES BECEIV SO. 

^issss-^^ SECOND COPY, 



PREFACE. 



Question and Answer Books certainly serve two good 
purposes. They make it practicable for the teacher, who 
is perhaps already overworked, to hold frequent reviews, 
and they minimize at the outset that wholly mechanical 
work of "sorting out" questions which makes mere drudg- 
ery of the preparation of review topics. 

With carefully selected review questions and answers 
ready to hand, there would seem to be no reason why the 
teacher, however hard pressed for time, should not review 
the classes as often as desired. 

All educators agree that reviews should form an import- 
ant, an oft-recurring part of the work of every school. 
The pupil who is made to realize by repeated examinations 
that he must fix his lessons not only for to-day's recitation, 
but also for to-morrow's review, and next week's, and next 
month's, is going to become habituated almost of necessity 
to a more faithful application, a more determined con- 
centration of mind — a habit which, once formed, is of 
greater value even than knowledge itself. 



Teachers'. 
Labors 



^ 



^ ^ Craig's Revised Com- ^ 

I jo'riten ^is^' t 

^^^^^^ AA •'^^*Ji Answers, price ^^ 

^ si.so. {(L 

Page's Theory and ^ 

Practice of Tpach- *^ 

ing. Willi yues- ^f* 

tions and An- {IK> 

swers, price $i.oo. ^ 

Smith's New Class ^ 

Register. The ^ 

best of record {(|» 

books, price 50c. 

Gordy's New P'^ychol. 

_ __ - , - - - » w ogy. w i t li yues- ^ 

«gS ^ » ^'^ tions on each Les- {i]i» 

-^ son, price, §1.25. ^ 

Composition Writing Made Easy. Five Grades, viz. A, *V* 

B, C, p. K, 20c. each. All five for 75c. ^ 

Handy Pieces to Speak. Primary, 20c., Intermediate j^ 

20c., Advanced, 20c. All three for 500. ' ^^ 

A New Speller. 5,000 common words one should know i^ 

how to spell, price 25c. fM» 

Bad English. Humiliating " Breaks' corrected, price |^ 

^oc. ^ 

A New Book of Dialogues. (Adapted from popular t4» 

authors' works.) Fry., Inter,, and Adv. PriceSi.50. 4^ 

Commencement Parts. (Valedictories, Salutatories, ^ 

Orations, Essays.) Price $1.50 ft|» 

Pros and Cons. (Both sides of live questions fully ^^ 

discussed.) Price $1.50. ^^ 

How to Punctuate Correctly. Price 25c. ftg* 

How to Become Quick at Figures. Price $1.00. ^^ 

We will send above books on approval to any ,„ s^ 

earnest teacher. If you wish to keep any of them *^ 

after examination remit the price — if not you may fM» 

return them to us. ^^ 

We prefer to have you see the books before you ft|» 

purchase them. ^^ 

Kindly mention your official position when you ^'^ 

write us. t^ 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers X 

School Books c/A .7 Ptiblithers at One Store ^ 

4-5-13=14 Cooper Institute New York City ^ 



CONTENTS. 



Preface 



Questions and Answers on United States History . 

Questions and Answers on Geography 

Questions and Answers on Reading 

Questions and Answers on English Grammar 
Questions and Answers on Letter Writing .... 
Questions and Answers on Orthography, Orthoepy 

and Phonology 

^^*-Questions and Answers on Written Arithmetic . 

Questions and Answers on Theory and Practice of 

Teaching 

Questions and Answers on Bookkeeping 

Questions and Answers on Drawing . ^ . . . . 
Questions and Answers on Alcohol and Tobacco . 
Questions and Answers on Civil Government 
Questions and Answers on Physiology, Anatomy and 

Hygiene 

Questions and Answers on Participles and Infinitives 

Questions and Answers on Writing 

Questions and Answers on Test Problems .... 

Questions and Answers on Parliamentary Rules . . 



5 
1 29 

2 1 7 

229 

257 



X^ 



263 

285 - - 

329 

347 
367 

37S-\- 
385 

403 
445 
449 
459 A' 

471 



CRAIG'S COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK 

{Over igy^ooo copies sold) 

Over 10,000 teachers have secured their certificate 
witii its aid. County examiners use it because it is so 
authoritative. Students find it of great assistance in pre- 
paring for their Entrance Examinations to the High 
Schools. Teachers use it for review work. The ^ook 
contains over 8,500 questions and answers on 

U. S. History Geography 

Reading Pedagogy 

Grammar Algebra 

Physiology Civil Government 

Arithmetic Orthography 

In order that this book may find its way into the 
hands of every hard-working Teacher, we offer the 
following special club rates : Price for single copies, 
$1.50; two copies, $1.20; three copies, $1.15; four 
copies, $1.10 ; five copies, $1.00. Transportation prepaid. 



HENRY'S HIGH SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK 

{Over 60,000 copies sold) 

"This book is the most up-to-date practical aid I have 
ever seen. The questions on Mathematics, History, and 
the Sciences are full of helpful suggestions. Every pro- 
gressive teacher should possess a copy.' It contains 
questions and answers on the following subjects: 

General History Chemistry 

English Literature Zoology 

Philosophy Astronomy 

Rhetoric Geometry 

Political Economy Physics 

This is one of the most Iielpful books for High School 
teachers that has ever been published. It has helped 
many a student to successfully pass his College Entrance 
Examination. Price, $1.50. 

HINDS & NOBLE 

4-5-J3-I4 Cooper Institute - - New York City 

School Books oy Ail Publishers at One Store 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



1. What is History 1 

A recital of what has happened respecting nations and 
countries. 

2. What are the generally accepted divisions of history ? 
Ancient and Modern, with subdivisions of Sacred and 

Profane. 

3. What is {z) Ancient history 1 (h) Modern? (c) Sacred i 
(d) Profane ? 

An account of events {a) from the creation of the world 
to the birth of Christ; {b) from the birth of Christ to the 
present time; {c) the contents of the Holy Scriptures; 
{d) any history not regarded as inspired. 

4. What are the great events of ancient history ? 

The rise and fall of the four great empires: Assyria, 
Persia, Greece and Rome. 

5. For what is modern history distinguished? 

Great inventions and discoveries, the advancement of 
the arts of peace, the improvement of civil government, 
and the spread of civilization to all parts of the earth. 

6. How was America first settled / 

It is still a matter of conjecture ; but probably the first 

5 



6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

visitors from the Old World came from Asia by way of 
Bering Strait, or on Pacific coasting vessels driven by 
storms across the ocean and shipwrecked on the shores 
of our continent. 

7. What proofs shoiv that America ivas inhabited by a 
race of mefi previous to the Indians ? 

In Mexico, Central America and South America there 
are remains of temples, bridges, aqueducts and of ancient 
cities, indicative of a high state of civilization, the In- 
dians having no traditions of their origin. Thousands of 
curiously constructed earth mounds, which are scattered 
through the Mississippi River Valley, from the Gulf of Mex- 
ico to the Great Lakes, bear evidence that a different race 
from the Indians inhabited this continent before them. 

8. Were these earlier inhabitants all of one race ? 

The relics found in the mounds indicate that their build- 
ers were not of the same order of civilization as is repre- 
sented in the Mexican and Peruvian ruins. 

9. Why should tve suppose that the Indians were a dis- 
titict race of men from those of this prehistoric tifjie ? 

The natural instincts of the Indians are opposed to im- 
provement in the arts and sciences. For the three hundred 
years that their habits have been studied, they have always 
gloried in war and the chase, living where fish and game 
abound, and content with rude dwellings instead of pro- 
ducing any permanent or high-class architecture. The 
mound relics, also, are of types which have not survived, 
but which would have done so if they had entered into the 
lives of so conservative a race as the Indians. 

10. What records show that America was discovered pre- 
vious to its discovery by Columbus ? 

The historical records of Iceland assert that America was 
discovered by the Northmen in 1002. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



7 



1 1. Who were the JVorthfuen ? 

The inhabitants of Norway and Sweden were so called. 

1 2. What lands did they discover and what evidences exist 
of their explorations ? Were their discoveries of any benefit ? 

Their records, or traditions, describe the entire Atlantic 
coast; and the old tower at Newport, R.I., the inscriptions 
on the rocks at Dighton, Mass., and minor other relics are 
evidences of their claims. But no benefits arose from their 
discoveries, as the voyages were discontinued and the new 
country apparently forgotten. 

13. Into hoiu many chief epochs can the history of the 
Utiited States be divided '^ 

Six: First, from the discovery of the continent to the 
first settlement ; second, from the first settlement to the 
outbreak of the Revolutionary war; third, from the be- 
ginning of this war to the adoption of the Constitution; 
fourth, from the adoption of the Constitution to the com- 
mencement of the civil war ; fifth, from this to the sur- 
render of Lee's army ; and sixth, from the close of the 
civil war to the present day. 

14. What idea led to the discovery of America by Colum- 
bus t What results were sought ? 

That the earth was a sphere, and upon this belief Colum- 
bus attempted to find a westward route to India. 

1 5. What land did Columbus first discover, and when ? 
The island of Guanahani or San Salvador, on Friday, Oc 

tober 12, 1492. This is a much disputed point, however. 

16. Give sojue account of Columbus'' s trials and his final 
success ? 

Columbus, being too poor to fit out an expedition, ap- 
plied in vain to his own countrymen for aid, and then to 
the king of Portugal. He next turned to Spain, and in 
the meantime sent his brother to England, but his appeals 



8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

were laughed at, the very children mocking him as he passed 
in the streets. Eighteen years passed thus, seven of them 
in waiting for the answer of King Ferdinand of Spain. 
Saddened by his continued failures, he was leaving Spain, 
begging a little food at convent doors, and resolving to 
apply to the king of France. At a lonely mountain pass 
he was overtaken by a messenger from Queen Isabella, 
asking him to return. Urged by a desire to spread the 
Catholic faith throughout the world, and to see Spain the 
mistress of lands in Asia, the queen had changed her mind. 
To the objections of Ferdinand she answered : " I under- 
take the enterprise for my crown of Castile, and will pledge 
my jewels to raise the necessary funds." 

17. Ho7V many vessels composed his first fleet 1 When did 
they sail 1 

Three : the Pinta, the Santa Maria and the Nina. They 
sailed from Palos, Spain, August 3, 1492. 

18. (a) Where atid 7vhen did Columbus discover the main- 
land ? (b) How many voyages did he make! 

(a) At the mouth of the Orinoco River, in 1498. (/') Four. 

19. JVho discovered the mainland before Columbus "i 
Where 1 When 1 

John Cabot and his son Sebastian. The coast of Lab- 
rador. 1497. 

20. Why 7i'as the continent named America instead of 
Columbia 1 

A German, who published a description of the New World, 
suggested that it should be called America in honor of Amer- 
icus Vespucius, who made claims to the first discoveries. 

2 1 . What reward did Columbus receive for his discoveries 1 
Where was he buried l 

Others were jealous of his successes, and accused him of 
treason to the Spanish government. He was laden with 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. g 

chains and brought home a prisoner, and died without re- 
ward, broken-hearted. He was buried at Valladolid, Spain, 
where his body remained until 15 13; it was then trans- 
ported to Seville; in 1536 it was removed to the city of 
San Domingo; in 1796 it found a resting-place in the 
cathedral at Havana, whence, however, it was in 1899 re- 
moved to Spain. 

22. What nations explored the country no7V known as the 
United States ? 

The Spaniards, English, French and Dutch. 

23. Where did the Spaniards make their claims i The 
French 1 The Efiglish 1 The Dutch I 

The Spaniards in the West Indies and the southern part 
of the United States ; the French in the northern part of 
the United States and in Canada, having explored the Great 
Lakes, the Mississippi River from the Falls of St. Anthony 
to the Gulf, the Illinois, Wisconsin, Wabash, Maumee, Fox, 
and many other rivers ; the English on the Atlantic coast 
at various points, which they named Virginia; the Dutch 
in New York, which they called the New Netherlands. 

24. Name the most important Spanish discoverers and 
explorers. 

Columbus, Vespucci, De Leon, Balboa, Grijalvah, De 
Ayllon, De Narvaez, Magellan, De Soto and Melendez. 

25. What induced Ponce de Leon to come to the Netv 
World 1 Where 7vere his discoveries 1 

He was a Spanish soldier, who, being in disgrace, sought 
the glory of conquest to restore his tarnished reputation. 
He also went in search of a fountain, whose waters were 
supposed to restore youth to all who drank of them. He 
discovered Florida in 1512. 

26. What discovery 7C'as fnade by Vasco de Balboa ? 

He crossed the isthmus of Panama, and from the summit 
of the Andes first saw the Pacific Ocean, September 26, 15 13. 



lO COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

27. What was the object of De JVarvaez^s explorations ? 
Receiving a grant of Florida in 1528, he attempted its 

conquest with 300 men, allured by the prospect of gold. 
The exploration proved a failure. Many perished while 
wandering in the swamps. After arriving at the Gulf of 
Mexico, his men hurriedly constructed boats and put to 
sea ; but were shipwrecked, and De Narvaez was lost. Six 
years afterward four survivors reached the Spanish settle- 
ments on the Pacific coast. 

28. What of Ferdinafid de Soto and his explorations ? 

De Soto was a Spanish nobleman, who invaded Florida 
in 1539, seeking gold. He discovered the Mississippi 
River in 1541, and was buried in its waters when he died 
the next year. 

29. Whefi and by whom was the coast of Mexico discovered ? 
By Grijalvah in 15 18. 

30. Give an account of the expeditions of Pedro Melendez. 
Of De Ayllon. Of Magellan. 

Melendez was sent out by Philip II in 1565 to colonize 
Florida, but more particularly to destroy a colony of 
French Huguenots, who the year before had made a settle- 
ment near the mouth of the St. John's River. On being 
attacked the Huguenots put to sea in their vessels, but a 
furious storm destroyed their fleet, and they were washed 
ashore, where Melendez brutally butchered all who came 
near him. Only a few escaped. 

In 1520 Vasquez de Ayllon, a wealthy Spaniard, under- 
took an expedition to America, and, landing on the present 
coast of South Carolina, decoyed a number of natives on 
board his fleet and sailed for home, intending to sell them 
in Europe as slaves ; but three of his vessels were wrecked 
and most of the Indians were drowned. On reaching home 
he was honorably received by his government and sent on 
another kidnapping expedition, but it proved unsuccessful. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. n 

and he was financially ruined. This attempt to enslave the 
Indians caused them to lose all confidence in Spanish honor. 
Magellan was the first European navigator to venture on 
the Pacific, and the first to sail round the world. This 
voyage took nearly three years, beginning in 15 19. The 
Pacific was so named by Magellan on account of its peace- 
ful appearance, 

31. When, IV here, and by 7vhom was the first colony founded 
on the American continent ? 

In 1510, at Darien, by the Spaniards. 

32. When, where, and by ivhom was the first permanent 
settlement made i?i the United States ? The second 1 

In 1565, at St. Augustine, by Melendez. The second 
also was founded by the Spaniards at Santa Fe in 1582. 

2^2i- What parts of the New World were explored by the 
Spaniards 1 

Central America, Mexico, Peru, Florida, the Mississippi 
Valley, New Mexico and the coast of California. 

34. Who first atte7npted to form English settlemefits in 
America 1 

Sir Walter Raleigh and his half-brother. Sir Humphrey 
Gilbert. Their labors were unsuccessful, and the latter 
was drowned on the return voyage. 

35. When and where 7uas the first permanent English 
settlement 7nade in the United States / 

In 1607, at Jamestown, Virginia. 

36. Who sent out the settlers to famestozvn ? 

The London Company, composed of noblemen, gentle- 
men, and merchants of London. 

37. What territory was granted to the London Company] 
All the country between the southern limit of Maryland 

and Cape Fear. 



12 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

38. How many charters had the London Company ? 
Three. The first charter contained no suggestion of 

self-government. The people chose none of their officers; 
the king was to appoint two councils, one to reside in Lon- 
don and have control of all the colonies, and the other to 
reside in the colonies and have control of their local aff^airs. 
The second charter vested the authority in a governor in- 
stead of a local council ; it gave the colonists no additional 
rights, nor were they consulted with regard to the change. 
The third charter gave to the stockholders the power to 
regulate the affairs of the company. 

39. Name the most important French discoverers. What 
sections did they explore ? 

Verrazani and Cartier. Verrazani was sent out by the 
French king in 1524. He first touched the coast of North 
Carolina, and then sailed north to Newfoundland, having 
entered the harbors of New York and Newport. In 1534, 
James Cartier discovered and explored the Gulf and River 
of St. Lawrence. 

40. Who were the most important English discoverers and 
explorers 1 

The Cabots, Sir Francis Drake, Sir Humphrey Gilbert, 
Sir Walter Raleigh and Bartholomew Gosnold. 

41. Of ivhom was the PIyi7iouth Company cotnposed ? 
What territory zaas granted them ? 

It was composed of persons from Plymouth, Fngland. 
The grant was that tract of country lying between the 
forty-first and forty-fifth degrees of latitude, and was called 
North Virginia. 

42. Who ivere the first Spanish, French, English and 
Dutch discoverers ? 

Columbus was the first discoverer under Spanish auspices, 
John Verrazani the first under French, John Cabot the 
first under English, and Hudson the first under Dutch. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



13 



43. Where and when was the first permanent settlement 
made by the Dutch ? By the French ? 

By the Dutch at New York in 1613. By the French at 
Port Royal, N.S., in 1605. 

44. Where and when was the first white child of English 
pa7-e7its bom in America 1 What %vas her tiame I 

At the temporary settlement on Roanoke Island in 1587. 
Virginia Dare. 

45. What region 0/ country was called Acadia 1 

The tract lying between the present cities of Philadelphia 
and Montreal. The name has since been confined to New 
Brunswick, Nova Scotia and the adjacent islands. 

46. What can be said of Sir Francis Drake ? 

He was an English sea captain, who explored the coast 
of California and Oregon in 1579, and returned home by 
the way of the Cape of Good Hope, having made the second 
circumnavigation of the world. 

47. Why did Raleigh name the lands he explored Virginia 1 
In honor of Elizabeth, who was called the Virgin Queen. 

48. Who 2vas Champlain ? 

The pioneer who in 1609 discovered Lakes Champlain 
and Huron. He afterward led a party of Canadian In- 
dians against the Iroquois, in northern New York, beino- 
the first white man to enter that region. 

49. Who were the fesuit tnissionaries ? 

French priests, who sought to convert the Indians to the 
Roman Catholic faith. They were the explorers of the 
Mississippi Valley. In 1668 they founded the mission of 
St. Mary, the oldest European settlement in Michigan. 

50. Who were the first partial explorers of the Mississippi 
and its branches 1 

Joliet and Marquette. 



14 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

51. Who were La Salle and Father Hennepin 1 

Jesuit missionaries, and early explorers of the northern 
lakes and rivers. 

52. Who discovered the Hudson River 1 

Henry Hudson, an Englishman in the service of the 
Dutch government, in 1609. He sailed up the river to 
where the city of Hudson now stands. 

53. What was the object of Hudson'' s explorations 1 
To find a northern passage to the East Indies. 

54. What is said of the fate of Hudson ? 

In 1610, after discovering the strait and bay which bear 
his name, he was placed in an open boat with six sailors 
by some malcontent companions and abandoned. 

55. Who claimed the Ne7v Netherlands! 
The English and the Dutch. 

56. On what grounds did they base their respective claims ? 
The English upon the discoveries of the Cabots, and the 

Dutch upon the explorations of Hudson. 

57. How ivas the dispute settled! 

By force of arms; the English maintained possession. 

58. At the close of the sixteenth century, where were the 
only permanent settlements 1 

At St. Augustine and Santa Fe'. 

59. Name five of the first permanent settlements in the 
New World, at the beginning of the seventeenth century. 

Port Royal, N.S., in 1605, by the French; Jamestown, 
in 1607, by the English; Quebec, in 1608, by the French; 
New York, in 1613, by the Dutch; and Plymouth, in 1620, 
by the English Pilgrims. 

60. Who were the Pilgrifns ? 

They were dissenters from the Church of England, who, 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



15 



in order to worship in accordance with their conscience, first 
sought refuge in Holland ; but, believing in the future 
prosperity of the New World, they decided to face all hard- 
ships and found a colony there. They landed at Plymouth, 
December 21, 1620. This was the first settlement founded 
in Massachusetts. 

61. How many came on the first voyage 1 

One hundred and two. They came in a vessel called the 
Mayflower. 

62. Who was their first governor ? 
John Carver. 

63. Was the colony prosperous ? 

Nearly half its members died during the first four 
months, and all would have perished but for the aid of 
fishermen off the coast. Their sufferings continued four 
years, after which they prospered. 

64. Who was Roger Williams ? 

A Puritan of the Massachusetts Bay colony, who was 
banished thence for his unpopular religious opinions. He 
afterward founded the first settlement in Rhode Island. 
This was in 1636. 

65. Ho7u did the Puritans treat the Quakers ? 

They banished the Quakers from Massachusetts, im- 
prisoned many, and put four to death. 

66. Who 7vas Mrs. Anne Hutchitison 1 

A woman who, during the year in which Roger Williams 
was banished, declared that she had special revelations 
from God, and with great fluency of speech expounded 
them to crowded congregations of women, causing much 
disturbance among the clergy and people of Boston. She 
was finally banished. 

67. What 7aere the United Colonies of New England 1 
The colonies collectively of Massachusetts Bay, Ply- 



1 6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

mouth, New Haven and Connecticut which in 1643 were 
united under one government. 

68. What was the object of this league 1 

To protect its members against the Indians and the en- 
croachments of the French and Dutch, 

69. Why was Providence, Rhode Island, so named ] 
Because Roger Williams, having just escaped from the 

Puritans, was grateful for the tract (now Rhode Island) 
given to him by Canonicus, the Narragansett Indian chief, 
and compared it to a "gift of Providence." 

70. When and by what nation was 7iegro slavery intro- 
duced into the United States 1 

In 1619, by the Dutch. 

71. Who was Captaiti John Smith 7 

One of the founders of Jamestown, who, as governor, 
conducted the affairs of the colony with great energy and 
success. 

72. Who were Pocahontas and Powhatan 1 

Pocahontas was the daughter of the Indian chief, Pow- 
hatan. She saved the life of Capt. John Smith, who had 
been sentenced to death by her father. 

73. What became of Pocahontas ? 

She married, in 1613, a young English planter, John 
Rolfe. Three years later when visiting London she was 
taken sick and died, leaving an infant son, whose descend- 
ants include some of the leading families of Virginia. 

74. When did the first English women come to America? 
In 1608, to Jamestown, as wives for the settlers. 

75. What valuable plants were discovered in America 1 
Indian corn, potatoes and tobacco. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



»7 



76. When was the frst hidian plot to massacre the 
English ? 

In 1609, but the massacre was prevented by Pocahontas, 
who revealed the plot to the people of Jamestown. 

77. When was the first massacre in Virginia l 7he second? 
In 1622, when in one hour 347 men, women and children 

were massacred. The second was in 1644, when 300 were 
killed ; this plot was originated by Opechancanough, and 
was intended to exterminate the English settlers. 

78. Who was Nathaniel Bacon ? What 7vas the cause 
of Bacon'' s rebellion 1 

A patriotic young lawyer, who rallied a company and de- 
fended the settlements against the Indians; he was de- 
nounced by Governor Berkeley as a traitor for acting with- 
out orders. During the contest which followed, Berkeley 
was driven out of Jamestown, and the village partially 
burned. In the midst of this struggle Bacon died. 

79. When and where was the first Colonial Assembly 1 
June 28, 1619, at Jamestown. It. consisted of the gover- 
nor, council and deputies, or "burgesses," chosen from the 
various plantations. 

80. Who was King Philip ? 

King Philip was an Indian chief, the son of Massasoit, 
who, becoming jealous of the intrusion of the whites, 
planned a confederation of the Indian tribes against these 
intruders. 

8 1 . When was King Philip's war ? 

The war began in 1675, continuing about one year. 
King Philip was shot by an Indian, an ally of the English, 
in 1676. 

82. What were the Navigation Acts 1 

In 1660 the British Parliament ordered that the com- 
merce of the colonies should be carried on in Enoflish 



l8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

vessels, and their tobacco and all other products shipped 
to England. In fact, American manufactures were pro- 
hibited, and nothing allowed to be done that would enter 
into competition with the people of England. 

83. What was the effect of these hnvs ? 

• These laws bore very heavily on the people, causing 
great discontent, and were one of the causes which led to 
the Revolution. 

84. Were the Navigation Acts obsen^ed in Massachusetts ? 

No. An officer was sent to enforce them, but without 
success. Charles II seized upon the excuse thus offered, 
and made Massachusetts a royal province. The king died 
before his plan was completed, but James II, in 1686, de- 
clared the charters of all the New England colonies forfeited. 

85. Who was Sir Edmond Andros ] 

The first royal governor of New England. He was sent 
by James II. The colonies endured his oppressions for 
three years, when, learning that his royal master was de- 
throned, they revolted and imprisoned him. 

86. Erom what was derived the appellation of Charter 
Oak? 

When James II declared that the charters of all the New 
England colonies were forfeited, Connecticut refused to 
surrender hers. Governor Andros demanded the charter 
of the assembly then in session at Hartford, and during the 
debate which ensued the lights were suddenly extinguished, 
and the charter was seized by William Wadsworth and 
hidden in the hollow of an old oak, which since that time 
has been called the Charter Oak. 

87. Who was Sir William Phippsl 

The second royal governor of Massachusetts, or a pro- 
vince embracing Massachusetts, Maine and Nova Scotia. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



19 



88. What were the results of the so-called " Salem witch- 
craft ''2 

A superstition prevailed that persons were subject to the 
control of invisible evil spirits, and it is estimated that 
some 200 persons were accused, 150 imprisoned, 28 con- 
demned, 19 hanged, and one pressed to death. 

89. What was the cause of the Pequot ivar? How did it 
end? 

The Indians had become troublesome and dangerous to 
the early settlers of Connecticut, who resolved to make war 
upon the Pequots. A battle took place at Mystic River, 
where the tribe was nearly annihilated ; those Indians who 
were not killed were captured and made slaves, or escaped 
and joined other tribes. 

90. What 7iame did the Dutch give their colony on Mati- 
hattan Island] 

New Amsterdam, 

9 1. How was this island obtained? 

It was purchased of the Indians for about ^24. 

92. Giz'e a short history of the early government of Neiv 
York. 

After the discovery of the Hudson River, the West In- 
dia Company obtained of the Dutch government a grant 
of New Netherlands, and settlements were made at New 
Amsterdam and Port Orange, now the city of Albany, p'or 
twenty years New York was subject to Indian butcheries, 
varied by difficulties with the Swedes on the Delaware and 
the English on the Connecticut. In September, 1664, an 
English fleet came to anchor in the harbor of New Amster- 
dam, and demanded the surrender of the town. Peter 
Stuyvesant, the last and ablest of the four Dutch governors, 
plead with the council to fight, but in vain. They wished 
for English rule. The surrender was signed, and the 



20 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

colony was named New York. The English governors did 
not satisfy the people, so that when, after nine years of 
English rule, a Dutch fleet appeared in the harbor, the 
people went back quietly under their old rulers. The next 
year peace was declared between England and Holland, 
and New Amsterdam became New York again. Andros 
now became governor, and New York remained a royal pro- 
vince until the Revolution. 

93. When and by whom was Connecticut settled "i 

In 1636, by a company of persons from Massachusetts, 
with their minister, Mr. Hooker. Their settlements were 
at Windsor, Hartford and Wethersfield. 

94. By whom was the first settlemefit in New Hampshire 
made ? 

By the Rev. Mr. Wheelright and a few followers, who 
were also banished from Massachusetts on account of their 
religion. 

95. Who made the first settlement in Maine 'i 
Ferdinand Georges, in 1636. 

96. From 7vhat did its early colonists greatly suffer 1 
From the hostilities of the Indians. 

97. Why zvere the Indians so hostile and barbarous 1 
Because of the treachery of the early explorers, several 

attempts being made by the whites to kidnap Indians and 
take them to Europe as slaves. The Indians sought ven- 
geance. 

98. When and by tvhom was Philadelphia founded? 

In 1683 William Penn purchased the land of the Swedes. 
The name, derived from two Greek words, signifies Broth- 
erly Love. 

99. Who was William Penn ? 

A Quaker, who, with a band of followers, had settled in 
Pennsylvania in 1682, buying lands of the Indians. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 21 

100. Why did Lord Baltitnore obtain a tract of land 
7iorth of the Pototnac River ? 

To secure for the Roman Catholics a refuge from the 
persecutions which they were then suffering in England. 

1 01. What 7aas the cause of Claiborne'' s irbel/ion ? 

The Virginia colonies claimed that Lord Baltimore's 
grant covered territory belonging to them, Claiborne, a 
member of the Jamestown council, having established two 
trading-posts in Maryland, prepared to defend them by 
force. On the eve of a battle he fled to Virginia, and his 
party was defeated. Claiborne was tried for treason, but 
acquitted. Ten years afterward he came back, headed a 
revolt, and drove Lord Baltimore, then governor of Mary- 
land, out of the colony. Lord Baltimore returned with a 
large force, and Claiborne fled. 

102. After this rebellion, what was the condition of Mary- 
land? 

The Protestants, having obtained a majority in the as- 
sembly, excluded Catholics from their rights, assailed their 
religion, and even declared them outside the protection of 
the law. Civil war ensued. At one time two governments 
were sustained, one Protestant and the other Catholic. In 
1691 Lord Baltimore was entirely deprived of his rights as 
proprietor, and Maryland became a royal province. In 
1 7 15 a later Lord Baltimore recovered the government, and 
religious toleration was again restored. 

103. To whom does the honor of having first established 
religious freedom in America belong l 

To the Roman Catholics of Maryland, by the " Tolera- 
tion Act" of 1649. 

104. By whom was Delaware settled? Where and when? 
What transpired a few years after their settlement ? 

By the Swedes and Finns, in 1630, near the entrance of 
Delaware Bay, where they laid the foundation of Lewiston, 



22 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

the oldest town in the State. After a few years, Governor 
Stuyvesant of New Netherlands conquered their colony. 

105. What Europeari wars disturbed the American colonies ? 
King William's war in 1689, Queen Anne's in 1702, and 

King George's in 1744. 

106. What 7iias King Williani's war, a?id how long did it 
last? 

In 1689 war broke out in Europe between England and 
France, The contest extended to the American colonies, 
and lasted seven years. 

107. What 7vas the condition of the colofiies during Queen 
Afine^s war? 

Queen Anne's war lasted eleven years. The New Eng- 
land frontier was again desolated ; remote settlements were 
abandoned ; the people betook themselves to palisaded 
houses, and worked their farms with their guns always at 
hand. 

1 08. Were the colonies much affected by King George's war ? 
They were not. The only event of importance was the 

capture of Louisburg, on the island of Cape Breton. Peace 
being established, England gave back Louisburg to the 
French. 

109. What part did the Indians usually take ifi these wars ? 
They assisted the French against the English. 

no. Which of the colonies suffered mostly in early war- 
fare? 

Virginia, Massachusetts, Connecticut and New York. 

111. Which of the colonies was free from Indiaji warfare? 
Pennsylvania. 

112. Which was the only treaty 7vith India?is never sworti 
to, and the only one never broken ? 

William Penn's treaty with the Indians. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



23 



113. Name the thirteen colonies. 

Virginia, New York, New Jersey, Massachusetts, New 
Hampshire, Maryland, Connecticut, Rhode Island, Dela- 
ware, Pennsylvania, North Carolina, South Carolina and 
Georgia. 

114. When afid where loere Hanmrd and Yale Colleges 
founded 1 

Harvard was founded at Cambridge, Mass., in 1638; 
Yale at New Haven, Conn., in 1701. 

115. When and by whom jvas the first newspaper started 
in America 1 Who 7vas the first American editor 1 

The Boston News Letter was established in 1704 by 
Bartholomew Green. John Campbell was the first Ameri- 
can editor. 

116. In 1741, what caused great excitement in New York 
City ; 

The supposed negro plot to burn New York and make a 
negro governor. 

117. Who icas John Eliot ? 

A minister who labored among the Indians, and for his 
devotion was called the Indian Apostle; he also translated 
the Bible into an Indian written language. 

118. Who was William Kidd 1 

A man sent out by England to suppress piracy in 1696. 
He turned buccaneer, was captured in Boston in 1699, sent 
to England, condemned and hanged. 

119. By 71.1 horn was North Carolina settled? 

In 1650, near Albemarle Sound, by a colony from Vir- 
ginia. 

120. When 7vas South Carolifia settled? 

In 1689, at Charleston, principally by Huguenots. 



24 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

12 1. hi J"/ 00, 7v/iaf valuable plants were introduced into 
this country ? 

Cotton and rice. 

12 2. IV/ien and by 7vho7n ivas Georgia settled 1 

In 1732, by James Oglethorpe, who began a settlement 
where Savannah now stands. 

123. Why was it called Georgia ? 

In honor of George II, then king of England. 

124. From luhat nation came the great fnass 0/ the early 
settlers of the United Stiles ? 

From England, though there were considerable numbers 
of Dutch, French, Scotch, Irish, Swedes and Germans. 

125. IVhere were the different nationalities found in the 
colonies ? 

The Dutch were mostly in New York ; the French in 
New York and South Carolina ; the Scotch and Irish in 
East Jersey, the Carolinas and Georgia; the Swedes on 
the Delaware ; the Germans in Pennsylvania and North 
Carolina. 

126. In 7vhat occupations were the settlers of New England 
engaged "i Those of the Middle States l Those of Virginia 
and Maryland 1 Those of Georgia and Carolina ? 

In New England the settlers were engaged in farming, 
lumbering, manufacturing, ship-building and fisheries; in 
the Middle States chiefly in farming; in Virginia and 
Maryland in farming, tobacco being the staple product; 
in Georgia and Carolina in rice-raising near the coast, and 
in general farming on the high lands, where cotton was 
cultivated on a small scale. 

127. What colojiy and tozvn stood first in commerce ? 
The colony of Massachusetts and the town of Boston. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



25 



128. What were the populations of New Vorh, Philadelphia 
and Boston ? 

Boston and New York had about 18,000 each. Phila- 
delphia about 25,000. 

129. IVhy had Virginia no large towns? 

The water-ways through Chesapeake Bay and many large 
rivers brought ships into direct communication with many 
plantations, which facilitated exchange and dispensed with 
the need of central markets, so that the colonists did not 
collect in large towns. 

130. 7/1 these times hoiv rcuis trade carried on ? 
Mainly by barter. 

131. What was used instead of currency ? 

In Virginia, for a long time, tobacco was used as money; 
in New England wampum, made of shells ; in New York 
beaver-skins. 

132. In what money zvere accounts kept? 
English — pounds, shillings and pence. 

133. Ho7i) did the use of dollars and cents become established? 
By the demand for money in the time of the Revolution. 

134. What were the general fnanners and custo?ns of the 
early settlers ? 

Primitive. The people did their own weaving and made 
their own clothing, and all were required to dress within 
their means. Their food was abundant, but simple, and 
their houses were mostly log cabins. Everything wore an 
air of industry and thrift. 

135. What religious beliefs existed in the colonies ? 
Christianity in some form was found everywhere. In 

Maryland the Roman Catholic Church was uppermost ; in 
Virginia and South Carolina the Church of England. In 
New England the doctrine was Calvinistic and the form 



26 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

of church government Congregational; while in New York 
the Reformed Dutch Church was supreme. The Quakers 
predominated in Pennsylvania, Delaware, Rhode Island 
and New Jersey, Roger Williams had established at Provi- 
dence the first Baptist Church in America. The French 
Protestants, or Huguenots, were found in considerable num- 
bers in New York and largely in Carolina. 

136. Give an account of religious persecutions in that day. 
A war of sects was waged in several of the colonies, the 

people seeming to forget their ideas of tolerance and re- 
ligious equality as they prospered. The Puritans im- 
prisoned Baptists and put Quakers to death. The Church- 
men in Virginia banished Puritans and imprisoned Baptists. 
The Protestants of Maryland disfranchised the Catholics. 
But as years passed, the tolerant spirit was gradually re- 
stored. 

137. Under what dominion were the colonies ? 
Under the crown of England. 

138. What 7vere proprietary governments i Give examples 
of them. 

Where the province was under some proprietor, by grant 
to an individual or association from the king. Pennsyl- 
vania under William Penn, and Maryland under Lord 
Baltimore, are examples. 

139. Describe (a) ?-oyal goverfiment, (b) charter govern- 
ment, (c) voluntary association. 

(a) Royal government was that conducted directly by 
the crown through the appointment of a royal governor. 
(b) Charter government was where the colony was gov- 
erned by a code of laws enacted expressly for them and 
called a charter; this written instrument granted certain 
political rights and privileges, (c) Government by volun- 
tary association was where the people organized themselves 
into a body politic without authority of privilege from the 
crown. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



27 



140. Who JVC re f/ie founders of American literature 1 
Increase Mather, one of the early presidents of Harvard 

College, and his son Cotton Mather. 

141. What 7vas the first iniportafit book written by a native 
American ? 

Cotton Mather's '•'■ Magnalia,'''' a religious history of New 
England. 

142. What influence had the pulpit in the education of the 
people in colonial times 1 

It had great influence, as many of the ministers were 
men of superior scholarship. They did not deal wholly in 
religious dogmas, but led and inspired the people, kept 
patriotism aflame, watched the encroachments of British 
despotism, and moulded national character. 

143. When were post-offices first established 1 

In the year 1693 Parliament voted to establish post- 
offices in the colonies, and Thomas Neale was authorized 
to transmit letters and packets "at such rates as the 
planters should agree to give." 

1 44. What great men did the colonial times produce 1 What 
notable sentiment was uttered by fames Otis 1 

Jonathan Edwards, theologian; Benjamin Franklin, phil- 
osopher and statesman ; James Otis and Patrick Henry, 
orators. After the passage of the Stamp Act by Parlia- 
ment, James Otis said : "To my dying day I will oppose, 
with all the powers and faculties God has given me, all 
such instruments of slavery on the one hand and villainy on 
the other." "Then and there," said John Adams, "the 
trumpet of the Revolution was sounded." 

145. Where and when was the first permanent settlement in 
the Mississippi Valley ? 

At Kaskaskia, in Illinois, about i6go. 



28 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

146. What was the cause of fhe French and Indian roar, 
and who were the parties to it ? 

The cause was disputed territory, and the parties were 
the French and Indians against the English. 

147. Where was the disputed territory ? 

West of the Alleghany Mountains, along the Ohio River 
and the northern lakes. 

148. Who was sent to request the French to withdraw from 
the territory on the Ohio i 

George Washington. 

149. What was the result of Washington'' s endeavor to 
compel the French to abandoti the Ohio River territory ? 

After some successes Washington marched to a place 
called Great Meadows, where he built Fort Necessity. 
Early in July, 1755, ^^^ ^^''^ was attacked by the whole 
French and Indian force, but was so stoutly defended that 
the French commander, Count de Villiers, raised a flag of 
truce. Washington finally gave up the fort, but was per- 
mitted to march away with all the honors of Vi^ar. 

150 How were Washington and his soldiers rewarded by 
the legislature of Virginia 1 

A vote of thanks was passed, and each soldier was to re- 
ceive a pistole. 

151. After Washington'' s retur?t, ivhat general 7i'as sejit in 
his place against the French ? 

Gen. Braddock, with a select force of 1,200 men. 

152. What 7uas the result of Gen. Braddock' s expedition'^ 
When within a few miles of Fort du Quesne (now Pitts- 
burg, Pa.) he was surprised by a body of French and In- 
dians in ambush. Braddock was mortally wounded, and 
nearly all his officers and half his troops were killed. Brad- 
dock was buried during the retreat, and Washington ordered 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



29 



the wagons to pass over his grave and obliterate it so that 
his body might not fall into the hands of the Indians. 

153. Who was the only mounted officer saved hi this ex- 
pedition ? 

Washington, although four bullets pierced his coat and 
two horses were shot under him. 

154. Was the fiext expedition against Fort du Quesne 
successful? 

Gen. Forbes led this expedition. Washington com- 
manded the Virginia troops. After the capture of the 
fort it received the name of Pittsburg, in honor of William 
Pitt. 

155. At what points outside of the Ohio country did the 
colonists attack the French 1 

At Louisburg, Quebec, Crown Point and Niagara. 

156. What success had the £?iglish in their campaign 
agaittst Acadia 1 

The French forts at the head of the Bay of Fundy were 
quickly taken, and the region east of the Penobscot fell 
into the hands of the English. Gen. Loudoun planned an 
attack on Louisburg, but, learning that the French fleet 
contained one more ship than his own, gave it up. The 
next year Gens. Amherst and Wolfe captured the city after 
a severe bombardment, and took possession of the entire 
island. 

157. What did they do at Crown Point and Ticon- 
deroga 1 

The English under Johnson met the French commanded 
by Dieskau near the head of Lake George, where a battle 
was fought, the English being victorious. Johnson, after 
building a fort which he called William Henry, feared de- 
feat if he attempted to take Crown Point, and returned to 
Albany. 



30 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

158. Describe the attack on Ticonderoga. 

On a calm Sunday morning, about four months before 
the fall of Fort du Quesne, Gen. Abercrombie, with a 
thousand boats full of soldiers, with waving flags and mar- 
tial music, swept down Lake George to attack Ticonderoga. 
The result was a disastrous repulse. The next year, 1759, 
at the approach of Gen. Amherst with a large army, both 
Ticonderoga and Crown Point were evacuated. 

159. Were the English successful at Niagara ? 

Gen. Shirley reached Oswego, but after hearing of the 
disastrous defeat of Braddock, was discouraged, and only 
stopping to build a fort came home. Four years after 
Niagara surrendered to the English. 

160. Who were the commanders at the battle of Quebec! 

Gen. Wolfe commanded the English, and Gen. Montcalm 
the French. 

161. How 7vas Quebec taken! 

Gen. Wolfe, while reconnoitering, observed a narrow 
path winding among the rocks to the top. At night he de- 
scended the river, while his men landed, climbed the steep 
cliff and seized the guards, and at break of day stood with 
his entire army drawn up in order of battle on the Plains of 
Abraham. A desperate battle followed ; on September 13, 
1759, ^^^ days later, the city surrendered. 

162. What generals were killed at the capture of Quebec^ 
and what were their dying words ! 

Both Wolfe and Montcalm. Wolfe, when informed that 
the French were running, exclaimed: "Now God be 
praised; I die happy!" Montcalm, when told that his 
wound was fatal, replied: "So much the better; I shall 
not live to see the surrender of Quebec." 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



31 



163. What was the treaty of peace between France and 
England? 

France gave up all the territory east of the Mississippi, 
except two small islands south of Newfoundland, retained 
as fishing stations. In this treaty Spain ceded Florida to 
England, and France ceded to Spain New Orleans and all 
the territory she claimed west of the Mississippi. 

164. JF/iat were the cause and results of Pontiac^s war? 
When the English took possession of the western forts 

great discontent arose, for the French had won the hearts 
of the Indians, Pontiac, a chief of the Ottawas, formed a 
confederation of the tribes against the English. Eight 
forts were surprised and captured, and thousands of per- 
sons fled from their homes to avoid the scalping-knife. By 
a disagreement among the Indians the confederation was 
broken and a treaty signed. 

165. In the French and Indian war, 7vhat was the most 
remarkable battle 1 

The capture of Quebec. 

1 66. What were the effects of this war 1 

It cost the colonists 55^16,000,000, of which only^5, 000,000 
was repaid by England. They lost thirty thousand men, 
suffered the untold horrors of Indian warfare, and taxes 
were sometimes equal to two-thirds of the income of the 
tax-payer ; but they learned to think and act independently 
of the mother-country. 

167. At the close of the French arid Indian war, 7vhat ivas 
the population of the colonies? 

About 2,000,000. 

168. What were the chief causes which led to the American 
Revolution ? 

The colonies were unjustly taxed, and not allowed 
representat'on in Parliament. 



32 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

1 69. What were Writs of Assistance ? 

Warrants authorizing the king's officers to search for 
smuggled goods. This gave the custom-house officers power 
to enter a man's house or store at pleasure. The colonists 
resisted such power as a violation of their legal rights. 

170. W/iat was the Stamp Act, and when was it passed i 
It was a law requiring that to all bonds, deeds, news- 
papers, pamphlets, etc., there should be attached a stamp 
purchased of the tax authorities of the British crown. It 
was passed by Parliament in 1765. 

171. Who was Patrick Hefiry ? 

A Virginian who with boldness and eloquence distin- 
guished himself by his opposition to the Stamp Act. 

172. After the repeal of the Stamp Act, what attempt was 
made to tax the colonies ? 

A duty was laid on all tea, glass, paper and painters' 
colors which should be imported. 

173. Who were the Sons of Liberty ? 

In order to resist the Stamp Act, associations called 
Sons of Liberty were organized, and delegates from nine 
of the colonies met at New York and framed a Declaration 
of Rights, and a petition to the king and Parliament. 
November i was the date appointed for the law to go into 
effect, and on that day the people set aside all business, 
bells were tolled, flags were lowered to half-mast, and stir- 
ring speeches by the great orators of the times aroused the 
people over the whole land. 

174. What was the Mutiny Act? 

A law requiring that the colonies should furnish the 
British soldiers with quarters and necessary supplies. This 
act aroused the indignation of the Americans. To be 
taxed was bad enough, but to be forced to shelter and feed 
their oppressors was unendurable. 



UNITED STATES HISTOtiV. 33 

175. What event occurring in Boston received the name of 
''Boston Tea Party'' t 

Vessels containing nearly 350 chests of tea were boarded 
by Americans disguised as Indians, and the tea was 
thrown into the harbor. 

1 76. What zvas the Boston Port Bill 1 
An act of Parliament forbidding the landing of goods in 
Boston. 

177. What was the Boston Massacre t 

A small guard of British soldiers passing through the 
streets of Boston were so exasperated by the jeers and 
taunts of a crowd of men and boys, that they fired, killing 
three persons and wounding several others. 

178. When and jahere did the first General Congress of 
the colonies asse7nble, and ivhat action did it take ? 

The first Continental Congress was held at Philadelphia, 
September 5, 1774. It voted not to obey the recent acts of 
Parliament; protested against standing armies being kept 
in the colonies without consent of the people ; sustained 
Massachusetts in her resistance, and agreed to hold no 
intercourse with Great Britain. 

179. Why do we cherish the name Faneiiil Hall ? Where 
is it 1 By what other name is it knouni ? 

Faneuil Hall, in Boston, was a great rendezvous of the 
Revolutionary patriots. Powerful speeches were made in 
this hall for the cause of freedom, and from this it acquired 
the title of the "Cradle of Liberty." 

180. What 7vas the public feeling in England? 

Public feeling was generally against the colonies. " Every 
man," v^rote Dr. Franklin, "seems to consider himself as a 
piece of a sovereign over America; seems to jostle himself 
into the throne with the king, and talks of our subjects in 
the colonies." 



34 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

i8i. Were the people all united in their protestations 
against the English government 1 By what party names were 
they known ? 

They were not. Those who still remained loyal to the 
king were termed Tories, and those in opposition Whigs. 

182. Who 7vas Paul Severe ? 

A daring patriot, who, at the outbreak of the Revolution, 
performed valuable services in rousing the people in the 
country and villages. 

REVOLUTIONARY WAR. 

183. Who had command of the British army at the com- 
mencement of the Revolution ? 

Gen. Gage. 

184. When and zohere was fought the first battle of the 
Revolution ? 

April 19, 1775, at Lexington, a few miles from Boston. 

185. Describe the battle of Lexington. 

Gen. Gage, learning that the people were gathering mil- 
itary stores at Concord, sent eight hundred British soldiers 
to destroy them ; at Lexington a skirmish occurred in 
which seven Americans were killed. After destroying the 
stores, the troops hastily retreated, followed by the militia, 
who were eager to avenge the death of their countrymen. 
In their retreat to Boston the British lost nearly three 
hundred men. 

186. What effect had this battle 1 

The effect was like wild-fire. American blood had been 
shed. Patriot avengers came pouring in from all sides. 
Grey-headed fathers and mothers sent their boys to battle. 

187. Who was Israel Putnam ? What nickname was 
given him ? 

A Connecticut farmer who, when notified of the battle of 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 35 

Lexington, immediately left his plow, mounted his horse 
and rode to Boston, a distance of 100 miles, without leav- 
ing his saddle. His great courage and patriotism was of 
vast assistance to the cause of freedom. He was familiarly 
known as "Old Put." 

188. What were some of Putnani's narrow escapes ? 

The story of his entering a wolf's den and shooting the 
animal by the glare of his eyes serves to show his love of 
bold adventure. At Fort Edward he alone, when all others 
fled, saved a magazine containing three hundred barrels of 
gunpowder from approaching flames, at the cost of being 
terribly burned. In one encounter he received fourteen 
bullet holes in his clothing. The British vainly offered 
him money if he would desert the American cause. 

189. IV/ien and cohere zvas the battle of Bunker HilU 
Describe it. 

June 17, 1775, on Breed's Hill, in Charlestown. It was 
the intention of Gen. Ward, who commanded the patriots, 
to fortify Bunker Hill in the night, but by some mistake 
Breed's Hill was selected. At daylight the British were 
startled by seeing the redoubt which had been constructed, 
and the officers immediately decided to drive the Americans 
from their position. Three thousand troops under Gen. 
Howe were formed into line and slowly ascended the hill. 
No move was made by the patriots until the British were 
within ten .rods. Then a blaze of light shot from the re- 
doubt, and whole ranks of the enemy fell. The survivors, 
unable to endure the terrible slaughter, broke and fled. 

A second charge was but a repetition of the first; but 
on the third the ammunition of the patriots became ex- 
hausted and they were driven from the field. 

190. Who were the commanders in this battle ? What was 
the force of each army, and the loss ? 

Gen. Howe commanded the British army. It is uncer- 



36 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

tain who commanded the Americans, but generally histor- 
ians give Col. Prescott the credit. The British force, which 
numbered 3,000, lost 1,000; the Americans had a force of 
1,500, and lost 450. 

191 . What American general 7vas killed in this battle 1 

Gen. Warren. This gallant soldier was among the last 
to leave the field of battle, and while he was trying to rally 
the troops, a British officer who knew him seized a musket 
and shot him dead, 

192. How did the Americans regard the battle of Bunker 
Bill? 

The effect was that of a victory, as the untrained farmer- 
soldiers had met the seasoned troops of the British army, 
had repulsed them twice with great slaughter, and but for 
the lack of ammunition would have been victorious. 

193. What two forts were captured by the Americans in 

May, J77S. 

Ticonderoga and Crown Point. 

194. To whom did these forts surrender? 

To Ethan Allen and Benedict Arnold, respectively. 

195. What did Allen say when asked by 7vhat authority 
he demanded the surrender of Ticonderoga ? 

"I demand it in the name of the Great Jehovah and the 
Continental Congress." 

196. Who were termed " Green Mountain Boys " ? 

During a controversy between New Hampshire and New 
York, over lands claimed by each party. Col. Ethan Allen 
became conspicuous in the cause of New Hampshire, and 
the recruits under him were called the "Green Mountain 
Boys." It is now applied to the men of Vermont. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 37 

197. When did the second Continental Congress assemble, 
and what did it do ? 

On May 10, 1775. It voted to raise and equip 20,000 
men, and give the command to Gen. Washington. 

198. When did Gen. Washi?igton take command of the 
American army, and ho7v large tvas his force f 

July 3, 1775, at Cambridge, Mass. His force was 14,000 
men. 

199. What was the result of the American attack on 
Canada 1 

It was unsuccessful, suffering a defeat at Quebec, where 
Gen. Montgomery, the American general, was killed. 

1776. 

200. Hoiv did Washington force the British to evacuate 
Boston 1 

By sending a force at night to fortify Dorchester 
Heights. These overlook Boston, and Howe, remember- 
ing the lesson of Bunker Hill, decided to leave. The next 
day, March 18, 1776, Washington entered the city amid 
great rejoicing. 

201. Describe the attack on Fort Moultrie. 

On June 28, a British fleet under Admiral Parker opened 
fire on Fort Moultrie. The response from Moultrie's guns 
was so fearful that the fleet was badly damaged, and it 
withdrew and sailed for New York. 

202. What daring feat 7vas accomplished by Sergeant 
Jasper in this attack 1 

Early in the action the flagstaff was struck by a ball; 
Jasper leaped over the breastworks, caught up the flag, 
and springing back tied it to a sponge staff, and replaced 
it in its former position. 



3^ COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

203. Who iritroduced in Congress the resolution that "the 
United Colonies are, and ought to be, free and independent 
States"? 

Richard Henry Lee of Virginia, June 7, 1776. 

204. Who were appointed to draw up a declaration of 
rights ? 

Thomas Jefferson, John Adams, Benjamin Franklin, 
Roger Sherman, and Robert R. Livingston. 

205. When 711 as the Declaration of Independence accepted 
by Congress ? 

July 4, 1776. 

206. What did this declaration assert ? 

That the thirteen United States of America were free 
and independent. 

207. When 7vas it signed, and by how many persons ? 
August 2, 1776, by all the members of Congress, num- 
bering fifty-six. 

208. What became necessary after this declaration 1 
That articles of government should be drawn. 

209. What were these articles called, and when were they 
to take effect ? 

Articles of Confederation, and they were to take effect 
when ratified by all the States. 

210. Were they ratified by Congress immediately 7 

No ; delays and objections arose, but they were estab- 
lished in March, 1781. 

211. Which State was the last to give her co?isent 2 
Rhode Island, in 1790. 

212. Why were the articles of confederation not adapted to 
the general ivants of the government ? 

Because they gave no real power to Congress, which 



UNITED STATES mSTORY. 



39 



could only recommend what should be done. Congress 
could borrow money, but was not empowered to pay it; 
could declare war and determine how many troops should 
be raised, but could not levy taxes to defray expenses, or 
compel the States to raise the troops. 

213. When was the battle of Long Island fought, and with 
what result f 

On August 27, 1776, the Americans being compelled to 
withdraw, closely pursued by the British under Gen. Howe. 

214. /;/ the retreat of Washington, through what places did 
he fass ? 

North by way of Harlem, White Plains and Chester, 
then southwest through New Jersey to the Pennsylvania 
side of the Delaware River. 

215. When was the battle of White Plains fought, and who 
was victorious ? 

October 28, 1776. Neither side was victorious, although 
Washington retreated when the British received reinforce- 
ments. 

216. What 7vas the feeling of the colonists at this time 1 

They were discouraged and heartsick. In the three 
weeks' retreat of Washington the soldiers were poorly clad 
and many of them barefooted. Often their blood-stained 
footprints were left on the frozen ground. It was a season 
of great adversity, and tried the patriotism of the new 
government. Many people of wealth and influence went 
over to the British side. 

217. What daring exploit 7e.ias undertaken by Washington 
near the close of the year JJ76 1 

He crossed the Delaware River on the night of Decem- 
ber 25, proceeded to Trenton, and in the early morning 
captured one thousand Hessians and a large quantity of 



40 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

arms with the loss of only four men, two killed and two 
frozen to death. 

218. What was the effect of this feat ? 

It was considered the great military exploit of the Rev- 
olution. Its effect was electrical. It revived the drooping 
spirits of army and people. Recruits flocked to the Amer- 
ican standard, and the troops whose terms of enlistment 
had expired, agreed to remain. Such brilliant achieve- 
ments of Washington astonished the British commander, 
and Cornwallis, who was about to return to England under 
the impression that the rebellion had been subdued, was 
ordered to remain and prepare for a winter's campaign. 

219. Why did Washington choose Chris t??ias night to attack 
the Hessians ? 

Knowing that the Germans regarded this day as one of 
great festivity, he believed they would not expect an 
attack, and in the midst of their carousals could be sur- 
prised and routed. 

220. When and by who77i were the islands oj Rhode Island 
captured ? 

December 8, 1776, by Sir Peter Parker. 

1777. 

221. At the opening of the year 1777, how many British 
armies tvere in America ? 

There were three, one of 35,000 men, under Gen. Howe, 
whose headquarters were in New York ; one of 7,000 in 
Canada, under Sir Guy Carleton ; and one of 5,000 in Rhode 
Island, commanded by Gen. Prescott. 

222. What battle soon followed Washington's success at 
Trenton l 

The battle of Princeton, Jan. 3, 1777, which was one of 
the most brilliant contests during the whole war. The 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



41 



Americans were successful. That night Washington left 
his camp-fires burning to deceive the enemy, and by a 
circuitous route passed the British, fell upon the troops 
near Princeton, routed them, took three hundred prisoners, 
and by rapid marches reached Morristown Heights in 
safety. 

223. What was CornwalHs^s mistake in cofinection with 
this achievemefit of Washington ? 

He was urged by other officers to attack Washington 
that night, but believing it an impossibility for him to 
escape, he declined, saying he could "catch the fox in the 
morning." At daybreak the sound of cannon in the 
direction of Princeton aroused Gen. Erskine, who ex- 
claimed, "To arms. General! Washington has out- 
generaled us ; let us fly to the rescue at Princeton ! " 

224. What great compliment 7vas given to Washington 
by Frederick the Great of Prussia .? 

He declared that the achievements of Washington and 
his little band, during the six weeks following Christmas, 
were the most wonderful recorded on the pages of military 
annals. 

225. During the summer follo^ving the battle of Princeton, 
what occurred bctiveen the British and Americans 1 

Little of importance. Howe waited for an attack, but 
finding Washington apparently on the defensive set out to 
force an engagement, which by the adroit movements of 
the Americans was prevented. Finding these attempts 
unsuccessful, Howe suddenly changed his plans, embarked 
eighteen thousand men on his brother's fleet and set sail 
for Chesapeake Bay. 

226. What 7iinis t/ie force of Washington'' s army ? 

It numbered only eleven thousand men ; but with this 
small army Washington resolved to hazard a battle for the 
defence of Philadelphia. 



42 COMMON SCHOOL QUEST/ON BOOK. 

227. What noted Frejich Marquis jomed the Americans at 
this time, and ivhat obstacles did he overcome in order to offer 
his services to the American Congress ? 

Marquis de La Fayette. He was not yet twenty years 
of age and had just married. He had brilliant social 
prospects and carried out his plan in defiance of the objec- 
tions of his family, the protestations of the British Minister 
and the refusal of the king to grant him the necessary per- 
mission. Undaunted, he purchased a vessel with his own 
money, fitted it out, and, by evading the officers sent to 
detain him, crossed the ocean and hurried before Congress, 
where he asked permission to serve as a volunteer with- 
out pay. His valor won for him a commission as Major- 
General before he was twenty-one. 

228. When 7vas the battle 0/ Bran dywine fought, and 7vho 
was victorious 1 

September 11, 1777; Washington was defeated, retreat- 
ing to Philadelphia. 

229. When did Philadelphia surrender to the British 1 
September 26, 1777, without opposition. 

230. Where did Washington attack the British soon after 
his retreat from Philadelphia, and with 7vhat result 1 

y\t Germantown, October 4, meeting with defeat, and 



231. What was one of the most daring and remarkable 
exploits of this period of the 7var, and how accomplished! 

The seizure of the British General Prescott by Col. Bar- 
ton, who, with forty selected soldiers, crossed Narragan- 
sett Bay in the night to the island, where the British army 
was encamped, proceeded to Gen. Prescott's lodgings, 
captured him and returned. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



43 



232. What was the chief object of taking Gen. P/escott, 
and zvas it accomplished? 

To have an ofificer of equal rank with Gen. Charles Lee, 
that an exchange might be effected. The plan was suc- 
cessful. 

233. Where did the British army go into ivinter quarters, 
and what was their condition in the spring .? What did Dr. 
Franklin wittily remark of them 7 

At Germantown. The winter was spent in such con- 
tinued festivities that they were sadly demoralized. Be- 
cause of this demoralization, Franklin said that "Howe 
has not taken Philadelphia so much as Philadelphia has 
taken Howe." 

234. Who ivas Lydia Darrach ? 

A Quaker woman, who revealed to Washington a plot 
that the British had arranged to attack him. 

235. What cheerifig offset to Washington's defeat greeted 
the Americans ? 

The brilliant achievements of the Americans in the 
north. 

236. Who invaded the United States from Canada? 
Gen. Burgoyne, with 10,000 British troops and Indians. 

237. What success did he have? 

He captured Forts Crown Point, Ticonderoga and Ed- 
ward, and the supplies at Whitehall. These successes cre- 
ated general consternation among the American colonists. 
Militiamen from the neighboring States were rapidly col- 
lected, and under the command of Lincoln, Arnold and Mor- 
gan, were dispatched to check the advance of the British. 

238. Who commanded the 7iorthern division of the American 
army? Who the British? 

Gen. Gates commanded the Americans, and Gen. Bur- 
goyne the British. 



44 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

239. What stratagem did Arnold resort to, in order to rout 
the British, and relieve Fort Stanwix ? 

He sent a half-witted boy into the camp of the British, 
who spread the report that a large body of Americans was 
close at hand. When asked their number, he could only 
answer by pointing to the leaves of the trees. The In- 
dians and the British were so frightened that they fled 
immediately. 

240. At the battle of Bennington, how did Gen. Stark 
inspire his troops, and ivith ivhat result? 

As the British lines were forming for the attack, he 

exclaimed : " There are the red coats ! We must beat 

them to-day, or Mollie Stark is a widow." They gained a 
victory, and took six hundred prisoners. 

241. What battles were fought by Gates and Burgoynel 
Who IV on them 1 

The two battles of Stillwater, or Saratoga, on Septem- 
ber 19 and October 7, \"}1"i \ the Americans were successful. 

242. When, where and to whom did Burgoyne surrender? 
October 17, 1777, at Saratoga, to Gen. Gates. 

243. What was the agreement in this surrender? 

That the British should give up their arms and ammuni- 
tion, return to England, and engage no more in the war. 

244. In this campaign, what noted foreigner tendered his 
assistafice '■'■to fight as a volunteer for American ifidependence'''' ? 

Gen. Kosciusko, a Pole of noble birth. 

245. What patriotic remark did Gen. Stark make when 
informed, after the battle of Bennington, that one of his five 
sons had been unfortunate? 

" Has he proved a coward or a traitor ? " "Worse than 
that," was the answer; "he has fallen, but while bravely 
fighting." "Ah!" said the father, "then I am satisfied." 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 45 

246. What was the Conway Cabal plot? 

A plot, originating in Congress, to put Washington out 
of command of the army. When the people heard of it 
they were so indignant that those who proposed it were 
glad to sink into silence. 

247. When did Coftgress adopt the Articles of Confedera- 
tion ? 

In November, 1777. 

248. Where did Washington quarter his troops during the 
Winter of 1777-177^^ ^"^ '^'^^^^ ^^"" ^^^^^^ condition ? 

In Valley Forge. The men were encamped in cold, 
comfortless huts, with little or no clothing. Many were 
barefooted, few had blankets, and straw could not be 
obtained. Sickness attacked the camp, and for want of 
suitable food and medicines many of the sufferers died. 

1778. 

249. What move was now made by England to effect a 

reconciliation ? 

They sent commissioners with liberal proposals, but the 
day was past for any negotiation which did not recognize 
the colonies free and independent. 

250. When Gen. Reed, of Fennsylvafiia, 70a s offered ten 
thousand guineas and high honors to seek a negotiation of 
peace, what did he say? 

"I am not worth purchasing; but such as I am, the 
king of Great Britain is not rich enough to buy me ! " 

251. Who were appointed by Congress to solicit aid from 
the French government] 

Benjamin Franklin, Silas Dean and Arthur Lee. 

252. When and where was the treaty of alliance formed? 
At Paris, February 6, 1778. It was ratified by Congress 

May 4. 



46 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

253. What assistance was sent by France in the spring? 
A French fleet under Count d'Estaing. 

254. Hoiv loTig did the British hold Philadelphia? 
About nine months, withdrawing their forces June 18, 

1778. 

255. Where did Congress assemble 7vhile the British held 
Philadelphia ? 

At Lancaster and York, Pennsylvania. 

256. When and where was the battle of Monmouth fought, 
and who were victorious? What heroic achievement was 
performed by a woman ifi this battle? 

June 28, 1778, in the eastern part of New Jersey. Both 
parties claimed the victory, but the British withdrew their 
troops. The day was sultry and hot. During this battle 
an artilleryman was shot at his post. His wife, Mary 
Pitcher, saw him fall, and hearing the commander order 
the piece to be removed from the field, she hastened to 
the cannon, seized the rammer, and with great skill and 
courage performed her husband's duty. 

257. How was Maiy Pitcher retvarded by Congress for her 
courage and patriotism ? 

She was voted a sergeant's warrant with half-pay during 
her life. 

258. What is said of Gen. Charles Lee at the battle of 
Monmouth ? 

Gen. Lee, in conducting the attack, became alarmed and 
ordered a retreat, which threw the troops into confusion. 
Washington coming up ordered a halt, bitterly rebuked 
Lee, and by his personal influence rallied the men and 
sent them back against the enemy. Lee being thus re- 
buked, wrote indignant letters to Washington, who gave 
them to Congress, who suspended Lee from the army. Lee 
retired to his estate and never rejoined the army. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 47 

259. Describe the campaign in Rhode Island. 

A combined attack on Newport was agreed upon by- 
Gen. Sullivan and Count d'Estaing with the French fleet. 
Soon after the arrival of d'Estaing in Narragansett Bay, 
Howe appeared off the harbor with the English fleet. An 
engagement was about to begin, when a terrible storm 
came up and both fleets were badly damaged, and retreated 
for repairs. Sullivan, being thus deserted, was obliged to 
retreat to prevent an encounter with Gen. Clinton, who 
came from New York with reinforcements. 

260. When did the massacre of Wyoming occur, and ivho 
directed it 1 

July 3, 1778, under the direction of John Butler and 
Joseph Brandt at the head of 1,600 Tories and Indians. 

261. Describe this massacre. 

After the capture of the forts the Indians perpetrated 
the most barbarous massacre which their savage cruelty 
could devise, sparing neither women nor children and 
slaughtering the aged with the young. The entire valley 
was ablaze with burning buildings, and nothing that could 
be destroyed was allowed to remain. 

1779. 

262. Who had charge of the American forces in the South 
in I77g, and who of the British ? 

Gen. Lincoln commanded the Americans, Gen. Provost 
the British. 

263. At this time, where were Washington and Clinton? 
In the Northern States. 

264. What important posts on the Hudson were surrendered 
to the Americans in ijjg i 

Stony Point and Paulus Hook. 



48 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

265. How 7vere these posts taken, and by whom? 

Gen. Wayne, in the night of July 15, with unloaded guns 
and fixed bayonets, attacked Stony Point, carrying the 
works. Paulus Hook was surprised and taken by Major 
Lee on July 19. 

266. What was the result of the American attack on 
Savannah ? 

A great loss to the American and French forces. 

267. /;/ the siege of Savannah, ivhat noblema?i 7vas mor- 
tally wounded? 

The Polish Count Pulaski. 

268. Up to this time, what had bee?i the success of the 
American tiazy and privateers? 

They had captured more than five hundred ships ; they 
had even cruised among the British Isles, and entering 
harbors seized and burned ships lying at the English 
and Scottish wharves. 

269. Who was fohn Paul Jones ? 

A successful commander of the naval forces. His most 
memorable exploit occurred off the coast of Scotland, 
where his Bon Homme Richard captured the British 
Serapis. As the enemy carried the heavier guns, he lashed 
the two vessels together, and for two hours the crews 
fought hand to hand with musket, pike and cutlass. The 
Bon Homme Richard was worse damaged than the British 
suspected ; but just as she was about to sink, the captain 
of the Serapis struck his colors, and Jones transferred his 
men to the captured frigate and sailed off with her. 

270. During this year, what attack was made by Gen. 
Sullivan ? 

He was ordered by Washington to attack the Indians 
on the frontiers of New York and Pennsylvania. The 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



49 



savages were everywhere defeated and forty of their 
villages were burned. 

271. What was the condition of the coutitry at the close of 
the yeat jyjQ? 

There was a very despondent feeling. The Americans 
had gained no decisive victory, while the British had ob- 
tained control of much important territory. The finances 
of the government, also, were in a sad condition. 

272. What 7vas Continental money / 

The paper currency issued by Congress. This issue 
amounted to ^200,000,000, and became so depreciated 
that 540 in bills were worth only ^i in specie. 

1780. 

273. In 1780, where were the military operations mostly 
carried on t 

In South Carolina. 

274. What was the result of the siege of Charleston! 
Gen. Lincoln was forced to surrender his troops, 2,000 

in number, May 12, 1780. 

275. Who succeeded Lincoln in the command of the Southern 
forces, and who had command of the British ? 

Gen, Horatio Gates succeeded Lincoln, and Lord Corn- 
wallis had command of the British. 

276. When and where 7vas the battle of Camden, who com- 
manded, and ivho was victorious? 

Near Camden, South Carolina, August 16, 1780. The 
armies were commanded by Gates and Cornwallis, the 
Americans being defeated with a loss of 2,000 men. 

277. Who received co7fimand of the Southerft army after 
the unsuccessful operations of Gen. Gates i 

Gen. Nathaniel Greene. 



50 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

278. What massacre was perpetrated by Col. Tarleton 
and his British troops t 

The massacre of Maxhaw Creek, where a body of 400 
Americans were surprised, and after surrendering were 
massacred. 

279. What was the condition of the South after these re- 
verses ? 

As the States had been overrun by the British, there was 
no organized resistance to them. 

280. What fleet came to assist the Americans infulyi 

A French fleet under the Chevalier de Ternay and Count 
de Rochambeau with 6,000 troops. 

281. Who 7iias Benedict Arnold? 

An American traitor, who secretly agreed to betray West 
Point into the hands of the British. 

282. Who was Major Andre ? 

A British officer, who was sent by Clinton to negotiate 
with Arnold. 

283. What were the names of the captors of Andre, and 
how tvere they rewarded] 

John Paulding, David Williams and Isaac Van Wart. 
Each received a pension of ^200 for life and a silver medal 
bearing on one side the motto, "Fidelity," and on the 
other, "The love of country conquers." 

284. What were the words of Washi?igton when the proofs 
of Arnold's treason were placed iji his hands? 

"Whom can we trust now.-"" 

285. What became of Atyiold and Andre? 

Arnold escaped to the British lines. Andrd was hanged 
as a spy, at Tappan, N. J., October 2, 1780. 



UNITED STATES I/ISTOK'V. 51 

286. HoTii was Arnold i-ewarded for his treac/iery] 

He received about ^30,000, a colonelcy in the British 
army, and the contempt of everybody. 

287. IV/io retidcred gallant assistance in the South in the 
la^vless attacks of the Tories, and often successfully routed 
s?nall detachments of the British soldiers t 

Marion, Sumter, Pickens and Lee. 

288. JFhat can be said of the courage, privations and hard- 
ships of these men l 

They were brave and patriotic, fighting without pay, 
food or clothing. They bore all the hardships and pri- 
vations of warfare without a murmur, A British ofificer 
who was sent to negotiate with Marion for an exchange of 
prisoners was asked to dine with him. Finding the fare to 
consist only of roasted potatoes and salt, and that his host 
had neither bed nor blanket, he was so affected by this de- 
votion to liberty that he resigned his commission, declaring 
that he would never fight against a cause with such de- 
fenders. 

289. What 7aas the condition of the British armies at the 
close of the year jy8o 1 

They had two large armies well equipped : one under Sir 
Henry Clinton, with headquarters at New York, and the 
other in the south under Lord Cornwallis. 

290. What valuable assistance 7vas rendered by Robert 
Morris, of Philadelphia! 

He gave three million rations to the soldiers. He loaned 
large sums of money, and even pledged his entire property 
as credit for the government. He also organized soldiers' 
relief associations, where private subscriptions were re- 
ceived, clothing was made, and encouragement given to 
renewed enlistment by soldiers whose time had expired. 
This patriot, so often the main support of Washington, 



52 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

lost his fortune in his old age, and was confined in prison 
for debt. 

1781-1788. 

291. When and ichere avas the battle of Cowpens fought^ 
and who 7vas victorious 1 

January 17, 1781, in South Carolina. The Americans 
under Gen. Morgan were successful, with a loss of only 
80 men. The enemy's loss was 800. 

292. What successful operations were conducted by Gen. 
Greene in September^ 

He attacked the British at Eutaw Springs, Septem- 
ber 8, and so crippled the enemy that they retired toward 
Charleston. 

293. Did Gen. Greene ever gain a decided victory 1 

No ; but his defeats had all the effects of success, and 
Congress voted him the highest honors for his prudence, 
wisdom and valor. 

294. How was the war conducted at the North? 

With great brutality. Arnold, who had command of a 
British force, in Connecticut, burned much private as well 
as public property, and Cornwallis, after arriving and tak- 
ing command, destroyed ^10,000,000, worth of property. 

295. What event brought the war to a close? 
The surrender of Cornwallis at Yorktown. 

296. When atid to ivhoni did Cornwallis surrender? 
October 19, 1781, to Gen. Washington. 

297. When and where was the treaty of peace signed, and 
who were the commissioners who signed it? 

September 3, 1783, at Paris. The American commis- 
sioners were John Adams, Benjamin Franklin, Henry 
Laurens and John Jay. The British commissioners were 
Messrs. Fitzherbert and Oswald. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



53 



298. When was peace proclaimed to the American army? 

April 19, 1783, just eight years after the battle of 
Lexington. 

299. Where and when did Washington resign his miiitary 
commission i 

December 23, 1783, before Congress, which was as- 
sembled at Annapolis, Md. He then returned to his home 
at Mt. Vernon, Virginia. 

300. What was the condition of the country at this tifne] 

The Articles of Confederation did not meet the needs of 
the hour. Bitter jealousy existed between the several States 
with regard to each other and the general government. 
Continental money was much depreciated, and universal 
bankruptcy seemed almost inevitable. 

301. What fiotab/e foreigners gave their assistance to the 
Americans ? 

The Marquis de La Fayette, Count de Grasse, Count de 
Rochambeau, Count d'Estaing, Count Pulaski and Cheva- 
lier de Ternay. 

302. What ivas the cause of the Shays Rebellion^ 

In New England a large body of people refused to pay 
their taxes, and openly threatened to overturn the govern- 
ment. The rebellion, led by Daniel Shays, was put down 
by troops under Gen. Lincoln. 

303. When was the national flag adopted! Describe it. 

In 1777, by Congress. It is composed of thirteen stripes, 
alternate red and white, with a field of blue in the upper 
flag-staff corner, on which there is a star for every State. 
The breadth is two-thirds its length. 

304. When was the Constitution adopted? 
In 1788. 



54 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

305. After the adoption of the Constitutiofi, where did Con- 
gress first meet? 

At New York, in April, 1789. 

306. What were the difficulties 7vith which the 7iew govern- 
ment had to contend? 

The treasury was empty, and the United States had no 
credit ; the Indians were hostile ; pirates from the Barbary 
States preyed upon our commerce ; Spain refused us the 
navigation of the Mississippi ; England had not sent a 
Minister to our government, nor had she made a treaty of 
commerce with us. 

Washington's administration — 1 789-1 797. 

307. When was Washington inaugurated Presidetit of the 
United States 1 

At New York, April 30, 1789. 

308. Where was the second session of Congress held? 

At Philadelphia, in 1790, where the seat of government 
was to remain until 1800. 

309. Whefi did the city of Washington become the capital 
of the United States ? 

In 1800. 

310. Who composed Washington's Cabinet? 

Jefferson was Secretary of State ; Hamilton, Secretary 
of the Treasury ; Knox, Secretary of War ; and Randolph. 
Attorney-General. 

311. Ho7a 7vas the credit of the United States put upon a 
firm basis? 

By the advice of Hamilton, taxes were levied on im- 
ported goods and on distillation of spirits, and a mint and 
national bank were established at Philadelphia. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



^% 



312. What did Daniel Webster say of Hamilt07J ? 

"He smote the rock of the national resources, and 
abundant streams of revenue burst forth. He touched the 
dead corpse of public credit, and it sprang upon its feet." 

313. W/io 7i'as appointed Minister to the United States 
frofn France ? Why icuis he recalledl 

Citizen Genet, in 1793. The war which broke out be- 
tween France and England induced Genet to try to rouse 
the American people to espouse the cause of France, and 
he even went so far as to fit out privateers in the ports of 
the United States to prey upon British commerce. Wash- 
ington had great trouble in preserving neutrality. He 
saw that the true American policy was to keep free from 
European entanglements, and therefore demanded the re- 
call of Genet. 

314. What great calamity visited the people 0/ America in 
August, lygj .? 

The yellow fever broke out in Philadelphia, and raged 
with such virulence that within three months, out of a 
population of 60,000, no less than 4,000 perished. 

315. What 7vas the Whiskey Rebellio7i^ 

The inhabitants in Western Pennsylvania were deter- 
mined that no tax should be paid on whiskey, and they 
were so well organized that fifteen thousand troops had to 
be called out to subdue them. 

316. What difficulties now arose zvith the Ifidians, and 
what expeditions were sent against them 1 

The early settlers of Ohio were much annoyed by their 
depredations, and Gens. Warner and St. Clair were sent 
against them, but were defeated with great slaughter. 
Gen. Wayne was now put in command, and in 1794 gained 
a complete victory, laying waste the entire Indian country. 



56 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

317. What 7uas the condition of foreig7i affairs 1 
Difficulties were arising with England in regard to the 

collection of debts in America and the impressment of our 
seamen. A treaty was made with Spain securing to the 
United States the free navigation of the Mississippi and 
fixing the boundary of Florida. 

318. What treaty 7vas made with Eiigland in regard to 
English debts ? How 7vas this treaty received by the American 
people i 

Chief Justice Jay was sent as envoy extraordinary to 
England, where he negotiated a treaty which was ratified 
by the Senate in 1795 after a violent opposition. This 
treaty recognized the right to collect debts in the United 
States, but did not forbid the impressment of American 
seamen, a source of bitter complaint. 

319. What two political parties were 7i07v organized? 
Who were the leaders of these parties! 

The Republican party under the leadership of Jefferson, 
Madison and Randolph, and the Federalist party by Hamil- 
ton and Adams. 

320. What were the principles advocated by these parties'} 
The Federalists favored the granting of broad powers to 

the general government, which they thought ought to be 
strong, while the Republicans, fearing lest the strength of 
the government should lead to a monarchy, advocated 
State rights as a safeguard against the usurpation of power. 
They also opposed the United States Bank, the English 
treaty and the assumption of the States' debts by the gen- 
eral government. In the campaign preceding the election 
of John Adams to the Presidency the Federalists were ac- 
cused of being the friends of Great Britain and the Re- 
publicans the friends of France. The Republicans declared 
themselves the only true friends of the people, and stig- 
matized all others as aristocrats and monarchists. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



57 



321. By 7vhat majority ivas Adams elected! 

By a majority of two electoral votes over Jefferson, the 
Republican candidate, who became Vice-President. 

ADAMS' ADMINISTRATION I 797-1801, 

322. IV/ie/i 7vas Adams inaugurated Presidentl 
March 4, 1797. 

323. Duritig Adams' adfJiiuistration what 7vere the most 
memorable occurreiices / 

The passage of the Alien and Sedition Laws, and difficul- 
ties with France. 

324. What were the Alien and Sedition Laws? 

The Alien Law authorized the President to expel from 
the country any foreigner whom he deemed injurious to 
the United States. Under the Sedition Law, anyone 
libeling Congress, the President or the government could 
be fined or imprisoned. 

325. What difficulties sprang up between this country and 
durance, and what prevented ivar between them ? 

Our flag was insulted, our vessels were captured, and our 
envoys were refused audience by the French government. 
Hostilities were begun on the seas, but when Napoleon 
became First Consul of France the difficulty ceased. Peace 
was declared in 1800. 

326. Why was durance so hostile to the United States when 
she had previously rendered such valuable services 1 

Having rendered us assistance, many of her people be- 
lieved that we should return her favors, and, becoming 
desperate in her home difficulties, she sought revenge. 
Our demand for the recall of Genet the French people con- 
sidered an insult to them. 



^8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

327. /// the midst of these excitements what memorable 
event occurred? 

The death of George Washington, December 14, 1799, 
at Mount Vernon, aged sixty-seven years. 

328. When was the seat of government removed from 
Philadelphia to Washifigton? 

In the year 1800. 

329. What was the political feeling during the Adams 
administration ? 

Strong party feeling prevailed throughout the administra- 
tion. The unpopularity of the Alien and Sedition Laws 
resulted in the success of the Republican candidates at 
the next Presidential election. 

330. Who were candidates in the campaign of 1800? 

Adams and Pinckney for the Federalists. Thomas Jef- 
ferson and Aaron Burr for the Republicans. 

33 1 . What tie vote occurred in this election 1 
One between Jefferson and Burr. 

Jefferson's administration. 

332. Hozv zvas Thofnas feffersoTi elected President 1 
There being no election by the people, he was elected 

by Congress on the thirty-sixth ballot. 

333. What was the most important event of fefferson^s 
administration ? 

The purchase of Louisiana from Napoleon for 115,000,000. 
This secured more than one million square miles of land, 
and full possession of the Mississippi. The tract sold 
to us had just been ceded by Spain to France. 

334. What 7cias the cause of the 7var with Tripoli? 
American commerce suffered greatly from the pirates of 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



59 



the Barbary States. They held the crews of captured ves- 
sels until ransomed. The war occurred in 1805. 

335. What daring exploit was accomplished by Lieut. 
Decatur? 

The frigate Philadelphia, running aground while in the 
harbor of Tripoli, had fallen into the hands of the Bashaw. 
Decatur entered the harbor with a small vessel, apparently 
in distress, and concealing his men below, boarded the 
Philadelphia by surprise, swept the crew ipto the sea, set 
the ship afire, and amid a tremendous cannonade from the 
batteries escaped without the loss of a man. 

336. What difficulties arose betweeti England and the 
United States ? 

England claimed the right of stopping American vessels 
on the high seas, searching for seamen of English birth 
and pressing them into the British navy. Accordingly the 
British frigate Leopold fired into the American frigate 
Chesapeake off the coast of Virginia, and her commander, 
going aboard, seized four of the crew, three of whom were 
Americans by birth. They were carried off on the pre- 
tense that they were deserters. 

337. What 7vas the American doctrine in regard to na- 
turalized foreigners ? What the English doctrine? 

The Americans claimed that a foreigner, when natural- 
ized, became an American and entitled to the same protec- 
tion as any other citizen. The English doctrine was 
"Once an Englishman, always an Englishman." 

338. After the capture of the Chesapeake, what did Jef- 
ferson order? 

That all British war vessels should quit the waters of the 
United States. 

339. What tvas the " Efnbargo Acf' ? 

A Resolution of Congress forbidding American vessels 



6o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

to leave port. As this was so injurious to our commerce 
the restriction was removed, but all intercourse between 
England and France was forbidden. 

340. What was the Milan Decree? 

A decree of Napoleon for the confiscation of all vessels 
which submitted to search by an English ship, or paid 
tribute. 

341. What deplorable meeting occurred between Aaron 
BH7r and Alexander Hamilton ? 

A duel in which Hamilton was killed. This occurred in 
July, 1804, and was greatly lamented by the American 
people. 

342. What was ^'^ Burr's Conspiracy'^ ? 

In 1806 Aaron Burr was arrested for an alleged attempt 
to set up an independent government west of the Alle- 
ghanies. He was tried for treason, but acquitted. Un- 
doubtedly his ambition was to be president of a separate 
republic, to conquer Mexico and establish a strong gov- 
ernment. 

343. For what is Robert Fulton fioted] 

For inventing the steamboat. The first trial trip was 
made from New York to Albany in 1807. 

344. At the close of Jefferson' s second term, what ivas the 
political senti?nent of each party 1 

The bitterness existing between the United States and 
England was fast moving toward war. The Republicans, 
under the leadership of James Madison, advocated the en- 
forcement of American rights, while the Federalists were 
opposed to a war policy. 

345. When was James Madison inaugurated President? 
March 4, 1809. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 6i 

Madison's administration — 1809-1817. 

346. What Jndian disturbances occurred in the year 18 11 1 
British emissaries had aroused the Indians to war, and 

Tecumseh formed a confederacy of the Northwestern tribes. 
Gen. William H. Harrison was sent against them, and at 
the battle of Tippecanoe routed them with great slaughter. 

347. What acts did England contitiue to commit against 
the United States, and with what result] 

They continued to impress our seamen, capture our 
ships, and even went so far as to send war vessels into our 
waters and seize our ships as prizes. The British govern- 
ment refusing to cease this offensive course, all hope of 
peace was abandoned and our people prepared for war. 

348. When 7vas war formally declared against Great 
Britain, and how long did it last? 

War was declared June 19, 1812, and lasted two years 
and a half. 

WAR OF 181 2. 

349. What 7uas the opening event of the 7var of 18 12 ? 

Our government proposed to invade Canada. Accord- 
ingly Gen. Hull crossed over from Detroit; but, learning 
that the British and Indians were gathering to attack him, 
he retreated, pursued by a force of British under Gen. 
Brock and of Indians under Tecumseh. 

350. Describe the surrender of Detroit. 

As Gen. Brock marched to attack the fort, Hull seemed 
to lose all presence of mind and to fear the risk of a battle. 

He raised the white flag, surrendered Detroit with its 
garrisons and stores, and the whole of Michigan, without 
even stipulating for the honors of war. 

351. What other attempt 7oas made to invade Canada, and 
with what result] 

In October of the same year Gen. Van Rensselaer sent 



62 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

a small body of men across the Niagara River to attack the 
British at Queenstown Heights. The enemy were driven 
from their position and Gen. Brock was killed. Gen. Van 
Rensselaer now returned to bring over the rest of his 
army, but the militia had lost their courage and refused to 
go. The troops on the Canadian shore, thus abandoned, 
were compelled to surrender. 

352. What were some of the most htiportmit naval victories 
for the Americans in 18 12 ? 

The capture of the Guerriere by the Constitution, 
August ig ; of the Frolic by the Wasp, October 18 ; of the 
Macedonian by the United States, October 25 ; and of 
the Java by the Constitution, December 29. 

353. During this year, hozv many frizes ivere captured by 
the Americans? 

More than three hundred. 

354. What effect did these remarkal>te naval victories have 
upon the people? 

They aroused great enthusiasm and inspired confidence. 
Enlistments became rapid, and the course of the govern- 
ment was generally approved. In the midst of these suc- 
cesses Madison was re-elected with but little opposition. 

1813. 

355- ^Vhat 7cas the plan of the campaign of i8ijl 

Three armies were raised with the intention of invading 
Canada. The division under Harrison was sent to the 
west shore of Lake Erie ; the division under Dearborn be- 
tween Erie and Ontario; and Hampden's division was 
stationed on the shore of Lake Champlain. 

356. What successes had these divisions 1 
They accomplished but little. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 63 

357. Describe Ferry's victory on Lake Erie. 

The American fleet consisted of nine vessels carrying 
fifty-four guns, and the British fleet of six vessels with 
sixty-three guns. Perry's flag-ship, the Lawrence, engaged 
two of the heaviest vessels of che enemy, and fought until 
but eight of his men were left. Leaving the Lawrence he 
passed to the Niagara in a rowboat, and within fifteen 
minutes after mounting her deck won the victory. 

358. What daring exploit was perfor7ned by Perry 1 
While he was hastening from the Lawrence to the Ni- 
agara the enemy's guns were directed upon him ; but, al- 
though he passed within pistol-shot of the British, he 
escaped without injury. 

359. In writing to Gen. Harrison of the victoiy gained, 
what memorable tvords did Perry use ? 

"We have met the enemy, and they are ours." 

360. What course did Harrison pursue after hearing of the 
Erie engagement 1 

Harrison was at Sandusky Bay preparing to invade Ca- 
nada, and at the news of this victory crossed the lake and 
landed at Maiden, where on his approach the British re- 
treated. They were overtaken on the banks of the Thames 
River and compelled to surrender. In this engagement 
Tecumseh was killed. 

361. What were the principal American naval victories in 
18 13 ? 

The capture of the Peacock by the Hornet, February 24; 
of the Boxer by the Enterprise, September 5 ; of Barkley's 
fleet by Perry's fleet, September 10. 

362. What were the important British naval victories in 
1813I 

The capture of the Chesapeake by the Shannon, and of 
the Argus by the Pelican. 



64 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

363. In what engagement, and by ivhotn, was used the 
sentence, '■'■ Don'' t give up the ship''''! 

It was the last command of Capt. Lawrence as he was 
carried below decks during the engagement between the 
Chesapeake and Shannon. 

364. What Indian disturbances occurred, and ivho teas 
sent to punish them ? 

The Alabama Indians arose, fell upon Fort Mims and 
massacred the garrison. Gen. Jackson took command 
and drove them from place to place ; and at Horseshoe 
Bend, where they had fortified themselves, the soldiers 
with fixed bayonets scaled their breastworks, and a des- 
perate battle ensued. Six hundred Creeks were killed. 
Those who escaped were glad to make peace on any terms. 

365. What ravages were comtnitted by Admiral Cockbuni ? 
Early in the spring Cockburn began devastating the 

southern coast. In Virginia and the Carolinas he burned 
bridges, farm-houses and villages, robbed the inhabitants, 
plundered churches, and murdered the sick in their beds. 

1814. 

366. In the third invasion of Canada, what battles were 
fought 1 

The Americans attacked the British at Chippewa, July 5, 
and gained a brilliant victory. A second engagement was 
at Lundy's Lane, July 25. 

367. Describe the battle of lundy^s lane. 

It was one of the bloodiest battles of the war. Gen. 
Scott commanded the American force of one thousand 
men, and maintained the unequal contest until dark. A 
battery located on a height was the key to the British 
position. Scott asked Col. Miller if he could take it. 
"I'll try, sir," was the reply. The battery was taken. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 65 

Three times the British rallied for its recapture, bui were 
unsuccessful. This victory, though glorious to the Ameri- 
can arms, was barren of direct results. 

368. Give a description of the battle of Lake Champ lain. 

In this contest the British fleet on Lake Champlain 
attacked the American squadron under Commodore 
McDonough, and was nearly annihilated. Prevost, with 
twelve thousand men, advanced against Plattsburg, but 
when he found that his ships were lost he fled, leaving his 
sick and wounded and large quantities of military stores. 

369. IV/iat were some of the ravages of the British on the 
Atlantic coast? 

Gen. Ross marched to Washington, captured the city, 
burned the Capitol and other public buildings, with lib- 
raries and records, and several private dwellings. 

370. How did the term ^'■Hartford Cojivention Federalists" 
originate ? 

A convention of Federalists from the New England States 
met at Hartford, December 15, 18 14, and bitterly opposed 
the administration because of its mode of conducting the 
war. The meeting was branded with odium by the friends 
of the administration, and the name "Hartford Convention 
Federalist" was long used as a term of reproach. 

371. Where and whefi were the articles of peace signed] 
At Ghent, December 24, 18 14. 

1815. 

372. After this treaty, what terrible battle was fought, and 
with what loss 1 

The battle of New Orleans, January 8. Gen. Jackson 
commanded the American forces, numbering 6,000, and 
Gen. Pakenham commanded the British, numbering 12,000. 



66 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION B00k\ 

The American loss was seven killed and seven wounded. 
The British loss was 2,500. 

373. What was the national debt at this time ? 
^127,000,000. 

374. At the close of Aladi son's term of office, what was the 
political feeling^ 

The Federalist party was practically broken up by its 
opposition to the war, and James Monroe, the Republican 
candidate for President, was almost unanimously elected. 
He was generally beloved, and all parties united in his 
support. 

375. When was James Monroe inaugurated i 
March 4, 1817. 

Monroe's administration — 1817-1825. 

376. What was the Missouri compromise? 

A bill introduced by Henry Clay defining the limits of 
slavery ; it provided that all States north of latitude 36° 30' 
and all Territories west of the Mississippi should be free. 

377. What foreigner visited this country as '■'■The Nation's 
Guest '"I 

La Fayette, in 1824. 

378. What 7vas the nature of the Monroe doctrine ? 

It was a declaration by President Monroe that any at- 
tempt by a European nation to gain domination on Ameri- 
can soil would be considered by the United States as an 
unfriendly act. 

37g. How was Florida obtained? 
By a treaty with Spain, in 1819. 

380. What political parties 7vere now before the people? 
The Whig party, which was formed in Jackson's time, 
was fast coming to the front as an opponent to the Repub- 



UMITED STATES I/ISTOA'V. 67 

lican party, which about this time changed its name to 
Democratic. The Whigs were in favor of a protective tar- 
iff and a general system of internal improvements. The 
Democrats opposed these measures. John Quincy Adams 
and Henry Clay were the champions of the Whigs, and 
Andrew Jackson and John C. Calhoun of the Democrats. 

381. IVhat was the origin of the tenn '■^loco-foco'''' 1 

It was a name applied to the Democratic party in 1835 
in consequence of the outbreak of a quarrel in a Democratic 
meeting, where the lights were all put out, and but for 
the loco-foco or lucifer matches which some of the mem- 
bers carried in their pockets it would have been necessary 
to adjourn the proceedings. 

382. What is a protective tariff t 

A system of duties on imported goods for the purpose of 
encouraging home manufactures. 

383. How 7oas/ohn Quincy Adams elected President 
There were four candidates, and no clear majority of 

votes was obtained for any one of them. Adams was 
therefore chosen by the House of Representatives. 

J. Q. ADAMS's ADMINISTRATION 1825-1829. 

384. What important events occurred during Adamses ad- 
ministration 1 

The first railroad was completed and the Erie Canal wa."- 
opened. 

385. Where was the Jirst railroad built in the Unitec 
States, and when ? 

From Albany to Schenectady, New York, in 1833. A 
short line had been built in Maryland, in 1828. 

386. How long is the Erie Canal? 
About 363 miles. 



68 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

387. Why was the '■'■American System^^ {a protective tariff^ 
popular in the East and unpopular in the South 1 

Protection for the East meant shutting out foreign 
manufactures from a direct competition with Eastern 
manufactured products; while in the South, agriculture 
being the chief pursuit, the people there desired manufac- 
tured goods brought to them as cheaply as possible. 

388. Why zaas Adams not elected to a second term of office 1 
Because of the policy of protection advocated by his 

party. 

389. Who succeeded Adams? 

Andrew Jackson, who was inaugurated on March 4, 
1829. 

390. When and by whom was the corner-stone of Bunker 
Hill Monument laid? 

By Gen. La Fayette, on the fiftieth anniversary of the 
battle, June 17, 1825. 

Jackson's administration — 1829-1837. 

391. What was the character of facksoii's administration? 
Inflexible honesty and sturdiness of purpose. 

392. What was his idea of "■rotation in office''''? 

Jackson at once set out to surround himself with his 
political friends, and turn his political opponents out of 
their places under government. During his first year as 
President there were nearly seven hundred removals from 
office, not including subordinate clerks, while in the forty 
years preceding there had been but seventy-four, 

393. What was the Nullification Ordinance^ and who were 
the strongest supporters ? 

It was an ordinance adopted by the State of South 
Carolina, declaring that the tariff laws were "null and 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 69 

void," and that South Carolina would secede from the 
Union if force should be employed to collect any revenue. 
John C. Calhoun and Robert Y. Hayne were its most 
prominent supporters. 

394. What action did Jackson take I 

He issued a proclamation announcing his determination 
to execute the laws, and ordered troops under Gen. Scott 
to Charleston. 

395. What tvas Henry Clay's '•'■Compromise Biif? 

In order to prevent an open rupture between South 
Carolina and the government, Clay advocated a general 
reduction of the tarilY. This compromise was accepted by 
both sides, and quiet was restored. 

396. Who said "/ would i\ither be right thafi President" 
and why did he say it 2 

It was an expression of Henry Clay when his friends 
insisted that to advocate the compromise would lessen his 
chances for the Presidency. This step demanded great 
moral courage, as it required a partial surrender of his 
cherished theories of protection and an open breach with 
many political friends. 

397. What important bill did Jackso?t veto during his first 
term? What did he do in 18 jj in regard to the public funds 
of the United States? 

He vetoed the bill renewing the charter of the United 
States Bank. In 1833 he withdrew the public funds from 
this bank and deposited them in local banks. Owing to 
the withdrawal of this money the bank contracted its 
loans, money became scarce among the people and com- 
mercial distress followed. The measure excited violent 
clamor, but Jackson was sustained by the Democratic 
majority in the House of Representatives. When the 



yo COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

money was deposited in the local banks, it became easy to 
borrow, and speculation extended to every branch of trade. 

398. What can be said of speculation at this timel 

Land speculation was the great mania of the times. 
New cities were laid out in the wilderness, fabulous prices 
were charged for building-lots, and fortunes seemed to be 
within reach of everyone. These schemes, which existed 
only on paper, at last came to a disastrous collapse. 

399. What Indian troubles occurred during Jackson's ad- 
ministration t 

The Black Hawk war broke out in the Northwest 
Territory. After some skirmishing the Indians were driven 
off and their leader, Black Hawk, was captured. A war 
with the Florida Seminoles, also, grew out of an attempt 
to move them, in accordance with a treaty, to lands west 
of the Mississippi. 

400. What demands were made of the J^rench govei'nynentl 

They had promised to pay ^5,000,000 for damages to 
our commerce during Napoleon's war. Jackson urged 
Congress to make reprisals on French ships. By the 
mediation of England, the account was settled and war 
prevented. 

401. What were the leading principles of the Democratic 
pai'ty in the election of Martin Van Buren 1 Who was the 
Whig candidatet 

No United States Bank ; no protective tariff. Gen. 
Harrison was the Whig candidate. 

VAN buren's administration — 1837-1841. 

402. What were S07?ie of the memorable events during Van 
Bure?i's administration! 

The financial crisis of 1837, and the Patriot wir. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. )\ 

463. What 7vere seme of the causes of the fiylancial crisis? 

(i) The specie circular, which was issued by Jackson, 
directing that payments for public lands should be made 
in gold and silver. 

(2) The order of Congress that the surplus public 
money, amounting to about $28,000,000, be withdrawn 
from the local banks and distributed among the States. 
The banks could not meet this demand. 

(3) Heavy importations of European goods, which had 
to be paid for in gold and silver. 

(4) A terrible fire in New York City on the night of 
December 16, 1835, which burned six hundred valuable 
stores, and property to the amount of $18,000,000. 

404. Afention sof?ie icsnlls of this crisis. 

Business men could not pay their debts and failures 
were an every-day occurrence. In New York City alone 
during March and April, the failures amounted to more 
than $100,000,000. Property of all kinds declined in 
value. Eight of the States became wholly or partly bank- 
rupt, and even the United States government could not pay 
its indebtedness. Consternation seized all classes, confi- 
dence was destroyed and trade stood still. 

405. What 7oas the Patriot ^oart 

The Canadian rebellion against England. 

406. What occurred t/uring the Patriot war? 

This revolt stirred the sympathies of the American 
people. Meetings were held, volunteers offered and arms 
contributed. The President issued a proclamation, and 
Gen. Scott was sent to the frontier to preserve the peace. 
American filibusters took possession of Navy Island, in 
the Niagara River, but were dislodged by British troops. 
The steamer Caroline was taken by British troops and 
sent, with her crew, over the Falls. 



72 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

407. What disturbatice occurred between Maifie and New 
Brunswick ? 

The people on both sides threatened to take up arms to 
support their respective claims as to the boundary lines. 
For some time there was great peril of a war with England, 
but the matter was settled during Tyler's administration 
by what is called the Ashburton treaty of 1842, Lord 
Ashburton and Daniel Webster acting as commissioners. 

408. At the close of Van Buren''s administration, what was 
the prevalent political feelifig'i 

The financial difficulties had weakened the faith of the 
people in the Democratic party, and Van Buren failed of 
re-election. 

409. Which party was Jioiv successful? 

The Whig party elected William Henry Harrison by an 
immense majority. 

HARRISON AND TYLEr's ADMINISTRATION — 1841-1845. 

410. IIo7ii long did Harrison remain in office, and ndio suc- 
ceeded him I 

One month. He was succeeded by the Vice-President, 
John Tyler. 

411. Did Tyler carry out the principles of the party which 
elected him ? 

He did not. 

412. What bill was vetoed by Tyler, to the great disgust of 
the Whigs] 

A bill for establishing a United States Bank. 

413. What was the cause of the Dorr Rebellion ? 

The people of Rhode Island organized by force under a 
new constitution and elected a man named Dorr, Governor. 
Dorr was arrested, tried for treason, and imprisoned, but 
afterwards pardoned. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



73 



414. What were the Anti-Rent difficiilties'i 

The tenants on some of the old patroon estates in New 
York refused to pay their rent. Assuming the disguise of 
Indians, they tarred and feathered those who paid rent, and 
even killed the officers who served warrants upon them. 

415. What occurred in relation to the Mormons? 

They were settled at Nauvoo, 111., but, having incurred 
the enmity of the people about them, were compelled to 
leave. Joseph Smith, their leader, was killed by a mob. 

416. When 7vas Texas admitted into the Union? Why 
was their petition at first rejected? 

December 27, 1845. She had applied for admission in 
1836. The objections to her admission were two: ist, 
her boundary line was in dispute, and if she were annexed 
we could hardly hope to escape a war with Mexico ; 2d, 
Texas held slaves, and if admitted would add another to 
the list of slave states. 

417. Where was the first telegraph line, and what was the 
first message sent by it ? 

From Baltimore to Washington. The message is said to 
have been an announcement of the nomination of James 
K. Polk for President. 

418. When and by whom 7oas the cotton-gin invented? 

In 1792, by Eli Whitney; but its full value was not rec- 
ognized until the raising of cotton had become an im 
portant feature in the agriculture of the Southern States. 

419. What was the great political question on which hinged 
the cajnpaign for President? Who were the nominees? 

The question of annexing Texas. The Whigs, who op- 
posed annexation, nominated Clay, and the Democrats, who 
f.ivored it, nominated Polk. After a fierce contest Polk 
was elected. 



74 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

JAMES K. folk's ADMINISTRATION 1845-1849. 

420. What 7iiere the causes 7vhich led to the 7oar with 
Mexico ? 

The annexation of Texas by the United States, and 
Mexico's claim to a certain tract of land. 

42 1. Who had coffimand of the American arTtiyl 

General Zachary Taylor in 1846, and General Winfield 
Scott in 1847. Scott was successful in many engagements, 
entering Mexico September 14, 1847. 

422. What prominent battles were won by Taylor, and what 
by Scott / 

Taylor won the battles of Palo Alto on May 8, Monterey 
on September 24, and Buena Vista on February 23, 1847. 
General Scott won the battles of Vera Cruz on March 29, 
and Cerro Gordo on April 18, and captured the entire 
Mexican force in the City of Mexico. 

423. Who was John C. Fremont, and what part did he 
take in the Mexican, wart 

He was sent out by the United States government with 
a small exploring party to seek a new route to Oregon. 
While in California in 1844, he received instructions from 
the government to protect the interests of the United 
States in that territory. Troops were quickly raised and 
the Mexicans were compelled to retire southward. By the 
advice of Fremont the American settlers in California de- 
clared their independence of Mexico, July 5, 1846. 

424. What were the terms of peace betiveen the United 
States and Mexico t 

A withdrawal of United States troops ; that Mexico 
should cede to the United States the territories of New 
Mexico and Upper California for the sum of $15,000,000, 
and pay $3,500,000 due to American claimants. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



75 



425. What was the Wihtiot ProiHsoi 

David Wilmot offered in Congress, August, 1846, a bill for- 
bidding slavery in any territory which should be acquired 
through the Mexican war. This was designed to prohibit 
slavery in the territory of Texas. It excited violent debate, 
but did not become a law. 

426. When was gold discovered in California! 

In February, 1848, by Sutter while digging in a mill-race 
in the Sacramento Valley. 

427. What political parties were tiow in the field, and 7vho 
were ?tominated by them / 

There were three parties. The Whigs nominated General 
Taylor; the Democrats, Lewis Cass, while the Free-soilers, 
who were opposed to the extension of slavery, and believed 
that, as Taylor was a slave-holder, the principle of slavery 
would be fostered by him, formed a new party and nomin- 
ated Martin Van Buren. Taylor was elected. 

TAYLOR AND FILLMORE'S ADMINISTRATION 1849-1853. 

428. How long 7cias Taylor in office'} 

He was inaugurated President March 4, 1849, and died 
July g, 1850, after an illness of only five days. 

429. What itJiportant questiofi arose at the beginning of 
Taylor's administration t 

Californiaappliedforadmission tothe Union asafreeState. 
This brought the question of slavery into intense agitation, 
and for a time it seemed as though a terrible crisis was at 
hand. 

430. What was the Omnibus Bill / 

The compromise of 1850, presented by Henry Clay, and 
proposing ( i ) that California should come in as a free 
State; (2) that the territories of Utah and New Mexico 
should be formed without any provision concerning slavery; 



76 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

(3) that Texas should be paid ^10,000,000 to give up its 
claim on the territory of New Mexico; (4) that the slave 
trade should be prohibited in the District of Columbia; 
and (5) that a Fugitive Slave Law should be enacted. 

431. Who tons the Great Pacificator i 

Henry Clay, because he was ever ready to surrender part 
of his political policy in order to establish peace. 

432. What was the Fugitive Slave La7i.< I 

It provided for the return of runaway slaves to their 
■ owners, even if they had escaped to a free State. 

433. What is to be said of the invasion of Cuba? 

About five hundred adventurers undertook the annexa- 
tion of Cuba to the United States, but were defeated, and 
Lopez, the leader, was garrotted at Havana in 185 1. 

434. What two great men died in 18^2? 
Henry Clay and Daniel Webster. 

435. Who were the candidates in the next Presidential 
election, and what policies did the parties advocate? 

The Democrats and Whigs declared that they stood by 
the provisions of the Omnibus Bill, but the Free-soilers 
were outspoken against it. Franklin Pierce, the Democratic 
nominee, was elected by a large majority. Gen. Scott was 
the Whig candidate. 

Pierce's administration — 1853-1857. 

436. What was the Kansas-Nebraska BiUt Who pre- 
sen ted if ? 

Its effect was to repeal the Missouri Compromise by 
allowing the people of each Territory to decide whether it 
should be bond or free. It was proposed by Stephen A. 
Douglas, and bad direct relation to the Territories of Kan- 
sas and Nebraska. It became a law in May, 1854. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



77 



437. How did this bill affect the inhabitants of Kansas 1 
A bitter contest arose between the pro-slavery and anti- 
slavery men. Each party sent bodies of armed emigrants 
to the Territory. Disturbances arose, mobs were formed, 
houses were attacked and pillaged, citizens were murdered 
in cold blood, and for several years Kansas was the scene 
of lawless violence. 

438. What was the Gadsden Purchase! 

A dispute arose between the United States and Mexico 
in regard to the boundary line, and Gen. Gadsden nego- 
tiated a settlement, whereby J 10,000,000 was paid to 
Mexico for additional territory along the Gila River. 

439. What treaty 7vas made 7vith Japan / 
Commodore Matthew Perry's expedition to Japan in 1854 

resulted in a treaty by which that country opened two 
ports to the merchants of the United States. 

440. What 7i'as then the political situation? Who 7vere 
nominated ? 

The compromises of 1820 and 1850 being now abolished, 
the slave question became the turning-point of the election. 
New party lines were drawn to meet this issue. The 
Whig party now ceased to exist, and the Republican party, 
absorbing all who opposed the extension of slavery, nom- 
inated John C. Fremont, who carried eleven States. The 
Democratic party nominated James Buchanan, who was 
elected. The Know-Nothing, or American party, organized 
to resist the influence of foreigners, carried Maryland, but 
its existence was of short duration. Its motto was "Amer- 
ica for Americans." 

Buchanan's administration — • 1857-1861. 

441. What was the Dred Scott Decision? 

The Supreme Court of the United States declared that 
slave-owners might take their slaves into any State in the 



78 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

Union without forfeiting authority over them. Dred Scott 
was a slave, and claimed freedom on the ground that he 
had been taken into free territory. 

442. What did John Brojvn attempt to do? 

Being an ardent lover of negro freedom, Brown con- 
ceived the wild scheme of taking the law into his own hands 
and liberating the slaves. He seized the United States 
arsenal at Harper's Ferry, Virginia, in 1859, and pro- 
claimed freedom to all the slaves in the neighborhood. 
He was taken captive and hanged. 

443. In the etections of i860, 7vho zoerc candidates for the 
Presidency 1 

Abraham Lincoln, Stephen A. Douglas, John C. Breckin- 
ridge and John Bell. 

444. What did each of the parties advocate ? 

The Lincoln party held, that while slavery must be pro- 
tected where it was, it ought not to be carried into any 
free territory. 

The Douglas party favored squatter sovereignty, that is, 
the right of each State to decide whether it should exclude 
or permit slavery. 

The Breckinridge party claimed that any citizen had a 
right to migrate to any territory, taking with him any- 
thing that was property, including slaves, and that Congress 
was bound to protect the rights of slave-holders every- 
where. 

The Bell party had for its motto: "The Constitution of 
the country, the Union of the States and the enforcement 
of the laws." 

445. What 7oere the causes which led to the civil 7iiar? 
The agitation of the slavery question was the chief cause. 

The Southern States, believing they had a right to secede 
from the Union, seceded, but the Federal government 
denying that right, raised armies and enforced its authority. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



79 



446. Which State first passed an onUfiatice of secession? 
South Carolina, December 20, i860. 

447. What other States followed this example? 
Mississippi, Florida, Alabama, Georgia, Louisiana, Texas, 

Virginia, North Carolina, Arkansas and Tennessee 

448. What government was formed by these States, and 
when and where was it organized? 

The Confederate States of America, and the form of 
government was similar to the government of the United 
States. On February 4, 1861, a convention of the seceded 
States met at Montgomery, Alabama, and there organized 
the Confederacy. 

449. Who was elected its President, and when 7vas he in- 
augurated? 

Jefferson Davis, who was inaugurated February 4, 1861. 

Lincoln's administration — 1861. 

450. What event signalized the commencement of the luar? 
The bombardment of Fort Sumter, in the harbor of 

Charleston, S.C. 

451. What ivas the result of this bombardment? 

Fort Sumter fell into the hands of the Confederates 
under Beauregard, April 14, 1861. Maj. Anderson, the 
commander of Sumter, was permitted to go north with his 
men. The effect of this event was electrical. It unified 
the North and also the South. Party lines vanished. 
The Union men at the South were borne into secession, 
while the Republicans and Democrats at the North com- 
bined to support the government. The war spirit swept 
over the country like wild-fire. 

452. What did Liricoln do in regard to troops ? 

He issued a requisition for 75,000 troops, and soon 
afterward a call for 300,000 volunteers. 



8o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

453. Where 7vas the first blood shed in this loar? 

In Baltimore, April 19, 1861, a mob of Confederate 
sympathizers attacked the Sixth Massachusetts regiment 
on its way to Washington. 

454. What valuable stores 7vere seized by the Co?ifederates? 
They seized the United States armory at Harper's Ferry 

and the navy yard at Norfolk. At the latter place there 
were twelve ships of war, two thousand cannon, two hun- 
dred and fifty thousand pounds of gunpowder, and great 
quantities of shot and shell. 

455. Hoio did Colonel Elmer E. Ellsworth meet his death ? 

After the seizure of Alexandria, Va., Ellsworth, seeing 
the Confederate flag still flying from the roof of a hotel, 
went up and tore it down. As he descended he was shot 
at the foot of the stairs by the landlord, named Jackson, 
who in turn fell at the hands of Private Brownell. 

456. When icas the battle of Bull Run fought, and laith 
7cihat result 1 

July 21, 1861, in Northern Virginia. Gen. McDowell, 
in command of the Federals, made the attack, and was 
defeated after a severe engagement. 

457. What effect had this defeat on the Northern pcoplel 

At first they were much disappointed and discouraged; 
then came a renewed determination. Congress voted 
1500,000,000 and five hundred thousand men, and Gen. 
McClellan was appointed to the command of the Army of 
the Potomac. 

458. Give an accouiit of the battle of Ball's Bluff. 

A party of 2,000 Federals crossed the Potomac at Ball's 
Bluff. They were attacked and forced down the slippery, 
clayey bluff, from fifty to one hundred and fifty feet high, 
to the river below, where, in trying to escape, many were 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 8i 

drowned, some were shot, and scarcely half their number 
reached the other bank. 

459. What commanding officer was killed in this battle? 
Col. Baker, United States Senator from Oregon. 

460. What was the condition of Missouri 1 

The State refused to pass an ordinance of secession, yet 
an effort was made to preserve an armed neutrality. Lyon 
foiled this attempt. Gen. Sigel was defeated in an en- 
gagement at Carthage. Gen. Lyon now took command, 
and was compelled either to fight superior forces or aban- 
don that part of the State. He chose to fight. 

461. Where and when was General Lyon killed 1 

At Wilson's Creek, August 10, 1861, while gallantly lead- 
ing a bayonet charge. 

462. What proclamation was issued by Davis, and what 
was Lincoln'' s response ? 

Davis issued a proclamation offering to commission 
privateers. Lincoln declared a blockade of the Southern 
ports. 

463. At the beginning of the year 1861, hoiv many vessels 
7vere in the United States Navy 1 How many 7vere there at 
the close of the year t 

One on the Northern coast, and 42 in the whole United 
States Navy. At the close of the year there were 264. 

464. What did England and France do by way of encour- 
aging the Confederacy 1 

They acknowledged the Confederates as belligerents, 
thus placing them on the same footing with the supporters 
of the government. 

465. Who were fames M. Mason andfohn Slidell? 
Southern commissioners sent to England and France to 

plead the cause of the Confederacy. 



82 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

466. What was the Tre?it Affair 1 

The commissioners were taken forcibly from the British 
steamer Trent by Capt. Wilkes of the United States Navy 
and brought back to the United States. This produced 
much excitement in England. The United States govern- 
ment, however, promptly disavowed the act and released 
the commissioners. 

467. When did Lieutenant-General Scott retire from active 
service, and who succeeded him 1 

On the 1st of November, 1861, on account of age and 
physical infirmities. He was succeeded by Major-General 
George B. McClellan. 

468. Give a general revieiv 0/ the first year of the war. 
The large ships and stores at Harper's Ferry and 

Norfolk were captured by the Confederates. They were 
successful in the two.great battles of the year. Bull Run 
and Wilson's Creek ; also in the minor engagements at 
Big Bethel, Carthage, Lexington, Belmont and Ball's Bluff. 
The Union forces had saved Fort Pickens and Fortress 
Monroe, and captured the forts at Hatteras Inlet and Port 
Royal. They had also gained victories at Philippi, Rich 
Mountain, Boonsville, Carrick's Ford, Cheat Mountain 
and Dranesville. West Virginia, Maryland and Missouri 
were saved to the Union. Kentucky refused to secede. 

1862. 

469. What was the plan for the campaign of 1862 I 

On the part of the North there were three main objects: 
the opening of the Mississippi, the blockade of the South- 
ern ports and the capture of Richmond. 

470. What was the size of each army? What successes 
had the Union forces early in this year? 

The Union forces numbered about 500,000 ; the Con- 
federate about 350,000. Gen. Thomas won an engagement 



UNITED STATES IJIS'TORV. 83 

at Mills Springs, and Commodore Foote and Gen. Grant 
captured Forts Henry and Donelson in Northern Ten- 
nessee. 

471. When a)i(l to loJioin did Forts Henry and Donelson 
surre/ider ? 

Fort Henry was evacuated February 6, after a bombard- 
ment of one hour by Commodore Foote. Gen. Grant with 
his army intended to cut off the retreat, but the garrison 
escaped to Fort Donelson. The fleet now went back to 
the Ohio River and ascended the Cumberland, while Grant 
crossed to co-operate in an attack on Fort Donelson, 
which was captured, with fifteen thousand men, after three 
days' hard fighting. 

472. W/iat 7aas norv the plan of operations 1 

The Confederates fell back to Corinth, the great railroad 
centre of Mississippi and Tennessee, where their forces 
were gradually collected under the command of Gens. 
Johnston and Beauregard, while Gen. Buell at once occu- 
pied Nashville. The Union army ascended the Tennessee 
to Pittsburg Landing. Grant was placed in command 
and Buell ordered to reinforce him. The Confederates 
determined to rout Grant's army before the arrival of Buell. 

473. When was the battle of Sliiloh fought, and jvho com- 
manded 1 

On the 6th and 7th of April. Gen. Grant commanded 
the Federal army and Gen. Beauregard the Confederate 
forces. 

474. Describe the battle of Shiloh. 

On Sunday morning, April 6, Johnston surprised the 
Union forces by a desperate assault. The Federals, hav- 
ing no time to form into order of battle, fought where 
they happened to stand, slowly yielding, and for twelve 
hours they obstinately disputed every inch of the way. 



84 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

At last, pushed to the very brink of the Cumberland River, 
Grant massed his artillery and gathered around it the 
fragments for the linal stand. By the aid of the gunboats 
below and Buell's reinforcements the tide of battle was 
stayed, and the Confederates fell back. They possessed, 
however, the Union camps, three thousand prisoners, 
thirty flags and immense stores; but they had lost their 
commander. Gen. Johnston. The next morning the Con- 
federates were driven from the field, 

475. Where is Island No. jo, and iv/ien and by whom was 
it captured i 

In the Mississippi River, between Kentucky and Mis- 
souri. It was taken by Commodore Foote and Gen. Pope, 
April 7. 

476. IFhen was the battle of Perryville fought, and who 
were the conn?ianders 1 

October 8, 1S62. Gen. Bragg commanded the Con- 
federates, Gen. Buell the Union troops. 

477. When 7iiias the battle of Murfreesboro fought, and 
which army was victorious ? 

On December 31, 1862, Gen. Bragg, with 60,000 troops, 
attacked the Union forces under Gen. Rosecrans, and was 
repulsed. On January 2 the battle was renewed, but Bragg, 
being unsuccessful, retreated. This was one of the bloodiest 
contests of the war. The loss was one-fourth of the num- 
ber engaged. 

478. What effect had this battle .? 

The Confederates gave up the attempt to recover Ken- 
tucky. 

479. IVhat 7i.ias the flan of the first expeditioii against 
Vicksburg, and how did it terminate ? 

Grant was to move along the Mississippi Central rail- 
road, while Sherman was to descend the river from Mem- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 85 

phis with the gunboats under Porter. The plan was 
spoiled by Van Dorn's cavalry dash, which destroyed 
Grant's depot of supplies at Holly Springs. Sherman, 
ignorant of what had happened, pushed on and made an 
attack on Chickasaw Bayou, north of Vicksburg. After 
suffering a bloody repulse and hearing of Grant's mis- 
fortune, he fell back. 

480. IViiat fighting occurred i?i Missouri! 

The Union General Curtis having command, attacked 
the Confederate General Price and drove him out of Mis- 
souri into Arkansas. Van Dorn now taking command, a 
desperate battle was fought at Pea Ridge, March 7 and 8, 
1862, in which Van Dorn was totally defeated. 

WAR ON THE SEA AND ON THE COAST. 

481. Describe the capture of New Orleans. 

The attempt was made with a fleet of forty-four vessels 
under Commodore Farragut, and 8,000 troops under Gen. 
Butler. Mortar-boats for six days stormed the outer de- 
fenses,. but with little effect. Farragut then boldly resolved 
to carry the fleet past the defenses to New Orleans. At 
three o'clock in the morning, April 24, they advanced, run- 
ning a fearful gauntlet of shot and shell and flames from the 
fire-rafts. They now encountered the Confederate fleet of 
thirty armed steamers, twelve of which were destroyed. 
New Orleans soon surrendered. 

482. After the capture of Neiv Orleans, what course did 
Commodore Farragut pursue ? 

He ascended the river, took possession of Baton Rouge 
and Natchez, and, running the batteries of Vicksburg, 
joined the Union fleet above. 

483. What was gai?ied by the capture of Roanoke Island f 
It gave control to the outer defenses of Norfolk. It 

opened two sounds, eight rivers, four canals and two rail- 



86 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

roads. It was an excellent rendezvous for ships, and ex- 
posed a large country to attack. 

484. What vessels ivere sinik by the Alerrimac? 
The Cumberland and the Congress on March 8. 

485. Describe the encounter betie'een the Merrimac and 
the Monitor. 

The morning after the ravages of the Merrimac the 
Monitor made her appearance and began the attack. The 
Merrimac, confident of success, poured in a broadside, but 
her balls glanced harmlessly off the Monitor's turret, or 
broke and fell to pieces on the deck. The battle now be- 
came a desperate conflict, the vessels fighting side by side, 
iron rasping on iron. Five times the Merrimac strove to 
crush her antagonist by running her huge iron beak 
against the Monitor's side. At each dash her prow would 
rise above the water, and at the same instant heavy volleys 
from the Monitor would crash against the exposed parts. 
In this manner the Merrimac received injuries so severe 
that she gave up the contest and steamed back to Norforlk 
thoroughly disabled. 

486. What ivould undoubtedly hai'e been the final result if 
the Merrimac had been successful? 

She could have entered any port of the United States, 
destroyed cities, opened the blockade, and undoubtedly 
have secured recognition of the independence of the Con- 
federacy by European nations. On this battle hinged the 
fate of the war. 

487. What became of the Merrimac and the Monitor 1 
Just before the capture of Norfolk she was sunk by the 

Confederacy. The Monitor sunk, in a storm off Cape 
Hatteras. 

488. Who was fohji Morgan ? 

Morgan was the noted leader of a band of guerrillas and 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 87 

raiders in Tennessee. He repeatedly rode through Ken- 
tucky spreading terror in his path, burning towns, levying 
tribute, destroying telegraphs and railroads, and carrying 
off prisoners. In one raid alone in Ohio he boasted of 
having taken seventeen towns and cities, with a very large 
amount of army stores. 

489. Who was Quantrell ? 

Quantrell was another famous guerrilla, although his 
raids were not so extensive as those of Morgan. 

WAR IN THE EAST. 

490. /;/ t/ie 7var in iJie East, what luas the objective pomt 2 
Richmond. 

491. Who C07}i7naiuied ill the Peni?tsular Campaign? 
Gen. McClellan. 

492. Describe the siege ofYorkto7iin. 

Gen. Magruder, with only about 5,000 men, held such 
strong defenses along a line of thirteen miles that Gen. 
McClellan was brought to a stop. Heavy guns were ordered 
from Washington, but as the siege began Magruder quietly 
withdrew, having delayed the Union army a month. 

493. When was the battle of Williamsburg fougJit 1 

On May 5 Gen. Hooker, with his division, maintained the 
contest for nine hours ; then, being reinforced, he carried 
the works, and the pursuit was continued to within seven 
miles of Richmond. 

494. What were McClellan'' s plans, and how 7vcre they 
foiled? 

McDowell, with 30,000 men, was to meet him near Han- 
over Court House, and begin the siege of Richmond ; but 
Gen. Johnston, suspecting this movement, ordered Gen, 
Jackson to move up the Shenandoah Valley and threaten 
Washington. 



88 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

495. ]Vhat were the mo7'ements of Sto?iewall Jackson ? 
After being reinforced by Gen. Ewell's division of 

10,000 men, Jackson hurried down the valley and drove 
Banks across the Potomac. The excitement in Washington 
was intense. The President took military possession of all 
the railroads, called upon the Governors of loyal States to 
send militia to the defense of the capital, and ordered Fre- 
mont at Franklin, Banks at Harper's Ferry, and McDowell 
at Fredericksburg to capture Jackson. Then Jackson 
retreated, burning bridges as he passed, and escaped. 

496. JV/iat was the effect of these moveme?its i 

With 15,000 men, Jackson had occupied the attention of 
three major-generals and 60,000 men, prevented McDowell's 
junction with McClellan and saved Richmond. 

497. While these events were in progress in the Shenandoah 
Valley, what were the movements of McClellan ? 

McClellan had pushed his left wing across the Chicka- 
hominy. Before he could unite his army, a terrible storm 
flooded the swamps, and Chickahominy Creek became a 
broad river. Johnston, seeing the exposed wing, began an 
attack. He was severely wounded in this fight. The next 
day the Confederates were repulsed in great disorder. 

498. After the battle of Fair Oaks, ^vhat course did 
McClellan pursue 1 

Jackson making his appearance near Hanover Court 
House, McClellan resolved to change his base of supplies 
to the James River. A series of battles followed, lasting 
seven days. The most important were those of Mechanics- 
ville, Gaines's Mill, Savage's Station, Frazier's Farm and 
Malvern Hill. In this retreat the army fought by day to 
give time for the passage of baggage trains, and fell back 
at night to new positions. At Malvern Hill Lee received 
so bloody a check that he pressed no farther. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 89 

499; What is the distance from Fair Oaks to the James 
River 1 

Seventeen miles. 

500. What 7vas the effect of this campaign ? 

The North was as much discouraged as the South was 
elated. Lincoln called for 300,000 troops. 

501. What orders did McClellan noiv receive ? 

To transfer his army to Aequia Creek, and put it under 
the command of Gen. Pope. 

502. Describe Lee^s campaign against Pope. 

After some manoeuvering, Pope was compelled to fight 
the entire Confederate army on the old battle-field of 
Bull Run. The shattered remains of the Army of the 
Potomac retreated and took refuge within the fortifications 
at Washington. 

503. What 7vas the effect of this campaign] 

The Union army lost 30,000 men and a vast quantity of 
supplies. The capital was in great danger, with a vic- 
torious enemy outside and only broken battalions within. 

504. What did Lee do J 

He crossed the Potomac and entered Maryland. 

505. Who assumed command of the A?-my of the Potomac 
after Pope^s defeat / 

Gen. McClellan. 

506. What notable battle was fought soon after 1 
The battle of Antietam, September 17. 

507. After these battles, what course did Lee pursue ? 
He retreated across the Potomac. 

508. What 7iias the effect of Lee's defeat 1 

The North was saved from invasion and Washington 
from attack. 



go COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

509. Why was McClellan again superseded, and by whom ? 
For the slowness of his movements in pursuing the re- 
treating army. Gen. Burnside took command. 

510. When was the battle of Fredericksburg fought, and 
7vith what res u/t? 

On December 13. The Union army was defeated with a 
loss of 12,000 men. 

511. What were the Confederate victories during this year? 

Jackson's in the Shenandoah Valley; Lee's in the Pen- 
insular campaign ; the successful campaign against Pope; 
Bragg's raid in Kentucky; the battles of Cedar Mountain, 
Chickasa v Bluff and Fredericksburg. 

512. What were the Union victories? 

The capture of Forts Henry, Donelson, Pulaski, Macon, 
Jackson, St. Phillip, Island No. 10, New Orleans, Roanoke 
Island, Newbern, Yorktown, Norfolk, Memphis, and the 
opening of the Misssippi to Vicksburg. Also the battles 
of Pea Ridge, Williamsburg, Fair Oaks, South Mountain, 
Antietam, luka, Corinth and Murfreesboro and the silencing 
of the Merrimac. 

513. What terrible Indian massacre occurred? 

An outbreak in Minnesota, Iowa and Dakota. More 
than seven hundred whites were slain, and many thousands 
driven from their homes. Col. Sibley routed the Indians 
and took five hundred prisoners. Thirty-nine were hanged 
on one scaffold at Mankato, Minn., December 26. 

1863. 

514. What 7vas the war plan of i86j, and ho7C' large was 
the force engaged? 

The plan was about the same as that of the preceding 
year. The Union force was some 700,000, and the Con- 
federate 350,000, 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. gi 

515. WJu'ii iiuxs the Etnancipation Proclatnation issued 1 

January i, 1863. 

5 1 6. Describe the second expedition against Vicksburg. 

After several weeks of fruitless effort on the north side 
of Vicksburg, Grant marched down the west bank of the 
river and crossed below the city. Between May i and 18 
he defeated the Confederates at Fort Gibson, Jackson, 
Champion Hills, and Big Black River, and within seven- 
teen days after he had landed Pemberton's army was shut 
up within the intrenchments of Vicksburg. After three 
desperate assaults the Union troops threw up intrench- 
ments and began undermining the city. The siege lasted 
forty-seven days. 

517. Whefl did Vicksburg surrender ? 
On the 4th of July. 

5 1 8. What effect had this cattipaign ? 

The Confederates lost the cities of Vicksburg and Jack- 
son, with 37,000 prisoners and immense stores, and 10,000 
of their troops killed and wounded. On the fall of Vicks- 
burg, Port Hudson surrendered to Banks. The Mississippi 
was thus opened to the Gulf. 

5 1 g. After the battle of Murfreesboro, "icJiat were the 
mo7'eme'its in Tennessee ? 

Little occurred until June, when Rosecrans, with 60,000 
men, marched against Bragg and compelled him to evac- 
uate Chattanooga. On September 8, 19 and 20 the battle of 
Chickamauga was fought. The Union army was defeatec 
and withdrew to Chattanooga, while Bragg occupied the 
heights commanding the city, and threatened it with star- 
vation. 

520. What 7i'trs nor*.' the fcc/ing in the JVorth in regard to 
the Army of the Cumberland I 

One of great anxiety. The defeat of the Army of tlie 



C)2 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Cumberland made it seem but a matter of time when the 
Confederacy would be finally victorious. 

521. By what means was the Army of the Tennessee re- 
lieved? 

Grant was appointed to succeed Rosecrans, and relief 
was obtained by Hooker's arrival with two corps from the 
Army of the Potomac, while Sherman hastened by forced 
marches from luka 200 miles away. 

522. Where was Hooker, and how did he so suddenly 
appear before the Confederate army at Chattanooga 1 

He was in Virginia. His army, 23,000 strong, came by 
rail in seven days, a distance of 1,200 miles. 

523. Describe the battles of Lookout Mou?itain and Mis- 
sionary Ridge. 

The first movement was made by Gen. Thomas, who 
captured Orchard Knob on November 23. The following 
day Hooker charged the fortifications of Lookout Mountain. 
The Union forces carried the heights and swept over the 
crest, driving the enemy before them. The next morning 
Hooker advanced on the south of Missionary Ridge. 
Sherman was engaged on the northern flank. Grant, from 
his position on Orchard Knob, saw the effect of Sherman's 
assaults. The Confederate line in front of him was weak- 
ening, and with a bold movement Thomas's corps was 
launched against its centre. The orders were to take the 
rifle-pits at the foot of Missionary Ridge, then halt and re- 
form; but in the excitement of success officers and men 
pushed forward and up the ascent. Grant caught the in- 
spiration, and the entire force was ordered to engage in the 
conflict in one grand charge. Up they went, over rocks and 
chasms, all lines broken in the eagerness to reach the summit. 
Without firing a shot, and heedless of the tempest of mis- 
siles descending upon them, they gained the crest, captured 
the guns and turned them upon the retreating foe. That 



UNITED STATES IJISTORY 



93 



night the glow of the Federal camp-fires along the heights 
about Chattanooga crowned the most brilliant of Grant's 
achievements and the most picturesque of the battles of the 
war. This fight has become famous as the "battle above 
the clouds." 

524. What effect had these successes ? 

The Union forces possessed Chattanooga, Bragg's army 
was routed and the General resigned. The victories gave 
control of East Tennessee, and furnished an open doorway 
by which the Union army gained easy access to Virginia, 
North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia and Alabama. 

525. After the battle of Fredericksburg^ who took command 
of the Army of the Potomac "i 

Gen. Joseph Hooker, on January 26. 

526. When was the battle of Chancellorsville fought 1 

On May 2 and 3. The Union army was defeated with 
great loss. 

527. In this battle, what noted Confederate officer ivas 
killed 1 

"vStonfewall" Jackson, While returning from a reconnois- 
sance at the front, he was fired upon by his own men, who 
mistook his escort for Federal cavalry. 

528. Who succeeded Hooker after the battle of Chancellors- 
ville t 

Gen. George Meade. 

529. What were the viovements of Lee ? 

With the flower of the Confederate army he crossed the 
Potomac, passed through Maryland, entered Pennsylvania, 
and proceeded within four miles of Harrisburg. 

530. How was his progress arrested? 

By the battle of Gettysburg, which was fought the ist. 



g4 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

2d and 3d of July, Gen. Meade commanding the Union 
forces. Gen. Lee retreated to Virginia. 

531. At the battle of Gettysburg^ what were the casualties t 
The Unionloss was 23,000; the Confederate, 36,000. 

532. The loss of Vicksburg and the battle of Gettysburg 
had what effect on the Confederacy 1 

These losses and defeats turned the point of war, and the 
fortunes of the Confederacy began to wane. 

^TyTy. Ho7v did Admiral Dupout attempt to take Charles- 
ton i 

Having confidence in the ability of the iron-clads to resist 
cannon-balls, he attempted to run the fortifications and 
force his way up to the city. The attempt was a disastrous 
failure. 

534. What were the Confederate successes for the year 
1863 ? 

The Confederates gained the great battles of Chickamauga 
and Chancellorsville. The Union cause in Texas was de- 
pressed. Galveston was seized and every attack on Charles- 
ton successfully resisted. * 

535* What 7acre the Union successes! 

The Federals took Vicksburg and Port Hudson, and 
won the battles of Chattanooga and Gettysburg. Arkan- 
sas, East Tennessee, large parts of Louisiana and Missis- 
sippi and some parts of Texas were held by Union 
troops. 

536. When 7vas the Draft Riot I 

Congress in 1863 passed a Conscription Act, and 
under this act the President ordered a draft for 300,000 
men. This led to a three days' riot in New York City, 
beginning on July 13, and during which 150 lives were lost 
and a very large amount of property was destroyed. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



95 



1864. 

537. Describe the raid made by General Judson Kilpatrick 
at the beginning of 1864. 

On the 28th of February Kilpatrick made a bold and 
successful raid upon the exterior defenses of Richmond. 
Railroad tracks were torn up, telegraph wires cut, six large 
grist mills were destroyed and heavy damage was done. 
At a point three miles from Richmond he found the enemy's 
works too strong to be assailed by a force of cavalry and 
withdrew, camping that night within six miles of the Con- 
federate capital. 

538. What was accomplished by this expedition ? 

Many miles of railroad were cut, several hundred pris- 
oners were captured, and ^7,000,000 worth of property was 
destroyed. 

539. What befell Colonel Dahlgren and his command! 
While attempting to return, after destroying the grist 

mills on the James River Canal, Dahlgren fell into an 
ambush of the enemy and was killed. His remains were 
treated with indignity. 

540. When was General Grant appointed Lieutenant- 
General of the Union Army ? 

March 3, 1864. 

541. Where was the main strength of the Confederacy! 

It lay in the armies of Robert E. Lee in Virginia and 
Joseph E. Johnston in Georgia. 

542. What plan was now adopted! 

Grant was to march against Lee, and Sherman to attack 
Johnston and sweep through to the coast. 

543. Describe Sherman'' s advance upon Atlanta. 

He started with a force of 100,000 men. For one hun- 
dred miles there was continuous skirmishing. Sherman 



96 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

would drive Johnston into a stronghold, and then with 
consummate skill would outflank him, when Johnston with 
equal skill would retreat to a new post and prepare to 
meet his opponent again. Several bloody battles were 
fought, and finally Johnston retired on July 10 to the 
intrenchments of Atlanta. Hood was now put in com- 
mand. 

544. When did Atlanta surrender 1 
September 2, 1864. 

545. What had been the loss during this campaign of/our 
months^ fighting ? 

There had been ten pitched battles and scores of minor 
engagements, at a cost to the Union army of 30,000 and 
to the Confederacy of about 40,000 men. 

546. JVhat tnovemcnt teas made I'v Hood, and why 1 

He turned to invade Tennessee, with the expectation 
that Sherman would follow him, and that thus Georgia 
would be saved from invasion. 

547. What became of Hood\^ armyl 

Hood marched against Gens. Thomas and Schofield at 
Nashville. After severe fighting, Thomas withdrew from 
the fortifications and remained two weeks. He then sud- 
denly burst forth and drove the Confederate army out of 
its intrencliments and into headlong flight. It was com- 
pletely demoralized, and, for further use, destroyed. 

548. Describe Sherman'' s '■'■ March to the Sea," after the 
burning of Atlanta. 

Hood being moved from his path, there was little to 
impede his progress. With 60,000 troops, in five weeks 
he marched three hundred miles, and then captured Sa- 
vannah. 

549. What effect had this march on Georgia? 

A fertile region, sixty miles wide and three hundred 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



97 



miles long, was devastated, and three hundred miles of 
railroad were destroyed. 

550. At the time of G ninths move to7vards Richmotid, what 
battles were fought t 

The battles of the Wilderness and Spottsylvania. 

551. Describe the battle of the Wilderness. 

After crossing the Rapidan, the Union army plunged 
into the Wilderness, where it was attacked on May 5, by 
the Confederate army. In the woods, dense with smoke, 
this strangest of battles was fought. The third day both 
armies, worn out by the desperate struggle, remained in 
their intrenchments. Grant lost 20,000 men, Lee 10,000. 

552. What did Grant do, and 7ohat battle followed 1 

He pushed his army by the Confederate right flank 
towards Spottsylvania Court House, where for five days, 
from May 8 to 1 2, terrible fighting occurred. Ten thousand 
men fell on each side. 

553. Where was the next engagement! 

Grant now concluded to try the flank movement again, 
and pushed forward to Cold Harbor, a short distance from 
Richmond. Lee hastened by a shorter route, and arrived 
in time to prepare for defense. Early on the morning of 
June 4 the Union army made an assault on Cold Harbor. 
Twenty minutes after the first shot was fired, fully ten 
thousand Union men were killed or wounded, while the 
enemy's loss was little over one thousand. 

554. What was the result of the attack on Petersburg? 
The Confederate works could not be carried, so Grant 

threw up intrenchments, and prepared for a siege of 
Richmond. 

555. What was the loss in this campaign 1 

The Union army lost 70,000, and the Confedera+^es 
40,000. 



98 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

556. What memorable words were written by General 
Grant to the President on the nth of May, 1864 1 

" I propose to fight it out on this line, if it takes all 
summer." 

557. During the siege of /Richmond, ivhat two important 
events occurred "i 

The Mine Explosion at Petersburg, Va., and the capture 
of the Weldon Railroad. 

558. What 7i'as the result of the mine explosion 1 

A mine was dug beneath a strong Confederate fort, and 
was fired with a blast of 8,000 pounds of powder. The 
fort and garrison were destroyed. At the same time the 
Union artillery opened along the line, and an assaulting 
column rushed forward ; but it stopped in the crater 
produced by the explosion. The Confederates, rallying, 
turned their artillery upon the mass of men within the 
demolished fort, and about 4,000 were lost before the rest 
could retreat to the Union lines. This is known as the 
"Battle of the Crater." 

559. What raids were made by General Early 1 

Early entered Maryland, threatened Washington and 
Baltimore, defeated Wallace, and then withdrew to Vir- 
ginia. In the same month — July — he crossed into 
Pennsylvania, his troops setting fire to Chambersburg ; 
but after that he immediately withdrew. 

560. What was secured by these expeditions'} 

A vast amount of stores, five thousand horses, and a 
withdrawal of part of Grant's army from before Petersburg. 

561. What did General Sheridan do I 

In September, Sheridan defeated Early at Winchester 
and Fisher's Hill, and in a week destroyed half the enemy 
and put the rest to flight. Early returned with reinforce- 
ments, and, under cover of a dense fog, surprised Sheri- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 99 

dan's army at Cedar Creek, October 19, and drove it back 
in confusion. At this critical moment Sheridan arrived 
•from Winchester, "twenty miles away," checked the re- 
treating columns, turned them " about face " and won the 
battle. 

562. What was the effect of Sheridan's successes? 

This was the most brilliant campaign of the war. In 
one month Sheridan had virtually annihilated Early's army. 
His own loss was 17,000. 

563. Describe the Red River expedition. 

Gen. Banks was sent up the Red River to loosen the 
Confederate grasp on that region and Texas. This cam- 
paign resulted in a Confederate triumph. Banks lost 
5,000 men, 18 guns, and large supplies. 

564. When tvas the massacre of Fort Pilloiv, Ky.t 

On April 12. The Confederates were maddened by 
the sight of negro troops opposing them, and a terrible 
massacre followed. 

565. What brilliant naval victory did Admiral Farragut 
achieve 1 

The capture of Mobile Harbor, August 5. He closed 
it against blockade-runners. The city of Mobile was not 
captured until April 12, 1865. 

566. Describe the expedition against Fort Fisher. 

Fort Fisher defended the Harbor of Wilmington, N.C. 
The expedition consisted of seventy vessels under Com- 
modore Porter, and a land force under Gen. Butler. After 
a fierce bombardment, Dec. 24 and 25, Butler decided 
that the fort could not be taken by assault, and the army 
returned to Fortress Monroe. Commodore Porter asked 
for another trial. The same troops were sent back under 
Gen. Terry. By a series of trenches a column of troops 
worked themselves up to within two hundred yards of the 



loo COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

fortifications. At the word they rushed forward and burst 
into the fort. The hand-to-hand conflict within lasted for 
hours. Late at night the garrison surrendered, on Jan- 
uary 15, 1865. 

567. What occurred at St. Albans., Vermont, on the igth 
0/ October, 1864? 

A band of raiders from Canada assaulted the town, 
robbed the banks, seized horses from the livery stables 
and returned to Canada before the inhabitants recovered 
from their surprise. The entire raid was accomplished in 
a half-hour. 

568. Describe the attempt of Confederate emissaries to bum 
Ne7v York. 

On the night of November 25, 1864, an attempt was 
made to burn New York by saturating beds in the princi- 
pal hotels with a mixture of phosphorus and oil. The 
attempt was discovered in season and a great disaster 
averted. 

569. What was the Alabama, and what damage did she 
do? 

She was a British steamer built in England, but officered 
and commissioned by the Confederate government. Her 
object was to prey upon Union commerce, and she suc- 
ceeded in capturing more than sixty vessels. Her com- 
mander was Capt. Raphael Semmes. 

570. When, 7vhere, and with what result was the encounter 
betwecfi the Kearsarge and the Alabama? 

The engagement between the Kearsage and the Alabama 
took place off the coast of France, in the English Channel, 
June 15, 1864. The Alabama was sunk, Capt. John A. 
Winslow, commanding the Kearsage, rescued a part of 
the sinking crew. The English yacht Deerhound picked 
up the remainder and steamed off to the British coast. 
Capt. Semmes was among the number thus rescued. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. loi 

571. What other interesting naval operatiofi occurred during 
this year 1 

The destruction of the Confederate iron-clad Albemarle, 
at Plymouth, North Carolina. This was accomplished by 
Lieut. Cashing, who fastened a torpedo to the Albemarle, 
which exploded and sunk her. 

572. At the close 0/1864, what ivas the political condition 
of the North? 

There was much dissatisfaction at the North with the 
conduct of the war ; the debt was becoming enormous and 
paper money greatly depreciated. Grant had been re- 
pulsed at Cold Harbor and Early had made successful 
raids. In the midst of these calamities Abraham Lincoln 
was renominated by the Republicans, and the Democrats 
nominated Geo. B. McClellan, who stood firmly for the 
prosecution of the war but was not in full sympathy with 
the policy of the administration. Lincoln's popular ma- 
jority was more than four hundred thousand. 

573. Ho7a did gold compare in value with greenbacks? 

In July, 1864, it required $2.90 in paper to buy one 
dollar in gold. 

574. What were the Confederate victories duritig this year? 
The Confederates won the battles of Sabine Cross Roads, 

Wilderness, Bermuda Hundreds, Spottsylvania, New Market 
and Cold Harbor. They resisted the Red River and 
Florida expeditions, two attacks upon Petersburg and one 
against Fort Fisher. 

575. Name the Union victories. 

They won the battle of Atlanta and the battles pre- 
ceding it — Dalton, Resaca, Dallas, Lost Mountain, Kene- 
saw Mountain, Winchester, Fisher's Hill, Cedar Creek 
and Nashville. They captured Fort de Russy, the forts in 
Mobile Harbor, and Fort McAllister; Sheridan annihilated 



102 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Early's army ; Sherman marched across Georgia and took 
Savannah ; Thomas destroyed Hood's army, and the Con- 
federacy was ahiiost extinguished ; only North and South 
Carolina remained in full control of the Confederacy. . 

1865. 

576. What was the plan of the campaign for 1865! 

Sherman was to move north from Savannah against 
Johnston, and then join Grant in a final attack upon Lee, 
Sheridan had swept down from the Shenandoah, cut the 
railroads north of Richmond, and formed in line before 
Petersburg. Wilson was in Alabama and Georgia, while 
Stoneman held the passes of the Alleghanies and waited in 
North Carolina for the issue in Virginia. 

577. What were General Sherman^s movementsl 

Early in February Sherman started north, and, though 
meeting with untold difficulties, swept on. He captured 
Columbia on Feb. 17, and on the following day Charleston 
was evacuated. Johnston fiercely opposed him at Averys- 
boro and Bentonville, but was defeated. On the banks of 
the Neuse Sherman met Schofield and Terry, and the 
three, with a combined army of 100,000 men, waited for 
the final charge against the Confederacy. The distance 
traveled was more than 425 miles, one hundred of which 
was swamp. 

578. Describe the siege 0/ Richmond. 

Lee was now shut up in Richmond, and his only hope 
of prolonging the struggle was to cut his way out. He 
decided to attack Grant's lines, cause a concentration of 
troops, and retreat by other routes before his plan was 
discovered. He failed, as Grant returned the advance 
with renewed vigor, capturing the outer defenses and pre- 
venting a retreat. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



103 



579. Give a description of the battle of Five Forks. 

Sheridan, with his cavalry and heavy columns of in- 
fantry, pushed out from Grant's left wing and threw a 
heavy force behind the Confederate position at Five Forks. 
Assailed in every direction, the garrison was overwhelmed, 
and five thousand men were taken prisoners. 

580. What effect had this brilliant victory 1 

Lee's position was made untenable. His right was 
turned and his rear threatened. 

581. Describe the capture of Petersburg and Richmond. 
On the morning of April 3, the Union army advanced in 

an overwhelming assault along the whole front. liy noon the 
Confederate line of intrenchments, before which the Army 
of the Potomac had lain so long, was broken, and thousands 
of prisoners were captured. That night Petersburg and 
Richmond were evacuated. The next morning the Union 
troops took possession of the Confederate capital. 

582. When and to whom did Lee and fohnston surrender? 
Lee surrendered to General Grant at Appomattox, near 

Lynchburg, Va., on April 9, and Johnston to Sherman in 
North Carolina on April 26. 

583. Whefi and how was Jefferson Davis captured^ and 
what was done with him t 

He was arrested by a party of Union troops, in Georgia, 
on May 10, 1865, and imprisoned in Fortress Monroe, but 
was later released on bail furnished by Horace Greeley. 

584. How long did the Civil War last? 
A little more than four years. 

585. When ajid by whom was Abraham Li?icoln assas- 
sinated? 

On the 14th of April, 1865, by John Wilkes Booth, at 
Ford's Theatre in Washington, D.C. 



I04 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

586. What became of Booth! 

After shooting the President he sprang upon the stage. 
His spur caught in a flag used to drape the proscenium, and 
he was thrown heavily, breaking his leg. He escaped, 
mounted his horse and fled through Maryland, into Virginia, 
where he was overtaken, near Bowling Green, in a barn 
and shot. 

587. Give an account of the attack on Secretary Seward. 

On the same night of the assassination of Lincoln an 
accomplice stabbed Mr. Seward while lying ill in bed. 

588. What became of Booth'' s accomplices? 

Harold, Payne, Atzerodt, and Mrs. Surratt were hanged; 
Arnold, Mudd and O'Laughlin were imprisoned for life, 
and Spangler was sentenced for six years. 

589. What was the total number of troops called out in the 
war, and what the total number obtained? 

The number called out was 2,942,748, the number obtained 
was 2,690,401. 

590. How many mefi 7vere lost in the war? 

The Union armies probably lost in battle, or through its 
effects, 300,000 men, while 200,000 were crippled for life. 
The Confederate loss is not positively known, but was un- 
doubtedly almost as heavy. 

591. What 7uas the cost of the war? 

The government's debt on August 31, 1865, was nearly 
^2,844,000,000. The daily expenses at one time reached 
the sum of ^2,500,000. 

592. How was slavery forever abolished in the United 
States? 

By the thirteenth amendment to the Constitution, which 
was ratified on December 18, 1865, 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



lOS 



593. Who succeeded Lincoln as President? 

Andrew Johnson. He was sworn in on the day of 
Lincoln's death, April 15, 1865. 

594. What caused trouble between Johnson afid Congress? 
The exercise of the veto power. 

595. What were the most important bills passed over the 
President's veto? 

The Freedmen's Bureau, the Civil Rights, and the 
Tenure of Office bills. 

596. What was the nature 0/ these bills? 

The Freedmen's Bureau bill provided for the establish- 
ment of a department for the protection of the freedmen. 
The Civil Rights bill guaranteed to the negroes the full 
rights of citizenship. The Tenure of Office bill made it 
necessary that the consent of the Senate shall be obtained 
for the President's removal of any person from a civil office. 

597. On 7vhat charges was Johnson impeached? 

Various misdemeanors, and contempt of the Senate by 
violating the Tenure of Office act in an attempt to remove 
arbitrarily Edwin M. Stanton, Secretary of War. Johnson 
was acquitted, the two-thirds majority necessary for convic- 
tion lacking one vote. 

598. What is the fourteenth amendment to the Constitu- 
tion? When adopted? 

It guarantees equal civil rights to all, and bases repre- 
sentation in each of the States on the number of voters. 
It was adopted July 28, 1868. 

599. What dejnand upon France was made by the United 
States government? 

The recall from Mexico of the French troops under 
Maximilian. 



lo6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

600. What States were added to the Union during the 
war / 

West Virginia and Nevada. 

601. What zvas the Reconstruction policy of Johnson ? 

He recognized the State governments that had been 
formed during the war under the protection of the Union 
army in Virginia, Tennessee, Arkansas and Louisiana. In 
the other States he appointed provisional governors and 
authorized the calling of conventions to form loyal govern- 
ments. These conventions met, repealed the ordinances 
of secession, repudiated the Confederate debt, and ratified 
the thirteenth amendment. On these conditions Johnson 
claimed that the States, having never been legally out of 
the Union, should be restored to their rights in the Union. 
Pardon was proclaimed to those persons who had been en- 
gaged in secession with certain exceptions. 

602. When 7c>as Universal Amnesty declared ? 
On Christmas day, 1868. 

603. What was the Reconstruction policy of Congress ? 
Congress decided that the President had no power to 

prescribe the conditions for the readmission of the seceded 
States, and his proclamations and orders were treated as 
invalid. Tennessee was admitted, but the other States 
were placed under military rule. After a bitter and pro- 
tracted struggle, governments were finally established in 
Arkansas, Alabama, Florida, Louisiana, North Carolina 
and South Carolina. 

604. What 7vas the '■^iron-clad oath,'''' and who luere the so- 
called '■'■carpet-baggers " / 

Congress made a requirement that every candidate for 
holding office should swear that he had not participated in 
the secession movement. As but few Southerners could 
conscientiously take this oath it was called "iron-clad," 



UNITED STATES JJISTORY. 107 

and the offices were filled by men who had come from the 
North during the war and soon after it. Owing to their 
recent arrival, these men were termed "carpet-baggers." 

605. How long was the govenunent in establishing its 
Reconstruction policy 1 

Three years. The Southern States were not represented 
in the government from 1861 to 1868. Virginia, Missis- 
sippi and Texas were not allowed to vote for President 
until after Grant's first administration. 

606. What proclamation was issued by Johnson in 7-egartl 
to the Fenians ? 

The Fenians were making preparations to cross the 
Canadian frontier at Buffalo, N.Y., and St. Albans, Vt. 
Johnson issued a proclamation declaring the movement a 
violation of neutrality, and sent General Meade to execute 
the law. 

607. J/o7V 7vas Alaska obtained? 

By purchase from Russia, in October, 1867, for ^7,200,000 
in gold. It contains 500,000 square miles. 

608. What treaty was made with China? 

In 1868 an embassy from C'hina, in charge of Anson 
Burlingame, then our diplomatic representative in China, 
visited the United States. This was the first event of its 
kind in the history of the Chinese nation. A treaty was 
framed granting valuable commercial privileges. 

609. What repeated de?nand was made 0/ the French gov- 
ernmefit? 

During our civil war L'rance attempted to establish an 
empire in Mexico, and Maximilian, an Archduke of Austria, 
was appointed emperor. The United States government 
protested, but with its hands full of its own affairs was un- 
able to enforce the Monroe Doctrine. After the close of our 
war our government again demanded of Napoleon the re- 



Io8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

call of French troops. Maximilian, deprived of foreign 
aid, was defeated by the Mexicans, and on June 19, 1867, 
was shot after a trial by his captors. 

610. When 7cias the Atlantic cable completed! 

In June, 1866. The first cable was attempted in 1856, 
and laid from New York to St. Johns, Newfoundland. In 
1857 a vain effort was made to cross the ocean. In 1858 
a cable was laid across the Atlantic and apparently worked 
successfully, but on September i it ceased to work. Cyrus 
W. Field, the projector of this enterprise, was not dis- 
couraged, and organized a third company, which in June, 
1866, was successful. There are now several cables. 

611. What UHXS the political situation at that time! 

The Republican party nominated Ulysses S. Grant and 
Schuyler Colfax; the Democrats, Horatio Seymour and 
Frank P. Blair. Virginia, Mississippi and Texas had not 
yet been "reconstructed" and were not allowed to vote. 

grant's administration — 1869-1877. 

612. When was the Union Pacific Railway completed i 
How far is it fro7n New York to Sa?i Francisco! 

In 1869. The distance from New York to San Francisco 
is about 3,300 miles. 

613. When was the fifteenth amendment formally pro- 
claimed^ and what is its nature! 

On March 30, 1870, and it provided that the right of the 
citizens of the United States to vote shall not be denied or 
abridged by the United States or any State, on account of 
race, color, or previous condition of servitude. 

614. Describe the important conflagrations of iSyi and 
1872. 

A great fire broke out in Chicago on Sunday night, Octo- 
ber 8, 187 1. It was the most terrible conflagration in 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 109 

modern times. Three thousand acres of almost solid 
blocks were devastated. Twenty-five thousand buildings 
were burned, ^200,000,000 worth of property was destroyed, 
and 1 00,000 persons were rendered homeless. Contributions 
to the amount of more than ^7,500,000 were sent to the 
suffering citizens from nearly all parts of the world. Dur- 
ing the same autumn fires raged in the forests of Wisconsin, 
Minnesota and Michigan. Entire villages were consumed. 
In Wisconsin alone nearly 1,500 persons perished. On 
November 9, 1872, fire swept over sixty acres in the whole- 
sale trade centre of Boston, and destroyed ^70,000,000 
worth of property. 

615. What was the Alabama claims diffictilty 7vith Eng- 
land^ and h 07V was it settled? 

The English government refused to pay for the damages 
to American commerce caused by the cruising of the Ala- 
bama. The dispute was settled by arbitration, in a con- 
vention at Geneva, Switzerland, the English government 
paying ;^ 15,500,000 to the United States. 

616. How was the dispute regarding the Northwestern 
boundary between the United States and British America 
adjusted? 

It was submitted to the Emperor of Germany and was 
decided in favor of the United States. 

617. What was the proposed annexation of San Domitigo ? 
The republic of San Domingo, comprising a large part 

of the island of Hayti, applied for admission to the United 
States, but was rejected. A commission appointed by the 
President to examine its condition reported favorably, but 
the measure was rejected by Congress. 

618. At the close of Grant'' s first term, zvhat jvas the 
political situation ? 

Grant was renominated by the Republicans, and the 



no COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Democrats endorsed the nomination of Horace Greeley, 
already the Liberal-Republican candidate. 

6ig. Give a short biography of Horace Greeley. 

Horace Greeley was one of our great self-made men. 
Born in poverty, he had risen from the humblest position 
to be the most renowned editor of the age. In 1841 he 
had founded the New York Tribu?ie. When civil war 
seemed imminent, he had urged measures to avoid it, even 
advocating the policy of letting the discontented States 
depart in peace; but when war had been proclaimed he 
had urged a vigorous prosecution. At the close of the 
war he had pleaded for immediate conciliation. ,Just 
before the close of the Presidential canvass his wife died, 
and this, together with the desertion of friends and the 
excitement of the contest, unsettled his mind. He was 
confined in a private asylum, where he soon died. 

620. Describe the difficulties with the Modoc Indians. 
Having refused to stay upon their reservation in Oregon, 

troops were sent against them, whereupon they retreated 
to their fastnesses in the Lava Beds. Peace commis- 
sioners, proposing to arrange the difficulty, held a con- 
ference with the chiefs. In the midst of this council, the 
Indians treacherously murdered General Canby and the 
Rev. Dr. Thomas and wounded Mr. Meacham. The 
Modocs were then bombarded and forced to surrender. 
Captain Jack and several of the leaders of the band were 
hanged at Fort Klamath, October 3, 1873. 

621. Describe the pan ic of iSjj. 

In the autumn of 1873 J^y Cooke & Co., bankers, of 
Philadelphia, became too heavily involved in railroad 
enterprises, especially the Northern Pacific, and failed. 
The failure produced a financial crisis, and hundreds of 
prominent firms all over the Union were involved in ruin. 
The money market became stringent, and a stagnation of 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. m 

business followed. But for the timely aid of the govern- 
ment in throwing several millions of dollars into the market, 
the distress would have been much greater. The name 
"Black Friday" was applied to the day when almost every 
man and firm in business seemed to be threatened with 
bankruptcy. 

622. What centc7i7iial atuiiversaries were observed with 
great enthusiasm in i8y^ and 1876? 

The hundredth anniversary of the battle of Lexington, 
of the battle of Bunker Hill, and of the signing of the 
Declaration of Independence. 

623. Describe the tnain features 0/ the Centennial Exhibi- 
tion. 

Fairmount Park, in Philadelphia, was the scene of the 
display. More than two hundred buildings were scattered 
over the extensive ground, the main structure covering 
twenty acres. Exhibits were gathered from every clime. 
The exhibition lasted six months, from May to November, 
and the total number of visitors was 9,910,966. 

624. What war with the Sioux Indians occurred, and 
what terrible defeat overtook the govertiment forces ? 

A band of Sioux took the war-path. Troops were sent 
to force them to return to their reservation. On the 25th 
of June, 1876, General Custer suddenly came upon the 
enemy and a desperate fight followed, in which Custer and 
his entire command were killed. 

625. In i8y6, who ivere nominated for President ? 

The Republicans nominated Rutherford B. Hayes and 
Wm. A. Wheeler; the Democrats, Samuel J. Tilden and 
Thomas A. Hendricks; the Greenback party, Peter Cooper 
and Samuel F. Cary. 

626. What was the result of the election? 

Both Republicans and Democrats claimed the election, 



112 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

the Republicans insisting that the States of South Carolina, 
Florida and Louisiana had been carried by the Democrats 
by fraud. 

627. How was Rutherford B. Hayes chosen President 1 
In order to reach a settlement, a Joint Electoral Com- 
mission was appointed, composed of five United States 
Senators, five United States Representatives, and five 
Justices of the Supreme Court. This body decided that 
185 electoral votes had been cast for Hayes and Wheeler, 
and 184 for Tilden and Hendricks. 

628. What was the feeling among the American people in 
regard to the settlement of this question? 

The Republicans were jubilant, while the Democrats 
denounced the decision, claiming that the Commission 
had decided, not by evidence, but on partisan grounds, as 
eight of them were Republicans and seven were Demo- 
crats; therefore Hayes was termed by his opponents the 
"eight-to-seven " President. 

629. IVhen Samuel f. Tilden taas ashed if his party should 
stand by his election^ what reply did he make? 

To the delegation who sought his advice he insisted that 
no act of theirs should imperil the country. 

Hayes's administration — 1877-1881. 

630. What promise was made by Hayes in regard to '■^rota- 
tion in office ^^ ? 

To make "no dismissal except for cause, and no pro- 
motion except for merit." 

631. What was Preside?it Hayes'' s Southern policy! 

One of conciliation. The Federal troops which had 
hitherto sustained the Republican State governments in 
South Carolina and Louisiana were withdrawn and Demo- 
cratic officers at once took control of the local affairs. He 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



"3 



also appointed Judge Key, a Southerner and an ex-Con- 
federate, Postmaster General. 

632. What railroad strike occurred in 1877 1 

On nearly all of the principal railroads in the Northern 
States a strike of workmen occurred, the cause being a 
general reduction of wages. At Pittsburg, Pa., the strike 
grew into a terrible riot, in the course of which vast 
amounts of property were destroyed; it was quelled only 
by the use of troops. In the riot more than one hundred 
lives vere sacrificed, and the Pennsylvania Railroad 
suffered a loss of nearly ^3,000,000 worth of property. 

633. What was the Biand Silver Bill? 

In 1873 Congress demonetized silver, and made gold 
the sole standard of our currency. Opposition arose to 
this act, and in 1878 a bill was passed remonetizing silver 
and making the standard silver dollar a legal tender for 
the payment of debts. The government was required to 
purchase from $2,000,000 to $4,000,000 worth of silver 
bullion every month, and coin it into dollars. The bill 
was called the "Bland bill," because Representative Bland 
of Missouri set it in motion in Congress. 

634. Describe the yello7v fever 0/ J8y8. 

In the summer of 1878 it broke out in New Orleans and 
spread with alarming rapidity northward along the Missis- 
sippi into Missouri and Tennessee. More than 7,000 
deaths were reported. 

635. When did the resumption of specie payinetits occur! 
January i, 1879. On December 17, 1878, gold, for the 

first time since January, 1862, sold in New York at par. 

636. What Indian difficulties took place in i8yg? 

The Ute Indians at the White River Agency, being 
dissatisfied on account of the encroachments of miners 
and the non-payment of money promised by the govern- 



114 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

ment, took up arms and massacred and abused the whites 
at the agency. The revolt was suppressed by United 
States troops. 

637. In 1880, what was the population of the United 
States? 

The census of 1880 showed a population of more than 
50,000,000. The increase of inhabitants from 1870 to 1880 
was some 12,000,000. 

638. What were the Fishery Awards? 

Difficulties sprang up between Great Britain and the 
United States because of the fisheries on our northeast 
coast. The matter was left to an international commission 
of arbitration which awarded Great Britain the sum of 
$5,500,000. 

639. What were out treaties with China in 1880? 

One in relation to commerce, and the other granting to 
our government the regulation of Chinese immigration. 

640. Was President Hayeses administration favorable to 
his party ? 

A large element in the party were not satisfied with his 
policy of conciliation toward the South. They believed 
that, if the electoral vote had legally been cast for him as 
President, it must also have been cast for the Republican 
State officers, and that it was the duty of the President to 
protect those officers by the presence of United States 
troops at the State capitals. 

641. Who were the nominees for the Presidency to succeed 
President Hayes ? 

The Republicans nominated James A. Garfield and 
Chester A. Arthur. The Democrats nominated Winfield 
S. Hancock and William H. English. The Greenback- 
Labor party nominated James B, Weaver and Benjamin 
J. Chambers. 



VmTED STATES HISTORY. 



"5 



642. What was the pri?uipal issue between the Republican 
and Democratic parties 1 

The tariff question. 

643. What were the principles advocated by the Greenback- 
Labor party 'i 

The Greenback-Labor party was opposed to the issue of 
paper money by any private corporation; they insisted 
that it should be issued solely by the government and 
made a full legal tender. They claimed also that mon- 
opolies were fast controlling all kinds of business and that 
labor was becoming a mere slave to the avarice and greed 
of capital; that legislation was enacted for the rich without 
due regard for the poor; and that our factories were over- 
burdensome to women and children. 

GARFIELD AND ARTHUR'S ADMINISTRATION. 

644. When was Garfield inaugurated President ? 
March 4, 1881. 

645. What gigantic swindling system was detected in the 
Post-office Department 1 

The Star Route frauds, whereby contracts in the West 
for carrying the mails were so manipulated that great 
wrongs and robberies were perpetrated. Within two 
months contracts to the amount of nearly ^2,000,000 were 
annulled. The alleged conspirators were tried, but judg- 
ment was never rendered against them. 

646. When was President Garfield assassinated 1 

On the morning of July 2, 1881, by Charles J. Guiteau, 
at a railway station in Washington, D.C. 

647. What was the feeling of the country in regard to the 
assassination, and what became of the assassin ? 

The assassination produced profound and universal sor- 
row. Preparations for the celebration of Independence 



ii6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Day were generally abandoned. President Garfield died 
on the 19th of September following, at Long Branch, N.J. 
He is buried at Cleveland, O. The assassin was tried, con- 
victed and hanged. 

648. What testimonial of respect was shown by the Queen 
0/ England to Mrs. Garfield 1 

By direction of the Queen a wreath of flowers was placed 
upon Garfield's coffin, as a sign of her sympathy with the 
martyred President's wife. 

649. When did Chester A. Arthur become President of the 
United States ? 

Immediately on being informed of the President's death 
he took the oath of office. 

650. What was the extent of the fiood in the Mississippi 
Valley in 1882? 

Nearly 100,000 persons were rendered homeless. 

651. Describe the East River Bridge. 

A suspension bridge connecting New York City and 
Brooklyn, 5,989 feet long, was opened to the use of the 
public in 1883. It was begun January 3, 1870. The height 
of the towers is 278 feet and the length of the suspended 
span from tower to tower 1,596 feet. The height from the 
water, at the center, is 135 feet. The four great cables 
are 15] inches in diameter, and each cable contains 5,296 
parallel wires of galvanized steel, oil-coated, closely 
wrapped, and weighing, with covering, 897 1 tons. 

652. What is the Civil Service Act, and when was it 
passed ? 

It was passed in 1883, and aimed to regulate appoint- 
ments and promotions in the civil service of the United 
States by means of examinations instead of political pre- 
ferment. 



UN/I'KD STATES HISTORY. 117 

653. When was letter postage reduced from three cents to 
two cents 1 

October i, 1883. 

654. How was Alaska recognized as a Territory 1 

In 1884 a bill was approved by which a governor, judge, 
marshal and other officers were to be appointed for a term 
of four years, but no legislative assembly or Congressional 
delegate was authorized. Sitka was made the temporary 
seat of government. 

655. How was Chinese immigration regulated? 

It was forbidden by a law passed in 1882, for ten years. 

656. Who 7vere notninated for /'resident in 1884! 

The Democrats nominated Orover Cleveland and 
Thomas A. Hendricks. The Republican.s, James G. 
Blaine and John A. Logan. The Greenback-Labor party, 
B. F. Butler and A. M. West. The Prohibitionists, John 
P. St. John and William Daniel. 

657. What were the chief subjects of discussion in this 
campaign 1 

Between the Democrats and Republicans, the tariff and 
scandalous personalities. The Greenback-Labor party es- 
poused the same policies as four years before, while the 
Prohibitionists demanded the suppression of the li(|uor 
traffic by the general government. 

658. Who was elected President, and by what popular 
majority t Which State held the deciding vote 'I 

Grover Cleveland. New York State held the deciding 
vote, and its Democratic majority was about 1,045. 

Cleveland's administration — 1885-1889. 

659. When did General Grant diet 

July 23, 1885, at Mount McGregor, N.Y. 



ii8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOdk\ 

6oo. Where atid token did Vice-President Hendricks die? 
At his home in Indianapolis, November 25, 1885. 

661. Ifoici many times has the Vice-Presidency been made 
vacant by death ? 

Five times. 

662. What other noted men died shortly after Mr. Hen- 
dricks ? 

George B. McCIellan, Winfield S. Hancock, Charles 
Francis Adams and Chester A. Arthur. 

663. What notable events occurred in 1886? 

The Haymarket riot in Chicago, May 3. The riot of 
Milwaukee, May 6. The earthquake of Charleston, S.C. 
The conviction of eight Anarchists in Chicago. The rise of 
the Knights of Labor to prominence. Great gales off the 
coast of Texas, and wrecks on Lakes Michigan and Super- 
ior. The unveiling of the statue, "Liberty Enlightening 
the World," in New York Harbor. 

664. What noted man died December 26, 1886? 
John A. Logan, United States Senator from Illinois. 

EVENTS OF 1887-1889. 

665. What important cofnmercial act was passed by Con- 
gress in Janiiaty of this year I 

The Inter-State Commerce Act. It was signed by the 
President, February 4, 1887. 

666. What bill originated in the Senate in regard to the 
Canadian fishery question ? 

The Retaliation Act which placed in the hands of the Pres- 
ident the power to prohibit the importation of the products 
of the Canadian fisheries, or, if necessary, to suspend all 
commerce with Canada until the differences between the 
United States and that country were settled. 



UNlT/iD SI-ATKS ///S/OA'V. i i,j 

667. IV/iat ivas t/ic result af l/ir, cleclion of jHHHI 

'J'he Republicans elected I'.enjamin Harrison President, 
and Levi P. Morton Vice-President. The election was ex- 
citing and majorities in the doubtful States small. 

668. Jn J''cl>ruar-}\ jHH(j, lohat iniporta?il office was added 
to the Cabinet t 

Secretary of Agriculture. 

669. What h'j^is/atian in the same month nufi of special 
interest to the people of the Northivest't 

An act by which North and South JJakota, Washington 
and Montana were admitted as States. 

670. IVhat interesting^ a/iniTersary occurred in iHHgl 

'J'he centenary of the first inauguration of Washington 
as President of the United States. I'resident Harrison in 
a proclamation had recommended that on "J'hursday, 
April 30, at the hour of nine in the morning, the people of 
the entire country repair to their respective places of ]Ji- 
vine worship, to implore the favor of (3od that the bless- 
ings of liberty, jjrosperity, and peace may abide with us as 
a people." 'I'his recommendation met with general observ- 
ance. The day was also celebrated by patriotic displays 
in all the cities and principal towns of the Union. 

EVENTS OF 1890. 

671. What important tariff and siii'er legislation was en- 
acted in iHgo ? 

"The McKinley law," .so called, made important changes 
in the tariff, generally in the direction of an increase in 
the rate of protective duties. 'I'he .Sherman act was a law 
repealing the Bland act, and requiring the government to 
purchase monthly 4,500,000 ounces of silver bullion at the 
market price and coin a part of it into standard dollars. 



I20 COMMON' SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

672. What latv did Congress pass in i8gi bearing upon 
copyright ? 

A law providing that the President may, under certain 
conditions, by proclamation extend to foreigners the privi- 
leges of copyright in the United States. 

EVENTS OF 1891-1892, 

673. J:/o7i/ near to the verge of war did the United States 
come during Harrison'' s administration? 

Some American sailors were murderously attacked in the 
streets of Valparaiso by a Chilian mob. Our government 
demanded reparation in damages and an apology, under pain 
of war. Chili was just coming out of a civil war of her 
own, and for reasons of domestic policy held back a little, 
but succumbed just as the period fixed in the American 
ultimatum was expiring. 

674. What 7c>ere the effects of the McKin/ey laic? 

Its opponents declared that the operation of the 
"McKinley law" resulted in a general advance in the cost 
of living. Its supporters claimed that it increased the 
general prosperity. At the next general election, the Re- 
publicans lost the House of Representatives and were sup- 
planted by a large Democratic majority, 

675. What 7i>as the result of the election of i8g2? 

The Democrats elected Grover Cleveland President and 
Adlai K. Stevenson Vice-President. The campaign was 
notable for the absence of much of the usual excitement. 
The general verdict appeared to be against a continuance 
of the high protective rates of the McKinley tariff. 

EVENTS OF 1893-1894. 

676. What event of international interest fnarked the year 
1893? 

The World's Columbian Exposition, held at Chicago, 



UNITED STATES J/ISTORY. 121 

commemorating the 400th anniversary of the discovery of 
America hy Columbus. 

677. Did any exceptional political occurrences mark this 
year J 

{a) President Cleveland convened Congress in extra 
session in August to consider the alarming financial de- 
pression which had recently set in. This session ended 
with the repeal of the silver-purchase clause of the .Sher- 
man Act of 1890. 

(/^) A dispute between this country and Kngland con- 
cerning the seal industry in the Bering .Sea, which had 
been assuming a threatening aspect, was amicably settled 
by international arbitration. 

678. What important question engaged the attention of 
the Congress and the people in i8q4 ? 

A protracted discussion by Congress (Democratic) re- 
sulted in the enactment of a revised tariff law repealing 
the duties on imported wools, and other important raw 
materials, and reducing duties on many manufactured or 
partly manufactured articles. 

679. What 7i>as the result of the Congressional elections of 
1894? 

A general "overturn," replacing the Democratic major- 
ity in the House of Representatives by a larger Repub- 
lican majority. 

680. What occurrences in the labor-field excited general 
anxiety in 1894? 

A strike of railroad employees at Chicago assumed an 
almost revolutionary character by reason of violence, in- 
cendiarism, and general lawlessness. President Cleveland 
ordered United States troops to the scene of the troubles, 
thus terminating the episode. 



122 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

EVENTS OF 1895-1896. 

681. What great question 7vas brought most prominently to 
the attctitioti of the people in i8g^-i8g6 ? 

The general question of the settlement by arbitration 
of all differences with other nations. A dispute between 
Great Britain and Venezuela, concerning the boundary line 
between Venezuela and British Guiana, drew forth from 
President Cleveland a sharp protest, coupled with an inti- 
mation that our government, in support of the "Monroe 
Doctrine," would, if necessary, go to war. After con- 
siderable diplomatic correspondence it was agreed to sub- 
mit the Venezuelan boundary question to arbitration, 
which our government pronounced satisfactory. 

682. What zvas the ?'esult 0/ the general election of i8q6? 

The Republicans elected William McKinley President 
and Garrett A. Hobart Vice-President, with a working 
majority in the House of Representatives, on platform de- 
clarations assuring the maintenance of the existing gold 
standard in our currency. The Democrats had demanded 
the unlimited free coinage of silver at the current ratio of 
16 to I. Next to the coinage question, the most important 
issue of the campaign was that of the duties on imports, 
McKinley representing those who desired higher tariffs as 
a protection to domestic industries. 

EVENTS OF 1897-1898-1899. 

683. What 7oas the first important act during the McKinley 
administration 1 

The calling of an extra session of Congress in March, 
1897, for the enactment of a new protective tariff, styled 
the Dingley Act, in honor of Representative Dingley of 
Maine, its author. The act was signed July 24, 1898. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 123 

684. Did either House of Congress do anything else of note 
at the extra session ? 

The Senate rejected a general treaty of arbitration 
between Great Britain and the United States. 

685. Was this the only treaty of consequence before the 
Senate at this session? 

No. A treaty with the republic of Hawaii, for its an- 
nexation to the United States, was sent in by President 
McKinley, but went over till the regular session the fol- 
lowing winter and then failed. 

686. Ho7v did its failure affect J/aiaaiian annexation? 

It made it necessary to effect the annexation by joint 
resolution as in the case of Texas. This was finally ac- 
complished in the summer of 1898. 

687. IVhat remarkable separation occurred betiveen the 
prices of silver and wheat i?t iSgy? 

Wheat rose in price to $1.19 cents a bushel, and silver 
fell to 45iVo cents an ounce. 

688. Was any effort made to improve the value of silver? 
An international monetary commission was appointed 

by President McKinley. It visited England, France and 
Germany in behalf of an agreement between those coun- 
tries and the United States for maintaining their silver 
coinage at a stated ratio of value as compared with gold; 
but their efforts were fruitless. 

689. What noteiaorthy event for New York occurred in 
1897? 

The enactment of the Greater New York law by the 
State Legislature, uniting Brooklyn, Staten Island and 
other adjacent territory with New York City proper, and 
raising it in population to the second rank, as to both area 
and population, among the cities of the world. The con- 
solidation went into effect January i, 1898. 



124 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

6go. What ifnportant getieral legislation was etiacted by the 
Fifty-Jifth Congfess at its ivintcr session of j8gy-i8g8 ? 

A bankruptcy law; resolutions declaring Cuba free, and 
thus bringing about a war with Spain; and the War Rev- 
enue Act. 

691. Ho7a long did the war zvilh Spain last? 

Actual hostilities began April 21, 1898, with the sev- 
erance of diplomatic intercourse, and ended August 12, 
1898, with the signing of a peace protocol at Washington. 

692. IVhat ti'erc the principal battles in this warl 

The battle of Manila Bay, on May i, in which Admiral 
Dewey destroyed the entire Spanish fleet in Philippine 
waters; the sea-fight off the mouth of the harbor of San- 
tiago, Cuba, July 3, when the ships under Admirals Schley 
and Sampson destroyed the fleet of the Spanish Admiral 
Cervera; the battles incidental to the capture of Santiago, 
between June 24 and July 17, and the battle which ended 
the siege of Manila and brought about its surrender, 
fought just before the news of the peace negotiations 
reached the Philippines. 

693. What other exhibitions of American heroism dis- 
tinguished this wart 

The sinking of the collier Merrimac, in the narrowest 
part of the entrance to the harbor of Santiago, to blockade 
the harbor. This was accomplished by Naval Constructor 
Hobson, with a picked crew of seven men, at night, under 
fire of the Spanish shore batteries. Col. Funston's bravery 
in the Philippines was also especially notable. 

694. What brought about this wart 

The state of disquietude in the United States caused by 
the long and bloody war carried on by the Spanish army 
in Cuba in its attempt to put down the rebellion there. 
The acme of outrajred sentiment in the United States was 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



125 



reached when, on February 15, the American battleship 
Maine was destroyed in the harbor of Havana by a mys- 
terious explosion, causing the death of 264 American offi- 
cers and seamen. 

695. What were the pri7icipal terms of the peace protocol? 
The cession of Porto Rico by Spain to the United 

States; the evacuation of that island and of Cuba; the re- 
nunciation of Spanish sovereignty in Cuba; and the ref- 
erence of the future disposal of the Philippine Islands to 
an international conference or Peace Commission. 

696. Who 7Ciere appointed to represent the United States in 
the peace conference., and ivhere did the conference hold its 
sessions t 

Senators Davis, Frye and Gray; William R. Day, late 
Secretary of State, and VVhitelaw Reid of New York, 
The sessions of the conference were held in Paris. 

697. What was the character of the War Revenue Actl 
It provided for the issue of bonds to raise money for 

carrying on the war, and for a far-reaching system of in- 
ternal taxation to supply the means for meeting the princi- 
pal and interest of the debt thus created and supply the 
government with additional revenue. 

698. What did the treaty of peace pro7'ide ? 

That Spain should give up all her remaining possessions 
in the Western Hemisphere, as forecast by the protocol, 
and cede to the United States the Philippine Archipelago 
in consideration of the payment of ^20,000,000 by the 
United States, and also the island of Guam in the 
Ladrones; and that each government should relinquish all 
its own claims for indemnity and those of its citizens or 
subjects, growing out of the Cuban war. The treaty con- 
tained also some provisions securing especially favorable 
commercial privileges to Spain in her late possessions 
transferred to the United States. 



126 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

699. When was peace formally declared i 

On April 11, 1899, when the ratifications of the treaty 
by the two nations were exchanged at the Executive Man- 
sion in Washington. 

700. What dramatic coincide?ice attended the vote of the 
' United States Senate for the ratif cation of the treaty ? 

The struggle over ratification had been very fierce, a 
large number of Senators objecting to the assumption of 
sovereignty by the United States Government in the Phil- 
ippines. On February 4, 1899, after the 6th had been 
fixed as the date for the final vote, the Filipino insurgent 
army, under General Emilio Aguinaldo, opened fire upon 
the American army in the outposts of Manila. This was 
obviously done for the purpose of emphasizing the demand 
of the Filipinos for independence as opposed to annexa- 
tion to the United States. It seemed to have an effect the 
reverse of what was intended. Some of the Senators 
who had been inclined to listen to the plea of the Filipi- 
nos now declared that this violence must be punished. 
When the vote was taken on February 6, it stood 57 to 
27, or one more than the requisite two-thirds in favor of 
the treaty. 

701. Has the United States any other foreign complications 
on hand at present ? 

Yes. A\ joint commission representing Great Britain, 
Canada and the United States, which met in Washington 
in the fall of 1898, suspended its sessions for a time in the 
following spring, because, in considering the various sub- 
jects which had caused irritation between the United 
States and the other countries involved, it could not reach 
a satisfactory agreement on a boundary line between 
Alaska and the British possessions in the American North- 
west. In Samoa, also, trouble has grown out of the tripar- 
tite system of government, the British and American repre- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 127 

sentatives espousing the cause of Malietoa, one of the 
claimants to the Samoan throne, while the German repre- 
sentatives sided with his rival, Mataafa. The dissension 
became so violent that Rear-Admiral Kautz, of the United 
States Navy, was sent to Apia with a suitable force and 
was obliged to do some fighting with the natives of 
Mataafa's faction. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

GEOGRAPHY. 



1. From 7iihai is the ienn geography derived 1 

From the two Greek words ge (earth) and grapho 
(I describe). 

2. How niany kinds of geograp/iy are there ? 
Three: mathematical, physical and political. 

3. Define mathematical geography. 

It treats of the form, magnitude and motions of the 
earth, and of the various imaginary lines on the surface. 

4. Give a definition of physical geography. 

It is a study and explanation of the solid and fluid parts 
of the earth's surface, the atmosphere, and all animal and 
vegetable life. 

5 . What is political geography ? 

A treatise on the various countries on the earth's sur- 
face, the people inhabiting them, their governments, etc. 

6. What is the shape of the earth t 

A sphere flattened at the two ends of one of its dia- 
meters, called the poles. 

7. How may its rotundity he proved "i 

By journeying around it. 

129 



130 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Approaching vessels, moreover, show their masts first, 
while their larger parts, the hulls, are still outside the line 
of vision. 

The shape of the earth's shadow, as cast on the moon 
during an eclipse, is always round; and, finally, measure- 
ments made by astronomers, bear like witness. 

8. What is supposed to have flattened the earth at the 
poles ? 

Its revolution while in a plastic condition. 

9. JIo7a much greater is the diameter at the equator than 
the diameter at the poles ? 

About twenty-six miles, the diameter at the equator 
being 7,925 miles. 

10. What is the area of the earth's surface ? 
About 196,900,278 square miles. 

1 1. What is the earth's bulk ? 
About 260,000,000,000 cubic miles. 

12. What is its weight ? 

About 5,852,000,000,000,000 tons. 

13. What is its specific gravity 1 
5 I times heavier than water. 

14. What is the horizoiil 

That line where the sky appears to meet the earth. 

1 5. What is the axis of the earth ? What are its poles 1 
The diameter on which it performs its daily revolutions; 

the poles are the points where this axis meets the surface. 

16. How many revolutions has the earth 1 Define each. 

Two: diurnal and annual. Its diurnal revolution is its 
motion on its axis from west to east; its annual is its 
rotation around the sun. 



GEOGRAPHY. 131 

17. Give proof s of the earth's roiatmi. 

The motion of falling bodies is one of the most con- 
vincing proofs, while the fact that the sun and distant 
planets appear to revolve around the earth once in twenty- 
four hours is a reasonable proof of the earth's rotation. 

1 8. Explain how faZ/i/ig bodies prove if. 

If the earth had no rotary motion, a ball dropped from 
a high tower would strike the base at a point exactly ver- 
tical from the place of starting; but, as the earth has this 
motion, the top of the tower must move faster than the 
bottom, and the ball will strike outside of the line of the 
base, the difference being about proportional with the 
difference between the velocity of the top and that of the 
base. 

19. IIoiv do we know that the earth rotates frotn 7ciest to 
east i 

Because the sun appears to rise in the east, and also 
because a falling ball will strike outside of the base on the 
' east side of a tower and on the inside of the base on the 
west side. 

20. What is the exaet time of its ivtatioti ? 
Just 23 hours, 56 minutes, and 4.09 seconds. 

2 I. What is the velocity of this rotation t 

On the equator it is about 1.042 miles per hour. 

22. Where is the velocity least "i 

The velocity diminishes from the equator to the poles, 
where it becomes nothing. 

23. What causes day and night 1 

The revolution of the earth on its axis. 

24. What is called the circle of illumination? 

The great circle which separates the dark side of the 



132 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

earth from the light side, or the dividing line between 
night and day. 

25. On ivhat does the relative length 0/ the day and night 
depend? 

On the position of the earth toward the sun in its annual 
revolution. The sun, apparently moving north in the 
summer, produces in the northern hemisphere an increased 
circle of illumination and hence increased length of day- 
light, while in winter the same movement occurs in the 
southern hemisphere, decreasing, producing an increase of 
the length of daylight there. 

26. What causes the seasons? 

The revolution of the earth around the sun. 

27. What is the earth's orbit ? Its estimated letigth ? 

The course it takes in its annual motion; the estimated 
length of the orbit is about 600,000,000 miles. 

28. What is the earth's motion around the sun called? 
Its annual revolution. 

29. What is the exact time of a complete revolution? 
Just 365 days, 6 hours, 9 minutes, 9.6 seconds. 

30. Define a siderial year. 

It is the exact time of a revolution. 

31. Define a tropical year. 

The interval between one March equinox and the next 
which is 365 days, 5 hours, 48 minutes, 49.7 seconds. 

32. Which 7'alue is taken for the civil year? 
The tropical year, or 365 | days, nearly. 

33. Hoio great is the earth's annual motion? 
About 68,000 miles an hour. 



GEOGRAPHY. 133 

34. What position does the earth occupy in the universe? 
The earth is one of a group of non-luminous bodies which 

revolve around the sun, accompany it through space, and 
reflect its light. 

35. What bodies compose the solar system ? 

The sun, eight large bodies called planets, and, as far as 
is now known, about one hundred and seventy-five smaller 
bodies called planetoids or asteroids, besides many comets 
and meteors. Some of the planets have bodies called 
moons or satellites moving around them. 

36. What position does the earth occupy in this system ? 

It belongs to the group nearest the sun, and is third 
from the sun in position. 

37. What is the distance of the earth from the sun ? 
About 92,000,000 miles. 

38. Has the sun any other motion than its movement 
through space? 

The sun, all the primary planets, and their satellites, 
rotate from west to east. 

39. To what theory has the uniformity of direction of the 
movetnents of the plaiiets and sun given rise! 

To a theory by La Place called the nebular hypothesis, 
which assumes that originally all material of which the 
solar system is composed was scattered throughout space 
in the form of very tenuous matter called nebula. It being 
granted that this matter began to accumulate around a 
centre, and that rotary motion was acquired, it can be 
shown on mechanical principles that such a system as our 
own might be evolved. 

40. What governs the velocity of the different planets ? 

As the circumference of the orbits of the planets in- 
creases with their distance from the sun, their velocity at 



134 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

the same time diminishes, and the time of revolution, or 
length of year, increases correspondingly. 

41. What causes the contiiiual revolution of the earth and 
other planets t 

On the supposition that the earth was given "x projectile 
force when separated from the nebulous sun, it would, if 
left to itself, have continued to move in one direction; but 
the attraction of the sun retained it in its orbit, its motion 
on its axis remaining unchanged. 

42. What gives the earth's orbit its elliptical shapel 

The unequal attraction of the neighboring planets and 
of the sun. In the course of its revolution its positions 
are such that at certain points it is drawn away from the 
sun, and this produces an orbit longer one way than 
another. 

43. Why is it cold in winter and 7varm in summer? 
Because of changes in the direction of the sun's rays. 

It is on the same principle that morning and evening are 
cooler than midday. 

44. What are zones? How many are there? What is the 
width and situation of each? 

Belts or divisions of the earth, bounded by the tropic 
and polar circles. There are five of them — two frigid, 
two temperate, and one torrid. The north frigid lies 
between the North Pole and the Arctic Circle, and is 23^° 
in width; the north temperate lies between the Arctic 
Circle and the Tropic of Cancer, and is 43° in width; the 
torrid lies between the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic 
of Capricorn, and extends 23^° both north and south of 
the equator; the south temperate is of the same size as the 
north temperate, and lies between the Tropic of Capricorn 
and the Antarctic Circle; the south frigid is all of the 
earth's surface within the Antarctic Circle. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



'35 



45. What is the ecliptic "i 



A great circle whose plane coincides with that of the 
earth's orbit. 

46. Why is the ecliptic so called ? 

Because solar and minor eclipses can take place only 
when the moon is very near its plane. 

47. What is the inclination 0/ the earth'' s axis to the plane 
0/ its orbit? 

It is 66i°, or 23^° out of a perpendicular direction. 

48. Why are the zones given their respective loid/hs? 

During the revolution of the earth around the sun a part 
of the earth's surface comes to be directly perpendicular to 
the sun's rays. This belt, 47° wide, is enclosed by the tropics 
and termed torrid, meaning very hot. Geographers have 
decided that each temperate zone should extend to that 
line where the duration of the longest day is twenty-four 
hours; and as the inclination of the earth is 23.1°, that 
line should be 23^° from the poles, where the Polar Circles 
have been drawn. 

49. What 7voul(i be the influence on the earth's climate if 
its axis should become horizontal to the plane of its orbit 1 

What the general influence of such a change would be is 
hard to say; but during the annual revolution of the earth 
every point on the entire surface would come, at sometime, 
directly perpendicular to the sun's rays, and become tor- 
rid. When one pole would come perpendicular to the 
sun's rays, the other would necessarily be in darkness, and 
frigid. The length of the longest day at the equator 
would be twenty-four hours, and would occur every six 
months. This would give, at the equator, four zones in 
one year — two torrid and two temperate. 



136 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

50. Why 7vould the inc/ination of the earth affect the 
climated 

If the earth were perpendicular to the plane of its orbit 
there would be no change of seasons. As it becomes in- 
clined, the attitude of the earth toward the sun is continu- 
ally changed in the course of its annual revolution, and 
this change must produce a diversity of climate. It is by 
such inclination that the temperate zones acquire four sea- 
sons. 

51. Supposing the earth'' s ificlhiation to l>e jo° or any other 
given figure^ how can we ascertaiji the width of the several 
zones i 

The inclination of the earth will vary the line where the 
length of the longest day is twenty-four hours, 1° for every 
degree of inclination. As it is now 231°, the line must be 
231° from the poles, or the boundary of the frigid zones. 
If the inclination should be 30°, the frigid zones would ex- 
tend 30°, and 30° each side of the equator would become per- 
pendicular to the sun's rays, making the torrid 60°, the tem- 
perate 30° and the frigid 30°; and so on of any other de- 
gree of inclination. The frigid zone would be in width 
the number of degrees of the inclination of the earth; the 
torrid would be the same each side of the equator, and the 
temperate what lay between. 

52. At 7vhat season is the earth ?iearest the sun? 
About January i. 

53. Explain why it is nearer at one time than at another. 

As the orbit is an ellipse, the narrower parts must bring 
it, in its revolution around the sun, nearer the sun than the 
wider parts. 

54. When is the earth at its perihelion? 
When it is nearest the sun. 



GEOGRAPHY. 1 37 

55. When at its aphelion 1 
When it is farthest from the sun. 

56. What are the equinoxes 1 JTozo many and what are 
they calledl 

They are the times of the year when the sun's vertical 
rays fall on the equator. There are two, the vernal and 
the autumnal. 

57. On 7vhat days of the year do they occur .? 

The vernal equinox takes place on the 20th of March 
and the autumnal on the 2 2d of September. 

58. What are the equinoctial points ? 

Where the ecliptic intersects the equator at two points 
diametrically opposite to each other. 

59. What are the solstices 1 

They are the times when the vertical rays of the sun reach 
their farthest northern or southern limit and fall on one or 
the other of the tropics. 

60. Hoiv many are there, and what are they called 1 
Two, the summer and winter solstice. 

6x. On 7vhat days of the year do they occur 1 
The summer solstice on the 21st of June, and the winter 
solstice on the 21st of December. 

62. What are the solstitial points ? 

The points midway between the equinoxes. 

63. What is a compass? 

A magnetic needle playing upon a pivot and always 
pointing nearly due north and south. 

64. What are known as the cardinal points? 

The cardinal points are north, south, east and west. 



138 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

65. What are the semi-cardinal points? 
Northeast, northwest, southeast, southwest, 

66. How inafiy circles divide the earth ? 

Several great and small circles. The meridian circles 
and the equator are great circles; the tropic and polar cir- 
cles, and the parallels of latitude, are small circles. There 
are also circles of position or measurement, and climatic 
circles. 

67. Deji?ie great ajid small circles. 

All circles which divide the surface of the sphere into 
two equal parts are great circles; all others are small cir- 
cles. 

68. Define circles of position or measurement. 

They are the circles used to determine the geographical 
positions of places. 

69. Define climatic circles. 

Circles used to mark important climatic boundaries and 
are termed climatic circles or parallels. 

70. Natne the circles of position. 

The equator, meridian circles and parallels of latitude. 

71. Natne the climatic circles. 

The tropics and polar circles, and the ecliptic. 

72. Define a quadrant. 

It is one quarter of a circle, or 90°. 

73. How is every circle divided? 
Into 360 equal parts, called degrees. 

74. What is a map? 

A drawing representing the whole or a part of the earth's 
surface. 



GEOGRAPHY. 139 

75. What are the lines, or circles, on a tnapl 

The equator, meridian circles, parallels, tropic and polar 
circles. 

76. What is the equator? 

A great circle equally distant from the poles. 

77. Through ivhat countries does the equator pass! 

It crosses Brazil, Colombia, Ecuador, Borneo and Su- 
matra in the East Indies, British East Africa, the Kongo 
Free State and French Kongo. 

78. What is a meridian circle? What is a meridian? 

A meridian circle is any great circle passing through the 
poles. A meridian is half a meridian circle. 

79. What is longitude? 

The distance either east or west from any given merid- 
ian. 

80. On what is longitude measured? 
On the parallels and the equator. 

81. From what meridians do we reckon longitude? 

The one which passes through Washington, D.C, and 
the one near Greenwich, in England. 

82. Bojc many degrees west of Greenwich is Washington? 
About 77°. 

83. What is the greatest longitude a place can have? 
180° either east or west. 

84. Can a place have no longitude? 

If situated on the meridian from which we reckon, it can 
have no longitude. 

85. Reckoning from the meridian at Washington, tvhat is 
the latitude and longitude of Quito? 

It has no latitude, and but 1° of longitude, west. 



I40 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION ROOK. 

86. What is the length of a degree of longitudel 

Sixty geographical miles at the equator, but it grows 
gradually less as it approaches the poles; at latitude 30° it 
is about fifty-two geographical miles; at latitude 60° it is 
thirty, and at the poles it is nothing. 

87. Why does the length of a degree of longitude decrease 
after leaving the equatorl 

All meridian lines meet at the poles; and as a degree of 
longitude is enclosed between meridian lines, the length 
must decrease as the lines approach the poles. 

88. What is a prime meridian ? 

The meridian from which longitude is reckoned. 

89. Where is a prime meridian usually located l 

Each nation usually takes the meridian of its own capi- 
tal. 

90. Through what States docs the meridian of Washington 
pass 1 

New York, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia and North 
Carolina. 

9 1 . What countries in Asia are crossed by the sa7ne meridian 
circle 1 

Siberia, the Chinese Empire and British India. 

92. Explain how we reckon the difference in time between 
two places tvhcn the difference of longitude between them is 
given, <?/- vice versa? 

As there are 360° of longitude it follows that in the 
earth's rotation one hour of time must pass through ^^ 
of 360°, or 15°. This reduced makes 1° in four minutes. 
Then knowing the difference in longitude the time is 
easily found, or, if the difference of time is known, a re- 
versed process must give the difference in longitude. 



GEOGRAPHY. 141 

93. What large city in Asia is nearly opposite Philadelphia ? 
Pekin. 

94. What is latitude 1 

The distance north or south of the equator, according to 
its direction, is north or south latitude. 

95. On what is latitude ineasured i 
Upon the meridians. 

96. What is the highest degree of latitude ? 
90°, which is at the poles. 

97. What is the length of a degree of latitude 1 
Sixty geographical, or 6gi statute miles. 

98. What is the basis of a geographical mile 1 
One minute of longitude at the equator. 

99. Through 7vhat countries and bodies of 7vater does the 
Tropic of Cancer pass ? 

Bahama Islands, Gulf of Mexico, Mexico, Pacific Ocean, 
Hawaiian Islands, near Canton China, British India, Ara- 
bian Sea, Arabia, Egypt, and Atlantic Ocean. 

1 00. The Tropic of Capricorn ? 

Brazil, Paraguay, Argentine Republic, Chili, Pacific 
Ocean, Australia, Madagascar, South African Republic, 
British South Africa, Uamara Land, and Atlantic Ocean. 

I o I . The Arctic Circle ? 

Greenland, Northwest Territories, of Canada, Alaska, 
Siberia, Russia, Sweden, Norway and Atlantic Ocean. 

102. The Antarctic Circle? 

Land has been discovered in this region, but no efifort 
has been made to chart and name it. 

103. Why is it colder at the Antarctic Circle than at the 
Arctic? 

In the northern hemisphere there are vast tracts of land 



142 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

to receive the rays of heat and warm the atmosphere; but 
towards the south pole the rays of heat seem to be lost on 
the great bodies of water, and the air is not warmed. 

104. What part of North America is in the satne latitude 
as Englafid aiui Jrelafidl 

The southern part of Canada. 

105. Ho7V does the climate of Labrador differ materially 
from that of England 1 

The winds from the north, and the Arctic current which 
flows near the coast of Labrador, cause the climate to be 
too cold for agriculture. In the same latitude in England 
snow is seldom seen, owing to the nearness of the warm 
waters of the Gulf Stream, a branch of which flows into the 
Irish Sea, while the northeast current flows by the coast of 
Norway. The Gulf Stream renders the climate of West- 
ern Europe mild and moist. 

106. Why are the winters more mild at Puget Sound than 
in the region of Lake Superior? 

The Japan current, which passes our Pacific coast there, 
brings the warm waters of the torrid zone. 

107. Describe the Gulf Stream. 

It issues from the Gulf of Mexico, spreads out a breadth 
of 150 miles, and sweeps along the shore of North America 
to Newfoundland. Here it meets the Arctic current and 
divides into two branches, one of which takes a southeast- 
erly course towards the coast of Africa, while the other 
flows in a northeasterly direction towards the British Isles 
and Norway. 

108. Where and what is the principal Sargasso Sea ? 

It is a mass of floating seaweed, situated in the middle 
of the Atlantic Ocean, and occupying the eddy or whirl 
caused by the several ocean currents which surround it. 
There are smaller ones in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



143 



109. What is the meaning o/s^t.rgz.sso'i 
It is a Spanish name, meaning grassy. 

1 10. What are the natural divisions 0/ land? 

Continents, islands, peninsulas, isthmuses, capes, pro- 
montories, mountains, hills, plains and valleys. 

111. What are the natural diinsions ofivatert 
Oceans, seas, gulfs or bays, straits, lakes and rivers. 

112. IJo7v are straits divided? 

Into straits proper, passages, sounds and channels. 

113. What is the size of the Eastern Continent compared 
with the Western? 

It is little more than twice as large. The Western 
Continent contains about 15,000,000 square miles. 

114. What is the area of the entire surface of the globe? 
About 200,000,000 square miles. 

115. Which of the gratid divisions is the largest, which the 
smallest, 7cihich the most populous, and which the most fertile? 

Asia is the largest, Europe the smallest and most popu- 
lous, and South America the most fertile. 

1 16. What are the political divisions of North America ? 
The United States, Canada, Danish America, Mexico, 

Central America, and the West Indies. 

117. Of what races does the population of the United States 
consist ? 

Caucasians, Negroes, Indians and Chinese. 

118. What is the number of the population of the United 
States? 

Nearly 70,000,000. 

119. What are the leading fortns of industry of the people? 
Agriculture, manufacturing, mining and commerce. 



144 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

1 20. What are exports and imports i 

Exports are those commodities shipped out of the country, 
and imports those which come in. 

121. What are the leading exports and imports 1 

The leading exports are cotton, breadstuffs, provisions, 
petroleum, tobacco, and many varieties of manufactured 
goods. The chief imports are dry goods, sugar, coffee, 
tea, hides, iron, tin and cutlery. 

122. With what countries does the United States have the 
greatest commerce? 

England, Germany, France, Canada, West Indies, Brazil, 
China, and Japan, 

123. What country contains the greatest number 0/ inhabit- 
afits in proportion to its area? 

England with about 23,000,000 souls. 

124. How does England cofnpare in area with the United 
States ? 

It is about one-sixtieth as large, or about the size of 
Wisconsin. 

125. Which is larger, Europe or the United States? 
Europe is about one-tenth larger. 

126. How does Europe compare in size and population 
to Asia? 

Asia contains four times as many square miles and two 
and a-half times as many inhabitants. 

127. What is a frith, or estuary? 

A narrow arm of the sea into which a river empties. 

128. What is an archipelago? 

A sea interspersed with many islands. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



145 



129. What is a delta 1 

When a river discharges its waters by several outlets, 
the tract of land embraced by these outlets is called a delta. 

1 30. Why is this tract of land called a delta ? 

From its resemblance to the fourth letter of the Greek 
alphabet, which is delta, shaped like a triangle. 

131. What is a road, or roadstead 1 

A marine space some distance from the shore where ves- 
sels can anchor in safety. 

132. What is an oasis? 
A fertile spot in a desert. 

133. What is the valley or basin of a river? 

The tract of country drained by that river and its trib- 
utaries. 

134. What river of the world has the greatest basin, and 
what is the extent of this basin ? 

The Amazon; it contains more than 2,275,000 square 
miles. 

135. What is the extent of the basin of the Mississippi? 
About 1,244,000 square miles. 

136. What is the extent of the basin of the (a) La Plata ? 
(b) Nile? (c) Obi? (d) Yenisei? (e) Yang-tse-Kia/ig ? 
{{) Niger? (g) Volga? (h) Ganges? (i) Mackenzie? (j) St. 
Lawrence? (k) Saskatchawan? (1) Orinoco? (m) Columbia? 

(a) 1,242,000; (/;) 1,425,000; (c) 1,250,000; (d) 1,040,- 
000; (^) 950,000 ; (y) 800,000 ; (,^) 600,000 ; (//) 416,000; 
(/) 590,000; (» 480,000- (h) 478,000; (/) 340,000; 
(m) 298,000. 

137. Lfo7e> wide is the mouth of the Amazon? 
One hundred and eighty miles. 



146 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

138. Into how many classes is m auk md divided as regards 
social condition 1 

Into four: the enlightened, the civilized, the half- 
civilized, and the savage. 

139. Which nations are enlightened, which civilized, and 
which half-civilized? 

Nearly all the people of Europe, of the United States 
and Canada, and of their respective colonies, are en- 
lightened. The civilized people are nearly all those of 
South America, Mexico, China and Japan. The half- 
civilized people would embrace a large part of the people 
of Hindoostan, Indo-China, Turkey and Egypt. 

140. Who are batbanans, and who savages? 

Many of the tribes of Central Asia, the Barbary States, 
and the wandering tribes of Arabs are barbarians, a little 
raised above the savages, who are typified by the Indians 
of America, many of the negro tribes of Africa, and the 
Papuans of Oceanica. 

141. What class 0/ men ate called nomads, and 7vhy? 

The Arabs are called nomads because of their wander- 
ing nature, living in movable camps with no fixed loca- 
tion. 

142. What are the principal forms of government ? 
Republican and monarchical. 

143. What is a republic, and 7V hat a monarchy? 

A country governed by men who are chosen by the 
people is called a republic. A monarchy is a government 
in which the chief power passes by inheritance, and the 
ruler holds his authority for life. 

1 44. Name the principal republics of the world. 

The United States, France, Switzerland, Mexico, Brazil, 
Venezuela, Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Chili, 



GEOGRAPHY. 147 

Argentina, Uruguay, Paraguay, (Guatemala, Honduras, 
San Salvador, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Hayti, San Domingo, 
the Transvaal, Orange Free State, Liberia, Andorra, San 
Marino, Montenegro, and Cuba. 

145. ]]^hat is ail unlitni/ed,aiid lo/iat a limifeti moiiarc/iy ? 

The will of the sovereign is the supreme law of an un- 
limited monarchy. A limited monarchy is one in which 
the will of the monarch is limited by a constitution. 

146. IV/iat kind of a mo>ian/iy is i/uit of (a) Russia 1 (b) 
Eiiglandl (c) Gennaiiy i (d) Tui^k^^i (e) Spaiul (f) Chi?ia? 

(a) Unlimited; {/>) limited; (<^) limited ; (<-/) unlimited; 
(^) limited ; (/) unlimited. 

147. IV/iat is a constitutioti] 
The fundamental or organic law. 

148. What is the sovereign of a/i efnpire called? 

An emperor, sultan, shah, czar, khedive, or mikado. 

149. What are the political divisions of the earth ? 
Empires, kingdoms, republics, states, counties, town- 
ships, and cities. 

150. Defne each of these. 

An empire is a country governed by an emperor ; a 
kingdom, one governed by a king ; a republic, one gov- 
erned by representatives chosen by the people ; a state, a 
division of a republic or kingdom having laws of its own 
harmonizing with those of the general government ; a 
county, a division of a state or kingdom ; a city, a 
municipal or local organization for governmental pur- 
poses. 

151. What is the capital of a country t What is the me- 
tropolis ? 

The capital is the seat of government. The metropolis 
is the largest city. 



148 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

152. Hoiu nia?iy distinct races of ffien are there ? 
Five: Caucasian, Mongolian, American or Indian, 
African, and Malay. 

I 53. What is the estimated nmnbet of inhabitants of the 
earth ? JJoim divided / 

The estimated number is, in round numbers, 1,400,- 
000,000. The Caucasian and Mongol races number more 
than four-fifths, the Ethiopian about one-seventh, the 
Malay about one twenty-fifth, the Indian about one one- 
hundredth. 

154. How jnany importa?it systems of re]igio?i prevaill 
Seven : Christianity, Buddhism, Brahminism, Con- 
fucianism, Shintoism, Mohammedanism, and Judaism. 

155. What is the estintated popular streiigth of each system? 
The Christians about 400,000,000 ; the Buddhists, from 

300,000,000 to 500,000,000; the Brahmins, 150,000,000; 
the Confucians, from 60,000,000 to 100,000,000; Shinto 
has from 12,000,000 to 20,000,000 followers; Moham- 
medanism, perhaps 200,000,000 ; Judaism, 7,000,000. 

156. Into ho70 many great classes are Christians divided t 
Three: Roman Catholics, Greek Catholics and Pro- 
testants. 

157. What is the Alohaintnedan religion? 

The Mohammedans are followers of the prophet 
Mohammed, who lived in Arabia about six hundred years 
after Christ. They believe in one God; they consider 
Moses and Christ as true prophets, but Mohammed as the 
greatest and last. The Koran is the Mohammedan holy 
scripture. 

158. What are the principal points of faith of{?C) the Bud- 
dhists, (b) the Brahmins, (c) the Confucians, and (d) the 
followers of Shinto ? 

(a) The Buddhist religion was originated by Buddha in 



GEOGRAPHY. 



149 



the sixth century, B.C., and was characterized by admir- 
able humanity and morality, with the idea that death was 
but a transitional stage of existence. Later the religion 
became mixed with an idolatrous worship of its founder 
and other supposed kindred beings. 

(/') The Brahmins believe that Brahma was the creator 
of the world and that he was the first deity of a Hindoo 
triad. Their idols represent this union of three deities, 
and their worship is idolatrous. 

(c) Confucianism is the system of morality taught by 
Confucius and his disciples, and forms the basis of Chinese 
jurisprudence and education. It can hardly be called a 
religion, as it does not inculcate the worship of any 
deity. 

{d^ The Shinto religion has been the chief religion of 
Japan, and includes the worship of ancestors and sacrifice 
to departed heroes. 

159. What is the principal difference between the Christian 
and Jewish religions 1 

The Jews reject Jesus as a Saviour, and expect a Mes- 
siah yet to come. The Talmud is their bible. 

160. Who are tcrtned pagans J 

Idolaters and nature-worshippers. They comprise the 
greater part of the inhabitants of Asia and Africa, nearly 
all those of the islands of the Pacific, and the Indians of 
America. 

161. What are the longest four rivers in the world I 

The Mississippi with its chief tributary, the Missouri, 
has a length of 4,200 miles; the Nile is 4,000 miles long; 
the Amazon, 3,750 ; the Yenisei, 3,400. 

162. Navte and give the letigih of the longest four rivers of 
North America. 

The Mississippi proper, 2,800 miles long; the Missouri, 



150 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

2,900 ; the Mackenzie, 2,300 ; the Arkansas, 2,000 ; and 
the Saskatchawan, 1,900. 

163. What would be the length of the St. Lawrence through 
the chain of lakes to the head of the St. Louis River? 

About 2,000 miles. 

164. Give names atid lengths of the longest four rivers of 
South America. 

The Amazon, 3,750 miles long; the La Plata, 2,300; the 
Orinoco, 1,550; the San Francisco, 1,550. 

165. Those of Europe. 

The Volga, 2,000 miles long; the Danube, 1,600; the 
Don, 1,000; and the Dnieper, 1,000. 

1 66. Of Asia. 

The Yenisei, 3,400 miles long ; the Yang-tse-Kiang, 
3,320; the Obi, 3,oQo ; the Lena, 2,700. 

167. Of Africa. 

The Nile, 4,000 miles long ; the Niger, 3,000 ; the 
Zambesi, 1,800; the Senegal, 1,200. 

168. What is noticeable of the Amazon River? 

The Amazon is a broad, deep river, and navigable for 
large vessels about 2,400 miles, and for steamboats to the 
foot of the Andes. The tide flows up 600 miles. The 
waters teem with alligators, and the banks are lined with 
almost impenetrable forests, filled with huge serpents and 
ferocious beasts of prey, troops of monkeys, swarms of 
insects, and flocks of gaudily-colored birds. 

169. Of the Mississippi? 

The Mississippi rises in Lake Itasca, and is navigable 
to the Falls of St. Anthony, which are very heavy rapids. 
The upper part of the river, in many places, has high and 
rugged banks, while in the lower part levees are built along 
the shores to prevent inundations. Its mouth is not 



GEOGRAPHY 



15* 



favorable for the navigation of large vessels. Instead of 
being broad and clear it has many outlets, and sand-bars 
are continually forming. 

170. Of the Missouri^ 

This river is very rapid. It is much larger than the 
Mississippi in its upper part, and is navigable to the Great 
Falls above Fort Benton, Montana, where there are some 
grand cataracts. 

171. Of the Nile? 

The source of the Nile was not definitely known until 
recently, but through the explorations of Livingstone and 
Stanley it has been pretty well ascertained. At Khartoum, 
in the Soudan, the river divides, and these divisions are 
called respectively the Blue Nile and the White Nile. The 
Blue Nile rises in Abyssinia, and the White Nile, the real 
source of the river, in Lake Victoria Nyanza. The over- 
flow of the Lower Nile from June to December is caused 
by the tropical rains in Abyssinia and those of the interior. 
The river gradually rises for three months and as slowly 
subsides, leaving a narrow stream for the remainder of the 
year. By this overflow the valley lands for an extent of 
from ten to twenty miles from the river bank become 
among the most fertile in the world. Above its mouth for 
nearly 1,500 miles no rivers or creeks flow into it. 

172. Describe the Rio de la Plata. 

The La Plata River is a great estuary 200 miles long, 
formed by the union of the Parana and Uruguay Rivers. 
For 1,000 miles on the Parana there is continuous and safe 
navigation for vessels of three hundred tons burden. 

173. Describe Egypt. 

Egypt is nearly as large as Texas; about three-fourths 
of its area consists of sandy deserts. The settled parts are 
principally in the valley of the Nile, which is from 10 to 
20 miles wide. Egypt is noted for its ancient ruins. Its 



152 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

pyramids, temples, sphinxes, statues, and the caves hewn 
in the rocks, are traces of its former civilization. 

174. By what two great commercial routes can we travel 
around the world, starting from New York ? 

We can cross the Atlantic; enter the Mediterranean 
Sea; pass through the Suez Canal; sail down the Red Sea 
into the Indian Ocean; skirt the southern points of Asia 
to Canton; thence cross the Pacific to San Francisco; and 
thence cross the continent by rail to New York. 

Or, we can sail southwest until nearly opposite Rio 
Janeiro; cross the Atlantic; round the Cape of Good 
Hope; sail through the Indian Ocean to the East Indies, 
and thence up the China Sea to Canton; cross the Pacific 
to San Francisco; sail thence to Panama and cross the 
Isthmus by rail; and sail thence north through the West 
Indies, to New York. 

175. What country has the most and the longest lines of 
railroad ? 

The United States. 

176. Betaveen ivhat parallels does the United States lie, 
and how far are these parallels apart! 

Between the 26th and 49th. The distance from the 
southern point of Texas to the British possessions is about 
1,600 miles. 

177. What is the longitude of San Francisco, and about 
how far is it from New York City? 

It is about 45° west from Washington, and about 3,000 
miles from New York. 

178. What State is the geographical centre of the United 
States? 

Kansas, if we do not include Hawaii in the United 
States. It is also the centre of population. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



153 



179. Which country produces the most cottofi? Which the 
most sugar? Which the most coffeet Which the most rice't 
Which the most teat 

Of cotton the United States produces most; of sugar, 
the West Indies; of coffee, Brazil; of rice and tea, China. 

180. What countries produce largely of the same products? 
Of cotton, the United States, South America and Egypt; 

of sugar, the United States and South America; of coffee, 
Java, the West Indies and the United States; of rice, the 
United States and Egypt. 

181. JFhat country produces the most spices? 

The Spice Islands are celebrated for the production of 
cloves, nutmegs, and other spices. Java produces more 
pepper than all other countries combined. 

182. What are cloves, and how do they groiv ? 

The unexpanded clove flowers, dried. The clove tree 
grows to the height of from twenty to thirty feet. 

183. What are tiut?negs? 

The fruit of the nutmeg tree. This tree is about the 
size of the common pear. 

184. What is a mountai/i system ? 

Several ranges near each other and connected. 

185. Name the mountain systems 0/ America. 

The Rocky, Californian, Alleghanian, Andean, Parime 
and Brazilian. 

186. What is the length of the longest day at the equator, 
at the Tropic of Cancer, on the Arctic Cii'cle, and at the North 
Pole? 

At the equator the length of the days is always twelve 
hours; at the tropics the longest day is about thirteen and 
one-half hours; on the Polar Circles twenty-four hours; at 
the Poles six months. 



154 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

187. Why docs so little raifi fall in South America west 
of the Andes? 

Rains from the Pacific are of rare occurrence, and the 
height of the Andes shuts off the rain-clouds from the east. 

188. Which large city in Eutope is noted for {z.) the manu- 
facture of cotton cloth? (b) Which for silks? (c) For 

linen? {d) For cutlery ? {e.) For laces ? 

{a) Manchester; {b) Lyons; (r) Belfast; {d) Sheffield; 
{e) Brussels. 

189. What are the leading pursuits of the people of the 
New England States ? 

Agriculture, manufacturing, lumbering and commerce. 

190. What are the products of the New England States? 
Grains, butter, cheese, wool, maple sugar, and live stock. 

191. Where are manufactures carried on to the greatest 
extent in these States? Name some of the most famous cities 
for the manufacture of cotton ? 

The chief manufacturing centres are on the Merrimac 
and Pawtucket Rivers. Lowell, Lawrence, Fall River, 
Pawtucket and Woonsocket are noted for their cotton 
manufactures. 

192. What is remarkable about the Merrimac Fiver? 

It is said to be more extensively used for manufacturing 
purposes than any other river in the world. 

193. What is said of the climate, soil, agricultural products, 
and commerce of New England? 

The winters are long and severe, and the summers short 
but hot. The soil is generally stony and not very fertile, 
except in the valleys. The agricultural products are not 
sufficient to supply the wants of the population. The 
many excellent harbors, the comparative nearness to 
Europe, and the abundance of ship timber have contrib- 
uted to establish an extensive foreign commerce. 



GEOGRAPHY. 155 

194. How do the Ne7v England States compare in size 
with California! 

They are about two-fifths of California's size. 

195. What noted colleges are located at Cambridge and Neiu 
Ha7'en ] 

Harvard at Cambridge and Yale at New Haven. 

196. What important industries are carried on at Lynn, 
New Bedford, Springfield, Worcester and Portland? 

Lynn is famous for its manufacture of boots and shoes, 
New Bedford for its whale fisheries and manufactories, 
Springfield for the greatest arsenal in the United States, 
Worcester as a railroad and manufacturing centre, Port- 
land for the terminus of the Grand Trunk Railway of 
Canada. 

197. Where is Mouftt Washington, and what is its height 1 
It is the highest peak of the White Mountains in New 

Hampshire, and is 6,288 feet high. 

198. Where is marble obtained! 

Chiefly from extensive quarries in Vermont and Italy. 
It is found also in Maine, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, 
Tennessee and Georgia. 

199. What is granite, and where is it found I 

It is a very hard rock, much used for millstones and solid 
architecture. It is found in the Eastern States. 

200. What State is called (a) the "■Granite State''? (b) 
the ''Pine-tree State"? (c) the " Green Mountain State'' ? (d) 
the ''Bay State" ? 

(a) New Hampshire; (/') Maine; (c) Vermont; (d) Mas- 
sachusetts. 

201. Bor 70 hat are Lexington and Concord famous? 

For the opening engagements of the war of the Revolu- 
tion, April 19, 1775. 



156 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

202. Ho7V many square miles in the area of Rhode Island., 
and how mafiy States of the satne size could be formed out of 
the State of Texas 1 

Rhode Island contains 1,300 square miles. Texas would 
make 183 Rhode Islands. 

203. Ho7V does Maine compare in size ivith the other fve 
New England States ? 

It is nearly as large. 

204. What is particularly noticeable about the northern 
boundary of Connecticut 1 

The boundary line, otherwise straight, swerves in order 
to take one township and part of another from the State of 
Connecticut and give them to Massachusetts. 

205. What is the size of California] 
About 189,000 square miles. 

206. What is the surface of this State 1 

A large i^ortion of it is traversed by mountain ranges. A 
great agricultural valley lies between the Sierra Nevada 
and the Coast Range, and extends 500 miles. 

207. What is the name of this valley, and from what did 
it derive its name I 

It is called the Sacramento and San Joaquin Valley, and 
derives its name from the Sacramento River, which rises 
in the northern part of the State, and the San Joaquin, 
which rises in the southern part. These rivers flow to 
ward each other and empty into a branch of San Fran- 
cisco Bay. 

208. What is the Golden Gate? 

A narrow strait about four miles long, which is the en- 
trance from the Pacifrc Ocean to San Francisco Bay. 

209. What is the climate of the Pacific coast? 

It is mild and equable in temperature, but has great ex- 



GEOGRAPHY. 



^57 



tremes of moisture. The seasons are termed the wet and 
the dry. About Puget Sound there is a greater rain-fall 
than in any other part of the United States, except Alaska. 

210. What natural curiosities do wejiiid in Calif oniial 

The Big Trees and the Yosemite Valley are two of the 
chief wonders of nature. The Big Trees are gigantic ever- 
greens, some more than one hundred feet in circumfer- 
ence, 400 feet high, and 3,000 years old. The Yosemite 
Valley is a remarkable chasm ten miles long and three 
wide, with perpendicular walls of granite from 3,000 to 
5,000 feet high, over which the Merced River, in three 
leaps, falls more than 2,000 feet. 

211. What are the products of this section 1 

Wheat, wool, lumber, salmon, gold, wine, and a great 
variety of fruits. 

212. What can be said of the fisheries of the Columbia 
River 1 

They are an immense industry. 

213. What can be said of the valley of Puget Sound, and 
its climate ? 

The Puget Sound country is very fertile and its climate 
mild, which is due to the warm ocean current flowing by 
its shores. The same latitude on the Atlantic is almost 
a cold, barren waste. 

2 1 4. Describe Alaska. 

It has an area of 577,000 square miles, or more than ten 
times that of Illinois. The climate is cold, and with the 
exception of the southern extremity it seems unfit for civil- 
ization. In the northern, part the coast is low and marshy, 
while in the south it is mountainous. The Yukon and 
Pelly Rivers are remarkable for their breadth and 
length. 



158 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

215. What is its for7n of goverJiment^ 

It is a Territory, but has no legislature and no represen- 
tation in Congress. 

216. Is tJiis possession r'aluahlc to the United States 1 

Its value is already considerable, and may become very 
great, as the salijion fisheries are inexhaustible and mining 
is attracting much attention. The seal fisheries yield an 
annual revenue to the government, which has varied some- 
what in recent years. Late discoveries of gold have added 
to its value. 

217. How arc the seal fisheries conducted! 

A contract or license is granted to a company, who are 
allowed to kill so many seals each year and pay the gov- 
ernment for this exclusive privilege. 

218. Which is the principal sett/ement, and what is its 
climatic peculiarity! 

Sitka. The rain-fall at this point is about seven and a 
half feet a year. 

219. When 7s.'as gold discovered in California ? 
It was first announced in February, 1848. 

220. What is the clifnate of California? 

There are two seasons, the wet and the dry. In the lati- 
tude of San Francisco the wet season lasts from the middle 
of November to the middle of May. 

221. What is the difference in latitude between San Fran- 
cisco and Richmond! 

Richmond is about twenty-five miles south of the lati- 
tude of San P'rancisco. 

222. IIo7ii far north of Richmond is New York City! 
About 230 miles. 



GEOQRArHY. 159 

223. What part of South America is in the same latitude 
south of the equator, that the middle of the United States is 
north of it? 

The northern part of Patagonia. 

224. Hoza does Brazil compare in size with the United 
States {not i?icludifig Alaska or the Hawaiian Islands) ? 

It is a little larger than the United States, containing 
about 3,230,000 square miles. 

225. What city of the West Indies is in the same latitude 
north of the equator that Rio faneiro is south of ill 

Havana. 

226. Describe South America. 

It is a vast peninsula, occupying the southern half of the 
Western Continent. Its length from north to south is 
about 4,000 miles, and its greatest breadth is about 3,000. 
Three great mountain systems diversify the surface, viz., 
the Andean, which stretches along the western coast; the 
Parime, which consists of several parallel ranges extending 
from east to west between the Orinoco and the Amazon 
Rivers; and the Brazilian system, which consists of two 
ranges running parallel to the coast of Brazil, with several 
diverging chains. Between these mountain systems ex- 
tends a vast plain, which may be divided into four parts 
— the llanos, the selvas, the pampas, and the wastes of 
Patagonia. 

227. What are the llanos? 

Level grazing tracts which occupy most of the basin of 
the Orinoco. During the dry season they are parched and 
desolate, but with the return of rain rich pastures are 
abundant. 

228. What are the selvas? 

The forest plains of the Amazon, occupying the lower 
part of the basin and extending as far as the periodical in- 
undation. 



i6o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

229. What are the pampas 1 

Tracts in Argentina, covered with a heavy growth of 
grass which affords sustenance to great herds of cattle 
and horses. 

230. What are the 7oastcs of Patago/iia ? 
Sterile tracts covered with sand and gravel. 

231. What is a plateau, or tableland? 

An extensive flat tract considerably elevated above the 
level of the sea. 

232. Hoiv may the plateaus of South America he divided? 
The Great Plateau of the Andes ; the elevated plains of 

Quito, Bogota, and Popayan; and the tableland of Brazil. 

233. Describe the plateau of the Andes. 

It is an extensive tract of lofty tableland, stretching along 
the tops of the Andes between parallels 3° and 15° south 
latitude, with an elevation of nearly 13,000 feet. 

234. Describe Quito. 

It is situated under the equator, on the side of a volcanic 
mountain, 9,500 feet above the sea. The climate is that 
of continuous spring. Earthquakes are frequent. Eleven 
summits of the Andes covered with perpetual snow are in 
sight of it. 

235. What are Chimborazo and Cotopaxi? 
Volcanoes of Ecuador. Chimborazo is a peak of the 

Andes range, 21,440 feet high. Cotopaxi, 18,900 feet high, 
is the most tremendous volcano in the world. The flame 
sometimes rises 3,000 feet above the top. 

236. What is the Permnafi balsa? 

A light raft, formed of inflated skins covered with a light 
platform. It is used for unloading vessels through the 
breakers, which continually dash upon the shores and 
prevent the approach of any ordinary boat. 



GEOGRAPHY. l6i 

237. Describe the Cassiquiare River. 

It connects the Orinoco and Rio Negro Rivers, The 
tract of country through which it flows is so level that a 
rise or fall of the Orinoco governs the course of that river 
which flows during a portion of the year into the Amazon, 
and at other times in an opposite direction. 

238. Hoiv far north does South America extend? 
Twelve and a half degrees north of the equator. 

239. Noici may we divide the countries of South America? 
Into three divisions: Portuguese South America, Spanish 

South America, and the Guianas. 

240. What does Portuguese South America comprise! 
The Empire of Brazil. 

241. What do the Guianas cotnprise? 
The British, French and Dutch colonies. 

242. What does Spanish South America co?fiprise ? 

Nine independent republics, viz.: Venezuela, Colombia, 
Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia, Chili, Argentine Confederation, 
Uruguay and Paraguay. 

243. Why are these republics called the Spanish division? 
They were once colonies of Spain, and the Spanish lan- 
guage is spoken there. 

244. Describe these republics. 

Venezuela, the most northern country of South America, 
is tropical in climate, and exports coffee, cocoa and tropical 
fruits. 

Colombia occupies the northwest part, embracing the 
Isthmus of Panama, and is the most important of the five 
northern republics. 

Ecuador lies south of Colombia, and its exports are co- 
coa, coffee, India-rubber and Peruvian bark. 



i62 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Peru lies south of Ecuador, and has more miles of rail- 
road than any other country of South America. Its chief 
exports are guano and saltpetre. Silver mining is an im- 
portant industry. 

Bolivia has but little commerce; its people are not very 
energetic. Its exports are Peruvian bark, saltpetre and 
silver-ore. 

Chili occupies a narrow strip of sea-coast extending from 
Peru to Cape Horn. It is the most enterprising country 
of South America, and a large proportion of its inhabitants 
are Europeans. Its chief exports are copper-ore, silver and 
wheat. The climate is semi-tropical in the northern part 
and extends into the cold, barren regions on the south. 

Argentina, or the Argentine Confederation, stands next 
to Chili in enterprise. Its climate is semi-tropical, and its 
exports are hides, wool and flax. The country is little 
more than an extensive plain, with the finest grazing in the 
world. Large herds of cattle, horses and sheep are suc- 
cessfully handled here. Two-thirds of the hides are shipped 
to the United States. Education is rapidly advancing. 
The location of this country is in the southern hemisphere 
what that of the United States is in the northern, 

Uruguay and Paraguay formerly belonged to the Ar- 
gentine Confederation, but are now independent republics. 
Their exports and climate are similar to the Argentine Con- 
federation. Paraguay is the weakest of the nine Spanish 
republics, and is the only other country of South America, 
excepting Bolivia, having no sea-coast. 

245. Hoiu many inhabitants has South Afnerica^ and ho7V 
are they divided in fegard to race? 

South America has somewhat less than 30,000,000 in- 
habitants, of whom one-third are whites, one-third Indians, 
and the remainder Negroes and persons of mixed blood. 

246. What about local commerce and civilization ? 

As South America is largely in the torrid zone, the climate 



CEOGKAPHY. 163 

does not inspire activity, and commerce naturally drags ; 
but as civilization advances, general prosperity increases. 
The whole continent is fast feeling the influence of the en- 
lightenment of the United States and Europe. 

247. What are the natural resources a/id industries? 

There are no large gulfs or bays to indent the shores, 
and no great lakes, and hence small natural facilities for 
commerce. The opportunities for manufacturing, also, are 
far inferior to those of North America. The great central 
plain supports millions of cattle, horses and sheep. The 
industries mostly have to do with the products of tropical 
climates. Gold, silver, copper and diamonds are found 
and extensively mined. 

248. Which is the most i?nportant country for the commerce 
of the Ufiited States 1 

Brazil. 

249. What can you say of the railroads of South America! 
They are short. Chili has the best system, and Brazil 

has about 2,000 miles. 

250. What part of South America is in the satne latitude 
as Cape Colo?iyl 

Uruguay. 

251. What city in Australia is in nearly the satne latitude 
as Buenos Ayres .? 

Sydney. 

252. What large city in the United States is in nearly the 
same longitude as Quito? 

Buffalo. 

253. What part of the westerti coast of Africa is in the 
same latitude as Cape Gallinas? 

Near Cape Verde. 



164 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

254. Where is Cape Horn? 

It projects from Horn Island, which is southwest from 
Hermit Island. 

255. W/iat is Tierra del Fuego? 

The most southern part of the inhabited world, and is 
peopled by a race of savages who live chiefly by fishing. 

256. W/iem-e did it derive its fiame? 

It was discovered by Magellan, in 1520, and named by 
him on account of the number of fires he saw along the 
coast, which he supposed to be eruptions of volcanoes. 
The meaning of Tierra del Fuego is "land of fire." 

257. JV/iy was Patagonia so 7iamed? 

It was taken from the Spanish word Patagon — a man 
with large feet. Magellan gave the inhabitants of this 
country the name of Patagonians on account of their feet, 
which, being wrapped in skins, seemed much larger than 
they really were. 

258. Which cape in South America is the most northerti, 
which the fuost southern ? 

Cape Gallinas is farthest north, and Cape Horn farthest 
south. 

259. Which is the most eastern, andivhich the most western / 

Cape St. Roque is the most eastern, and Cape Parina 
the most western. 

260. Where is Lake Reys, and what river is its outlet? 

It is in Peru, and the Ucayle River is its outlet. This 
lake is the source of the Amazon. 

261. What is the general character 0/ the lakes 0/ South 
America ? 

With the exception of Lake Titicaca and Lake Ma- 
racaibo, they are more like vast morasses than lakes. 



GEOGRAPHY. 165 

262. Describe Lakes Titicaca and Maracaibo. 

Lake Titicaca is a saltish lake, about half as large as 
Lake Erie, and is situated on the Great Plateau nearly 
13,000 feet above the level of the Pacific Ocean. Its 
waters are inland, having no outlet to the ocean. Lake 
Maracaibo is, more properly speaking, a bay, being con- 
nected by a strait with the Caribbean Sea. 

263. Where are the Lobos and Chincha Islands? 
They lie off the coast of Peru. 

264. For what are they valuable? 

They are of great value for the immense quantities of 
guano found upon them. 

265. Which is the sfnallest division of South America^ and 
what State is about the same size? 

French Guiana, which contains about 3,500 square miles, 
is about the size of Maine. 

266. JIoiv does Brazil compare in size to the whole of 
South America? 

It contains nearly one-half of the peninsula. 

267. Describe this country. 

It was once a colony of Portugal, and Portuguese is the 
language of the civilized inhabitants. An ocean telegraph 
connects Brazil with Portugal, and another with the United 
States by way of the West Indies. Brazil furnishes the 
greater part of the coffee used in the world, more than one- 
half of which comes to the United States. Cotton, sugar, 
hides, dye-woods. India-rubber and diamonds are also pro- 
duced in large quantities. 

268. What important enterprise is being pushed on the 
Isthmus of Panama? 

A ship canal. It is understood that it shall not become 
a possession of any foreign government. With Colombia 



i66 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

we have a treaty of protection. The United States guaran- 
tees that no other power shall take possession of her lands 
or government. 

269. Who 7vas Count Ferdinatid de Lesseps? 

A great French engineer who built the Suez Canal, 
and who started the building of the canal on the Isthmus 
of Panama. 

270. Describe the Andes Monntaifis. 

They begin in low hills on the Isthmus of Panama, and 
end at Cape Horn in a bleak and naked rock rising 3,500 
feet above the sea. In Patagonia they rise abruptly from 
the shore, but farther north they are from 60 to 100 miles 
from the coast. They consist generally of parallel ranges 
of lofty mountains, with high valleys and tablelands be- 
tween. This system is from 30 to 400 miles wide. 

271. What does British America co7nprisel 

About one-third of the continent of North America, to- 
gether with many adjacent islands. Its chief divisions are 
the Dominion of Canada, the Province of Newfoundland, 
the Bermuda Islands, the Bahamas, Jamaica and several 
colonies in the West Indies. 

272. What are the divisions of tJie Dominion of Canada! 
Quebec, Ontario, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, British 

Columbia, Manitoba, and the Northwest Territories. 

273. What are the 7ioteworthy characteristics of the Do- 
mi?iion as to cli??tate, surface, trade, etcJ 

The climate is severe, except in the southern parts of 
British Columbia and Ontario. The surface as a whole is 
considered level. British Columbia and the provinces east 
of Manitoba are great forest regions. Between the Rocky 
Mountains and Manitoba are extensive prairies. Trade 
is principally with Great Britain and the United States. 
The exports are fish, coal, grain and lumber. 



GEOGRAPHY. 167 

274. Hotv does the Dominion compare in size with the 
United States ? 

Its population is 4,375,000 or only about ^^ that of the 
United States; and its area is 3,500,000, or about the same 
as that of the United States. 

275. IVhai island forms a part of the province of Nova 
Scotia ? 

Cape Breton. 

276. Describe Newfoundland. 

The surface is generally rocky and barren. The coast is 
indented by deep inlets, which form many excellent harbors. 
It is noted for its fisheries. 

277. Describe Nova Scotia, Prince Edward Islafid, New 
Brufis7vick, Quebec and Ontario. 

Nova Scotia has many good harbors and valuable fish- 
eries; it is favorably located for commerce, and exports 
fish, sheep, coal and gypsum. Prince Edward Island has 
a fertile soil, and agriculture is the leading occupation of 
its inhabitants. New Brunswick is noted for its timber 
forests, and exports great quantities of lumber and fish. 
Quebec has a severe climate, and is noted for its pictur- 
esque scenery; Montreal, the largest city of this province, 
has an extensive commerce, and ships large quantities of 
grain. Ontario has a mild climate, compared with Quebec, 
and produces a great amount of grain and lumber. 

278. Describe Manitoba and British Columbia. 

Manitoba is in the basin of the great wheat-growing region 
of the North, and is rapidly increasing in population; the 
Red River of the North, flowing from the United States, 
and the Winnipeg Lake with the Saskatchawan River 
afford 2,000 miles of inland navigation. British Columbia 
abounds in salmon, timber, coal, gold and other metals. 



1 68 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

279. Describe the Northwest Territories. 

They are divided into Provisional Districts: Athabasca, 
Alberta, Saskatchawan and Assiniboia. They promise to 
become eventually the greatest wheat-producing country 
in the world. 

280. What is the government of the provinces of the Do- 
minion ? 

The chief executive officer is the Governor-General, who 
is appointed by the crown of Great Britain. The Legisla- 
ture consists of two branches: the members of the lower 
branch being elected by the people, but the members of 
the other branch appointed by the Governor-General. 
Each province has a similar government under a Lieu- 
tenant-Governor. 

281. For what is the great Saskatchawan Valley noted, 
and how large is it ? 

For the production of wheat; it contains more than 
300,000 square miles. 

282. What is the Bras d'Orl 

It is an arm of the sea which almost divides the Island 
of Cape Breton. 

283. What French possessions are near these provinces? 

The small islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon. They lie 
south of Newfoundland, and serve as fishing-stations. 

284. What are the banks of Newfoundland? 

Shallow places in the sea, the largest being the Grand 
Bank, which lies to the eastward of the island. This bank 
is more than 600 miles long and 250 miles broad. 

285. Where is Anticosta Island ? , 

At the mouth of the St. Lawrence River. It is a barren 
island, occupied only by keepers of light-houses on the 
coast. 



GEOGRAPHY. 169 

286. Which of the United States is about the size of New 
Brunswick and Prince Edward Island respectively ? 

South Carolina about equals New Brunswick, and Dela- 
ware Prince Edward Island. 

287. How is Montreal situated? 

On Montreal Island, 32 miles in length, and at the junc- 
tion of the Ottawa with the St. Lawrence. The Isle of 
Jesus lies north of it. 

288. For7vhatis the basin of the St. Lawrence remarkable? 
For the grandeur and beauty of its natural scenery. 

Niagara Falls, the Thousand Isles, the Rapids of the St. 
Lawrence, the falls near Quebec, and the grand scenery of 
the Saguenay River are the admiration of thousands of 
tourists. 

289. For 7vhat is the Bay of Fundy noted? 

For the highest tides in the world, which rise to the 
height of seventy feet. 

290. What are tides? Neap tides? Springtides? 

Tides are elevations and depressions of the ocean at re- 
gular intervals, occurring twice in twenty-four hours. The 
neap tides are those with the least ebb and flow, and 
occur at the close of the first quarter and first of the last 
quarter of the moon. Spring tides have the greatest ebb 
and flow, and occur at the time of the new and the full moon. 

291. What are the chief causes of tides? 

The attraction of the moon and sun. Probably not one 
teacher in a thousand can explain this attraction to the 
satisfaction of his pupils. The fact that the water rises on 
opposite sides of the earth at the same time is the difficult 
part of the question. 
4 292. What are the three distinct movements of the ocean? 
Waves, tides and currents. 



170 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

293. What are waves? 

The action of the winds on the surface of a body of 
water. On the ocean, the height of waves produced by 
storms averages from 10 to 20 feet. 

294. IV/iat are ocean currents^ and how are they caused! 

They are like vast rivers, transporting its waters from 
one part to another, and are caused by the heat of the sun, 
rotation of the earth, saltness of the sea, winds, tides, and 
melting ice. 

295. How are oceati currents divided! 
Into constant, periodical, and temporary. 

296. What is a counter current 1 

A stream which runs by the side of, or beneath another 
current, and in an opposite direction. 

297. Why are the tides of Fundy Bay so much greater 
than else7vhere? 

The position of the bay is such that the Atlantic tide is 
forced into it, and the waters are raised by this pressure 
above the adjoining sea. 

298. What are the chief productions of the Canadian 

provinces! 

Grain, hemp, flax, potatoes, lumber, fish, coal, grind- 
stones and gypsum. 

299. Name and locate the capital cities of these provinces. 

Halifax, N.S. ; Frederickton, N.B. ; iWinnipeg, Man.; 
Regina, N.W.T.; Ottawa, Ont.; Victoria, B.C.; Quebec, 
Que. 

300. To what province does Labrador belong! 
Newfoundland. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



171 



301. What are the obstructions to itavigation from tlie Gulf 
of St. Lawrence to Lake Superior 1 

The rapids of the St. Lawrence, Niagara Falls, and falls 
in the River St. Mary. 

302. LIo7u are these obstructions ai'oided ? 

In ascending the river the rapids are avoided by canals 
on the left bank, but the downward passage, though peril- 
ous, is made by the river itself. The Welland Canal con- 
nects Lakes Ontario and Erie, thereby avoiding the Falls 
of Niagara. The falls of the St. Mary River are passed by 
a ship canal. 

2,07,. Now is Nova Scotia joined to Neiv Brunswicl t 
By an isthmus fourteen miles wide. 

304. What islafids are in the Niagara Rit>erl 
Grand, Navy, and Goat. 

305. What difficulties of a political nature have of recent 
years arisen between Canada and the U7iited States / 

The Canadians claim that American fishermen have in- 
vaded British waters. 

306. What are the comtnercial routes of the Dominion? 
The chief water route is the St. Lawrence River and the 

Great Lakes. The Grand Trunk and Canadian Pacific are 
the leading railroads. 

307. Ldow is Oceanica divided? 

Into three divisions: Malasia, Australasia, and Poly- 
nesia. 

308. What does Malasia cotnprise? 

The East India Archipelago, which lies to the southeast 
of Asia. The principal divisions are the Sunda Isles, Spice 
Islands, Philippines, and Celebes. 

309. Which are the principal Sunda Isles? 
Borneo, Sumatra, and Java. 



172 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

310. What are the productions of these islands 1 
No part of the world is richer in its vegetable products. 
The minerals are also valuable. Nearly all the spices that 
we use, such as cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs and pepper, are 
raised on these islands. Bread-fruit, sago, cocoanuts, ba- 
nanas, yams, and various tropical fruits are grown exten- 
sively. Coffee is exported from Java; gold and diamonds 
from Borneo; tin from Banca; sugar, hemp and tobacco 
from the Philippine Islands. 

.■^11. What is said of the animals of Malasia ? 

Tijey are among the largest and fiercest on earth. The 
tiger, rhinoceros, elephant and ourang-outang are found 
in Sumatra. 

312. What are the inhabitants? 
Principally Malays. 

313. What nations have possessions here? 

Java, the Spice Islands, Sumatra, Celebes, a part of Bor- 
neo, and most of Timor belong to the Dutch. The Philip- 
pine Islands belonged to Spain until the war of 1898 be- 
tween that country and the Unitedl States. A part of both 
Borneo and Papua belongs to England; and part of Timor 
belongs to the Portuguese. 

314. Which are the most important cities of this archi- 
pelago ? 

Batavia and Manila. 

315. Hoiii large is Borneo? Sumatra? Java? Celebes? 
7'he Philippine Isles? 

Borneo contains about 260,000 square miles, Sumatra 
125,000, Java 52,000, Celebes 46,000, and the Philippines 
66,000. 

316. Which State is about the size of Celebes? 
Pennsylvania. 



GEOGRAPHY. 173 

317. In which zone are these islands situated? 

The torrid. The equator crosses Sumatra, Borneo, 
Celebes, and some of the Spice Islands. 

318. What is the surface 0/ these is lands f 

Most of them are mountainous, and many contain active 
volcanoes; Java alone contains forty-three. 

319. Are these islands thickly inhabited ? 

With the exception of Java, they are not. Java, which 
is about the size of Arkansas, contains 18,000,000 people. 

320. What does Australasia comprisel 

This is the largest division of Oceanica, and comprises 
Australia, Papua or New Guinea, Tasmania, New Zealand, 
New Caledonia, and many other islands. 

321. What race 0/ people are called Papuans? Where are 
they found, and what is noticeable of them? 

They are a cannibal negro race and inhabit a long group 
of islands extending from New Guinea to New Caledonia. 

322. To what country do Australia^ New Zealand, and 
Tasmania belong? 

To Great Britain. 

323. What possession has France in these divisions? 
New Caledonia, 

324. How is Australia divided? 

Into Western Australia, South Australia, Queen's Land, 
New South Wales and Victoria. 

325. How large is Australia? 

About four-fifths as large as the United States. 

326. What is the surface of this island? 

Near the coast are mountain ranges. The central re- 
gions have never been explored, but are supposed to con- 



174 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

sist of a low, barren plain. The Murray is the only river 
of much importance. 

327. What are the inhabitants ? 

The greater part of them are Europeans and their de- 
scendants. The natives are of the Papuan race. 

328. What are the chief pursuits of the people? 

Mining and raising wool. They also produce large 
amounts of wheat, indigo, cotton, sugar, coffee, tin and 
copper. 

329. What is the government of Australia? 

The colonies are politically independent of one another, 
and are governed by representatives chosen by universal 
suffrage, and by executive officers appointed by the British 
crown. 

330. What do you say of the climate and vegetation 1 

The northern part is tropical, while the southern part is 
subjected to sudden successions of floods and droughts. 

331. How is Australia connected by telegraph with Europe ? 

One line, from the principal cities, crosses the middle of 
the continent to the northwest coast, and is continued by 
ocean cable to British India, and thence through Asia and 
Europe. Other lines and cables connect directly with 
London. 

332. What may be said of the native animals of Australia ? 

The largest is the kangaroo. The most singular one is 
the platypus, which has the body of an otter and the bill of 
a duck, and lays eggs. 

333. Which are the principal cities? 

Melbourne, Victoria; Sydney, New South Wales; Ade- 
laide, South Australia; and Perth, West Australia. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



175 



334. Is this country thickly sctt/cd? 

It is not. The estimated number of inhabitants is 
2,000,000. 

335. Describe Tasmania. 

It is about one-half as large as England, and is a fine 
agricultural island, inhabited solely by European colonists. 

336. IVhere is New Zealand? 

Southeast of Asia. The surface is mountainous, and the 
inhabitants belong to the Malay race. 

337. What is said 0/ Papua and the other islands? 
They are but little known. There are no considerable 

white settlements in any of them except New Caledonia. 

338. What does Polynesia include? 

A multitude of islands scattered through the Pacific 
Ocean. 

339. Name the principal groups. 

T'he Sandwich, Society, Friendly, Marquesas, Caroline 
and Ladrone Islands. 

340. What is the surface of the islands of Polynesia? 

There are either mountainous, principally of volcanic for- 
mation, or low islands, which are the work of the coral ani- 
mal. 

341. What are the native inhabitants? 
Mostly of the Malay race. 

342. What may be said of the animals? 

When first discovered, these islands contained neither 
insects nor reptiles, and no animal larger than a hog. 

343. Which is the only important town in Polynesia ? 

Honolulu, on Oahu, one of the Sandwich (or Hawaiian) 
Islands. 



176 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

344. Name the Middle States, and tell hoiv they compare 
in size to the Neiv England States. 

New York, Pennsylvania, New Jersey and Delaware; 
they are about twice as large as New England. 

345. Which is the larger, Nezv York or Pennsylvania] 

New York contains 47,000 square miles, and Pennsylvania 
46,000. 

346. What is the surface 0/ these States? 

New York is somewhat undulating; it contains the 
Catskill and the Adirondack Mountains. Pennsylvania 
is rather mountainous; the Alleghany system attains its 
greatest breadth here. The greater part of New Jersey, 
Delaware and Maryland is low and generally sandy. 

347. What can be said of New Yorkl 

In wealth, population, and commercial importance, it 
holds the first rank in the Union. 

348. For what are Rochester, Syracuse, West Point, and 
Saratoga noted? 

Rochester has the most extensive flour-mills in the East, 
and Syracuse the greatest salt-works in the country. West 
Point is the seat of the United States Military Academy, 
and Saratoga is well known as a fashionable watering- 
place. 

349. For what is Pennsylvania 710 ted? 

It is one of the richest States in the Union. Much of 
its wealth lies in mining and manufacturing, but it is also 
rich in grain and live stock. 

350. What may be said of its minerals? 

The mines of iron and coal far surpass those of any other 
State. Petroleum in large quantities is found fn the north- 
western part. 



GEOGRAPHY. 177 

351. For isjhat are Pittsburg and Philadelphia notedl 
Pittsburg is the greatest iron manufacturing city, and 

Philadelphia is the second greatest manufacturing city in 
the Union. 

352. Where is Fairmount Park, and what great event 
occurred there in recent years t 

It is in Philadelphia, and the great world's fair of 1876, 
called the Centennial Exposition, was held there. 

353. What is the estitnated population 0/ the City of New 
York / 

It is estimated at about 3,500,000. 

354. Describe the Brooklyn Bridge. 

See answer No. 651 on United States History. 

355. What gift of the French people is in Neiv York 
harbor? 

The Statue of Liberty Enlightening the World. 

356. What are the pursuits of the people of New ferseyl 
Chiefly agricultural. They supply the vegetable markets 

of New York and Philadelphia. 

357- What noted resorts for sea-bathing are in this State? 
Long Branch, Asbury Park, Cape May and Atlantic City. 

358. IIo7V large is Dehnvare? 

With the exception of Rhode Isiand, it is the smallest 
State in the Union; contains only 2,120 square miles. 

359. Describe the District of Columbia? 

It is situated on the Potomac River, and has an area of 
sixty square miles. It contains Washington and George- 
town. It is under the government of Congress. 

360. How great a fall has the cataract of Niagara? 
One hundred and sixty-five feet. 



178 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK 

361. How are the West Indies divided! 

Into the Greater Antilles, the Lesser Antilles, and the 
Bahamas. 

362. What islands belong to the Greater Antilles? 
Cuba, Hayti, Jamaica, and Porto Rico. 

363. What do the Lesser Antilles include? 

The chain of islands extending from Porto Rico to South 
America. 

364. What and 7vhere are the Bahama Islands? 

They are low islands of coral formation, and lie north 
of the Greater Antilles. 

365. To 7ohat country do these islands belong? 

Cuba and Porto Rico lately belonged to Spain, but 
Cuba is now free, and Porto Rico has come into possession 
of the United States, owing to the Spanish-American war 
of 1898; Jamaica, the Bahamas, and most of the Lesser 
Antilles belong to Great Britain; Hayti is independent; 
and the remaining islands are owned by France, Denmark, 
Holland and Venezuela. 

366. What are the inhabitants of these islands? 
Principally whites, and free negroes, with some Chinese. 

About one-sixth are whites. 

367. What is the surface of the Antilles? 

Mountainous. The mountains are supposed to be the 
remains of a chain which at some remote period connected 
North and South America. 

368. What are the productions ? 

Tropical fruits, sugar, coffee, tobacco, rum, mahogany 
and spices. 

369. What is rum ? 

Spirits distilled from moiasses. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



179 



370. How is the island of Hay ft divided? 
Between two republics, Santo Domingo and Hayti. 

371. What is the history of this island t 

It once belonged to France and Spain. In 1791 the 
slaves in the western, or French division, rose against their 
masters, and after a bloody war succeeded in establishing 
an empire, which presently became a republic. In 1849, 
the President (Soulouque) proclaimed himself emperor, 
with the title of Faustin I. After a reign of ten years he 
was deposed, and a republican form of government was 
again adopted. In 182 1 the eastern division revolted from 
Spain and became a republic. 

372. Where are the Bertnuda Islands, and to whom do 
they belong ? 

They are east of the United States and belong to Great 
Britain. There are about 400 of these islands, but most 
of them are so small and barren that they have neither 
name nor inhabitants. 

373. How large are Cuba and Hayti I 

Cuba is about the size of Pennsylvania, and Hayti is 
about half as large as Michigan, containing 28,000 square 
miles. 

374. What are keys? 

Small rocky islands of coral formation. 

375. What is a reef t 

A chain of rocks lying near the surface of the water. 

376. Describe the southern coast of Florida. 

It is fringed with reefs, and, as many of the rocks are 
just below the surface of the water, they are dangerous to 
navigation. 

377. Where is Key West, and what are its exports! 

It is the most southerly town in the United States proper, 



l8o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

on an island of coral formation southwest of the mainland 
of Florida. Its exports are salt and sponge. 

378. How is salt made iti Key West} 
By solar evaporation. 

379. What is sponge 7 

A soft porous growth,- which is found attached to rocks 
below the surface of the water. 

380. What is the general surface of Florida 1 

Level. In the south, dense marshy thickets called 
everglades cover the surface and are of 160 by about 60 
miles in area. 

381. What are the products of this State? 

Cotton, corn, sugar-cane, rice, and tobacco. Tropical 
fruits, such as oranges, lemons, figs, pomegranates, pine- 
apples, olives, etc., are abundant. 

382. What is Lake Okeechobee, and where is it? 

It is a great swamp connected with the everglades, near 
the southern part of Florida, 

383. What schefne is proposed by civil engineers in regard to 
this swamp? 

They propose that capitalists shall drain these lands by 
a system of canals. As the lands when drained will be 
unsurpassed in fertility, it is reasonable to suppose that 
eventually this will be done. 

384. Why has Florida so few good harbors? 

On account of the many reefs or keys which skirt the 
shores, and the lowness of the land as it approaches the 
sea. 

385. Which State is split by the Mississippi River? 
Louisiana. About one-fifth of the State is on the east 

side of the river. 



GEOGRAPHY. l8i 

386. On which side of the river is New Orleans? De- 
scribe if. 

On the east side, about 100 miles from the mouth. It is 
the greatest cotton mart in the world, and is built around 
a bend in the river, whence it is called the Crescent City. 
The foundation is artificial, as it was built on a swamp. 
It lies below the level of the river, but is protected by the 
levee, which at this place is a continuous quay, four miles 
long and 100 feet wide. 

387. Whai is the soil of Louisiana! 

It is varied. The richest tract is a belt of land from one 
to two miles wide, on both sides of the river, extending 
from 150 miles above to 100 miles below New Orleans. 
This tract is annually inundated by the spring floods. 
Only a small part of the State is under cultivation. 

388. How many Territories are there in the United States? 

Three organized, and two unorganized. Arizona, New 
Mexico and Oklahoma are organized. Indian Territory 
and Alaska are not. Hawaii and Porto Rico are annexed 
territories. 

389. What does Danish America i?iclude? 
Greenland and Iceland. 

390. Has Greenland beeti fully explored? 

It has not. The interior and northern parts are unknown, 
and it is supposed by some that the island is only a pro- 
jection of an Arctic continent not yet discovered. 

391. Why was Greenland so named? 

It was named by an Icelandic chief, who, for some crime, 
was obliged to fiee from his native land. To induce his 
countrymen to follow him, he falsely represented his new 
home to be superior in fertility to Iceland. 



1 82 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

392. Describe Iceland. 

It is of volcanic formation. Ranges of high, rugged 
mountains border the coast, while the interior is a dreary 
of desert volcanoes, ice-clad mountains, or fields of lava. 

393. What natural curiosities are herel 

The geysers, or boiling springs. About fifty of these 
hot springs occupy an area not exceeding twelve acres. 
Some throw up water, and even large stones, to a great 
height. 

394. What is supposed to be the cause 0/ this phenomenon? 

Nearness to Mount Hecla, which is only thirty-five miles 
distant, or a volcanic commotion beneath the springs them- 
selves. 

395. What gave its name to Iceland i 

It was named by a Norwegian pirate who, on his first 
visit, saw a bay filled with ice, which had floated thith«r 
from Greenland. 

396. Which are the principal towns of Danish America] 
Lichtenfels and Reikiavik. 

397. How fnuch larger is Asia than Africa? 
About 4,000,000 square miles. 

398. What is the greatest length and breadth of Africa? 
From north to south it measures about 5,000 miles; its 

greatest breadth is about 4,800 miles. 

399. Give a short description of Africa. 

Large parts of it have not been fully explored. The 
shores are not indented by deep gulfs or inlets, which is 
one of the principal reasons why the interior is so little 
known. The surface is varied. There are mountain sys- 
tems, sandy deserts and elevated plateaus. The greater 
part is in the torrid zone, and, much of the country being 



GEOGNAPIIV. 183 

desert land, it is, as a whole, the hottest and driest grand 
division of the globe. 

400. What are the inhabitants'} 

Except the northern part and some settlements on the 
coast, the inhabitants are negro tribes, whose religion is 
paganism and their condition barbarous. 

401. What are the chief countries of Barbaryl 
Morocco, Algiers, Tunis and Tripoli. 

402. To 7vhat nations do they belong? 

Morocco is an independent empire. Algiers is a colony 
of France. Tunis and Tripoli are dependencies of Turkey. 

403. No7v large is the Desert of Sahara i 
From 750 to 1,200 miles wide, and 3,000 long. 

404. Describe the Soudan, its exports, and how its com- 
merce is carried on. 

It occupies a large part of Central Africa, extending 
across the continent south of the Great Desert. The soil 
is fertile, and the climate tropical and similar to the Ama- 
zon Valley. It contains a number of semi-barbarous states 
of large population. 'I'he religion is chiefly Mohammedan, 
although a great many tribes of negroes are pagans and 
combine with their religion a belief in evil spirits, witch- 
craft and magic charms, known as fetichism. The exports 
are gold, ivory, ostrich feathers and gum arable. Com- 
merce is carried on by caravans. 

405. Now is Southern Africa divided^ 

Cape Colony, Natal, Zululand, the Transvaal, Orange 
Free State, Bechuna, Namaqua, Damara and Rhodesia. 

406. How are these countries governed i 

Cape Colony, Zululand, Rhodesia and Natal are British 
colonies. The others are independent. 



184 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

. 407. Where and what is Liberia "i 

It is on the western coast of Africa, and is a negro re- 
public, with a government modeled after that of the United 
States. The republic was founded in 182 1 by the Ameri- 
can Colonization Society, as a place of refuge for free 
blacks and liberated slaves from the United States. 

408. Where is the colony 0/ Sierra Leone? 

Above Liberia. It was founded for the same purpose in 
1787, by the British government. 

409. What are the principal exports 0/ Africa? 

They differ in different parts. The southern part ex- 
ports corn, wine, wool, hides, horns, ivory, gold and dia- 
monds; the western, ebony, palm oil, gold dust, and 
ostrich feathers; the northern, fruits, wool, hides, gums, 
indigo, salt, leather, cotton, rice, opium, coffee, and many 
other articles. 

410. Describe Madagascar. 

It is the largest of the African islands, containing 240,- 
000 square miles. It is mountainous and but little known. 
Part of the inhabitants belong to the African and part to 
the Malay race. 

411. What city is the largest in Africa? The second in 
size ? 

Cairo is the largest and Alexandria the second. 

412. Where are Port Said and Suez ? 
At the two ends of the Suez Canal. 

413. LLow long is the Suez Canal, and to what nation 
does it belong? 

It is 65 miles long and belongs virtually to England and 
France. 



GEOGRAPHY. 185 

414. Locate the capital cities of the Territories of the United 
States. 

Santa Fe, New Mexico; Phoenix, Arizona; Tahlequah, 
Indian Territory- Guthrie, Oklahoma; and Sitka, Alaska. 

415. For ivhaf are Idaho and Montana noted? 

For their rich gold and silver mines, and their natural 
advantages tor grazing and stock-raising. 

416. Where is Yelloivstone Parkl 

In the northwest corner of Wyoming. It contains 3,600 
square miles. It contains many deep canyons, lofty falls, 
bathing pools, geysers, lakes, and other natural beauties 
and wonders. It has been set aside by Congress as a 
"perpetual reservation for the benefit and instruction of 
mankind." 

417. Describe North and South Dakota. 

They are less mountainous than Idaho or Montana. 
Much of their surface consists of rolling prairie land, well 
watered, and especially adapted for farming and cattle- 
raising. 

418. Describe the Union Pacific Railroad. 

It is a great transcontinental route, lying west of the 
Missouri River. It passes through the southern part of Ne- 
braska, up the valley of the Platte River, touching the 
northern boundary line of Colorado and the southern part 
of Wyoming, through Northern Utah and Nevada, and 
thus to California. 

419. Name the principal towns on this railroad. 
Omaha, Fremont, Columbus, Kearney, Julesburg, Chey- 
enne, Laramie and Ogden. 

420. How is Salt Lake City situated? 

It is on the Jordan River, near Great Salt Lake, south 
of the Union Pacific Railroad, and on a branch line. 



1 86 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

421. Describe Utah. 

It contains the Great Salt Lake and the eastern part of 
the great arid basin, which is the most desolate region in 
the United States. Rain seldom falls in this basin, but 
some tracts near the rivers and lakes have been made fer- 
tile by irrigation. Gold, silver, iron, salt, coal and other 
minerals are plentiful there. 

422. What people settled Utah ? 
The Mormons, or Latter-day Saints. 

423. J^or what are the Southwestern States and Texas 
especially adapted? 

For grazing and grain-growing. 

424. How are parts of Western Texas occupied 1 
By herds of wild horses. 

425. What are the productions of Texas 1 

Cotton, corn, sugar, tobacco, rice, and some semi-trop- 
ical fruits. 

426. What is the climate? 

A great part of the State is much elevated, and there- 
fore free from extremes of heat and cold. Snow is seldom 
seen, but from October to March violent winds called 
"northers" sweep over the prairies of Texas, and plains of 
Mexico. 

427. Which of the States border on Canada? 
MainCj^New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, Michigan, 

Minnesota, North Dakota, Montana, Idaho, Washington. 

428. Which of the States are separated by the Mississippi 
River? 

Wisconsin, Illinois, Kentucky, Tennessee and Missis- 
sippi on the east shore are separated from Minnesota, 
Iowa, Missouri, Arkansas and most of Louisiana on the 
west. 



GEOGRAPHY. 187 

429. Which arc separated by the Ohio River? 

Ohio, Indiana and Illinois, from Kentucky and West 
Virginia. 

430. What is the general outline 0/ Europe, and 7vhat ad- 
vantages docs it offer? 

It is more irregular than that of any other division of 
the earth. Large seas and gulfs penetrate far into the 
interior, affording unequalled advantages for commercial 
intercourse. 

431. What is the surface? 

It is divided into extensive plains and mountain systems. 
Southern Europe is crossed from west to east by a great 
mountain system, which is continued through Asia to the 
Pacific Ocean. Northward from this system extends a 
great plain, which stretches from the Atlantic to the Pa- 
cific. 

432. What are the principal Europeati parts of this great 
mountain system? 

Caucasus, Balkan, Alps, Cevennes, Pyrenees, and Canta- 
brian. 

433. What part of Europe is included in the Great Plaifi? 
Russia, Northern Germany, Denmark, Holland, Belgium, 

and a part of France. 

434. What is the climate? 

It varies in the same latitude. In Eastern Europe the 
winters are excessively cold, while the summers are very 
hot. On the shores of the Atlantic the warm ocean cur- 
rent renders the climate mild and moist. 

435. Nafne the political divisions. 

Russia, Austria, Germany and Turkey are empires; 
Great Britain, Norway and Sweden, Denmark, Holland, 
Belgium, Spain, Portugal, Italy and Greece are kingdoms; 



1 88 COM MOIST SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

France and Switzerland, with Andorra and San Marino, are 
republics. 

436. Which divisions are called the '■'■ Five Great Powers''^ 1 
Great Britain, Russia, Germany, France and Austria. 

437. Natne the peiiitisulas of Eiirflpe. 

The Scandinavian, Jutland, Iberian, Italian, Morea and 
Crimea. 

438. Describe the Scandinavian peti insula. 

It comprises Sweden and Norway, two distinct States 
with separate governments, but united under one king. 
Nearly the whole of Norway and the eastern part of Swe- 
den are mountainous. The southeastern part of Sweden 
is a level plain. 

439. What are the exports 0/ this peninsula? 
Iron, copper, lumber and fish. 

440. Hoiv tnuch farther north can grain be raised in Nor- 
7vay than on the Atlantic shore of America? 

Rye, oats and barley can be raised 1,400 miles farther 
north. 

441. What point on the leiestern hemisphere is in the same 
latitude as Christiania? 

The southern point of Greenland. 

442. Where is Lapland? 

In Europe north of the Arctic Circle, and between the 
White Sea and Atlantic Ocean. It belongs to Russia, 
Sweden and Norway. 

443. Is this country inhabited? 

It is, by a Mongolian tribe called Laplanders. They 
own herds of reindeer, which supply them with food, cloth- 
ing and means of traveling. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



189 



444. What is the size of the Russian Empire 1 

It is next to the largest in the world, comprising fully 
one-half of Europe and more than one-third of Asia. The 
entire area is about 8,000,000 square miles. 

445. What is the surface of this empire i 

For the most part it is very level. The only moun- 
tainous section in European Russia is between the Azov 
and Caspian Seas. 

446. How are the itihabitatits divided! 

Into four classes: the*nobles, the clergy, the merchants, 
and the lately emancipated serfs. 

447. What are the gover?iment ami religion? 

The government is an absolute monarchy. The greater 
part of the inhabitants belong to the Greek Church. 

448. What are the inhabitants called, and ivhat is the title 
of their monarch 1 

The inhabitants are called Sclavs, and their monarch 
the Czar. 

449. What subject is strongly agitating the mi?ids of the 
Russian people? 

The question of a constitution which will change the 
r^overnment to a limited monarchy. 

450. Who are the Nihilists? 

They are revolutionists who seek the overthrow of the 
empire and resort to secret violence to accomplish their 
cause. 

451. What political relations, of a strained character, exist 
between Russia and England? 

England is fearful of the Russian advances in Asia, and 
jealously watches every movement. 



igo COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

452. J ft ivhat does the priticipal wea/ih of Russia consist 1 

In its forests, covering two-fifths of the country, and the 
products of agriculture and grazing. 

453. Where are the great wheat-growing regions of Europe t 
In Central and Southern Russia. 

454. What is the nature of the country around the Caspian 
Seal 

It is mostly sterile, and has the appearance of having 
been subjected to volcanic fires. There are many salt lakes 
and fire-hills. 

455. Describe the Caspian Sea. 

It is an inland sea, containing 140,000 square miles, and 
below the level of the Mediterranean. Several large rivers 
flow into it, but there is no visible outlet. 

456. What are steppes, and 7vhere are they founds 
Large, barren plains in Southeastern Russia. 

457. Where are Polafid atid Circassian 

Poland is that part of Russia lying north of Austria. 
Circassia is the region of the Caucasus Mountains. 

458. Where is Moscow, and when zvas it burned ^ 

It is near Central Russia, on a branch of the Oka River. 
It is a railroad centre, and one of the principal cities for 
trade. It was burned by the Russians during Napoleon's 
invasion of 1812, to deprive his troops of their expected 
winter quarters. This great sacrifice of the Russians saved 
their empire, by compelling Napoleon to withdraw from 
the country. 

459. For what is Sebastopol famous 1 

For a siege which it sustained for one year, against the 
combined English, French, Turkish and Sardinian armies. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



191 



460. What 7vas the cause of this siege? 

Sebastopol was one of the strongest Russian fortifications, 
and a perpetual menace to Turkey; its destruction ended 
the Crimean war. 

461. Who inhabit the steppes of Russia? 

The Cossacks, who are of great service to the Russian 
army as light cavalry. 

462. What takes place at Niznei Novgorod every year? 

A great fair is held there, which is attended by thousands 
of people who come from different parts of Europe and 
Asia to buy and sell goods. 

463. Which are the principal ports for foreign commerce? 
St. Petersburg, Cronstadt, Riga, Archangel, and Odessa. 

464. What seas and gulf s wash the shores of Russia? 
The Caspian, Azov, Black, Baltic, White and Kara Seas, 

and the Gulfs of Riga, Finland, Bothnia, Onega and Pet- 
chora. 

465. What do the British Isles comprise? 

Great Britain, Ireland, and many small adjacent islands. 

466. What does Great Britain include? 
England, Scotland and Wales. 

467. What is the surface of the British Isles? 

England and Ireland are generally level or undulating; 
Scotland and Wales are rugged and mountainous. 

468. Honi is Scotland divided? 

Into the Highlands and Lowlands. The Highlands lie 
north, and the Lowlands south, of the Grampian Hills. 

469. What is the nature of the sea-coast? 

It is very irregular, and abounds in fine harbors and 
roadsteads. 



ig2 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

470. What is the climate 'i 

It is moist and mild. The winters, even of Scotland, 
are rarely severe. The moisture of the climate and the 
low temperature in summer sometimes prevent crops from 
maturing. Corn will not ripen. 

471. In what does the chief ivealth of Great Britain con- 
sist 1 

In her commerce, manufactures and mining. 

472. How does she rank 7vith other nations in the amount 
of her manufactures and commerced 

She surpasses every other country in the world. The 
principal manufactures are those of cotton, wool and 
iron. 

473. What of her merchant marine and navyl 

There are 25,000 British merchant vessels and more than 
200,000 seamen. The British navy is regarded as the 
strongest in the world, although the Russian is hardly 
inferior. Germany, France and Italy also have powerful 
navies. 

474. What effect do the great armies of Europe have upon 
popular sentiment there? 

Besides immense standing armies, the European countries 
hold in reserve millions of citizens subject to call. The 
result of such enormous defense is a distressing taxation 
and popular discontent. No country can stand forever 
such a terrible drain on the resources of the people. 

475. What is the government of Great Britain? What is 
Parliament? 

The government is a constitutional monarchy. The 
Legislature, or Parliament, has two branches, the House 
of Lords and the House of Commons. The members of 
the House of Commons are elected by the people. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



193 



476. Who is the Prime Mitiisterl 

The executive power and the entire responsibility of the 
government are in the hands of the Ministry, who are 
appointed by the sovereign and selected from the Com- 
mons. The Prime Minister is practically the real ruler of 
the empire; if opposed by a majority of the House of 
Commons, he resigns, and the sovereign appoints his suc- 
cessor. 

477. Where is tin obtained 2 

Principally from Cornwall, England, and the Island of 
Banca. The mines of Cornwall have been famous from 
remote antiquity, 

478. What is the chic/ article of fuel in Ireland! 

Peat, or bog turf, of which there are more than 3,000,000 
acres. 

479. What is the extent of the British Empire 1 

It has colonies in every quarter of the globe, and unites 
under one sovereign a greater number of people than are 
ruled by any other government. 

480. Which are the principal possessions of Great Britain 
in Cofitinental Europe? 

Gibraltar in Spain, and the Islands of Malta and Gozo. 

481. Which in Asia? 

British India, including Ceylon, Hindoostan, a part of 
Farther India, and Singapore; the Island of Hong Kong, 
and the City of Aden. 

482. In Africa? 

Sierra Leone and other settlements on the western 
coast; Cape Colony, Zululand, Rhodesia, and Natal; the 
Islands of Sychelle, Mauritius, Ascension, and St. Helena. 



194. COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

483. In Oceanical 

Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, Norfolk, Labuan, and 
a part of Borneo. 

484. In America? 

British America, Bermuda Islands, Balize, Jamaica, 
Bahama Islands, and many of the Lesser Antilles, British 
Guiana, and the Falkland Islands. 

485. For what are Liverpool, Leeds and Bradford, Bir- 
mingham, Limerick, and Merthyr Tydvil noted] 

Liverpool, for its great commerce. Leeds and Bradford, 
for their manufactures of wool. Birmingham, for hard- 
ware. Limerick, for the manufacture of gloves, laces and 
fish-hooks. Merthyr Tydvil, for its iron-works. 

486. How large an area is covered by the City 0/ London! 
About 122 square miles. 

487. What questions agitate the people 0/ Ireland? 

The questions of home rule and peasant proprietorship 
of the land. 

488. Describe the Spanish Peninsula. 

It is the principal plateau of Europe, the whole central 
part consisting of a series of lofty plains, divided from 
each other by parallel mountain chains. This plateau 
comprises 93,000 square miles, or nearly one-half of the 
peninsula. 

489. What are the productions of Spain 1 

The vine, olive, mulberry, and orange. Large flocks of 
sheep are raised on the tablelands of the interior. 

490. What parallel crosses the central part of Spain, and 
through which of the United States does the same parallel 
pass 1 

The 40th parallel. It passes through New Jersey, 



GEOGRAPHY. ^95 

Pennsylvania, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, Nebraska, 
Kansas, Colorado, Utah, Nevada and California. 

49 1 . What other countries in Europe does the same parallel 
cross ? 

Portugal, Italy and Turkey. 

492. Were we to folloiv this parallel, what countries in 
Asia should we pass through 'i 

Turkey, Turkestan, China and Japan. 

493. Where is the Republic o/Andorral 

In the Pyrenees between France and Spain. 

494. What is noticeable of this republic 

The population is only 5,000 or 6,000, but the country 
has been independent for more than a thousand years. 

495. What are the foreign possessions of Spain and Portu- 
gal 

The Ladrone and Canary Islands belong to Spain. 
The possessions of Portugal are the Azores, the Cape 
Verde and the Madeira Islands, and Lower Guinea, 
in Africa. 

496. How wide is the Strait of Gibraltar? 
Twelve miles in its narrowest place. 

497. What may be said of the fortress of Gibraltar? 

It is situated on a mountainous promontory, and is the 
strongest fortification in the world 

498. How large is France? 

It contains 204,000 square miles. 

499. Ho7V does France rank with other countries? 

As one of the richest and most powerful. The position 
of the country and the fertility of the soil give it great 
commercial and agricultural advantages. 



196 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

500. What is the surface! 

The eastern part is mountainous, while the rest belongs 
to the great plain, which extends across the continent. 

501. What and where are the la tides? 

They are plains of shifting sands in the southwestern 
part of France. 

502. What are the principal exports? 

France exports more wine, brandy, and silk goods than 
any other country. 

503. IVhat influence has Paris throughout the civilized 
world? 

The influence of fashion, 

504. Name the priticipal possessions of France. 

Algeria, Senegal, Pondicherry, Isle of Bourbon, New 
Caledonia, Marquesas Islands, French Guiana, St. Pierre 
and Miquelon, Martinique, Guadaloupe, and Corsica. 

505. What are the pursuits of the people of Holland atid 
Belgium ? What is Holland properly called? 

In Holland, stock-raising and dairying are the chief 
pursuits. Belgium is an agricultural and manufacturing 
country; it also has extensive mines of coal and iron. 
Holland is properly called the Netherlands. 

506. What is the conditiofi of much of the coast of this 
country ? 

It is so low that in many places dykes, or embankments, 
are necessary to prevent inundations. 

507. How is internal communication promoted? 

By canals. In Holland especially, canals run through 
the principal streets of the towns, and form a complete 
network over the country. 



GEOGRAPHY. 197 

508. What is the Zuyder Zee I 

An arm of the sea, or gulf, which indents the northern 
part of Holland. 

509. What people are Dutch? 
The people of Holland. 

5 1 o. What are the colonial possessions of the Netherlands ? 

Next to those of Great Britain they are the most 
extensive and valuable in the world. They include the 
most important parts of the East Indian Archipelago, 
Dutch Guiana, and several islands in the West Indies. 

511. What are the occupations of the people, their com- 
merce, 7nanufactures, etcJ 

Agriculture is the principal occupation in the Nether- 
lands, and manufacturing and mining in Belgium. Their 
foreign commerce is among the largest in the world, 
their exports including fine manufactured goods of silk, 
cotton, wool, linen, leather and iron. Lace-making is 
an important industry. 

512. What is the surface of Denmark? 
It is nearly flat; some parts are below the surface of the 
sea, from which they are defended by dykes. 

513; JJo7v is Copenhagen situated? 

On the eastern coast of the Island of Zealand, and 
partly on the adjacent Island of Amok. Many of the 
buildings are built on piles in the water. 

514, What are the colonial possessions of Denmark? 
Greenland, Iceland, Faroe Islands, and several small 

islands in the West Indies. 

515. What does the German Empire comprise? 

The kingdoms of Prussia, Bavaria, Wurtemberg and 
Saxony, six grand-duchies, five duchies, seven principal!- 



198 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

ties, three free cities, and the state of Elsass called by the 
French Alsace. 

516. Which are the free cities 1 
Hamburg, Bremen and Liibeck. 

517. Where is the state of Alsace 1 

On the Rhine. It was a part of France, till the Franco- 
Prussian war of 1870-71. 

518. What are the capitals of the four kinj^doms? 
Prussia has Berlin for its capital; Saxony, Dresden; 

Bavaria, Munich; VVurtemberg, Stuttgart. 

519. Describe the govcrnme/it of Gerrnany. 

It is a limited monarchy, with the King of Prussia as 
German Emperor. The imperial legislature consists of 
two bodies: the Federal Council, somewhat resembling the 
English House of Lords, and the Reichstag, whose mem- 
bers are elected like the members of the House of Com- 
mons. 

520. What can he said of its military power? 

It is generally considered the strongest in the world, 
and the government is continually strengthening it. 

521. What of its school system and its manufactures? 
Prussia has the most complete and comprehensive 

system of public schools of any nation, and the general 
education of the whole empire is remarkably good. The 
manufactures are varied and extensive, and the exports in- 
clude wheat, wine, zinc, and almost every description of 
manufactured goods. 

522. Which are the chief forts of Germany? 
Hamburg and Bremen. 

523. What arc the agricultural productions? 

Nearly the whole of Germany is under cultivation, and 



GEOGRAPHY. 



199 



large crops of wheat, rye, barley, oats, tobacco, beet-root 
and linseed are produced. 

524. What are heaths? 

Sandy tracts in Northern Germany and Denmark. 

525. What are the inhabita?its 0/ Austria? 

They are of different races, but mostly Germans, Hun- 
garians, Italians and Poles. 

526. What is the proper title 0/ Austria? 
The Austro-Hungarian Empire. 

527. How is this empire divided? 

It is divided into two distinct and nearly independent 
groups of provinces. Each group has a government of its 
own, but the whole is under one general government. The 
Kingdom of Hungary and its dependencies constitute 
nearly one-half of the empire. The Emperor of Austria 
is King of Hungary. 

528. What are the chief exports of Austria? 

Wheat, wine, salt, wool and manufactures of linen, 
cotton, iron and glass. 

529. What can he said of tlie Danube River? 

It forms an important system of waterways, extending 
entirely across the empire. 

530. Hoiv is Vienna situated? 

On eighty-two small islands, separated by 150 canals 
crossed by elevated bridges. 

531. What was Poland formerly? 

An important kingdom of Central Europe. After 
suffering many reverses, it was divided between Russia, 
Germany and Austria. 

532. Which is the most mountainous country of Europe? 
Switzerland. 



200 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

533* Of how many states is Switzerland composed? 
It is composed of twenty-two states or cantons. It is 
about one-third as large as the State of New York. 

534. For what are the Swiss noted? 

They are noted for their love of liberty and their attach- 
ment to their native country, 

535- ^Vhat language do they speak? 

Most of the population speak the German language. 
Italian and French are spoken in the cantons adjoining 
Italy and France. 

536. For 7vhat is Geneva 7ioted? 

For the manufacture of watches and jewelry. 

537. Ho7v is Italy governed? 

It was formerly divided into a number of states, but 
the efforts of the people to obtain national unity were suc- 
cessful, and the whole country is now united under a 
liberal and enlightened government. 

538. /;/ ancient times, for %vhat was this country cele- 
brated? 

It was the central part of the Roman Empire, which 
ruled all the known world. 

539. For tvhat are the torvns and cities noted? 

Almost every place is connected with some event re- 
nowned in history or art. 

540. Where is Sa?i Marino? 

It is a small republic on the Adriatic Sea. 

541. 7'o ivhat country do the Islands of Sardinia and 
Sicily belong? 

Italy. 

542. What is the extent of the Ottoman Empire? 

It comprises Turkey in Europe, Asiatic Turkey, the Isle 



GEOGRAPHY. 20I 

of Candia, and Egypt. Tripoli, Barca, and Tunis are 
nominally under its cov.trol; also a part of Arabia, Crete 
and other small islands. 

543. Describe the Turks. 

They are a grave-mannered people, ignorant, bigoted 
and indolent. Their religion is Mohammedanism. 

544. How does Turkey compare ivith other European coun- 
tries in regard to civilization, agriculture, and the arts and 
sciences 7 

It is inferior in every particular. The people are not 
energetic, and their civilization is far below the standard. 

545. What are Roumania, Servia and Montenegrol 

They were formerly parts of the Turkish Empire, but 
are now separate Christian States. 

546. What a?e the exports of Turkey? 

Tobacco, wine, olive-oil, cotton, fruits, wool, carpets, 
and morocco leather. 

547. What was Greece in ancient titnes? 

Greece was in advance of all other nations in civilization 
and learning. Athens was the home of many renowned 
philosophers and orators. 

548. What is the shape 0/ Greece? 

Very irregular, projecting southward, and having many 
indentations from the sea, one of which, the Gulf of Le- 
panto, forms the peninsula of Morea, which is connected 
with the mainland by the Isthmus of Corinth. 

549. Name the capital cities 0/ Europe. 

St. Petersburg, Stockholm, Copenhagen, Berlin, The 
Hague, Brussels, Paris, Madrid, Lisbon, Rome, Vienna, 
Athens, Constantinople, Berne, London, Edinburgh. 



202 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

550. With what country is England most extensively en- 
gaged in trade ? 

The United States. 

551. Which is the most northern toivn in Europe^ yet why 
is this port never frozen 1 

Hammerfest. Its immunity from freezing is due to the 
warm waters of the Gulf Stream, which flow by the coast 
of Norway, and the warm southwest return trade-winds. 

552. Name the four most important rivers of Europe. 
The Po, the Rhone, the Rhine and the Danube. 

553- What countries are termed Spanish America? 

Mexico, Central America, West Indies, and the greater 
part of South America. 

554. What is the surface of Mexico? 

The interior consists of tablelands from 4,000 to 9,000 
feet high. The Pacific coast is abrupt and abounds in fine 
harbors; but on the Gulf of Mexico it is flat and sandy, 
and deficient in good harbors. 

555. Are the tablelands accessible from the Gulf? 

Only by two carriage-roads: one by Jalapa, from Vera 
Cruz; the other by Saltillo, from Matamoras and Monterey. 

556. What is the climate? 

As Mexico contains high and low lands, it exhibits a 
great variety of climate. In ascending from the coast to 
the surface of the plateau, there are three regions: the hot, 
swampy and pestilential lowlands; the temperate regions; 
and the cold, desolate plains above. 

557. What are the inhabitants? 

Whites, Indians, and Spanish Creoles. The Indians 
and mixed-bloods form the greater part of the population. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



203 



558. Ho70 are the seasons divided! 

Into the wet and the dry. The rainy season continues 
from May to October, and the dry from October to May. 

559. What are the agricultural products of Mexico 1 
They vary with its climate. Wheat and barley are pro- 
duced in the cooler regions, and cotton, tobacco, sugar- 
cane, tropical fruits and spices in the plains and valleys 
below. 

560. What is its commerce? 

The commerce of Mexico is limited, and is mostly with 
England and the United States. 

561. What are the principal minerals 1 
Gold and silver, iron and copper. 

562. Ho2i> is the City of Mexico situated? 

On a plain 7,000 feet above the level of the sea and en- 
closed by lofty mountains. The city is about two miles 
from Lake Tezcuco, is in the form of a square, and is 
noted for its many churches, convents and plazas. 

563. What two twlcanoes are visible from the city? 
Popocatapetl and Iztaccihuatl. The former is 17,717 

feet high, and its name means Smoking Mountain. The 
latter is 15,600 feet high, and its name means White Lady. 

564. What is cochineal? 

The cochineal is an insect which feeds on a species of 
cactus. When killed and dried on the sun it yields a bril- 
liant crimson dye. 

565. What is pulque? 

Pulque is a favorite Mexican beverage, manufactured 
from the Maguey plant. It is intoxicating. 

566. What is briefly the history of Mexico? 

In 1 52 1 Fernando Cortez, a Spanish adventurer, con- 
quered the country. He found there an extensive kingdom. 



204 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

with regular laws, and with cities, temples, public roads 
and many of the arts of civilization. After the conquest 
the cruelty of the Spaniards drove the Indians back into a 
state of barbarism. In 1821 Mexico became independent 
of Spain, and established first an empire and then a 
republic. The people are restless, and revolutions have 
been common. By the war with the United States, Mexico 
lost much valuable territory. 

567. What petiinsulas belong to this republic^ 

Yucatan and Lower California. They are little known. 
Yucatan is noted for its ruins of ancient cities and temples. 

568. Wh a t is th e govertiment of Mexico ? 

It is a federal republic of twenty-seven states, one 
territory, and a small federal district which contains the 
capital. It was for three centuries the most important 
colony of Spain. 

569. What does Central America comprise 1 

The five independent republics: Guatemala, Honduras, 
Salvador; Nicaragua and Costa Rica, and British Hon- 
duras. Central America bears a general resemblance to 
Mexico. 

570. What are the capital cities! 

San Salvador, Salvador; Managua, Nicaragua; Teguci- 
galpa, Honduras; Guatemala, Guatemala; San Jose', Costa 
Rica; and Belize, British Honduras. 

571. Where is British Honduras? 
South of the eastern part of Yucatan. 

572. What are the exports 0/ British Honduras 1 
Mahogany and other hard cabinet woods, cochineal, 

tortoise shells, sarsaparilla and cocoa-nuts. 

573- What three routes have been projected for a canal 
from the Atlantic to the Pacifici 

Across the Isthmus of Panama; by way of the San Juan 



GEOGRAPHY. 205 

'River and Lake Nicaragua; and by the Isthmus of Tehuan- 
tepec. 

574. How does Mexico compare in size to the United 
States ? 

It is about one-fourth as large. 

575. In what zones is Mexico 1 

The north temperate and the torrid; the Tropic of Cancer 
crosses the central part. 

576. Where are the greatest copper regions in the United 
States? 

In northern Michigan and Wisconsin. 

577. Where is lead found most abundantly? 

In southwestern Wisconsin and those parts of Illinois 
and Iowa which adjoin, in Nevada, and in Colorado. 

578. What are the great stap/e productions of the Southetm 
United States? 

Cotton, tobacco, rice, sugar, corn and sweet potatoes. 

579. Which State produces the most (a) cotton, (b) rice, 
(c) sugar, (d) tobacco, (e) potatoes, (f) corn, (g) wheat? 

(a) Texas; (b) South Carolina; (c) Louisiana; (d) 
Kentucky; (e) New York; (/) Iowa; (g) California. 

580. Which State has the greatest number of (a) swine, 
(b) cattle, (c) horses, (d) mules, (e) sheep? 

(a) Iowa; (b) Texas; (c) Illinois; (d) Missouri; (e) 
Texas. 

581. Which State produces the greatest quantity of gold? 
Silver? Iron? Copper? Lead? Coal? Pine lumber? Tur- 
pentine, resin and tar? 

Gold, California; silver, Colorado; iron, Pennsylvania; 
copper, Michigan; lead, Illinois; coal, Pennsylvania; 
lumber, Michigan; turpentine, etc.. North Carolina. 



2o6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

582. How are turpentine^ resin and tar manufactured! 

Turpentine and resin are made of the sap of the pitch 
pine, by boiling; turpentine is the vapor, while resin is 
what remains. Tar is also made from the pitch, but by 
burning; the timber having been placed in nearly a per- 
pendicular position, and covered to prevent a flame, the 
heat causes the pitch to ooze out and run below, where it 
can be saved. 

583. From what does North Carolina derive her chief 
wealth 1 

From her pine forests. 

584. What is South Carolina often called? 
The "Palmetto State." 

585. What article can be raised extensively in almost all 
the States f 

Corn. 

586. Itito 7iihat physical divisions may 7ve separate the 
Un ited States 1 

Into the Atlantic Slope, the Pacific Slope, and the Cen- 
tral Plain. 

587. What does the Atlantic Slope embrace? 

The country which extends from the Alleghany Moun- 
tains to the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico. 

588. What does the Pacific Slope embrace? 

The country between the Rocky Mountains and the 
Pacific Ocean. 

589. What is included in the Central Plain? 

The Mississippi Valley, the Texas Slope, the basin of 
the St. Lawrence, and the valley of the Red River of the 
North. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



207 



590. Hozv may we divide the United States with reference 
to drainage 1 

Into the St. Lawrence Basin, the Atlantic Slope, the 
Mississippi Valley, the Texas Slope, the Pacific Slope, the 
Inland Basin of Utah, and the Red River Basin. 

591. What is the surface of Asia? 

It is crossed by a system of mountains, tablelands and 
plains. 

592. What division may we make in this country? 
Arctic Asia, Desert Asia, Peninsular Asia and Insular 

Asia. 

593. What part is included in each? 

Arctic Asia takes in the Great Siberian Plain. Desert 
Asia is the belt of high and dry plateaus extending through 
the central sections. Peninsular Asia is the most impor- 
tant division of the continent, and includes Hindoostan, 
Indo-China and Corea, with the projecting part of China. 
Insular Asia includes the richest and most important archi- 
pelagoes in the world. 

594. What portion of the human race is in Peninsular 
Asia ? 

One-half. 

595. What can be said of the productions of Asia? 

As Asia embraces all varieties of climates, its produc- 
tions range from arctic to tropical. 

596. What is the longest inland commercial route on the 
globe ? 

The caravan trade from Pekin through Irkoutsk, Tobolsk, 
to Moscow and St. Petersburg. 

597. Hoiii are the tablelands divided? 

Into those of Central and those of Southern Asia. They 
are the loftiest and most extensive in the world. 



2o8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

598. What countries constitute the Great Northern Plain 
of Asia 1 

Turkestan and Siberia. This is a continuation of the 
great plain of Europe. 

599. Describe the mountain system 0/ Asia. 

It begins with the Taurus Mountains, and is continued 
by the Elburz and Hindoo Koosh to the Balor Mountains. 
Thence it branches off into four great chains — the 
Himalaya, Kuen Lun, Thian Shan, and AIti — which are 
the most stupendous mountains on the globe. 

600. Where is the Great Desert of Gobi? 

Near the central part of Asia, south of the Thian Shan 
Mountains. This is only a part of an immense belt of 
desert land which extends almost across the continent 
from west to east. 

601. What are the climatic divisions! 

The three of Northern, Central, and Southern Asia. 

602. What is the climate of Northern Asia? 

It is characterized by intense cold, with short intervals 
of great heat during the summer. 

603. Describe Siberia. 

It is a great plain, comprising more than one-third of 
Asia. Near the Arctic Ocean it is a barren and desolate 
region, and the cold is so intense that the spongy soil is 
frozen to the depth of several hundred feet. Near the 
Irtysh River the soil is rich and the pasturage good, but 
there are few inhabitants. 

604. What is the climate of Central and Southern Asia? 
Central Asia has the climate of the temperate zone. It 

is subject to great extremes of heat and cold, and, except 
near the shores of the Pacific, is remarkably dry, for the 
mountain system intercepts the warm and moist winds of 



GEOGRAPHY. 209 

the Indian Ocean. Southern Asia has the climate of the 
torrid zone. 

605. To what three races do the inhabitants of Asia 
belong? 

Mongolian, Caucasian and Malay. 

606. What people belong to the Mongolian race 1 

The nations living north of the Himalaya Mountains — 
those of Farther India, the Japanese and the Chinese. 

607. What nations, or tribes, living in Asia belong to the 
Caucasian race? 

The Georgians, Armenians, Arabs, Persians, Afghans 
and Hindoos. 

608. What countries are occupied by the Malay race? 
The peninsula of Malacca, and many of the islands of 

Ocean ica. 

609. For leihat has Siberia long been used? 

For a place of banishment for exiles and criminals. A 
large part of the population consists of them and their de- 
scendants. 

610. 7o 7vhat country does Georgia belong? 
It is a Russian province. 

611. What is noticeable of the inhabitants? 
The people are a vigorous and handsome race. 

612. Iloim is Turkestan divided? 

Into Russian and Independent Turkestan. Russian 
Turkestan contains a number of districts called khanates, 
which are ruled by native rulers, although only as vassals 
of Russia. Independent Turkestan includes those Tartar 
khanates which are not yet annexed by Russia, represent- 
ing only a small area of what was formerly Turkestan. 



2IO COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

6 1 3. What is the Kha?i ? 

The name given to the rulers of the several independent 
states of Turkestan. 

614. What does the Chinese Empire include? 

China, the dependent provinces of Mantchooria, Mon- 
golia, Kashgaria and Thibet. 

6 1 5. What is said of the population of China ? 

It is so dense in some districts that great numbers of 
the inhabitants dwell constantly in boats on the rivers, or 
on rafts on the lakes, which they convert into gardens by 
covering them with earth. They are a very industrious 
people, and jealous of European aggression. 

616. What are the productions of China? 

The most important are rice, tea and silk. Rice is the 
chief article of food for the entire population. 

617. What is the government? 

A despotic empire. The laws are severe; for trifling 
offenses punishment is inflicted with the bamboo whip, 
while serious crimes almost always meet with death. 

618. What about education in China? 

Education is compulsory. All adult males are able to 
read and write and possess a knowledge of the elements of 
arithmetic. 

619. Hoiv are all government officers beloia the emperor 
selected? 

By means of public competitive examinations. 

620. What can be said of these people in regard to trade, 
the arts and sciences ? 

Their domestic commerce is immense, but their foreign 
commerce is in the hands of foreigners. Their skill in 
various occupations cannot be excelled, and many of our 
most useful inventions were known to them hundreds of 



GEOGRAPHY. 2il 

years before they were known to the Europeans, but were 
not put to a practical use. 

621. Describe the great 7s.iall of Chi7ia. For 7vhat purpose 
was it built 1 

The wall is 1,200 miles long, from thirty to forty feet 
high, and twenty feet thick, with many towers and 
equipments for defense. It was built about 211 b.c. to 
keep the Mongol Tartars out of China. 

622. Which are the mos( itnportajit seaports for foreign 
trade ? 

Canton, Shanghai, Ningpo, Fuchow, Amoy. 

623. Name the principal islands of Japan. 
Nipon, Sikoke, Kiusui and Jesso. 

624. What are the chief productions of these islands! 
Rice, wheat, barley, tea, tobacco and camphor. 

625. What is the government of Japan? 
A constitutional monarchy. 

626. What is the emperor called? 
The Mikado. 

627. Ho7i< do the Japanese compare in enlightenment ivith 
the Chinese? 

They surpass the Chinese in intelligence and equal them 
in mechanical skill. Although of related races, they differ 
greatly in their language and political institutions. They 
are quick to adopt the great inventions of the white civil- 
ized peoples, such as their military systems, lighthouses, 
steam-power and electricity. 

628. What two peninsulas comprise India? 
Hindoostan and Indo-China. 

629. What does British India iticlude? 

Nearly all of Hindoostan and the western coast of Indo- 



212 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

China. It is the richest and most important dependency 
ever possessed by any nation. 

630. Ho7v is Jndo-China divided? 

Between Burmah, Siam, Anam and many smaller inde- 
pendent states. All have despotic governments. 

631. W/iat peculiarity is found in the literature of the 
Hindoos 1 

It is written in a peculiar poetical and religious 
phraseology which has been in use since long before the 
Christian era. Besides being poetical, the Hindoos are 
almost universally musical. 

632. What is the government of British India! 

A Governor-General and a Supreme Council are ap- 
pointed by the British government. The Queen of England 
is Empress of India. 

633. What atid where is Ceylon? 

It is a rich and populous island south of Hindoostan, and 
a separate colony of Great Britain. 

634. Where is Cochin-China? 

The southeastern coast of Indo-China is called Cochin- 
China. 

635. Where do the Fretich hold possessions? 

They possess an important province in the southwestern 
part, with Saigon for its capital. 

C36. What ai-e the productions of India? 
Cotton, rice, wheat, opium, sugar, indigo, jute, fine silk 
fabrics and costly cashmere shawls. 

637. For 7iihat is Ceylon especially noted? 
For its coffee and cinnamon. 

638. Describe Afghanistan. 

Persia, Afghanistan and Beloochistan occupy the desert 



GEOGRArnV. 213 

plateau of Iran, between the valleys of the Tigris and the 
Indus. The people of Afghanistan are hardy, warlike, and 
divided among many tribes. As this country is the chief 
route from India to Western Asia, it is of great commercial 
and military importance. 

639. What can be said of Beloochistan ? 

This country is mostly a barren wilderness, and consists 
of a number of small states under the headship of the Khan 
of Kelat. 

640. What is the government 0/ Persia? 

A despotic monarchy, with a sovereign called a Shah. 

641. What is the surface 0/ Arabia? 

The greater part is a desert plateau. The principal 
fertile tracts are Oman and Yemen, and the mountain 
valleys. 

642. Describe the inhabitants. 

The greater part of them are Bedouins, a wandering 
people who live in the deserts, devoting themselves to the 
care of their camels, horses, goats and sheep. They are 
generous and hospitable, but vengeful and addicted to 
plunder. 

643. For what are Mecca and Medina noted? 

Mecca is regarded by Mohammedans as a holy city, the 
birthplace of Mohammed, and is annually visited by vast 
numbers of pilgrims. Medina is venerated as the burial- 
place of Mohammed. 

644. What is the general appearance 0/ the Persians ? 
They are polite in their manners, and, having a compara- 
tively high civilization, are often called the French of Asia. 

645. What can be said of the past history of Persia ? 

It was once one of the grandest and most formidable 
governments of the world. 



214 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK:. 

646. Describe Arabia. 

Arabia is about one-third as large as the United States. 
A great plateau, having many large and fertile valleys, 
occupies the interior; surrounding this is a broad belt of 
deserts, covering more than one-third of the peninsula; 
while along the coasts is a. low and narrow sandy plain, 
containing a few fertile districts. 

647. What is its govemmeufi 

There are several independent states in Arabia, governed 
by despots called Sultans. 

648. Name the peninsulas of Asia. 

Arabia, Hindoostan, Malacca, Korea, and Kamtschatka 

649. Where is the Isthmus of Krazv? 

It connects Malacca with the mainland. 

650. Which is the most elevated lake i?i the world? 
Sirikol, the source of the Amoo River, on the tableland 

of Pamer. It is 15,600 feet above the level of the sea. 

651. Where is Palestine? 

Palestine is in the northeastern part of Arabia, on the 
Mediterranean Sea. 

652. Where is fcrusalem? 
Jerusalem is the chief city of Palestine. 

653. How wide is Bering Strait? Dover? Gibraltar? 
Bering forty miles, Dover thirty, Gibraltar twelve. 

654. How 7i>ide is the Isthmus of Panama? Suez? Te- 
huantepec? 

Panama twenty-seven miles, Suez sixty-five, Tehuantepec 
one hundred and thirty. 

655. Which are the five largest islands in the world? 
Australia, Greenland, Borneo, New Guinea and Mada- 
gascar. 



GEOGRAPHY. 



215 



656. What are the sizes of the oceans 1 

The Pacific Ocean contains about 82,000,000 square 
miles; the Atlantic, 30,000,000; the Indian, 22,000,000; 
the Antarctic, 12,000,000; and the Arctic, 4,000,000. 

657. In the production of 7vhat minerals does Great Britain 
exceed every other country t 

Coal, iron, salt, lead, and tin. 

658. Name the largest sez'en rivers in the United States. 
Describe them. 

Mississippi, Missouri, Arkansas, Rio Grande, Columbia, 
Nebraska, and Red. 

659. What are the principa I uses of rivers ? 
For drainage, commerce and milling. 

660. What important places of the globe are situated on or 
near the 40th parallel north latitude? 

Philadelphia, Columbus, Indianapolis, Springfield, Denver, 
Pekin, Constantinople, and Madrid. 

661. What part of the United States is in the same latitude 
north of the equator^ that the southern part of Africa is south 
of it? 

The boundary line which divides the States of Missis- 
sippi, Alabama and Georgia from Tennessee. 

662. What are the latitudes of Cape Horn and the Cape 
of Good Hope? 

Cape Horn is fifty-three degrees south, and Good Hope 
about thirty-two degrees. 

663. What is the difference between the natural location of 
commercial afid ma?iufacturing cities? 

Commercial cities require good harbors and water com- 
munication to facilitate commerce, while manufacturing 
cities depend very much upon water power to run their 
machinery. 



2i6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

664. Why is the water of Great Salt Lake not fresh ? 
Lakes of this class lose water by evaporation only, and 

retain the salt and other materials carried into them by 
their affluent rivers. 

665. Name five of the principal articles exported by the 
people of the United States. 

Cotton, wheat, pork, cheese, machinery. 

666. Name some of the principal articles importedl 
Wool, tea, coffee and spices, dry goods, sugar and 

liquors. 

667. What are the great waterways for the internal com- 
merce of the United States? 

The Atlantic system, the Mississippi system, the Great 
Lakes with the St. Lawrence River, and the canals. 

668. Describe the Mississippi system. 

This system contains fifty-six great tributaries, containing 
17,000 miles navigable to steamboats and more than 
20,000 by barge. It carries an immense commerce, but in 
some localities the annual floods and droughts prevent a 
continuous shipment. Below the mouth of the Ohio the 
Mississippi sometimes rises more than fifty feet. 

669. What does the St. Lawrence system comprise? 

The Great Lakes and the navigable streams which flow 
into and through the St. Lawrence River. This system is 
closed for several months in the year on account of ice, but 
floods or droughts never affect it. 

670. Where are the chief canals? 

They lie at the entrance of Lake Superior, the Niagara 
Falls, the Rapids of the St. Lawrence and the Erie Canal. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



READING. 



1. What is reading? 

The enunciation of written language. 

2. What is elocution f 

The delivery of composition. 

3. What does elocution embrace! 
Orthoepy and expression. 

4. What is expression 1 
The manner of delivery. 

5. What mental qualifications must a good reader possess 
and employ i 

A clear conception. 

A vivid imagination. 

Real sympathy. 

The faculty of imitation. 

Vocal power. 

Artistic skill. 

Precise judgment. 

6. What are the physical requisites for good reading? 
Distinct articulation. 

Full and free respiration. 

217 



2i8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Perfect control of a clear, full, round, musical tone of 
voice. 

Graceful and expressive action. 
Cultivated taste and judgment. 

7. What, then, does good reading demandt 
Articulation, Accent, Emphasis, Inflection, Modulation, 

and Pauses. 

8. What objects are to be aimed at in the study and teaching 
of reading 1 

The acquisition of great knowledge. 

The acquisition of a love for reading. 

The improvement of the memory, judgment and taste. 

Improvement of the social faculties. 

Improvement of the health. 

A graceful carriage and address. 

A preparation for public life. 

The prevention and correction of improprieties. 

9. What does orthoepy embrace? 
Articulation, Syllabication, and Accent. 

10. Define articulation. 

It is the utterance of the oral elements. 

1 1. What is correct articulation ? 

Accurate and distinct utterance of the elementary 
sounds. 

12. J-foiu can a good articulation be acquired? 

By continued practice of the utterance of the elemen- 
tary sounds, and an observance of the phonetic analysis of 
syllables and words. 

13. What is Phonetic Analysis? 

It is the separation of syllables and words into the 
elementary sounds of which they are composed. 



READING. 



219 



14. What is an elementary sound? 

It is the simplest distinct sound made by the organs of 
speech. 

15. What are oral elements? How produced? 

They are the elementary sounds that form syllables and 
words, and are produced by the positions of the organs of 
speech in connection with the breath. 

16. Into what classes are the elementary sounds of the 
English language divided? 

They are divided into vocals, subvocals, and aspirates. 

17. Define each of these. 

Vocals are pure tones, and are the prominent elements of 
all words. 

Subvocals are those consonants which produce an under- 
tone of voice when their sounds are uttered. 

Aspirates are mere whispers made by the organs of 
speech and breath. 

18. Give a list of the most common faults in articulation. 

Suppression of vocal sounds in unaccented syllables. 
Suppression of subvocal and aspirate sounds. 
Incorrect articulation of vocal sounds. 
Omission and addition of syllables. 

Blending the end of one word with the beginning of the 
next. 

19. What is accentuation? 

The act of applying accents in reading and speaking. 

20. What is accent? 

The force given to one or more syllables of a word. 

21. Hoiv are accented syllables designated? 
By a mark, thus, ('); as command' ment. 



2 20 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

2 2, Name and define the kinds of accent 
Primary and secondary: the primary calls for the more 
forcible stress of voice, and the secondary the less forcible. 

23. When hvo syllables of a word are accented^ which has 
the greater force / 

The primary. 

24. What are the expressiofts 0/ speech? 

Emphasis, Slur, Inflection, Modulation, Monotone, 
Personation, and Pauses. 

25. What is emphasis] 

The force given to one or more words of a sentence. 

26. What is the object 0/ emphasis? 

To attract particular attention to the word or phrase 
upon which it is placed. 

27. How is it accomplished? 

Usually by an increased stress or emphasis, but some- 
times by an unusual lowering of the voice, even to a 
whisper. 

28. Define slur. 

It is the smooth, gliding, subdued movement of the voice 
used in parenthetic clauses, with words contrasted or re- 
peated, and in explanation. 

29. Ho7a are eniphaiic jvords distinguished in print? 
By italics, small capitals, and CAPITALS. 

30. When should emphatic words be used? 

When words and phrases are important in meaning, or 
when they point out a difference; when emphatic words 
are repeated, or when a succession of important words or 
phrases occurs. 

31. How many kinds ofi emphasis are there? 
Two: absolute and antithetic. 



READING. 22 1 

32. What is absolute emphasis 1 

That which is used to designate the important words of 
a sentence, without any direct reference to other words. 

2)2,- Define antithetic emphasis. 

It is founded on the contrast of one word or clause with 
another. 

34. What are inflections'} 

The upward or downward slides of the voice. 

35. Ho70 many inflect iotis are there 1 

Three; the rising, the falling, and the circumflex. 

36. What is the circumflex? 

A union of the rising and falling inflections, beginning 
with the one and ending with the other. 

37. What is a series? 

A number of words or phrases following one another in 
the same sentence. 

38. What is a commencing series, and what a concluding 
series ? 

Where a succession of particulars occurs at the begin- 
ning or middle of a sentence it is called a commencing 
series. Where it terminates a sentence it is a concluding 
series. 

39. What is monotone? 
A sameness of tone. 

40. What is irafisition ? 

A change in the manner of expression. 

41. Define monotony. 

Monotony is a frequent occurrence of the same tone, 
without reference to the sense. 

42. When is the rising inflection used? 

It is generally used when the sense is incomplete; in 



222 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

questions which may be answered by yes or no; when a 
word or sentence is repeated as a kind of interrogatory 
exclamation; usually in negative sentences- and in the last 
sentence but one of a passage. 

43. When is the falling in/lection used? 

When the sense is incomplete; when language demands 
strong emphasis; in exclamations; and in questions which 
cannot be answered by yes or no. 

44. Jti what is the circumflex mainly used? 

In the language of irony, sarcasm and contrast. 

45. What is modulation, and how is it divided? 

Modulation is the variation of the voice made in reading 
and speaking, and is divided into pitch, force, quality, and 
rate. 

46. What is pitch, and how divided? 

Pitch is the degree of elevation of the voice, and is 
divided into high, moderate and low. High pitch is that 
which rises above the usual speaking key, and is used in 
expressing joyous and elevated feelings. Moderate pitch 
is that which is heard in common conversation, and is 
used in expressing ordinary thought and moderate emo- 
tion. Low pitch is that which falls below the usual speak- 
ing key, and is employed in expressing emotions of 
sublimity, awe and reverence. 

47. Define force and its divisions. 

Force is the volume, or loudness of voice, and is divided 
into loud, moderate and gentle. Loud force is used in 
expressing violent passions and vehement emotions. Mod- 
erate force is a medium loudness of voice, and is employed 
in narrative, description, and ordinary assertion. Gentle 
or subdued force is employed to express fear, caution, 
secrecy, solemnity, and tender emotions. 



READING. 



223 



48. Define rate, and tell /iota it is classified. 

Rate is the speed of utterance, and is divided into 
quick, moderate and slow. Quick rate is used to express 
joy, mirth, violent anger and sudden fear. Moderate rate 
is employed for the same purposes as moderate force. 
Slow rate is used to express grandeur, vastness, pathos, 
horror and consternation. 

49. IVhat is quality^ and /low divided? 

Quality has reference to the kinds of sound uttered, and 
is divided into the pure tone, orotund, aspirate, guttural, 
and trembling. 

50. What is the difiference bet2vee7i quantity and pitch? 
Quantity has reference to loudness or volume of sound; 

pitch to the elevation or depression of a tone. 

51. What is the difiference between force and emphasis? 

Force is the energy with which the whole is uttered; 
emphasis is the stress on a particular portion.* 

52. What is cadence? 

The dropping of the voice at the end of the sentence, 
which indicates that the sense is complete. 

53. What is stress? 

The manner in which force is applied. 

5 4 . Wh a t is dim ax? 

Climax is an utterance gradually increasing in intensity, 
and changing in pitch and movement. 

5 5 . Define grouping. 

Grouping is that nice modulation and adaptation of 
the voice to the sentiment expressed which renders the 
utterance not only more impressive but more pleasing to 
the ear. 

56. What is pure tone J 

A clear, smooth, flowing sound, with moderate pitch. 



224 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

57. What is the orotund quality 1 

The pure tone deepened, enlarged and intensified, and 
is adapted to the expression of the sublime and pathetic 
emotions. 

58. Describe the aspirated tone. 

An expulsion of the breath, the words being spoken in a 
whisper. 

59. What is the guttural quality t 

A deep undertone, expressing hatred, contempt, loath- 
ing. 

60. When is the trembling tone used? 

The trembling tone is a constant waver of the voice, 
used to express an intense degree of suppressed excite- 
ment, or in representing the speech of enfeebled old age. 

6 1 . What is personation ? 

Changes of the voice necessary to represent two or more 
persons speaking. 

62. What are pauses? 

Suspensions of the voice in reading or speaking. 

63. What are grammatical pauses ? 
Pauses indicated by punctuation marks. 

64. Define rhetorical pauses. 

They are suspensions of the voice which the sense 
requires when a grammatical pause is not admissible. 

65. What are etymological points? 

Points used to indicate something in regard to the 
formation, use, or omission of words or parts of words. 

66. Explain the apostrophe, caret, diuresis, marks of 
quantity, marks of accent, hyphen, period. 

The apostrophe (') is used to show the omission of a 
letter or letters; as, Sec'y. 



READING. 225 

The rar^/ (a) is used to show some omissions in writing; 
as, come 

"The king is (a) to marshal us." 

The dicRresis marks the separation of contiguous vowels; 
as, preengage. 

Marks of qua?itity are used to show that the vowel is 
long or short, and are placed over the letters, (' "). 

The marks of accent express the tones of the voice and 
are the grave (' ), the acute ('), and the circumflex ("). 

The hyphen (-) is used to separate syllables, or to unite 
the parts of a compound word. 

ThQ period (.) is used to show the abbreviation of a 
word; as, lat. for latitude. 

67. What are the points of ?eference? 

Points used to refer the reader to some other place 
on the page or the book; they are: the Asterisk (*); 
the Obelisk or Dagger (f); the Double Dagger (J); the Sec- 
tion (§); Parallels (||); the Paragraph (H). If necessary, 
these points may be doubled. 

68. What is suspensive quantity] 

Prolongation of the voice at the end of a word without 
making an actual pause. 

69. What does quaiitity emb?'ace? 
Force and rate. 

70. What is the difference betiveen enunciation atid pronun- 
ciation ? 

Enunciation is the utterance of words; pronunciation, 
the mode of utterance. 

71. What quality of voice is generally used in reading and 
speaking? 

The pure tone. 

72. What determines the proper accent of words? 
General usage. 



2 26 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

73. How is inflection sometimes affected by emphasis i 

It sometimes changes the falling to the rising inflection. 

74. What is the difference between the construction of prose 
and poetry 1 

Prose pays no attention to the melodious arrangement 
of its words, while poetry is written with regard to the 
feet in each line, or the rhyme, or both. 

75. What is a parenthetic clause, and how should it be 
read? 

Something abruptly introduced into a sentence for the 
purpose of modifying, explaining or adding to the leading 
proposition. It should be read in a lower voice. 

76. When melody comes into conflict with accent, which must 
yield? 

Accent. 

77. Give a principle 0/ reading that will admit 0/ general 
application. 

Be sure that you understand what you read, and en- 
deavor to express the sentiments of the author as you 
would express them if they were your own and you were 
talking. 

78. What are some of the essential qualities of good 
readifig? 

To read slowly, mind the pauses, give the proper inflec- 
tions, speak plainly, and read as if talking. 

79. Give rules for the use of capitals. 

Capital letters are used : 

To begin the first word of a sentence; 

To begin proper names; 

To begin titles of honor; 

To begin the first word of every line of poetry; 

To begin the names of objects personified; 



READING. 



227 



In writing the pronoun I, and the interjection O; 

To begin appellations of the Deity; 

To begin the names of the days of the week and of 

the month; 
To begin direct quotations; 
To begin words derived from proper names; 
To begin the chief words in the titles of books, head 

ings of divisions of books, chapters, discourses, 

etc.; 
To begin words of special importance. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



1. What is E?iglish grammar I 

The art of speaking and writing tiie English language 
correctly. 

2. What is the object of studying grammar? 

To be able to understand, speak, and write a language 
correctly. 

3. What is language? 

Any method of communicating thought or feeling. 

4. What can you say of the composition of language ? 
It is of two kinds, prose and verse. 

5. Into what parts is grammar divided? 
Pronunciation, orthography, etymology, syntax and 

prosody. 

6. Of what does pronwiciation treat? 
Of the sounds of letters and syllables. 

7. Define etymology. 

It treats of the different parts of speech, their derivation 
and modification. 

8. Of what does syntax treat? 

Of the arrangement and relation of words in sentences. 

229 



230 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

9. Of w fiat does prosody treat 1 

Of versification, punctuation, figures and utterance. 

10. What is the basis of grammar 1 
The usage of the best authors. 

1 1. Of what does language consist? 

Of sounds which, combined, form words which represent 
ideas. 

12. How are words classified, and on what groiindsl 

As nouns when they are names of beings, places or 
things; 

As pronouns when they are substitutes for names or facts; 

As adjectives when they qualify or limit names; 

As verbs when they assert action, being or condition; 

As adverbs when they modify an assertion or a quality; 

As prepositions when they express relations of things or 
of thought; 

As conjunctions when they introduce or connect words 
and sentences; 

As exclamations when they express a sudden or intense 
emotion; and 

As words of euphony when they are used for rhetorical 
effect. 

13. By 7vhat general name are the different classes ofiawrds 
called] 

Parts of speech. 

14. How are the ?iouns divided? 
Into proper and common. 

15. How are conunon nouns again divided? 
Into collective, abstract and verbal. 

16. What is a collective noun? 

One that denotes a group or number of objects. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 231 

1 7. What is an abstract noun ? 

The name of some quality of a substance. 

1 8. What is a participial noun i 

A participle or infinitive used as a noun. 

19. When does a proper noun become a common noun? 
When it is used to denote a whole class; as, "The Wash- 
ington s of the world are few." 

20. When does a common noun become proper? 

When personified, or used as a proper noun; as, "Come, 
gentle Spring!" 

21. What is the office of a pronoun ? 
To avoid the repetition of nouns. 

22. What is the antecedent 0/ a pronotin? 

The word, phrase or clause which the pronoun represents. 

23. What is the subsequent 0/ a pronoun? 
Interrogatives or relatives of the interrogative kind, when 

they are used in asking questions, have no antecedents, but 
relate to some word or phrase contained in the answer, 
which is called the subsequent. 

24. What is the difference between antecedent and subse- 
quent? 

The antecedent signifies that which goes before, the 
subsequent that which follows. 

25. Into what c/asses are pronouns divided? 
Personal, relative, interrogative and adjective. 

26. What is a personal pronoun ? 
One which distinguishes the persons. 

27. Name the personal pronouns. 

/, thou ox you, he, she and //, with their compounds and 
declined forms, are the personal pronouns. 



232 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

?8. Where are thou, thy, thine, thee and ye, usedl 

In the Bible and addresses to the Deity, in the conversa- 
tion and correspondence of certain religious sects, and 
often in poetry and romance. 

29. In parsing, what disposition should be made of the 
pronouns ours, yours, hers, theirs ««//mine? 

As these words are equivalent to a noun and pronoun, 
the parsing should correspond with the words which they 
represent. 

30. What is the peculiarity about the ptonou7i it? 

The antecedent of zV is sometimes considered lost, when 
the pronoun denotes merely the state or . condition of 
things, or a point of time, or when it introduces a sentence 
and is explained; as, "It rains"; "It is twelve o'clock"; 
"It was moonlight"; It is mean to take advantage of 
another's distress." Some authors consider // in the above 
examples as having no antecedent, yet, if we observe closely, 
there may be one somewhat remote; as, in the first ex- 
ample, we might use clouds for the antecedent; in the 
second example, time; in the third, night; and in the last, 
act, as, "The act is mean," etc. 

31. What is a compound personal pronoun? 

My, thy, your, him, her, or //, compounded with self to 
form the singular; and our, your, and them, compounded 
with selves to form the plural. 

32. What is a relative pronoun? 

A pronoun which joins a descriptive clause to its ante- 
cedent. 

33. To what are the relatives who ^//^ which applied? 
Who is applied to persons only; 7t>hich to persons or 

things. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



'ZZ 



34. Hojv is the telative what used? 

What is used in place of t/iat jvhich or things which, and 
may denote persons or things. 

35. When is as a relative pronoun 1 When is the 7C'ord 
that ? 

When it is preceded by such, many, or same, and relates 
to the objects thus specified. That is a relative pronoun 
when it is equivalent to 7c<ho, 7vhoin or which. 

36. What pronoun is used 70 hen the antecedent is supplied? 
The pronoun ichich. 

37. What are the compound relative pronouns? 

Who, which, and ichat, with ever and soever annexed. 

38. What is an interrogative pronoun ? 
One used to ask a question. 

39. What is a responsive, or indirect interrogative pronoun? 
One used indirectly as an interrogative; as, "Tell me 

7vhat truth is." 

40. IVhat are adjective pronouns, and how are they divided? 

Adjectives sometimes used as pronouns. They are 
divided into four classes: distributive, demonstrative, in- 
definite, and reciprocal. 

41. To 7vhat do distributive pronouns relate? 

To objects taken singly. They are each, either, and 
neither. 

42. What is the difference between the demonstrative and 
indefinite pronouns ? 

The demonstrative pronouns point out objects definitely, 
while the indefinite relate to objects indefinitely. The 
demonstratives are this, these, that, those, same, former, latter. 
The indefinites are one, ones, other, others, any, some, such, 
all, both, and none. 



234 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

43. What do recipfocal pronouns denote 1 

They have the same signification, and consequently are 
convertible, and may be used for each other. 

44. How should either, neither, each other, and one 
another be used? 

In speaking of two, either, neither and each other should 
be used; but in speaking of more than two, one another. 

45. How should this and th?it be used? 

That should be applied to the more distant, the first 
mentioned, or the absent; this, to the nearer, the last men- 
tioned, or the present. 

46. What properties have nouns and pronouns? 
Gender, person, number and case. 

47. When are objects personified? 

When they are regarded as persons. Nouns sometimes 
acquire gender by personification. 

48. In personified objects, when is the masculine gender 
preferred? 

When the character of the object denotes size, power or 
domineering qualities; as, "The Sun seemed shorn of his 
beams." "Lo, steel-clad WarYixs, gorgeous standard rears." 

49. When is the feminine gender preferred? 

When the character of the object is noted for beauty, 
amiability, productiveness or submission, as "Soon Peace 
shall come with all her smiling train." The earth, the 
moon, a ship, when personified, are given the feminine gen- 
der. 

50. What are the methods of distinguishing the tivo sexes? 

By different words, by diff'erent endings, and by a dis- 
tinguishing word; as, father, mother; emperor, empress; 
wrt'^-servant, »m/(/-servant. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



235 



51. When and ho7ii are proper noiais made plural f 
When they refer to a class of the same character, they 

are made plural by adding j when it does not coalesce in 
sound, otherwise es; as, the Cherokees; the Napoleons; 
the Van Nesses. 

52. What class o/twuns is generally used in the singular 
numherl Hotv may they be Jised in the plural? 

The names of substances, actions, states, qualities, arts, 
sciences and diseases, when they refer to the kind of thing; 
but when different kinds are meant they are plural; as, 
wine, wines; tea, teas ; fei'er, fevers; religion, religions. 

53. When is a collective nou?i singular? When plural? 
When the whole group is regarded as one thing, it is 

singular, but plural when different groups are meant, or 
when it refers to the individuals composing a group; as, 
the army is large; the armies are moving; the congregation 
owns a church; the congregations are of various national- 
ities; most people are eager to succeed. 

54. How are most nouns made plural? 

By adding s to the singular; but those ending in /, 0, u, 
y, preceded by a consonant, or in s, x, z, sli, and soft ch, 
add es. 

55. What is the origin 0/ the use 0/ the possessive sign 's? 
It is the abbreviation of the old English ending es or 7s; 

the sign (') being called an apostrophe, because it indi- 
cates the omission of the e or /. 

56. Ho2a are most compound 7vords made plural? 

By making plural that part described by the rest; as 
mouse-traps, cupfuls. 

57. How are the titles Mr., Mrs., Miss and Dr. made 
plural? 

Mr., Dr. and Miss are made plural by annexations; as 



236 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Messrs., Drs., Misses. When the title is Mrs., or when a 
numeral stands before the title, the title is made plural; as, 
the Ahsdames Brown, the two Misses Smith. 

58. JIo7if is the phiral of foreign fiouns formed? 

Most of them retain their foreign plurals when used in 
the English language. 

59. Hoiu are classic words ending in a, us, um or on, is, 
X or Qx c/ianged to form the plural? 

When the ending is a, it is changed to (C or a/a, r/s is 
changed to /, um or on to a, is to es or ides, x or ex to ces 
or cies. 

60. Form the plural of the following words: Formula, 
larva, nebula, vertebra, focus, radius, sarcophagus, stimulus, 
phenomenon, datum, analysis, synthesis, axis, basis, crisis, 
emphasis, oasis, parenthesis, thesis. 

Formula?, larvae, nebulse, vertebrae, foci, radii, sarcophagi, 
stimuli, phenomena, data, analyses, syntheses, axes, bases, 
crises, emphases, oases, parentheses, theses. 

61. How are letters and figures made plural? 
By annexing 'j; as, the Vs; thej^. 

62. What is enallage as used in grammar? 

A change of words, or a substitution of one gender, 
number, case, person, tense, mode or voice of the same 
word, for another. 

63. What is case? Name the cases. 

That property of nouns and pronouns which shows 
their relation to other words. The cases are nominative, 
possessive, and objective. 

64. When is a noun or pronoun used in particular cases? 
It is used in the nominative when it is the subject of a 

verb; in the objective when it is the object of a verb or 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



237 



preposition; and in the possessive when it denotes 
possession. 

65. When is a noun or pronoun used independently'} 

In direct address: '■^Jo/in, your father is here." In 
exclamation: "Alas, poor Yorick!"" In pleonasm or 
specification: '■'^ He that hath ears, let him hear." 

66. Ho-iU is the possessive case usually denoted"} 

By adding s in the singular number, and putting the 
apostrophe after the s in the plural. 

67. How can the possessive case be expressed without the 
apostrophe? 

By using of; as, "The death of Socrates." 

68. When are two terms iti apposition, and 7vhen is one 
predicated by the other 1 Jn what must these terms agree] 

When a verb joins the terms, one is predicated of the 
other; as, "He is president." When no verb joins them, 
the latter term is in apposition with the former; as, 
"Webster, the orator." These terms must agree in case. 

69. How is a compound term expressed in the possessive 
case / 

It takes the possessive sign but once; generally at the 
end, or next to the name of the object possessed; as, "The 
court martiaCs decision," ^^ Daniel Webster's oration." 

70. When is a noun or pronoun in the same case as 
another! 

When it denotes the same person or thing. 

71. Jn how many cases are compound personal pronouns 
used ? 

Only in the nominative and objective cases, and then 
they retain the same form. 

72. Decline v<iho, which, what, and ih.a.t'i 
Nominative ivho, possessive 7vhose, objective whom; 



238 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

jv/iich and 7v/iat have the same form in the nominative and 
objective, but borrow whose for their possessive. That is 
not declined. 

73. Whe?i may that have two cases 1 

When it is a relative, and equivalent to that which. 

74. What is declension? 

A regular arrangement of the grammatical properties of 
a noun or pronoun. 

75. How are the articles the, a, and an used] 

The is used to point out a particular one, object or class; 
a or ««, to show that no particular one of a class is meant. 

76. Why are both a and an called the indefinite article 1 

Because they have the same meaning. As is used when 
the next word begins with a consonant sound; an., when 
the next word begins with a vowel sound. 

77. What is an adjective] 

A word used to qualify or limit the meaning of a noun 
or pronoun. 

78. How are the adjectives divided! 
Into descriptive and definitive. 

79. Define each class. 

The descriptive adjective describes or qualifies; the 
definitive specifies or limits. 

80. Into what smaller classes are adjectives divided] 
Into common, proper, numeral, pronominal, participial 

and compound. 

81. Define a common adjective. 

The common adjective expresses quality. 

82. Define a proper adjective. 

A proper adjective is one derived from a proper name. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 



239 



83. What is a participial adjective t 
A participle used as an adjective. 

84. What is a cofnpound adjective? 

A compound word used as an adjective. 

85. What is a numeral adjective? 
One that expresses number. 

86. How are the numeral adjectives divided? 

Into cardinal, ordinal, multiplicative, and indefinite. 

87. Give examples of each class. 

The cardinals are one, two, etc. ; the ordinals, Jirsf, second, 
etc.; the multiplicative, single, double; the indefinite, few, 
many. 

88. What is a pronominal adj'ective? 
One sometimes used as a pronoun. 

89. Into what classes are pronominal adjectives divided? 
The distributive, the demonstrative and the indefinite, 
go. What modifications have adjectives ? 

Number and comparison. 

9 1 . What is comparison ? 

A variation in the form of adjectives and adverbs to 
denote different degrees of meaning. 

92. Ho7V many degrees are there? 

Three: positive, comparative and superlative. 

93. Define the respective degrees. 

The positive degree expresses the quality of the ad- 
jective; the comparative expresses the quality in a 
higher or lower degree; the superlative expresses the 
quality in the highest or lowest degree. 

94. What parts of speech have comparison? 
Adjectives and adverbs. 



240 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

95. How are degrees below the positive expressed! 
Usually by adding less and least. 

96. When should more <?rmost be preferred in comparison ? 
Usually with adjectives of more than two syllables, or 

those of two syllables that do not end in le or_>'. 

97. What is the difference between comparison ascending 
and comparison descending! 

One expands in volume of expression, or grows greater 
in its comparison, while the other decreases with the 
prefixes less and least. 

98. When are adjectives redufidant? 

When they have more than one form for the superlative; 
as, near, nearer, nearest or next. 

99. When adjectives of one syllable and those of several 
syllables come together, which are placed frst atid ho7v are they 
compared] 

The monosyllables are placed first, and all are compared 
by prefixing more and most; as, "The more ttice and elegant 
parts." 

100. Must adjectives always agree ivith their substantives 
in number! 

Yes, although the substantive is not always expressed. 

1 01. When does an adjective become a noun! 

When it is used abstractly, or in place of a noun of 
which it expresses quality; as, the briny deep, the good. 

102. What is a veti) ! A regular verb ! An irregular verb ! 
A verb is a word used to state the act or state of the 

subject. A regular verb is one that forms its past tense by 
adding ed; an irregular verb does not add ed. 

103. What are the principal parts of a verb! 

The present tense, past tense, present participle, and 
perfect participle. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



241 



104. Why are these called the principal parts 1 

By means of these and the auxiliary verbs all the other 
parts of the verb can be formed. 

105. What is a redutidatit verb? A defective verbl A finite 
verb ? 

A redundant verb is one which has more than one form 
for some of its principal parts. A defective verb is wanting 
in some of its principal parts. A finite verb predicates 
the act or state of its subject. 

106. What parts of a verb are not finite? 
The infinitives and participles. 

107. What is a transitive verb? An intransitive verb? 

A transitive verb is one which has or requires an object. 
An intransitive does not have or require an object. 

108. When may a transitive verb become intransitive ? 
When its chief design is to set forth an act and leave 

the object unknown. "She reads well." 

109. When may an intransitive verb become transitive? 

In poetical expressions, in a causative sense, and in idi- 
omatic expressions; as, to 7narch armies, I laughed myself 
hoarse. 

1 1 o. What is a neuter verb ? 

One which expresses state without action or the receiv- 
ing of action. 

111. What is a principal, and 7vhat an auxiliary verb? 

A principal verb expresses the chief act or state. An 
auxiliary verb helps other verbs to express their grammatical 
properties. 

112. Define a redundant verb. 

A redundant verb is so called because it has more than 
one form for some of the modes and tenses. 



242 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOR'. 

1 1 3. Give examples of redundant verbs. 

Be, awake, bereave, bet, dig, dwell, lean, keep, hang, gild, 
kneel, hew, knit. 

114. What properties have verb si 
Voice, mode, tense, person and number. 

115. Define voice^ mode and tense 1 

Voice shows whether the subject does or receives the act. 
Mode is manner of assertion. Tense expresses time. 

1 1 6. What are the person and number of a verb ? 
The form of the verb to agree with the subject. 

117. When is a verb in the active or passive voice? 

In the active when the subject acts, in the passive when 
it receives the act. 

118. How is a verb in the active voice changed into the 
passive] 

By using the object of a verb for the subject. 

119. To what verbs does voice belong? 
To transitive verbs only. 

120. How many modes are there? 

Four: indicative, subjunctive, potential and imperative. 
Some grammarians add an infinitive mode. 

121. Define them. 

The indicative indicates or declares a fact. The poten- 
tial expresses power, possibility, jiberty, inclination, duty 
and necessity. The subjunctive expresses a wish, an un- 
certainty or a future contingency. The imperative com- 
mands or entreats. 

122. What is the difference between the forms of the indi- 
cative and subjunctive modes? 

The only difference is in the third person singular of two 
of the tenses, the present and the present-perfect. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR, 243 

1 23. How many tenses are there in each of the modes i 
There are six in the indicative; three in the subjunc- 
tive — the present, past, and past-perfect; in the potential, 
four — the present, present-perfect, past and past-perfect; 
and in the imperative, one — the present tense. 

I 24. What are the signs 0/ the tenses? 

In the indicative mode have is the sign of the present- 
perfect tense; hail the sign of the past-perfect; shall or 
will, of the future; shall have or 7vill have, of the future- 
perfect. The present or past tense is the simplest form, 
expressing present or past time. The signs of the present 
potential are may, can^ must; of the present-perfect, may 
have, can have, must have; of the past, might, could, would, 
should; of the past-perfect, might have, could have, would 
have, should have. The three tenses of the subjunctive 
mode are the same in form as the indicative, except in the 
singular number of the present and past tense, which takes 
the plural form without variation. The imperative has the 
same form as the present indicative. 

125. What are the forms of a tense? 

The dififerent ways in which it can be expressed; as the 
common form, the emphatic, the progressive, the passive 
and solemn. 

126. What is the emphatic form of a verb? 

That which denotes emphasis, by making .-f^ or did a 
part of the verb. 

127. Hozv is the passive form expressed? How the pro- 
gressive? '•«' 

The passive form is expressed by combining the verb be, 
or some of its variations, with the perfect participle. The 
progressive form represents the continuation of the act or 
state, and is formed by combining the verb be, or some of 
its variations, with the present participle. 



244 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

128. What is the ancietit forfnl 

The old common form that is still used in the solemn 
style. With thou and ye for subjects, it has the ending /, 
st or est for the second person singular, and th or eth for 
the third person singular. 

129. How is a proposition made interrogative 1 Hojv made 
negative ? 

Interrogative, by placing the verb, or part of it, before 
the nominative. Negative, by placing «<?/ after the verb 
or after the first auxiliary. 

130. When the subject cofisists of words differitig in person, 
how is the form of the verb or pronoun determined? 

The first person is preferred to the second, and the 
second to the third. You, John and I are attached to our 
country. If the nominatives are taken separately, or con- 
nected by or or nor, the verb prefers the nominative next 
to it. He or I am to blame. 

131. What is an impersonal verb? 

A verb having person and number without a subject; as, 
methinks, meseems. 

132. What properties have the auxiliary 7'erbs? 
Voice, mode, tense, person and number. 

133. What 0' the auxiliary verbs? 

Be antj' its variations; do, did; can, could; have, had; 
may, might; must; shall, should; will, would. 

134. Which of these are sometimes principal verbs? 
£, or am, 7vas, ^<? and have. 

135. When is it proper to use shall a«/^/ should? 

When a duty, command, determination, resolve is to be 
expressed, and in future propositions when the subject is 
of the first person and no reference is made to the will of 
the subject. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



^45 



136. When is it proper to use will rt^*^/ would? 

When the idea is that of willingness, inclination, or in 
future propositions when the subject is of the second or 
third person and no compulsion is to be expressed, 

137. When are do, be and \\z.v^ principal verbs? 

When not combined with any other verb expressed or 
understood. 

138. What stands as an ans7ver to what? ^rwhom? of a 
transitive verb? 

The object or complement of the transitive verb stands 
as an answer to the question what? or whom? with the 
verb. 

139. Ifow can you detertnine whether a verb is transitive 
or intransitive? 

By asking the question what? or whom? If the verb 
will carry an answer relating to some particular thing it is 
transitive, but if it does not carry the subject to some 
termination it is intransitive. 

140. How tnatiy terms are implied iti a tratisitive verb? 
Three: subject, predicate and object. 

141. JIo7a many terms are implied in an intransitive verb? 
Only two: the subject and predicate. 

142. What is a copulative verb? 

One used to assert the condition of a subject; as, sugar 
is sweet. It is an incomplete verb using an adjective, 
noun or pronoun relating to the subject, and is often 
called a neuter verb. 

143. What are the principal copulative verbs? 

Be, become, seem, appear, grow, feel, look, smell, taste, 
etc. 



246 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

144. What is the peculiarity of copulative verbs 1 

They imply in their meaning the verb to be; thus, become 
is really to "come to be"; appear is to "be in appearance." 

145. What is an injinitive? 

The form of the verb generally preceded by to^ expressing 
an act or state without predicating it. There are two in- 
finitives: the present and the perfect. 

146. How is the present infinitive formed, and ivhat does 
it denoted 

In the active voice, by combining to with the simplest 
form of the verb; in the passive voice, by using to be with 
a simple participle. 

147. How is the perfect infinitive formed, and what does it 
denote 1 

By combining to have or to have been, with a simple 
participle. It represents the completion of the act or state 
at the time referred to. 

148. When is to, the sign of the infinitive, omitted? 
When the infinitive is combined with the auxiliary or 

after the active verbs bid, dare, let, make, ?ieed, see, hear, 
feel, and sometimes after have, help, please and fi?id. 

1 49. What is a participle ? 

A word derived from a verb, participating in the proper- 
ties of a verb and adjective. It is generally formed by 
adding ing, d or ed to the verb. There are two participles: 
the present and the perfect. 

150. How is the present participle formedl 

By annexing ing to the simplest form of the verb, so as 
to represent the act or state as present and continuing at 
the time referred to. 

151. Hoiv is the perfect participle formed? 

By annexing d or ed to the simplest form of the verb, so 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



247 



as to represent the act or state as completed at the time 
referred to. 

152. What voices have participles! 

The simple present participle of a transitive verb is 
nearly always in the active voice. The simple perfect par- 
ticiple of a transitive verb is either active or passive; it is 
active when have or any of its forms is combined with it, 
and passive when it stands by itself, or when be or any of 
its forms is combined with it. 

153. What is a compound participle 7 

Being, having, or having been, combined with some other 
participle. 

154. What do being, having rt-//^ having been express in 
relation to participles 1 

Being expresses the present passive participle; having 
expresses the perfect active participle; having been ex- 
presses the perfect passive participle. 

155. What are some of the chief particulars in which par- 
ticiples and infinitives agree and differ 1 

They have voice and tense; are annexed to auxiliary 
verbs; partake of the nature of nouns, adjectives and 
adverbs; and, when nouns, assume case. A participle 
may become an adjective, it may govern the possessive 
case, it may become concrete and assume number, it may 
be used after prepositions; but an infinitive has none of 
these attributes. 

156. What is the conjugation of a verb? 

The regular arrangement of the modes, tenses, persons, 
numbers and participles. 

157. What is the inflection of a verb! 
Its conjugation. 



248 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

1 58. What is meant by the weak and the strong conjugation 

of verb si 

The weak conjugation is the regular formation of the 
verb; as, move, moved. The strong conjugation is its 
irregular formation; diS, grow, grew, with the past participle 
ending in n or en. 

159. What is the thefue of a verb? 

That form which admits of the preposition to before it; 
in other words, the infinitive form of the verb. 

1 60. What is a paradigm ? 

A model of inflection by which to inflect other words. 

161. What is it to make a ve/b? 

To place a word in the position of a verb where it will 
carry the properties of an action. 

162. What is the synopsis of a verb? 

An outline of its parts through the modes and tenses, in 
a single person and number. 

163. What forms of a 7'erb are called composite? 

Those which consist of auxiliaries combined with 
participles or infinitives. 

164. What is an adverb? How are 7nost of them for?ned? 

A word used to modify the meaning of a verb, adjective, 
or other adverb. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives 
by adding ly. 

165. What is a conjunctive adz^erb? 

One used to perform the office of a conjunction and 
adverb at the same time. 

1 66. Into what classes are adverbs divided? 
Into adverbs of time, place, degree and manner. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



249 



167. What is the difference in the use of aii adjective and 
an adverb 1 

An adverb expresses manner, or describes the act; an 
adjective describes the subject or object. 

168. Horn can we ascertain to zmhat class adverbs belong? 

Adverbs of time answer the questions: When? Hoiv 
long? How often? Adverbs of place answer the ques- 
tions: Where? Whence? Adverbs of degree answer the 
questions: Hoia much? To what extetit? In la hat degree? 
Adverbs of manner answer the question: How? 

169. What is a preposition? An adjunct? 

A word used to show the relation between a following 
noun or pronoun and some other word. An adjunct is a 
preposition with its objects and modifiers, and may relate 
to a substantive, verb, adjective or adverb. 

170. What may a substantive be when governed by a pre- 
position ? 

A noun, a pronoun, an infinitive, a participial noun, or a 
clause. 

171. When does a preposition become an adverb? 

When there is no word to govern; as. The eagle flew 
///, then around, then down again. 

172. What is a conjunction? Correlative connective? 

A word used to connect words, phrases or propositions. 
A correlative connective is one of a separated pair that 
connect the same parts; as, Neither this nor that. 

173. What is the difference betiveen analysis and syn- 
thesis ? 

Analysis is the resolving of a whole into its parts. 
Synthesis is the combining of the parts to form a whole. 



250 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

174. Wh at is parsing 7 

The resolving of a sentence into its parts, giving their 
properties and syntax. 

175. What is relation'} agreement 1 government f 

The relation of words is their connection with one 
another; agreement is their similarity in person, number, 
gender,, case, etc. ; government is the power one word has 
over another. 

176. What is a sentence? clause? proposition? phrase? 

A sentence is an assemblage of words making complete 
sense; a clause is a proposition which makes only part of 
a sentence; a proposition is a subject combined with its 
predicate; a phrase is two or more words, but not an 
entire proposition. 

177. What is a declaratory sentence? interrogatory? imper- 
ative? exclamatory? 

A declaratory sentence expresses a declaration; an in- 
terrogative sentence asks a question; an imperative sen- 
tence expresses a command or entreaty; an exclamatory 
sentence expresses an exclamation. 

178. What is a simple sentence? compound? complex? 

A simple sentence has but one proposition; a compound 
sentence has two or more propositions; a complex sentence 
has one principal clause, with one or more dependent 
clauses. 

179. What are the subject and predicate of a sentence? 

The subject is that of which something is said; the 
predicate is what is said of the subject. 

180. What are the logical a?td grammatical subject and 
predicate of a sentence? 

The grammatical subject and predicate are the subject 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



251 



and predicate words; the logical subject and predicate are 
these words with all their modifiers. 

181. What is discourse^ and of what may it treat? 
Discourse is a train of thought expressed in language, 

and may be description, narration, science or philosophy. 

182. Wh at is a paragraph ? 

A sentence or combination of sentences, completing a 
train of thought, and distinguished by a new beginning. 

183. Upon u<hat is analysis based? 

Three relations: the predicate relation, the adjective 
relation, and the adverbial relation. 

184. What are elements 0/ sentences? 
Words, phrases and clauses. 

185. What must every proposition have? 
A subject and predicate. 

186. What is a tnodifier? 

A modifier is a dependent word, phrase or clause, used 
to limit or vary the meaning of some other word or ex- 
pression; it may be an adjective or an adverbial modifier. 

187. By what may a noun and pronoun be modified? 

By an article, an adjective, a possessive, an appositive, 
a participle, or an infinitive, as well as by phrases and 
clauses. 

188. By what may a verb be modified? 

By an object, a predicate adjective, an adverb, a parti- 
ciple, or an infinitive, as well as by phrases and clauses. 

189. When an infinitive or participle is used as a noun, 
what modifiers does it take? 

The infinitive takes only the modifiers of a verb; the 
participle those of either a verb or a noun. 



252 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

190. What parts of speech are never modified! 
Articles, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections. 

191. What kinds 0/ words are cotviectives? 

Conjunctions, prepositions, relative pronouns, respon- 
sive pronouns, and conjunctive adverbs. 

192. In the analysis of phrases, what forms are givettl 
Simple, complex, compound, mixed, and prepositional. 

193. What part of a sentence is considered the most impor- 
tant! 

The beginning; the next most important is the end. 

194. When may a subordinate element occupy the chief 
place! 

When it is uppermost in the speaker's mind, or denotes 
what is most striking. " Out flew millions of flaming 
words." '■'■By these we acquired our liberty." 

195. What is a period in grammar! 

A sentence so constructed that the meaning is sus- 
pended till the close. 

196. /// what do all the errors of language consist! 

In the improper arrangement of words, in the use of 
improper words, in the omission of words, and in the use 
of unnecessary words. 

197. What is a figure in grammar! 

A deviation from the ordinary form; a construction or 
application of words for the sake of brevity, force, or 
beauty. 

198. Name the figures of grammar. 

The figures of orthography, of etymology, of syntax, and 
of rhetoric. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



253 



199. What is a figu}-e of orthography 2 

An intentional deviation from the ordinary or true 
spelling of a word. 

200. What is a figure of etymology "i 

An intentional deviation from the ordinary formation of 
a word. 

201. What is a figure of syntax 1 

An intentional deviation from the ordinary construction 
of words. 

202. What is a figure of rhetoric"? 

An intentional deviation from the ordinary application 
of words. 

203. What are the names of the most i?7iportant figures of 
etymology "i 

Aphaeresis, syncope, apocope, prosthesis, paragoge, 
tmesis, diaeresis, syna^resis. 

204. Define them. 

Apheeresis is the shortening of a word by taking a letter 
or syllable from the beginning; as, Against, there^s. 
Syncope is the shortening of a word by taking a letter or a 
syllable from the middle; as, rcd''ning for reddening. 
Apocope is the shortening of a word by taking a letter or 
syllable from the end ; as, //;' for the. Prosthesis is the 
lengthening of a word by prefixing a syllable. Paragoge 
is the lengthening of a word by annexing a syllable. 
Tmesis is the insertion of a word between the parts of a 
compound; as, on which side soever. Diaeresis is the 
division of two concurrent vowels into different syllables 
usually marked thus, cooperate, ae'rial. Synaeresis is the 
joining of two syllables into one; as, dost, loved, learned, 
for do-est, lov-ed, learn-ed. 



254 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

205. What is ellipsis! aposiopesis? zeugmal pleonasml 

Ellipsis is the omission of words, and elision the omis- 
sion of letters. Aposiopesis is the leaving of something 
unsaid. Zeugma is the reference of a word to two others, 
when in strict syntax it can agree with only one of them. 
\ Pleonasm is the using of more words than the sense or 
syntax absolutely requires. 

206. What is a similel metaphor'} allegory? synecdochel 

A simile is a comparison expressed. A metaphor is a 
comparison implied; as, "Life is an isthmus between two 
eternities." An allegory is a fictitious story about one 
thing, which is designed to teach some moral or practical 
wisdom about another. Synecdoche is the name of a part 
applied to the whole, or that of the whole applied to a 
part. 

207. What is antithesis? irony? paralip sis? hypet-bole? 

Antithesis is a contrast; as "Virtue ennobles, vice 
debases." Irony is the sneering use of words with a con- 
trary meaning. Paralipsis is the pretended omission or 
concealment of what is meant; as, "I will not call him a 
villain, for it would be unparliamentary." Hyperbole is 
exaggeration. 

208. What is euphemism? ifiterrogation? exclamation? 
Euphemism is a softened mode of speech for what would 

be disagreeable or offensive if plainly spoken. Interroga- 
tion is an appeal in the form of a question to strengthen a 
statement. Exclamation is an abrupt mode of speech, 
designed to express more strongly the emotions of the 
speaker. 

209. What is versification? verse? 

Versification is the art of making verse. Verse is the 
musical arrangement of words, according to some regular 
accent. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 255 

210. What is a foot 1 

A foot is two or more syllables, constituting a part of a 
line or verse. 

211. What is rhyme 1 blank verse 1 

Rhyme is the similarity of sounds between the endings 
of poetic lines. Blank verse is verse without rhyme. 

212. What is a coupletl a stanza? 

A couplet is two poetic lines, usually rhyming together. 
A stanza is a regular division of a poem, and consists of 
three or more poetic lines with complete rhymes. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



LETTER WRITING. 



1. What five importafit things are to be considered in writ- 
itig a letter] 

The heading, the introduction, the body of the letter, 
the conclusion, and the superscription. 

2. Of what does the heading consist? 

Of the name of the place at which the letter is written, 
and the date. 

3. What important thitigs should be considered in givifig 
the name of the place? 

If in a city, the name of the street and door number of 
the residence should be given. If at a hotel, school, or 
well-known institution, the name should be given. Jf in a 
village, or country place, the post-office address, the name 
of the county and State. 

4. Of wJiat does the date consist? 

The name of the month, the day of the month, and the 
year. 

5. How should the heading be ivritten? 

Begin about an inch and a half from the top of the page, 
on the first ruled line of commercial note, a little to the left 
of the middle. If the heading occupies more than one 

257 



258 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

line, let each line begin a little farther to the right than 
the other. The day of the month, year, and door number 
are written in figures. 

6. How should you capitalize and punctuate the heading? 
Each important word begins with a capital letter, each 

item is set off by the comma, and the whole closes with a 
period, 

7. 0/7vhat does the introduction consist? 

Of the name, the title, and the place of business or resi- 
dence of the person addressed. 

8. What are the common titles in use, and to whom should 
they be applied? 

The prefix Mr. should be applied to a man's name; 
Messrs. to the names of several men; Master to that of a 
lad; Miss to that of a young lady; Mrs. to that of a mar- 
ried lady; Misses to several young ladies; Mesdames to 
several married or elderly ladies; Dr. to a physician; Jiev. 
to a clergyman, or Rev. Mr., if name is unknown; I^ev. Dr. 
to a Doctor of Divinity, or Hev. can be placed before the 
name and D. D. after it; His Excellency to the name of a 
Governor or Ambassador; Hon. to the name of a Cabinet 
Officer, a Member of Congress, a State Senator, a Judge or 
Mayor. 

9. What is the most approved form 0/ addressing the Pres- 
ident? 

To the President, Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C. 
The salutation would simply be, Mr. President. 

10. 1/ two literary or professional titles are added to a 
name, in what order should they be written ? 

In the order in which they were conferred. 

1 1. Name the order of some of these common titles. 

A. M., Ph. D., D. D., LL. D. The higher implies the 



LETTER WRITING. 259 

lower, and great care should be taken to guard against an 
excessive use of these titles. 

12. Hott) should you express the salutations? 

They vary according to the station of the person ad- 
dressed, or the degree of intimacy with him. Strangers 
may be addressed as Sir, Rev. Sir, Genera/, Madam, etc.; 
acquaintances, as Dear Sir, Dear Madam; friends, as My 
dear Sir, My dear Madam, My dear Jones; near relatives 
and dear friends, as My dear Wife, My dear Boy, Dearest 
Ellen, etc. 

13. Hoiv do you begin the address of a letter! 

If it is a business letter, on the next line below the 
heading, at the left side of the page, and, if it contains 
more than one line, it should be spaced as in the heading. 
If the letter is of an official character or is written to a 
friend, the address may be placed at the bottom of the 
letter. 

14. Where should the salutation begin? 

It should begin a little to the right of the address, unless 
the address is written below. 

15. How should the salutation be punctuated? 

Every important word should begin with a capital letter, 
and the whole followed by a comma, or a comma and a 
dash, as Dear Sir, — . The semicolon is generally used 
instead of the comma. 

16. Where do you begin the body of the letter? 

If the introduction is long, on the same line with the 
salutation; or below the line if the introduction is short. 

17. How should business letters be composed? 

They should be brief, and the sentences short, concise, 
and to the point. Repeat nothing, and omit nothing 
needful. 



26o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

1 8. What should be ihe character of official letters and 
formal notes 1 

They should be more stately and ceremonious. In 
formal notes the third person is generally used instead of 
the first and the second, and there is no introduction, no 
conclusion, no signature ; thus: 

Mr. and Mrs. i^— 

request the pleasure of Mr. H — 'j cofnpany 

at a social gatheri?ig 

dn 

Tuesday evetiing, May ijth, 

at 8 o'clock. 
2J Kimball Ave., May jth. 

The answer may be couched thus: 

Mr. K— 

accepts with pleasure 

Mr. and Mrs. F — 's kitid itmitation for 

Tuesday evening, May lyth. 

Monday fnorning. May gth. 

19. How should the conclusion be drawn? 

The conclusion consists of the complimentary close, and 
the signature. The forms are many and varied, according 
to the relations of the writer to the person addressed. In 
letters of friendship use, Your sincere friend. Yours affection- 
ately. Your loving son or daughter, etc. In business letters, 
Yours, Yours truly. Yours respectfully, Very respectfully yours. 
In official letters, / have the honor to be. Sir, your obedient 
servant; Very respectfully. Your most obedieiit servant, etc. 

20. What about the signature? 

It should consist of the Christian name and surname. In 
signing a letter to a stranger write the Christian name in 
full. A lady addressing a stranger should prefix to her 
signature her title, Mrs. or Miss, placing it within the marks 
of parenthesis; as, (Miss), unless in her writing she has in- 



LETTER WRITING. 261 

dicated which of these titles her correspondent is to use in 
reply. 

2 1 . W/ie?-e should the first 700 rd of the conclusion begin 1 

It should begin near the middle of the first line below 
the body of the letter, and be spaced according to the 
number of lines occupied, like the heading and address. 

22. What is the superscription! 
The address on the envelope. 

23. Ho7V should you address an envelope and stamp it? 
The address should begin just below the middle of the 

envelope and near the left edge. The spacing should slope 
to the right as in the heading, and so that the last line will 
come near the lower right-hand corner. The name and 
title should occupy the first line; if in a city, the door- 
number and name of street should be on the second line, 
the name of the city on the third, and the name of the 
State on the fourth. In the country the name of the 
county may be written below the post-office address, or in 
the lower left-hand corner. Every line should end with a 
comma except the last, which should be followed by a 
period. Care should be taken to write plainly and in a 
straight line. The stamp should be placed in the upper 
right-hand corner. 

A SPECIMEN LETTER. 

Milwaukee, Wis., April 14, 1887. 
Wm. A. Gault, Esq., 

Caldwell, 

Wis. 

Mv Dear Sir: — Yours of the 
loth received. I am surprised to hear of the failure of 
Mr. B., and will meet you as requested at Mukwonago, on 
the 18th inst. 

Yours respectfully, 

JAMES GILMORE. 



262 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

A SPECIMEN SUPERSCRIPTION. 



Stamp. 



Mr. Wm. A. Gau/t, 

Caldwell, 
Racine Co. Wisconsin. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY 
AND PHONOLOGY. 



1. Of what does Orthography treatl 

It treats of correct spelling, and the nature and power 
of letters. 

2. Defiyie Orthoepy. 

The art of correct pronunciation. 

3. What is Phonology 1 

The science of uttering the elementary sounds. 

4. What is sound, and hoiv are sounds classified? 

Sound is the sensation produced upon the auditory nerve 
by vibration of the air or other conducting media. Sounds 
are classified as tones and noises. 

5. What are tones? What are noises? 

Tones are harmonious sounds which are pleasing to the 
ear. Noises are sounds without any regularity of produc- 
tion and devoid of the harmony of tones. 

6. What is a letter? 

A character used to represent an elementary sound. 

263 



264 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

7. What are eletnentary sou fids? 

Distinct single sounds, by the combination of which all 
the words of our language are formed. 

8. Hoiv many eleme?itary sounds are /here in the English 
language, and how are they divided? 

There are forty-five. They are divided into three 
classes: vowels, subvocals, and aspirates. 

9. Are all the elementary sounds distinct and true elements 
0/ our language? 

Many of them are similarly formed and therefore diflfi- 
cult to distinguish, but they are as near the requirements 
of a pure articulation as phonetists have been able to 
devise. 

I o. How are these sounds produced? 

By the organs of speech, with the breath. 

I I . What are the organs of speech ? 

The principal ones are the lips, teeth, tongue, palate, 
and nasal passages. 

12. Hojv is 7'0 ice produced? 

By the action of the breath on the larynx. 

13. What are the organs of 70 ice ? 

They are the lungs, diaphragm, intercostal muscles, 
bronchi and trachea, larynx and pharynx. 

1 4. What is the difference between voice and speech ? 
Voice is tone produced by the action of the breath on 

the larynx, while speech is the modulation of the voice to 
express thought, and may be uttered in a whisper. 

15. What are the vocal chords? 

They are the special vocal apparatus, and consist of two 
ligaments or bands of fibrous tissue situated within the 
larynx. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 265 

16. What peculiar formatioji has the tongue! 

It consists of a mass of muscular fibres so arranged as to 
admit of motion in every direction or several directions at 
once. 

17. Describe the palate. 

The palate is the roof of the mouth continuing back- 
ward, where it becomes a yielding, muscular, membraneous 
awning, separating the mouth proper from the nasal 
passages and the upper part of the pharynx. 

18. What connection has the ear 7vith the voicel 

The ear receives the productions of the voice, and by 
the communication of the auditory nerves with the brain 
they are understood. 

19. Ho2v is speech produced! 

By the action of the diaphragm and other muscles the 
breath is forced from the lungs through the bronchi and 
trachea into the larynx, where it comes into contact with 
the vocal chords, which, being called into action, produce 
a vibration, and by the resonating of the pharynx and other 
cavities is communicated to the external air, falling at 
length as a tone upon the listening ear. 

20. Hoiv are the letters divided! 

Into vowels and consonants. ) 

2 I . What are voivels 1 

Vowels are letters that denote pure tones. 

22. What are consonants! 

Consonants are letters that represent the subvocal or 
aspirate sounds. 

23. How are the consonants divided! 

Into single letters and combinations, mutes and semi- 
vowels, subvocals and aspirates. 



266 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

24. What is a mute? 

A letter which admits of no escape of breath while the 
organs of speech are in contact. 

25. Name the mutes. 

The mutes are h, p, d, /, k, c, and g hard. 

26. What is a semivowel] 

A letter which, in pronouncing, admits of an escape of 
breath. The semivowels include all the consonants except 
the mutes.* 

27. What divisions are formed from the semivowels? 

Four of the semivowels, /, m, ?i, r, are called liquids be- 
cause of their soft sound, which easily unites with the 
sounds of other letters; two of them, m and ;/, and one of 
the combinations, ng, are called nasals; s and z are called 
sibilants, or hissing letters. 

28. What are subvocals? 

Those consonants which produce an undertone of voice 
when their sounds are uttered. 

29. Name them. 

The subvocals are b, d, g, j, I, m, n, r, v, iv, y, z, th, zh, 
and ?ig. 

30. What are aspirates ? 

The aspirates are mere whispers made by the organs of 
speech and breath, and are c, /, h, k, /, s, /, x, th, ch, sh, 
and wh. 

31. Name the combinations 0/ the cotisonants. 

They are th aspirate, th subvocal, ch, sh, zh, wh, and ng. 

* The difference between the mutes and semivowels is that the 
organs of speech are more closely united in pronouncing the mutes 
than the semivowels. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 26'J 

32. According to their formation, into rvhat classes are the 
consona7it sounds diznded? 

Four: labials, dentals, Unguals, zw^ palatals. 

2)^. How are the labials formed 1 

By the lips; as b,f, 7n, /, ?', w, and wh. The lips are as- 
sisted by the teeth in making the sounds of/ and ?'. 

34. How are the dentals formed! 

Through the teeth; as/', s, z, ch, sh, zh, and c and ^ soft. 

35. How are the lifiguals formed? 

By the tongue, and are d, I, n, r, t, y, th aspirate, and th 
subvocal. 

36. How are the palatals formed? 

By the palate; as k, q, x, ng, and c and g hard. 

37. Why is the letter h not included in these divisions? 

As the sound is formed by emitting the breath suddenly 
with all the organs open, it does not properly belong to 
these divisions, since the organs of speech are not brought 
into action. 

38. What are cognates ? 

Letters whose elements are produced by the same organs 
in a similar manner; as/" and ?'. The aspirates (except h) 
are all cognates of some of the subvocals. 

39. How do we analyze words? 

By taking each letter separately, stating whether it is a 
vowel or consonant; if a vowel, what its sound is; if a 
consonant, to what divisions it belongs. 

40. Hoii) is th aspirate distinguished from th subvocal\ 
To distinguish th subvocal from th aspirate, a dash is 

placed beneath the subvocal. 

41. How are the elementary sounds divided? 

There are twenty vowel sounds, fifteen subvocals, and 
ten aspirates. 



268 



COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



vowel \ 
sounds 



42. Ho7v many sounds have the vowels 'i 
Forty-five, classified as follows: 

a, a, a, a, a, a, as in ale, add, air, arm, ark, all. 
e, e, e, as in eve, end, verge, 
i, 1, as in ice, ill. 
o, 6, as in old, odd. 
00, 06, as in moon, wool. 
u, ij, u, as in use, up, urge, 
ou, as in out. 
oi, as in oil. 

SUBVOCALS : 

b, d, g, j, I, as in bet, dot, get, jet, lid. 
m, n, ;/, r, ///, as in mit, not, finger, rat, that. 
V, w, y, z, zh, as in vat, woe, yet, buzz, azure. 

Aspirates : 
p, t, k, h, as in pet, tin, kit, hat. 
ch, th, f, wh, as in chin, thin, fat, when, 
s, sh, as in sin, shot. 



25 
conso- J 
nant ^ 
sounds 



43. Accordmg to this classificatioji' 0/ elementary sounds, 
how many letters would be required to form a full alphabet? 

Forty-five. 

44. Ho7v is this deficic7icy filledl 

By giving to some letters more than one sound. These 
sounds are represented by marks or symbols. 

45. What names are given to the symbols 7vhich represent 
the different sounds? 

The Macron 

The Breve " 

The Circumflex 

The Tilde, or Wave ~ 

Two Dots " 

One Dot • 



Vowel 
marks. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 269 

Conso- I The Bar _ 
nant \ The Dotted Bar ^ 
marks. \j;\^^ Cedilla, 

46. Of all the elementary sounds, which represent the purest 
product of the human voiced 

The Italian a, as in ah. 

47. What can be said of all other vocals and subvocalsl 

They are considered modifications of this tone, as they 
require some portion of it. 

48. What is a diphthong? 

A union of two vowel sounds in the same syllable. 

49. How many diphthofigs are there? 
Four: ou, ow, oi, oy. 

50. Hota fnany sounds are represented by these diphthofigs? 
Two: ou and ow represent the same sound, and are 

called inseparable diphthongs, because they cannot be sep- 
arated into two distinct vowel sounds; oi and oy represent 
one sound, and are called separable diphthongs, because 
their sounds can be separated into broad <z and short i. 
To test the separable diphthongs, spell by sound the words 
oil and boy, using broad a and short / in each, and pro- 
nounce in quick succession. 

51. What is a digraph? What is a triphthong? 

A digraph is the union of two vowels in the same syllable, 
one of which is silent. A triphthong is the union of three 
vowels in the same syllable, two of which are silent. 

52. What are the elements of 7uhich orthoepy treats? 
Articulation, syllabication and accent. 

53. What is a syllable? 

A letter or combination of letters, uttered by one 
emission of the voice. 



270 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

54. What is a word? 

A syllable or combination of syllables representing some 
thought or idea. 

55. What are ivords of one, two, three, four or more syl- 
lables called? 

Monosyllables, dissyllables, trisyllables and polysyllables. 

56. What is essential in every syllable? 
A vowel. 

57. By what is the pri?icipal sound in every syllable pro- 
duced? 

By the vowel, except in unaccented syllables with e as 
the vowel sound. 

58. To what does every cotisonant belong? 

To some vowel or diphthong, unless it be silent. 

59. When is a consonajit antecedent or consequent to a 
vowel? 

When it precedes the vowel in the same syllable it is 
antecedent to it; when it follows in the same syllable it is 
consequent to it. 

60. What is syllabication ? 
Dividing words into syllables. 

61. What is the guide for arranging words into syllables? 
They must be arranged exactly as they are heard in 

correct pronunciation. 

62. How may a word be divided at the end of a line? 
Between the syllables. 

63. Why are words divided into syllables? 
To assist in their pronunciation. 

64. When is the hyphen used? 

Between compound words when first formed or when 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 271 

little used; between syllables and the ends of lines; and 
between syllables for the purpose of instruction. 

65. When two vowels come together^ how are they disposed 
of ill syllahicatiofi / 

Unless they constitute a diphthong they must be treated 
as two syllables, or they may be used together with one 
vowel silent. 

66. When is one letter a substitute for another^ 

When it has the sound usually represented by another 
letter. 

67. What properties does a substituted letter assume? 
Those of the letter which it represents. 

68. Which letters have no substitutes? 
B, d, g, h, I, m, n, p, r, th and wh. 

69. When is i a consonant? 

When it begins a syllable and is immediately followed 
by a vowel sound; as in alien. 

70. Is VL ever a consonant? 

When it is preceded by g or s, and immediately followed 
by a vowel sound, it is a consonant and a substitute for w; 
as in language. 

7 1 . When is q a vowel? Is w ever a vowel? 

When it represents the sound of /. Formerly 70 was 
called a vowel when it represented the sound of u, but as 
it cannot form a syllable either alone or in connection 
with consonants, as all the other vowels do, it is proper to 
deny it the name of a vowel. 

72. What is the use of silent letters? 
To modify the sounds of other letters. 

73. Which letters are never sile?it? 
/■; _/, q, r, X, V, z. 



272 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

74. Which letters have no sound of their own] 
C, X and q. 

RULES FOR SILENT LETTERS. 

75. JVheu is Q. final silent 1 

When another vowel precedes it in the same syllable; as 
in made, grape^ ice, bride. 

76. What 7vould be the result if g. final 7vere not silent 1 
Two syllables would be formed for one. 

77. When is b silent? 

Before t or after m in the same syllable; as in comb, 
tomb, debty subtle. 

78. When is c silent? 

Before k in the same syllable; as in back, rack, luck. It 
is also silent in cza?; indict, muscle, victuals, and a few 
others. 

79. When is d silettt? 

Before^ in the same syllable; as in bridge, pledge. 

80. When is g silent? 

Before 7n or 11 in the same syllable; as in phlegm, gnat, 
malign, design. 

81. When is h silent? 

After ^ or r in the same syllable; as \n ghost, rhyme, rheu- 
matism; when it is final, following a vowel, as in oh, ah, 
fehovah; when it is initial in a few words, as in herb, heir, 
honest, hour; and in asthma, phthisis, isthmus, Thomas, 
Thames, it follows / and is silent. 

82. Whe?i is k silent? 

Before ?t in the same syllable ; as in knife, knee. 

83. When is 1 silent? 

After a when followed by /, m, k or v, in the same 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 273 

syllable (except valvc^^ as m folks, half , palm, stalk, salve. 
L is silent also in could, 7e>oulil a.nd should. 

84. When is n sileii/l 

After / and w/ as in /'////, solemn. 

85. JVhen is p s Hen 1 1 

When it is initial and before n, s, or /,■ as in psalm, 
pneumonia, f sailer. 

86. When is t silenl? 

Before r/^ in the same syllable; as in notch, latch. It is 
silent also in Christmas, eclat, 7nortgage, and a few other 
words. 

87. When is w silent? 

Before r in the same syllable; as in 7tiraf and loreck; and 
also in 7vhole, sword, 7vhoop, answer and t7e.<o. 

88. When is gh silenfi 

After i in the same syllable ; as m fright and neigh. After 
au and ou; as in aught, ought, bought, slaughter and through. 

89. /;/ 7ohat "iLiords is ch silent? 
In yacht, schism and dracJun. 

90. /// 7f'//<?/ words is s silent? 

In r^^//j, />/(?, island, puisne, viscount and belles-lettres. 

91. /j m ^7'^/- silent? 

In the word mnetno?iic or Mnemon. 

92. /// //c?7iv many ways are ivords designated? 

First, as simple or compound; second, as primitive or 
derivative. 

93. What is a simple ivord? What is a compound loord? 
One that is not composed of two or more whole words; 

a compound word is composed of two or more simple ones. 

94. What is a primitive word? 

One that is derived from no other word. 



274 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

95. What is a derivative 7vordi 

One formed from a primitive by means of prefixes or 
suffixes. 

96. What is a prefixl What is a suffixl What is a root? 

A prefix is a letter or letters joined to the beginning of 
a word; at the end of a word the addition is called a 
suffix; the root is the chief word without prefix or suffix. 

97. Under what circumstances is a ivord primitive which 
is formed by the addition 0/ prefixes or suffixes? 

Whenever the meaning of the word is radically changed 
by the addition of prefixes or suffixes; as in reproof, in 
which the meaning of neither re ox proof \s retained. 

In forming derivatives by means of suffixes, something 
more is required than merely to write the parts together 
as one word. Thus, if we desire to affix the suffix ed to 
the word suffer, we have only to unite, without change, the 
suffix with the radical, making suffered. But with the 
•word prefer, a change must be made by doubling the final 
r; thus preferred. This and other like changes are made, 
for the most part, in strict accordance with known rules. 
These rules should be committed to memory by repeated 
illustrations in order to understand when and how to apply 
them. 

98. Give the general rules for spelling. 

RULES FOR SPELLING. 

Rule I. — The final e of a .radical word is rejected 
when the suffix begins with a vowel, except words ending 
in ceox ge; as, moving, salable, pleasure, peaceable, coura- 
geous. 

Rule II. — The final e of a radical word is generally re- 
tained when the suffix begins with a consonant; as, hope- 
less, movement. In abridge, acknowledge, argue, awe, 
due, judge, lodge, true and whole, silent e is not retained. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 275 

Rule III. — Monosyllables and words accented on the 
last syllable, when they end with a single consonant pre- 
ceded by a single vowel, double their final consonants 
before a suffix that begins with a vowel; as, baggage, 
spotted, beginner. 

Rule IV. — The final consonant, when not preceded by 
a single vowel, or when the word is not accented on the 
last syllable, remains single upon the addition of a suffix; 
as, spoiling, suffered, toiling, visiting. 

Rule V. — The final y of a radical word, when preceded 
by a consonant, is generally changed into / upon the addi- 
tion of a suffix; as happ/ness, tr/al, stor/ed. In a few 
instances y is changed into e before ous and its com- 
pounds; as, beauteous, beauteously. 

Rule VI. — The final / of a radical word is omitted 
when the suffix begins with // as, alkal/, alkalize. 

Rule Vll. — The final j of a radical word when pre- 
ceded by a vowel, or when the suffix begins with /, remains 
unchanged; as, buyer, glorying. 

Rule VIII. — Words ending in f or fe commonly 
clTange / into v when a suffix is added beginning with a 
vowel; as, wives, mischievous. 

Rule IX. — Words ending in le, preceded by a con- 
sonant, drop these letters on receiving the suffix ly; as, 
ably, idly. 

Rule X. — Words ending in ble, before the suffixes ity 
and ities, talos / between the letters b and /; as, ab/lity, 
abilities. 

Rule XL — Words ending in er or or often drop the e 
or before a suffix beginning with a vowel; as, victrix, 
wondrous. 

Rule XII. — Monosyllables ending in f, I or s, pre- 
ceded by a single vowel, double the final consonant; as 
staff, spell, mill — except if, of, as, gas, /las, was, yes, is, his, 
this, us, thus. 

Rule Xlll. — Words ending in any other consonants 



276 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

than y, I ox s do not double the final letter — except add, 
odd, ebb, egg, itm, en', purr, butt, buzz, fuzz. 

The following is a list of prefixes, with their significa- 
tions: 

A signifies on, in, at, to; as, abroad, abed, avert. 

AB signifies from; as, absolve, to free from. 

AD, AC, AF, AG, AL, AN, AP, AR, AT, signify tO ; aS 

Adjoin, to join to; 
Accredit, to give credit to; 
Affix, to fix to; 
Agglutinate, sticking to; 
Allure, entice to; 
Annex, join to; 
Append, hang to; 
Arrange, range to; 
Attune, tune to. 

ALL, AL, WHOLLY; aS 

All just, wholly just. 

Already, wholly, or completely ready. 

Ail, when not separated from the radical by a hyphen, 
rejects one /. 
ANTi, ANT, signify against; as — 

Antipathy, a feeling against. 

Antarctic, opposite to the arctic. 
ANTE signifies before; as, antecedent, going before. 
BE signifies near; as, beside, near, or by the side of. 
Bi signifies two; as, bifold, twofold. 
ciRCUM signifies around; as, circumnavigate, to sail 

around. 
CON, COM, CO, COL, COR, signify with; as — 

Conjoin, to join with; 

Gommix, to mix with ; 

Coequal, equal with; 

Collect, to place with or together; 

Correlative, relating with. 
CONTRA, COUNTER, signify opposite; as — 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 277 

Contradance, a dance opposite; 

Counterview, a view opposite. 
DE signifies from; as, depart, to part from. 
DEMI signifies half; as, demi-wolf, half-wolf. 
DiA signifies through; as, diameter, the measure through. 
Dl, Dis, signify two; as — 

Ditone, an interval of two tones; 

Dissyllable, a word of two syllables; 
DIS also signifies not or un; as, dissimilar, not similar, 

disband, unband. 
E, EX, EC, EF, signify out; as — 

Emigrate, to move out; 

Export, to carry out of port; 

Eccentric, out of, or deviating from the centre; 

Effluent, flowing out. 
EXTRA signifies beyond; as, extravagant, going beyond. 
EQUi signifies equal; as, equidistant, at an equal dis- 
tance. 
EN, EM, signify in; as — 

Enclose, to close in ; 

Embroil, to put in a broil or tumult. 
EU signifies well or agreeable; as, euphony, agreeable 

sound. 
HEX signifies six; as, hexangular, six angles. 
HYPER signifies over; as, hypercritical, over-critical. 
IN, IM, IG, IL, IR, signify not or in; as — 

Incomplete, not complete; 

Imprudent, not prudent; 

Illegible, that can not be read; 

Ignoble, not noble; 

Irregular, not regular. 
INTRO signifies within; as, introspection, looking within. 
INTER signifies between; as, intervene, to come between. 
juxTA signifies next; as, juxtaposition, the place next. 
MAL signifies bad; as, malpractice; bad practice. 
MIS signifies wrong; as, misguide, to guide wrong. 



.yS COMMON SCHOOL QOESTiON BOOK'. 

MONO signifies one; as monosyllable, one syllable. 
MULTi signifies many; as, multiform, having many forms. 
NGN signifies not; as, non-essential, not essential. 
OCT signifies eight; as, octangular, eight-angled. 
OMNI signifies all; as, omnipotent, all-powerful. 
OUT signifies beyond; as, outrun, to run beyond. 
OVER signifies above; as, overshoot, to shoot over, 
ovi signifies an egg; as, oviform, egg-shaped. 
PER signifies by; as, perchance, by chance. 
PERI signifies around; as, perimeter, the measure around. 
PAR, PARA, signify from ; as — 

Parody, an ode or song which is an alteration from 
another; 

Parasol, a small canopy to shield from the sun. 
PEN signifies almost; as, peninsula, almost an island. 
PLENi signifies full; as plenipotent, full of power. 
POLY signifies many; as, polysyllabic, having many syl- 
lables. 
POST signifies after; as, postpone, to place after or put 

off. 
PRE signifies before; as, prejudge, to judge beforehand. 
PRETER signifies beyond; as, preternatural, beyond the 

natural. 
PRO signifies for; as, pronoun, for a noun. 
PROTO signifies first; as, protomartyr, the first martyr. 
QUAD signifies four; as, quadrangle, four-angled. 
RE signifies again; as, review, to view again. 
RECT, RECTI, signify right or straight, as — 

Rectangle, right angle; 

Rectilinear, straight-lined. 
RETRO signifies back; as, retrograde, to go backwards. 
SEMI, DEMI, HEMI, signify half; as — 

Semicircle, half a circle; 

Demitone, half a tone; 

Hemisphere, half a sphere. 
STEREO signifies solid; as, stereotype, solid type. 



OkTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 279 

SUB, sue, SUF, SUG, SUP, SUBTER, signify under; as — • 
Subcommittee, under committee; 
Succeed, to follow after; 
Suffix, to fix after; 
Suggest, to put under notice; 
Suppress, to press under; 
Subterfiuous, flowing under. 
SUPER, SUR, signify over or more; as — 
Superhuman, more than human; 
Surcharge, overcharge, 
sus signifies up; as, sustain, to hold up. 
SE signifies apart; as, secede, to go apart. 
SINE signifies without; as, sine die, without a day. 
SYM signifies with; as, sympathy, with feeling. 
TRANS signifies across; as, transatlantic, across the At- 
lantic. 
ULTRA signifies beyond; as, ultramontane, beyond the 

mountains. 
UN signifies not; as, unwise, not wise. 
WITH signifies against; as, withstand, to stand against. 
The following table contains the simple suffixes with 
their definitions, and words to illustrate them. For want 
of space a full analysis of the words cannot be given, but 
the student can supply the want by giving a complete 
definition of the suffixes and primitive words combined. 

{a) Jze, iize, ze, ise, se, is/i,fy, i/y, en, e, ate, iate, jiaie, cate, 
icaie, ite, signify to make, to give, to put upon or into; as 
civilize, stigmatize, glaze, criticise, cleanse, establish, satisfy, 
justify, soften, breathe, maturate, ampliate, actuate, impli- 
cate, duplicate, unite. 

i^b) Ing, ant, ent, tent, signify continuing; as, watering, 
dormant, pendent, sufficient. 

{c) -f^/ signifies did; as, preferred, did prefer. 
{d) Ate, ite, en, signify made, made of or like, possessed 
of; as, globate, erudite, silken. 

{e) Ant, ent^ aie^ ite^ ast^ ist^ ado, ard^ on, oso, ar, ary, iary. 



28o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

er, ee, eer, ier, or, ive, ster, fiei\ yet; zeti, isan, an, ian, tain, 
signify one, who, a person ; as, servant, president, collegiate, 
favorite, encomiast, botanist, desperado, dotard, glutton, 
virtuoso, beggar, adversary, incendiary, payer, payee, chari- 
oteer, cannonier, executor, executive, teamster, partner, 
lawyer, citizen, artisan, veteran, grammarian, chieftain. 

(/) Ess, ix, ine, ago, signify a female; as, lioness, medi- 
atrix, heroine, virago. 

(<§") ^O'j ^0'> 0'> O'j ^<^> ^^^> ^{'i'^-, tude, itude, iiess, t, t/i, 77iony, 
signify the quality or state of being, the thing which or 
that which; as, publicity, variety, novelty, privacy, opu- 
lence, justice, quietude, plentitude, exactitude, meekness, 
restraint, truth, sanctimony. 

(//) Jon, ment, ament, iment, ure, ture, ature, iture, a/, ade, 
signify the act of; that which; as, erection, ejectment, 
armament, impediment, pressure, mixture, signature, ex- 
penditure, refusal, cannonade. 

(/) Al, eal, ial, ual, em, urn, iac, ic, tic, atic, etic, id, an, 
ean, ian, ane, ine. He, eth, th, ar, ary, iary, uary, signify per- 
taining, belonging, or relating to; as, central, corporeal, 
dictatorial, habitual, southern, taciturn, demoniac, patriotic, 
dyspeptic, emblematic, dietetic, stupid, Roman, marmo- 
rean, Newtonian, mundane, crystalline, infantile, fortieth, 
tenth, columnar, missionary, stipendiary, sumptuary. 

(/) Ose, ous, eous, ious, nous, ceous, aceous, aneous, oneous, 
itious, fill, ey, y, signify full of, abounding in, having the 
nature or quality of; as, verbose, mountainous, righteous, 
robustious, tempestuous, cetaceous, lardaceous, instanta- 
neous, erroneous, cementitious, hopeful, clayey, juicy. 

{k) Kin, ling, iile, cule, ch, icle, ock, et, let, aster, signify 
little, small, minute, slight, petty; as, lambkin, kingling, 
globule, animalcule, tubercle, particle, hillock, feveret, 
ringlet, poetaster. 

(/) /rj signifies the doctrine, art or science of; as, optics. 

(w) Ism signifies that which is peculiar to; a doctrine; 
a state, or condition; as, savagism, Calvinism. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 281 

(«) Er signifies more ; as, wiser, more wise. 

{0) ^i-/ signifies most; as, wisest, most wise. 

(/) Dom^ ric, ate, hood, ship, age, cy, ry, signify the state, 
rank, office of, or the territory of jurisdiction of; as. Pope- 
dom, bishopric, electorate, childhood, township, peerage, 
captaincy, chieftainry. 

(^) Y, ry, ary, cry, ory, signify the art, practice, or busi- 
ness of, or the place where; as gluttony, bigotry, statuary, 
cookery, armory. 

99. After ascertaining the syllabication of a word, what is 
to be observed! 

The location of the accent. 

100. When tivo accents occur in the same word, which 
usually precedes the other] 

The secondary nearly always precedes the primary. 

1 01. jDo ivords ever have more than two accents? 
Some very long words have two secondary accents. 

102. What is the rule for accent of a word of two syllables 1 

With the exception of amen, they never have more than 
one accent. 

1 03. What is the rule 7vith compound ivords ? 

Each part retains its own accent, the same as two dis- 
tinct words. 

104. What is the rule where ivords change their pat ts of 
speech from verbs to nouns or adjectives t 

When used as verbs the accent is usually on the last 
syllable, but when used as nouns or adjectives, on the first 
syllable. 

105. Where is the accent iv hen words end in sion or ixonl 

The accent is on the penult, or syllable next to the 
last. 



282 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

106. Words ending in ical or acal place the accent on what 
syllable 1 

Generally on the syllable next preceding this termina- 
tion. 

T07. What is a final letter^ 

The last in a word. 

to8. What is the power of a letter I 

The elementary sound which it represents. 

109. What does the difference of accent sometimes do] 

It changes the meaning of the word; as, Au'gust, the 
eighth month; august', grand, majestic. 

1 10. Name the kinds of spelling. 

There are three kinds: phonic, oral and written. 

111. What is phonetic spelling? 
Spelling by sound. 

EXERCISES IN ABBREVIATIONS USED IN WRITING. 

Write out in full: Abbreviate : 

A. A. S. In the year of our Lord. 

G. C. B. Member of Congress. 

C. P. S. Before Christ. 

Nom. No. Keeper of the Seal. 

I. H. S. Justice of the Peace. 

A. B. or B. A. House of Representatives. 

Col. Coll. As if he would say. 

Min. Plen. Blessed Virgin. 

N. J. N. H. In the same place. 

Q. E. F. No one dissenting. 

Qr. Qt. Which was to be demonstrated. 

Rt. Rev. A sufficient quantity. 

S. A. R. R. For the time being. 

Sec. Leg. Doctor of Divinity. 



ORTHOGRAPHY, ORTHOEPY AND PHONOLOGY. 283 



Write out in full: 

V. P. vs. 

Nov. N. S. 

Do. or Ditto. 

H. B. M. 

M. B. M. D. 

Acct. A. B. S. 

E. J. e. g. 

U. T. Vt. 

C. S. A. Yd. . 

S. E. N. W. 

Zool. Pwt. 

N. T. N. Y. 

111. Ind. 

A. M. Md. 

M. P. Neb. 

Co. Am. 

Com. Feb. 

Wm. Wt. 

Wis. Vt. 

O. S. Oct. 

P. O. Pop. 

U. S. A. Viz. 

P. pp. Oz. 

Va. V. Wed. 

N. E. Ky. Kans. 

Feb. Fahr. Cal. 

G. B. N. C. Neh. 

Tim. Sp. Sam. 

Rep. Rev. S. 

La. lbs. Fem. 

Id. i. e. Gen. 

Mt. N. A. Miss. 

Hhd. Hist. Gov. 

Hdkf. Cr. Dft. 



Abbreviate : 

Superintendent. 

New Testament. 

A hundred-weight. 

District of Columbia. 

Bachelor of Divinity. 

And so forth. 

See; refer to. 

United States Navy. 

The last, or last month. 

West Indies. 

By the hundred. 

Attorney. 

Unknown. 

Manuscripts. 

Doctor of Laws. 

Love of learning. 

Right Honorable. 

Old Testament. 

To-wit; namely. 

Postmaster; afternoon. 

Take notice. 

Rhode Island. 

Parliament. 

Gentlemen; Sirs. 

Fellow of the Royal Society. 

Professor; President. 

Texas; Territory. 

Postscript; Regiment. 

Mademoiselle; Major. 

Italy; Hundred; Dozen. 

Fellow of the Society of Arts. 

Assistant; Junior. 

Cash on delivery. 

Thursday; Schooner. 



284 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

Write out in full: Abbreviate: 

4to. LL. D. 8vo, Volume; Philadelphia. 

Sat. S. C. W. Geology; Louisiana. 

Inst. Int. lo. Place of the Seal. 

Dist. Diet. Cyc. Meridian; Thousand. 

Long. L. Lat. Legislature; Lieutenant. 

Minn. Mad. Masc. Long Island; Matthew. 

Gent. Fur. Ft. Executor; Barrel; Adverb. 

Jam. Inter. Dr. Mistress; Servant; Democrat. 

Conj. Agt. Al. Alderman; Amount; Editor. 

E. Deut. Dea. Esquire; Geometry; History. 

Hon. Gr. U. S. Constable; Constitution. 

Cor. Adj. Anon. Chapter; Capitals; Avenue. 

Capt. Chron. C. Mexico; Michigan; Minnesota. 

N. Myth. Mo. Memorandum; Maine. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



1. W/tat is mathematics 1 
The science of quantity. 

2. What is quantity? 

Anything that can be increased, diminished or measured. 

3. Define arithmetic as a science and as an art. 

As a science, it logically investigates and philosophically 
classifies and arranges the principles and rules of the sub- 
ject; as an art, it applies these principles. 

4. Upon what is arithmetic founded, and hoiv are its oper- 
ations carried onl 

Tt is founded on notation, and its operations are carried 
on by means of addition, subtraction, multiplication and 
division. 

5 . Wh a t is a rith m elica I la ngu age t 

ihe method of expressing numbers. It is of two kinds, 
oral and written. 

6. What is a tin ill 
One, or a single thing. 

7. What is a nuniberl The power of a Humbert A root? 

A number is a unit, or a collection of units. The power 

285 



286 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

of a number is the product produced by repeating a num- 
ber so many times as a factor. A root is a factor repeated 
to produce power, 

8. What is an integer'} 
A whole number. 

9. What is the difference between an abstract jiumber and 
a concrete number'} 

An abstract number is one used without reference to 
any particular thing. A concrete number is one that has 
reference to a particular thing. 

1 o. What is a sign ( 

A sign is a character indicating an operation to be per- 
formed. 

1 1. What is the sign of aggregation i 

The sign of aggregation is a parenthesis, or bar, which 
shows that the numbers enclosed by it are to be considered 
together, subject to the same operation. 

12. What is a rule} A prob/etnl A)i axiom] 

A rule is a prescribed method of performing an opera- 
tion. A problem is a question or proposition to be solved. 
An axiom is any truth which is self-evident. 

13. What is analysis in arithmetic} 

The process of investigating principles, and solving prob- 
lems, independently of set rules. 

14. What is notatioti } 

Notation is a method of writing or expressing numbers 
by characters. 

15. What is numeration} 

Numeration is a method of reading numbers expressed 
by characters. 

16. Hoio many systems 0/ notation are in genera/ use} 
Two: the Roman and the Arabic. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 287 

17. Upon 7vhat is the Roman notation founded! 

Upon five principles: first, repeating a letter repeats its 
value; second, if a letter of any value is placed after one 
of greater value, it is added to the greater; third, if a letter 
of any value is placed before a greater, it is to be taken 
from the greater; fourth, if a letter of any value is placed 
between letters of higher value, it is to be taken from their 
united values; fifth, if a bar or clash is placed over a letter, 
it increases its value a thousandfold. 

18. In Juno many icays may numbers be 7vritte7i'i 
In words, letters, and figures. 

19. In the Arabic system of notation numbers are expressed 
according to what principlet 

According to the positions of the nine characters. 

20. Why is the Arabic system of notation, also called the 
decimal system 1 

Because of its increase and decrease in a tenfold ratio, 
from decent, a Latin word meaning ten. 

21. What is the difference betiaeen the simple and local 
value of a figure t 

The simple value of a figure is its value when taken 
alone, while the local value depends upon the place it oc- 
cupies with other figures. 

22. What is the fundamental sy/ttheticfrocess of arithmetic? 
Addition, for by it we pass from unity to plurality; from 

the one to the many. 

23. Gi^e the principles of addition. 

Only similar numbers can be added. The sum is a num- 
ber similar to the numbers added. The sum is the same 
in whatever order the numbers are added. 

24. What are the cases in, or modes of addition I 
Mental addition and written addition. 



288 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

25. Why do we write the fiumbers as suggested by the arith- 
methics, and why do we begin at the right hand to addt 

Merely for convenience. 

26. What is the fu/idamental analytical process of arith- 
metic? 

Subtraction, 

27. Give the principles of subtraction? 

Similar numbers, only, can be subtracted. The differ- 
ence is a number similar to the numbers subtracted. If 
the two numbers are equally increased or diminished the re- 
mainder will be the same. If the first number is equal to the 
sum of the second and the remainder, then the second must 
equal the difference between the first and the remainder. 

28. Name and define the cases in subtraction? 

One is expressed in the Arabic system, the other by some 
mental calculation. 

29. Natne the principles of multiplicatio?i. 

The multiplier is always an abstract number. The 
product of two numbers is the same, whichever is made the 
multiplier. If the multiplicand be multiplied by all of the 
parts of the multiplier, the sum of all the partial products 
will be the true product. The multiplicand equals the quo- 
tient of the product divided by the multiplier; the multi- 
plier equals the quotient of the product divided by the 
multiplicand. 

30. Why are the multiplicand and multiplier taketi together 
called factors? 

Because they make the product. 

31. What arc the terms of division? 
The dividend, divisor and quotient. 

32. Upon what does the quotient depend? 
Upon both dividend and divisor. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 289 

33. Show how the value of the quotiefit depefids on the re- 
lation of dividend and divisor. 

If one of these terms is changed it changes the quotient, 
but if both are changed alike the changes neutralize each 
other and the quotient remains the same. 

34. What principles of division are deduced from these 7e- 
latiofis? 

Multiplying the dividend or dividing the divisor by any 
number multiplies the quotient by that number. Dividing 
the dividend or multiplying the divisor by any number 
divides the quotient by that number. Multiplying or divid- 
ing both dividend and divisor by the same number does 
not change the quotient. 

35. I/i division, what relatio/i exists in regard to the 
quality of abstractfiess and concretenessl 

The quotient may be either abstract or concrete. It 
will be abstract when the dividend and divisor are both 
abstract, or both concrete. It will be concrete when the 
dividend is concrete and the divisor abstract. Either the 
divisor or quotient must always be an abstract number. 
An abstract number cannot be divided by a concrete 
number. 

36. How are jiumbers classified] 

As even and odd; prime and composite; integral and 
fractional; abstract and concrete; simple and compound; 
like and unlike. 

37. What are the minucnti and siibtraheiidl 

The minuend is the number subtracted from; the subtra- 
hend is the number subtracted. 

38. What is a composite number? 

One that can be produced by multiplying two or more 
numbers together. 



290 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

39. What is facforitig? 

The process of separating numbers into factors. 

40. IV/iat are the component factors of a juimbert 

The several numbers which, being multiplied together, 
produce the number. 

41. What are the powers of a nutnbert 

The first power is the number itself, or the root. The 
second power, or square, is the number multiplied by itself. 
The third power, or cube, is the product arising from using 
the number three times as a factor. 

42. What is the reciprocal of a number t 
It is I divided by that number. 

43. How do we find the true retnainder by dividing by 
factors ? 

Multiply each partial remainder, except the first, by all 
the preceding divisors, and add these products to the first 
remainder. It will be noticed that after the first division 
the remainder cannot be of the same denomination as the 
first number divided; and as each succeeding division in- 
creases the value of the remainders, each remainder must 
be multiplied by all the preceding divisors to reduce it to 
its former denomination. 

44. What is a prime number t When are nufnbers prime 
to each other? 

One which cannot be resolved into factors. Numbers 
are prime to each other when they have no common 
divisor. 

45. What are a common divisor, and the greatest comtnon 
divisor t 

One which will divide two or more numbers without a 
remainder. The greatest common divisor is the greatest 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 291 

number that will divide two or more numbers without a 
remainder. 

46. What are a jnultipk, a comtnon multiple, a?id the least 
common multiple^ 

A multiple is a number exactly divisible by a given 
number. A common multiple is one exactly divisible by 
two or more numbers. The least common multiple is the 
least number that is exactly divisible by two or more given 
numbers. 

47. What are fractions 1 
Parts of a unit. 

48. What is the value of a fraction 1 

The quotient of the numerator divided by the denomi- 
nator. 

49. What do the numerator and the denominator respect- 
ively shozvl 

The denominator shows into how many parts a number 
is divided; the numerator shows how many parts are 
taken. 

50. What are a proper fraction, an improper fraction, a 
mixed fraction atid a complex fraction 1 

A proper fraction is one whose numerator is smaller 
than its denominator. An improper fraction is one whose 
numerator is equal to or greater than its denominator. A 
mixed number is one expressed by an integer and fraction 
written together. A complex fraction is one that has a 
fraction in its numerator, or in its denominator, or in 
both. 

51. Is a fraction a number? 

A fraction is a number of equal parts of unity, and 
consequently must represent a subdivision of numbers; 
thus, 5 feet is a number, and the fraction y"^.^ of a foot 
represents equal numbers of a lower order, as 5 inches. 



292 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

52. Is a fraction a denominate number'} 
No. 

53. Why do we invert the divisor in division 0/ fractions? 

For convenience; if it is not inverted the fractions must 
be reduced to a common denominator, and one numerator 
divided by the other. 

54. How do zve find the greatest common divisor of frac- 
tions 7 

We find the greatest common divisor of the given 
numerators, and the least common multiple of the denom- 
inators. 

55. How do we find the least common multiple of frac- 
tions I 

By finding the least common multiple of the numerators, 
and the greatest common divisor of the denominators. 

56. What are decimal fractio?isl 

Fractions whose denominators are increased or de- 
creased in tenfold ratio. 

57. What is the first thing to be considered in the treatment 
of decimals 7 

The method of reading and writing them, or their 
numeration and notation. 

58. What will the denominator of a decimal always be! 

The unit i with as many ciphers annexed as are equal 
to the number of figures in the decimal or numerator. 

59. Upon what does the value of a decimal depend i 
Its distance from the decimal point. 

60. Hoio do decimals i?icrease and decrease 1 

They increase from right to left, and decrease from left 
to right, in a tenfold ratio. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



293 



61. What is a pure decimal] 

A pure decimal consists of a decimal only; for example, 
•35) which is read, as if written, ^W. 

62. W/iat is a mixed decijnali 

One with an integer and a decimal; thus, 15.7. 

63. What is a cotnplex decimal] 

One with a fraction annexed; thus, .005I. 

64. From what are the names of decimal orders derived] 
From the names of the orders of integers. 

65. Hoiii can we find the product of two decimals hy a con- 
tracted tnultiplication ] 

Write the multiplier with the order of its figures re- 
versed, and with units' place under that figure of the 
multiplicand which is the lowest decimal to be retained in 
the product. Find the product of each figure of the 
multiplier by the one above in the multiplicand and those 
to the left, increasing this multiplication by as many units 
as would have been carried had the rejected part of the 
multiplicand been used. Write these partial products 
with the lowest figure in the same column and add 
together, pointing of^ the required number of decimal 
figures. 

66. How can tve find the quotient of one decitnal divided hy 
another by a contracted division ? 

Compare the left hand figure of the divisor with the 
units of like order in the dividend, and determine how 
many figures will be required in the quotient. For the 
first contracted divisor, take as many figures from the left 
of the divisor as there are places required in the quotient, 
and in each following division reject one place from the 
right of the last preceding divisor, using the remainder for 
a new dividend. 



2 94 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

67. What is a circulating decimal 1 

A decimal in which a figure or set of figures are con- 
tinually repeating. 

68. What is a repetetidl 

The figure or set of figures continually repeated. 

69. What is a continued fractioni 

A fraction whose numerator is i, and whose denomina- 
tor is a whole number, plus a fraction whose numerator is 
also I, and whose denominator is a similar fraction, etc. 

70. What is the difference between decimal fractions and 
common fractions t 

The decimal fraction has a denominator understood, 
showing that a unit is divided into ten equal parts, or 
subdivided in a tenfold ratio; the second has a denomina- 
tor expressed, showing that a unit is divided into any 
number of equal parts. 

7 T . What is currency ? 
The medium of circulation. 

7 2. From what 7e>as the sign $ derivedl 

From the initial letters of the United States, U.S. joined 
together as a monogram. 

73. What is an aliquot part of a number? 
Such a part as will exactly divide that number. 

74. What is a billl 

A written statement of articles bought or sold, together 
with the price of each and the whole cost. 

7 5. What is a compound number? 

A concrete number, whose value is expressed in two or 
more different denominations. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC, 295 

76. What is a denominate number 1 

A concrete number in which the unit of measure is 
established by law or custom. 

77. What is a sifnple denominate number f 

A denominate number composed of units of the same 
denomination; as, 3 feet. 

78. What is a compound denominate number] 

One composed of two or more denominations which are 
related to each other; as, 3 feet 4 inches. 

79. What is a standard unit! 

A unit of measure from which the other units of the 
same kind may be derived. 

80. Name the quantities of tnagnitude 7vhich give rise to 
denominate numbers t 

They are value, weight, length, surface, volume, ca- 
pacity, angles, time. 

8 1. What is the standard unit of value 1 

Money is the standard measure of value, and in the 
United States the standard unit is the dollar. In English 
money the pound sterling is the unit. 

82. What is the standard unit of 7V eight t 
The Troy pound. 

83. What is the standard unit of length ? 
The yard. 

84. What is the standard unit of surface? 

The square yard for ordinary measurement, and the 
acre for land. 

85. What is the standard unit of volume? 

The cubic yard for ordinary measurement, and the cord 
for wood. 



296 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

86. What is the standard unit of capacity 1 

The gallon for fluids, and the bushel for dry measure. 

87. What is the standard unit 0/ angles? 
The right angle. 

88. What is the standard unit 0/ time? 

The day. This is determined by the revolution of the 
earth. 

89. What is a measure? 

That by which extent, dimension, capacity, or amount 
is ascertained. Measures are of eight kinds: length, 
surface or area, solidity, weight, time, angles, capacity and 
money. 

90. How many dimensions has extension ? 
Extension has three: length, breadth, and thickness. 

91. Explain ho7v distance is measured by time? 

Every circle is supposed to be divided into 360 equal 
parts called degrees. As the earth makes its revolution 
once in 24 hours, the 24 hours must equal 360°, or i 
hour, 15° of distance. By subdividing, we find that 1° 
would equal 4 minutes, and ^^ of a degree would equal 
4 seconds. 

92. How do you Jind the difference in time corresponding to 
any given difference in longitude? 

Divide the difference in longitude, expressed in degrees, 
minutes and seconds, by 15, and the respective quotients 
will be hours, minutes, and seconds. 

93. How do you find the difference in longitude correspond- 
ing to any given difference in time? 

Multiply the difference in time, expressed in hours, 
minutes and seconds, by 15, and its respective products 
will be degrees, minutes and seconds of longitude. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



297 



94. How do yoii fitid the time at one place^ when the time 
at another place and the differetice of these places in time are 
known ? 

When the second place is east of the first, add their 
difference of time; when it is west of the first, subtract 
their difference of time. 

95. IIo2i) do navigators determine their longitude at sea? 
Taking with them a chronometer set to mark the time at 

a given place — as Greenwich or Washington — they ascer- 
tain by observation of the sun with the sextant the time at 
the place they are in, reduce the difference of time to the 
difference of longitude, and thus ascertain that they are so 
many degrees east or west of the meridian of the place for 
which the chronometer is set. 

96. What is a scale? 

A series of numbers, descending or ascending, used in 
operations upon compound numbers. 

97. What is 7vcigJiti 

A measure of the quantity of matter a body contains, 
according to some fixed standard. 

98. Describe Guntcr' s chain. 

It consists of 100 links, each link containing 7.92 
inches, or the whole length 66 feet, or 4 rods. 

99. What is the difference het^vecn a pound Troy and a 
pound avoirdupois ? 

The Troy pound has 5,760 grains : the avoirdupois, 7,000. 

100. What is linear measure? 

That which is used in measuring lines or distances. 

1 01. What are a square, and a cul?e? 

A square is a superficial figure having four equal sides 
and four equal angles; a cube is a solid figure having six 
equal sides. 



298 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

102. How many inches in a wine gallon, in a beer gallon, 
and in a bushel? 

In a wine gallon, 231 cubic inches ; in a beer gallon, 282 ; 
in a bushel, 2,150.4 cubic inches. 

103. What are duodecimals 1 

The division and subdivision of a unit, resulting by 
continually dividing by 12. 

104. What is percentage 1 What is its base? 

Such part of a number as is represented by the per cent. 
Its base is the number on which the percentage is reckoned. 

105. What do the words per cent. ?nean? 
By the hundred. 

106. Name and define the elements involved in percentage? 
The elements are: the base, or number of which the 

per cent, is taken ; the rate, or number of hundredths taken ; 
the percentage, or quantity taken; the amount, or sum of 
the base and the percentage; and the difference, or base 
less the percentage. 

107. What is the difference between rate and rate per cent? 
The rate is the number of hundredths, and the rate per 

cent, is the fraction which denotes how many hundredths 
are taken. Thus, in 3%, or ^%j^, 3 is the rate and yg^ 
the rate per cent. 

108. Give the applications of percentage. 

The rules of percentage are applied to the computing of 
interest, discount, commission, taxes, insurance, duties, and 
especially profit and loss. 

109. What is commission? What is brokerage? 

The percentage allowed an agent, factor or commission 
merchant, is commission. Brokerage is the fee paid to a 
dealer in money, stocks, etc., for the transaction of 
business. 



WRITTEN A KITH ME TIC. 299 

1 1 o. What ts a commission merchant? 

An agent who buys and sells goods for another on 
commission. 

111. What are a consignee, and a consignor? 

A person who receives goods to sell for another is a 
consignee; a consignor is a person who sends goods to 
another to be sold. 

112. What is a company? What is a corporation? 

A company is a group of individuals united for the pur- 
pose of performing some business or undertaking. A 
corporation is a company formed and authorized by law to 
act as one person. 

113. What is a share of stock, and 7vhat is a stockholder? 

Stock is the amount of capital invested, and a share is 
one of the equal parts into which capital stock is divided. 
A stockholder is the owner of stock. 

114. What is the difference bet7veefi a charter and a firm? 

A charter defines the powers of an incorporated body, 
while firm is the name under which an unincorporated 
body transacts business. 

115. What is stock at par? 

Stock is at par when it sells for its face value; it is said 
to be above par when it sells for more, and below par 
when it sells for less. 

1 1 6. What is profit and loss ? 

A commercial term, used to express the gain or loss in 
business transactions. 

117. Ho7ti do we find the loss or gain per cent, inhen the 
cost and selling price are given ? 

Divide the gain or loss by the purchase price. 



300 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

1 1 8. How do we Jitid the selling price when iJie cost and 
gain or loss per cent, are given? 

Multiply the purchase price by ^i, increased or dimin- 
ished, as the case may be, by the gain or loss per cent. 

119. How do we find the cost when the selling price and 
the gain or loss per cent, are given 1 

Divide the selling price by ^i, increased or diminished, 
as the case may be, by the gain or loss per cent. 

120. What is an instalment! An assessment? A dividend? 
An instalment .is an advance payment required of the 

stockholders on their subscriptions to the capital stock. 
An assessment is a sum required of the stockholders to 
meet the losses of the business expenses of the company. 
A dividend is a sum paid to the stockholders from the 
profits of the business. 

121. What is insurance ? A policy ? A premium ? 

Insurance is security on property guaranteed by one 
party to another for a stipulated sum, against the loss of 
property by any casualty. A policy is a written contract 
between the parties. A premium is the sum periodically 
paid for insurance. 

122. Define a)i underwriter. 

An underwriter is an insurer — the person who takes the 
risk. 

123. IVame the kinds of insui-ance? 

There are six different kinds of insurance: Fire insur- 
ance, Marine insurance, Cyclone insurance. Accident 
insurance. Health insurance. Life insurance. 

124. What is a tax? A poll tax? An assessor? 

A tax is a money payment assessed on the person or 
on property of the individual for public purposes. A poll tax 
is a head-tax — a sum required of each male citizen liable to 



WRITTEN A RITHME TIC. 301 

taxation, without regard to his property. An assessor is 
the person appointed to prepare the assessment-roll and 
apportion the taxes. 

125. What is an inventory 1 

A written list of articles of property, with their values. 

126. What are general average and jetsam ? 

General average is a method of ascertaining the loss to 
be sustained by the proprietors of ships, freight and cargo 
respectively where a part of the property has been sacri- 
ficed or damaged for the common safety. Jetsam is the 
part of the goods thrown overboard. 

127. What are duties or customs, and what is a custom- 
house 1 

Duties or customs are taxes levied on imported goods. 
A custom-house is an office established by the government 
for the transaction of business relating to duties. 

128. What is smuggli?ig? 

Carrying on foreign commerce secretly, without paying 
the duties imposed by law. 

129. IIo70 many kinds 0/ duties are there? Define them. 
There are two kinds of duties: ad valorem and specific. 

An ad valorem duty is the sum computed on the cost of 
the goods in the country from which they were imported. 
A specific duty is a sum computed on the weight or meas- 
ure of the goods, without regard to their cost. 

130. What is interest, and johat is usury? 

A sum paid for the use of money. Usury is interest 
above the legal rate. 

131. What is a custom tariff! 

A list of the rates of duties to be collected. 



302 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

132. What is the difference bet^veen siffiple and compound 
interest? 

Simple interest is the interest on the principal only; 
compound interest is the interest on the principal and the 
previous interest added. 

133. The time, rate per cent, atid interest being given, how 
do we find the principal! 

Divide the given interest by the interest on ^i for the 
given time at the given rate. 

134. The time, rate per cent, and amount being given, how 
do 7t>e find the principal? 

Divide the given amount by the amount of ^i for the 
given time at the given rate. 

135. 7he principal, time and interest being given, how do 
7ve find the rate per cent. ? 

Divide the given interest by the interest on the principal 
at I per cent, for the time. 

136. The principal, iiiteresf, and rate per cetit. being given, 
ho7v do we find the time? 

Divide the given interest by the interest on the princi- 
pal for one year at the rate per cent. 

137. What is a partial payment? An indorsement? 

Partial payment of a note, bond, or other obligation is 
the payment of a certain amount of the money due on the 
obligation. An endorsement is anything written on the 
back, 

138. What is discount? What is the present ivorth of a 
debt, and how do 7i)e find it? 

Discount is an allowance made for the payment of a debt 
before it is due. The present worth of a debt is such a 
sum as, being put at legal interest, would amount to the 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 303 

debt when due. It is found by dividing the given debt by 
the amount of $1 at interest for the given time and rate. 

139. What is a bank] What is bank discount] What 
are days of grace] 

A bank is a corporation chartered by law for the pur- 
pose of receiving and loaning money, and perhaps also of 
issuing a paper circulation. Bank discount is an allowance 
made to a bank for the payment of a debt before it is due. 
Days of grace are three days allowed a debtor to pay his 
obligations after they become due. This practice has been 
discontinued in New York State. 

140. What is a promissory note] What is a bank note] 
What is a negotiable note] 

A promissory note is a written agreement to pay a cer- 
tain sum either on demand or at a specified time. Bank- 
notes are paper currency issued by banks as money. A 
negotiable note is one which may be bought and sold, or 
negotiated, and is made payable to the bearer or to the 
order of the payee. 

141. Name and define the kinds of notes. 

They are classified as time notes, negotiable notes, joint 
notes, bank notes, drafts, stock, and bonds. 

142. What is a notary public] What is a protest] 

An officer authorized by law to attest the validity of docu- 
ments or undertakings of any kind. A protest is a formal 
declaration in writing, made by a notary public, at the re- 
quest of the holder of a note, notifying the makers and the 
endorsers of its non-payment. 

143. What is a draft] A check] 

A draft is a note of exchange, issued by one party, call- 
ing upon a second party to pay over to a third party so 
much money, and charge therewith the account of the 
third party. A check is also a note of exchange, but made 



304 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

payable at some bank where the person issuing it has de- 
posits or credit. 

144. What is a bond? W/iat is a coupon? 

Bonds are interest-bearing notes issued by nations, states, 
cities, railroad companies, and other corporations as a 
means of borrowing money. The coupons are the due-bills 
for the interest, which, as they become due, are cut off and 
presented for payment. 

145. What do the terms '■'■five-twenties'''' and '■'■ten-forties''^ 
mean ? 

They are applied to government bonds and indicate the 
time when due. The five-twenties are due twenty years 
after issue, although the government can pay them any 
time after five if they choose to do so. The same rule of 
interpretation applies to the ten-forties. These war-bonds 
are now out of date. 

146. What is exchange, and hotv many kinds are there? 

Exchange is a method of remitting money from one per- 
son to another, or making payments by writteri orders. 
There are two kinds, domestic and foreign. 

147. Define these. 

Domestic or inland exchange is the exchange between 
different places in the same country. Foreign exchange 
is the remittance made between different countries. 

J 48. What is a bill of exchange? 

It is a written request or order upon one person to pay a 
certain sum to another person, or to his order, at a speci- 
fied time. A draft or check is one kind of bill of exchange. 

149. How mafty parties are there to a transaction in ex- 
change? 

There are always three, and usually four. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



305 



150. What is a set of exchatige'} What is a course of ex- 
change i 

It consists of three copies of the same bill sent by differ- 
ent conveyances to provide against a loss; when one has 
been paid the others are void. A course of exchange is 
the current price paid in one place for bills of exchange on 
another place. 

151. What is equation of payments f 

The process of finding the mean time of the payment of 
several sums, due at different times, without interest. 

152. What is equated time ? 

The date at which several debts may be paid at one 
time. 

153. What is the focal date? 

The date by which all others are compared in averaging 
an account. 

154. What is partnership ] 

A relation established by two or more persons in trade. 
The individuals thus associated are called partners. 

155. What is the difference betzveen simple and cof?ipoiind 
partnership ? 

A simple partnership is one in which each of the partners 
has his capital invested for the same length of time. A 
compound partnership is that in which the capital of the 
partners is employed for different periods of time. 

156. What is an endorsement] 

The endorsement of a bill of exchange is the writing 
upon its back by which the payee relinquishes his title, 
and transfers the payment to another. 

157. What is an acceptance? 

The acceptance of a bill is the promise which the drawee 
makes to pay it at maturity. 



3o6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

158. Hoiii is this obligation a ckn owl edged 2 

By writing the word "accepted," with his signature, 
across the face of the bill. 

159. What is a batikruptl 

A bankrupt is a person who fails in business and has 
not property enough to pay his bills. 

1 60. What is the difference between a bankrupt and a?i in- 
solvent? 

"Bankrupt" is strictly a term applicable only to a trader, 
while the term "insolvent" applies to any person who is 
unable to pay his debts. 

161. Defi)ie bafikruptcy. 

It is the condition of the business of a bankrupt. 

162. What is analysis? 

It is the process of arriving at a required result by fol- 
lowing a course of reasoning, and not by formal rules. 

163. What is ratio? Define each kind. 

Ratio is the comparison of two numbers with each other. 
Arithmetical ratio is the difference between two numbers. 
Geometrical ratio is one divided by the other. 

164. What are the terms of a ratio? 
The two numbers compared. 

165. What are the atitecedent and consequent? 

The antecedent is the first term of a ratio; the conse- 
quent is the second term. 

166. What are direct and inverse ratio? 

Direct ratio is dividing the consequent by the antece- 
dent. Inverse ratio is dividing the antecedent by the 
consequent. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 307 

167. /// hoio many 7vays may the ratio of two numbers be 
expressed! 

In two ways: By placing a colon between the terms, or 
by the form of a fraction, taking the antecedent for the 
numerator and the consquent for the denominator. 

168. What is the difference betiveeti a simple ratio and a 
compoii7id j-atio / 

A simple ratio is the ratio of two numbers. A com- 
pound ratio is the product of two or more simple ratios. 

1 69. What is proportion 1 
An equality of ratios. 

170. Which are the extremes and the means of a stated pro- 
portion ? 

The extremes are the first and fourth terms of a stated 
proportion. The means are the other two. 

171. What is a continued proportion ? 

A proportion with more than two equal ratios; as, 
3:5::6:io::9:i5. 

172. How matiy antecedents are there in a proportion, and 
how many consequents! 

As each ratio has an antecedent and consequent, the first 
and third terms of a proportion are the antecedents, and 
the second and fourth the consequents. 

173. How are ratio and proportion distinguished! 

Ratio is the relation between two numbers, while pro- 
portion is the relation between two ratios. 

174. What is a simple proportiojil 

An equality between two simple ratios. 

175. What is a direct proportion! 

One in which each term increases or diminishes, as the 
one on which it depends increases or diminishes. 



3o8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

176. What is an iujierse proportion? 

One in which each term increases as the term upon 
which it depends diminishes, or diminishes as it increases. 

177. What is a compound proportion i 

A proportion in which either ratio is compound. 

178. Of what does alligation treatl 

Of mixing or compounding two or more ingredients of 
different values. 

179. How many kinds of alligatioTi are there! Define 
each. 

Two: medial and alternate. Medial is the process of 
finding the average price or quality of several ingredients 
whose prices or qualities are known. Alternate is the 
process of finding the proportional quantity to be taken of 
several ingredients whose prices are known. 

180. Give the analysis of alligation! 

Alligation is but a short way of performing an analysis. 
To show the process we will unite 3, 4, 7, 10, to form a 
value worth 6. 



1 1 
3 — 3 



4 



^1 
1^ 



A It will be noticed that the dif- 



1 ference between 10 and 6 is a 

2 loss of 4, and to make a loss of i 
•3 will require {, also there will be a 

gain of \ in the opposite connection. The proportion, 
then, if the two terms 3 and 10, expressed in fractions, is 
\ and I, which, reduced to a common denominator, is y*?, 
and y\, or expressed in whole numbers, 4 and 3, which, in 
alligation, is understood as an exchange of difference 
without the use of fractions and their reduction to whole 
numbers. 

181. What is an annuity! 

A sum of money payable at certain intervals of time, 
usually one year. 



IVKITTE N A RI TIJME TIC. 



309 



182. Name and define the kinds of annuit^l 

A certain annuity, which continues for a fixed period of 
time; a perpetual annuity, continuing forever; a contin- 
gent annuity, depending upon certain occurences, as on the 
death of a person; an annuity in reversion, one that begins 
at a specified future time or event", and an annuity in 
arrears, is one the payments of which have been allowed to 
accumulate instead of being paid. 

183. What is involution] 

The process of raising a number to a given power. 

184. What is a surdi 

The indicated root of an imperfect power. 

185. What is the power of a number f 

A power of a number is the result obtained by using it a 
certain number of times as a factor. 

186. What is a perfect power! An imperfect power? 

A perfect power is a number whose root can be found. 
An imperfect power is one whose root cannot be exactly 
found. 

187. What is the exponent of a p07aerl 

The exponent of a power is a number placed at the right 
of the root and just above it, to show the number of times 
the root is to be used, as3*=:3X3X3X3- 

1 88. Define evolution. 

Evolution is the process of extracting the root of any 
number considered a power. It is the opposite of involu- 
tion. 

189. What is the root of a number? 

The root of a number is one of the equal factors of that 
number. 



3 to COMMON SCHOOL QUEST/0/^ BOO A'. 

190. How are the roots of nu77ibers indicated^ 

By the sign called a radical >/. The figure on the sign 
indicates the root. 

191. What is the square root of a tiumberl 

One of two equal factors that produce that number. 

192. What is the cube root of a number! 

One of three equal factors that produce that number. 

193. What is an arithmetical progression] 

A series of numbers increased or diminished by a com- 
mon difference. 

194. What is a geofnetrica I progression? 

A series of numbers increased or diminished by a con- 
stant multiplier. 

195. What five things are to be considered in an arithmet- 
ical progression 7 

The first term, the last term, the number of terms, the 
common difference and the sum of the series. Three of 
these being given, the other two can be found. 

196. What things are to be considered in a geometrical pro- 
gression ? 

They are the first term, the last term, the number of 
terms, the constant multiplier, and the sum of the series. 
Three of these being given, the other two can be found. 

197. What is a duodecimal? 

A denominate number in which twelve units of any 
denomination make a unit of the next higher denomina- 
tion. 

198. What is mensuratioti? 

The art of measuring magnitudes. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



311 



199. What is 7nagtiiiiide? 

Any thing which has length, breadth and thickness, or 
all of them, 

200. IVhai is the measuring imit of surfaces] 

It is customary to use the square as the measuring unit, 
as a square inch, foot, rod, etc. 

201. How do you find the area of a parallelogram and a 
square / 

By multiplying the length by the breadth. 

202. Hoiv do you find the area of {a.) a rhombus, (b) of a 
trapeziu7n, (c) of a triangle I 

(a) By multiplying the length by the altitude; (/>) by 
multiplying half the sums of the parallel sides by the alti- 
tude; (c) by multiplying the base by half the altitude. 

203. Hoza do you find the area of a triangle when the three 
sides are givett? 

From half the sum of the three sides subtract each side 
respectively; then multiply together half the sum and the 
three remainders, and extract the square root of the 
product. 

204. IIo7(i do you fifid the circumference of a circle 7iihen 
the diameter is given ? 

To find the circumference multiply the diameter by 
3.14159; to find the diameter, divide the circumference by 
the same number. 

205. Ho7V do you find the area of a circle 1 

By multiplying half the circumference by half the 
diameter; or, by multiplying the circumference by a fourth 
of the diameter. 

206. How do you find the side of the greatest square that 
can be inscribed in a circle of a given diameter 1 

Divide the square of the given diameter by 2, and ex- 
tract the square root of the quotient. 



312 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

207. How do yon find a mean proportional between two 
numbers] 

By multiplying the given numbers together, and extract- 
ing the square root of the product. 

208. Hoiv do you find the solidity of bodies whose sides are 
perpendicular to each otherl 

By multiplying the length, breadth and thickness. 

209. Ho7u do you find the solidity of a prism ? 

By multiplying the area of the base by the height. 

210. How do you find the lateral surface of a right prism ? 
By multiplying the length by the perimeter of the base. 

211. How do you find the solidity of a pyramid or cone 7 
By multiplying the area of the base by \ of the altitude. 

212. How do you find the lateral or convex surface of a 
regular pyramid or cofie? 

By multiplying the perimeter of the base by ^ of the 
slant height. 

213. How do you find the solidity of a cylinder? 

By multiplying the area of the base by the height or 
length. 

214. Ho7v do you find the convex surface of a cylinder? 
By multiplying the circumference of the base by the 

height. 

215. Ho7i> do you find the surface of a sphere or globe? 
By multiplying the circumference by the diameter. 

216. Ho7V do you find the solidity of a sphere or globe? 
By multiplying the surface by ^ of the diameter. 

217. How do you find the side of a square equal in area to 
any given surface. 

By extracting the square root of the given surface. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 313 

218. Ho7v do we measure lumber^ 

Multiply the length in feet by the product of the breadth 
and thickness, both in inches, and divide the result by 12. 

219. How do we find the solid cotitejits of a stick of round 
timber 1 

By multiplying the length by \ the mean circumfer- 
ence. 

220. What is gauging? 

The process of finding the contents or capacity of casks, 
barrels, etc. 

221. How do we find the contents of casks? 

Multiply the square of the mean diameter by the length, 
and this product by .0034 to obtain the wine gallons. 
Using the decimal .0028 will give us the beer gallons. 

222. Define the metric system of measurement. 

The metric system is a decimal system of weights and 
measures, having the metre for the base or unit. 

223. What is the measure of the metre iti inches! 
It measures 39.3708 inches. 

224. From what was the metre obtained? 

It is one ten-millionth part of a quadrant of the earth's 
meridian. 

TEST EXAMPLES. 

[The following examples embody a great variety of practical principles, and have 
been selected especially to test the knowledge of the student.] 

1. One gentleman meeting another, and inquiring the 
time past 12 o'clock, received for an answer: \\ of the 
time from now to midnight; what o'clock in the afternoon 
was it.'' Ans. 5 h. 40 m. 

2. Where shall a pole 60 feet high be broken, that the 
top may rest on the ground 20 feet from the stump? Ans. 

26|. 



314 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

3. Suppose a man owes ^1,000. What sum shall he pay 
yearly so as to cancel the debt, principal and interest, at 
the end of three years, reckoning it at 6 per cent, simple 
interest? Ans, $37ItVu- 

4. A gentleman has a garden 400 feet long and 300 
feet wide which he would raise 9 inches higher by means 
of the earth to be dug out of a ditch that goes around it. 
To what depth must the ditch be dug, supposing its 
breadth to be everywhere 6 feet? A>is. \o^^\. . 

5. Divide ^1,000 among A, B and C, so that A may have 
^156 more than B, and B J62 less than C. Ans. A, ^4i6|; 
B, $260?; C, $3222. 

6. If 21 cows eat up 8 acres of grass in 6 weeks, and 18 
cows eat up the same in 9 weeks, how many cows will it 
maintain for 18 weeks, if the grass grow uniformly during 
that time? Atis. 15 cows. 

7. Required the thickness of the lead of a pipe 
\\ inch bore, which weighs 16 lbs., a yard in length, 
a cubic foot of lead weighing 11,325 oz. avoirdupois. 
A71S. 2.329 -|- in. 

8. If a cubic foot of brass were drawn into wire -^^ of an 
inch in diameter, required the length of the wire, suppos- 
ing no loss in the metal. Ans. 55 m., 4 fur., 104 yds., 
2 ft., 4 in. -f. 

9. Divide 5^25 between 2 boys in such a proportion that, 
after it is divided, A shall have \ more than B. Ans. A, 
$15; B, $10. 

10. A makes B a present of ^100, on condition that he 
shall expend it in cows, sheep, and geese; cows at ^10 
each, sheep at Ji, and geese at i6j| cents, so as to have 
just 100 in the whole. How many must he purchase of 
each? Ans. 5 cows, 41 sheep, and 54 geese. 

11. If i of 6 be 3, what will | of 20 be? Ans. 7 J. 

12. How long must I keep $300 to balance the use of 
^500, which I lent a friend 4 months? Ans. 6| months. 

13. If 800 men have provisions for 2 months, how many 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



315 



must leave that the remainder may subsist 5 months on the 
same? Ans. 480. 

14. A hare, running 36 rods a minute, has 57 rods the 
start of a dog; how far must the dog run to overtake him, 
running 40 rods per minute? Ans. 570 rods. 

15. The hour and minute hands of a watch are together 
at 12 o'clock; when are they next together? Ans. i h., 5m., 
27t\s. 

16. If a pole be \ in the mud, § in the water, and 6 feet 
out of the water, what is its length? Ans. 90 feet. 

17. A man being asked how many geese he had, replied: 
If I had \ as many as I now have, and 2\ geese more, I 
should have 100; how many had he? Ans. 65. 

18. The head of a fish is 4 feet long, the tail as long as 
the head and \ the length of the body, the body as long as 
the head and tail; what is the length of the fish? Ans. 
32 feet. 

19. A and B can build a wall in 4 days, B and C in 
6 days, A and C in 5 days; required the time if they work 
together. Ans. 3^3^. 

20. A man left his two sons, one 14, the other 18 years 
old, $1,000, so divided that their shares, being put at 6 
per cent, interest, should be equal when each should be 
21 years old; what was the share of each? Ans. $546.- 

153 +; $453-846+. 

21. A gentleman divided his fortune among his sons, 
giving A $9 as often as B $5, and C $3 as often as B $7: 
C received $7,442.10!; what was the whole estate? Arts. 
$56,063.8572. 

22. Three horses, belonging to 3 men, do work to the 
amount of $26.45; ^ ^"^^ -^'^ horses are supposed to do | 
of the work, A and C's -^^^ B and C's ig, on which sup- 
position the owners are paid proportionately; what does 
each receive? A)is. A, $11.50; B, $5.75; C, $9.20. 

23. A gay fellow spent f of his fortune, after which he 
gave $7,260 for a commission, and continued his profusion 



3i6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

till he had only $2,178 left, which was \ of what he had 
after purchasing his commission; what was his fortune? 
Ans. $18,295.20. 

24. A general, placing his army in a square, had 231 men 
left, which number was not enough by 44 to enable him to 
add another to each side; how many men in the army? 
Ans. 19,000. 

25. Suppose that a man stands 80 feet from a steeple, 
that a line to him from the top of the steeple is 100 feet 
long, and that the spire is three times as high as the steeple; 
what is the length of a line reaching from the top of the 
spire to the man? Ans. 197 feet, nearly. 

26. How many acres in a square field measuring 70.71 
rods between the opposite corners? Ans. 15I acres. 

27. How long does it take sound to travel 120 miles? 
Ans. 9 m. 14 sec. -)- 

28. A laborer dug a cellar, the length of which was 
2 times the width, and the width 3 times the depth; he 
removed 144 cubic yards of earth; what was the length? 
Ans. 36 feet. 

29. A owes B $750, due in 8 months, but receiving $300 
ready money, he extends the time of paying the remainder, 
so that B shall lose nothing; when was it paid? Ans. 
I yr. I mo. 10 days. 

30. The sum of two numbers is 266"^, and the product 
of the greater multiplied by 3 equals the product of the less 
multiplied by 5 ; what are the numbers? Ans. 100, and 
i66|. 

31. A park 10 rods square is surrounded by a walk which 
occupies ^^0 of the whole park; what is its width? Ans. 
8 ft. 3 in. 

32. How many square inches of leather will cover 
a ball 3I inches in diameter? Ans. 38^- sq. inches. 

TyT)- How many solid inches in a globe 7 inches in 
diameter? Ans. 179I solid inches. 

34. What are the solid contents of a pyramid, the base 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



317 



of which is 4 feet square and the perpendicular height 
9 feet? Alls. 48 solid feet. 

35. What are the solid contents of a stick of timber 18 
feet long, one end of which is 9 inches square and the 
other end 4 inches square, uniformly diminishing through- 
out the whole length? Ans. 5 solid feet, 936 solid inches. 

2)(i. What are the solid contents of a round log of wood 
36 feet long, 1.6 feet in diameter at one end, and dimin- 
ishing gradually to a diameter of .9 of a foot at the other? 
-^«^- 45-333 + solid feet. 

37. How many gallons of wine will a cask contain, the 
head diameter of which is 25 inches, and the bung diameter 
31 inches, and the length 36 inches? Ans. 102.93-1- 
gallons. 

38. Two men carry a kettle weighing 200 pounds; the 
kettle is suspended on a pole, the bale being 2 feet 
6 inches from the hands of one, and 3 feet 4 inches from 
the hands of the other; how many pounds does each bear? 
Ans. I ^14? pounds. 

( 855 pounds. 

39. If a triangular piece of land 30 rods in length, be 20 
rods wide at one end and comes to a point at the other, 
what number of square rods does it contain? Ans. 300. 

40. There are two globes; one of them is i foot in diam- 
eter, and the other 40 feet in diameter; how many of the 
smaller globes would it take to make one of the larger? 
Ans. 64,000. 

41. What is the area of a circle i mile in circum- 
ference? Ans. 50 a. 3 r. 28.7399 + ''• 

42. A conical stack of hay is 20 feet high, and its base 
15 feet in diameter; what is its weight, allowing 5 lbs. to a 
cubic foot? Ans. 5,890.5 lbs. 

43. How many bushels will a cubical bin contain whose 
sides are 9 feet? Ans. 585.80357 bushels. 

44. How many hogsheads will a cylindrical cistern 10 
feet deep and 6i feet diameter contain? Ajis. 39.401 hhds. 



3i8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

45. How far from the end of a stick of timber 30 feet 
long, of equal size from end to end, must a lever be placed 
so that 3 men, 2 at the lever and i at the end of the stick, 
may each carry \ of its weight? Ans. i\ feet. 

46. If 100 eggs are placed in a straight line a rod apart, 
how many miles must a person travel to bring them one 
by one to a basket placed a rod from the first egg? Ans. 
31 m. 180 r. 

47. Said A to B: if I take one of your bags I shall have 
twice as many as you, and if I give you one of mine, we 
shall have an equal number? Ans. 5 and 7. 

48. Divide ^1,000 between A, B, and C, and give A $120 
more than C, and C $95 more than B? Ans. $230 B's, 
$325 C's, $445 A's. 

49. A man's desk was robbed three nights in succession; 
the first night, half the number of dollars was taken and 
half a dollar more; the second, half the remainder was 
taken and half a dollar more; the third night, half of what 
was then left and half a dollar more, when it was found he 
had ^50 left; how much had he at first? Ans. ^407. 

50. A owns I and B ^^ of a ship; A's share is worth 
^10,000 more than B's; what is the value of the ship? 
Ans. ^32,000. 

51. A man gave his oldest son \ of his property less $50; 
to the second he gave \, and to the youngest he gave the 
remainder, which was \ less $10; what was the amount of 
his property? Ans. ^360. 

52. What number is that, jV and \ of which being 
multiplied together, will produce the number itself? 
Ans, 20. 

53. The difference of two numbers is 53 and the differ- 
ence of their squares is 10,759; what are the numbers? 
Ans. 75 and 128. 

54. The sum of two numbers is 120, and the difference 
of their squares is 4,800; what are the numbers? Ans. 40 
and 80. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



319 



55. The diagonal of a square field is 120 rods; what is 
its area? Ans. 7,200 rods. 

56. Find the side of the greatest square beam which can 
be hewn from a log 5 feet in diameter. Ans. 3.535519 
feet. 

57. A man wished to tie his horse by a rope so that he 
could feed on just an acre of ground; how long must the 
rope be? Ans. 7.13645 rods. 

58. What number is that \ of which exceeds | of it by 
45 ? Ans. 600. 

59. At what discount must I buy stocks, so that by sell- 
ing at 2 per cent, premium I may gain 20 per cent, on my 
investment? A7is. 15 per cent. 

60. A debt was paid with interest August 18, 1857; had 
it been paid May 12, 1859, there would have been due ^26 
more; what was the original debt? Ans. $250. 

61. Find the surface of a sphere whose solidity is 65.45 
cubic inches? Ans. 78.54 square inches. 

62. A man has a pile of wood 33 feet 9 inches long, 20 
feet wide, and 5 feet high; if it is piled in a cubical form, 
how high will it be? Ans. 15 feet. 

63. Two merchants had each 40 gallons of wine at $1.80 
a gallon; they wish to make it worth $1.20 a gallon; one 
pours in water, the other alcohol at 40 cents a gallon; 
how many more gallons in one mixture than in the other? 
Ans. 10 gallons. 

64. A contributed ^1,400, B ^2,200, C ^1,875. B gained 
^27.30 more than C; required the total gain. Ans. ^459.90. 

65. A owes B ^2,500 due in 6 months; B wishes him to 
pay part now and retain the remainder 15 months; how 
much should he pay now? Ans. ^1,500. 

66. After 5 gallons of water had been added to 45 gal- 
lons of pure wine, the mixture was worth 51.26 per gallon; 
what was the pure wine worth per gallon? Ans. ^1.40. 

67. At 10 per cent, premium, what bill of exchange on 
London can be bought for $3.30? Ans. £6^ los. 



320 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

68. What debt due in 4 months, together with ^600 due 
in 9 months, could be paid in 7 months, without loss to 
either? 

69. A cistern is | full of water; after 35 gallons are 
taken out it is ^ full; how many gallons will it contain? 
Ans. 120. 

70. I was married at the age of 21; if I live 19 years 
longer I shall have been married 60 years; what is my age? 
Ans. 62 years. 

71. A boat goes i6| miles an hour down stream, and 10 
miles an hour up stream; if it takes 22 1 hours longer in 
coraing up than going down, how far down did it go? 
Ans. 585 miles. 

72. I bought a horse for $156 due in 8 months, and sold 
him at once for $180; find the gain per cent., interest 4^ 
percent. Ans. i8[^ per cent. 

73. After spending 25 percent, of my money, and 25 per 
cent, of the remainder, I had left $675; what had I at 
first? Alls. ^1,200. 

74. A man sold a house at 22 per cent, loss, losing $748; 
what did he receive for it? Ans. ^2,652. 

75. To carry 7 t. 10 cwt. 25 miles costs ^18.75; how much 
can be carried 125 miles for ^131.25? Ans. 10 t. 10 cwt. 

76. The base of a right-angled triangle is 42 feet, its 
hypotenuse 58 ; find the area. Ans. 840 square feet. 

77. At $1.47 a bushel, what cost 17 bushels, 3 pecks, 
2 quarts, i pint of fruit? Ans. ^26.21. 

78. A boy hired to a mechanic for 20 weeks on condition 
that he should receive ^20 and a coat. At the end of 
12 weeks the boy quit work, when it was found that he 
was entitled to ^9 and the coat; what was the value of the 
coat? Ans. $7.50. 

79. A farmer sold 34 bushels of corn and 56 bushels of 
barley for ^63.10, receiving 35 cents a bushel more for the 
barley than for the corn; what was the price of each per 
bushel? Ans. 48 J, price of corn; 83^, price of barley. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



321 



80. Sold ^ of a lot of lumber for what % of it cost; what 
per cent, was gained on the part sold? Ans. 25 per 
cent. 

81. A, B and C can do a job of work in 12 days, C can do 
it in 24 days, and A in 34 days; in what time can B do it 
alone? Ans. 8i| days. 

82. Of what principal is $150 the compound interest for 
2 years at 7 per cent.? Ans. ^1,035.196 -|-. 

83. A man in Buffalo purchased a draft on St. Paul, Minne- 
sota, for ^5,320, drawn at 60 days, paying 15,141.78; 
what was the course of exchange? Ans. 2 i per cent. 

84. What is the difference between half a solid foot and a 
solid half foot? Ans. 648 cubic inches. 

85. The bank discount of a certain sum for 6 months 
was ^188.49; what would have been the true discount? 
Ans. ;^i8o. 

86. The time since noon is /y of the time to 4 o'clock 
P.M. ; what is the time ? Afis. 10 minutes past i o'clock p.m. 

87. A man gave f of an estate to A, | of the remainder to 
B, and the balance to C, who received ^685 less than A; 
require the value of the estate. Ans. ^2,740, 

88. Bought some lemons for $7.20; had I received 30 
more, each would have cost | as much; how many did I 
buy? A71S. 90. 

89. The three sides of a triangle are 16, 63 and 65 ; find 
the area? Ans. 504. 

90. A man having oranges at 4 cents each and apples at 
2 for I cent, gained 20 per cent, by selling 5 dozen for $2.04; 
how many of each did he sell? Ans. 40 oranges, 20 
apples. 

91. Interest ^67.50, amount ^217.50, time 5 years 
7 months 15 days; require the rate. Ans. 8 per cent. 

92. A horse was tied by a rope 52 feet long, fastened 
to the top of a stake 20 feet high; over what area can he 
graze? Ans. 26.586-}- P. 

93. How many pencils must be bought for ^i.oo so that 



322 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

20 per cent, may be gained by selling them 4 for 1 cent? 
Ans. 480. 

94. The square root of a certain number is 4,096; what 
is the cube root of the same number? Ans. 256. 

95. The first term of an arithmetical series is 17, the 
common difference 6, the last term 161; how many terms 
are there? Ans. 25. 

96. A prism is 6 feet 4 inches high, on a base 3 feet 
9 inches square; find the solidity. Ans. 89 cubic feet, 108 
cubic inches. 

97. For a note of $340, discounted at 6 per cent., a 
bank paid $336.43; how many days had the note to run? 
Ans. 60 days. 

98. If to a certain number its half be added, and the 
sum subtracted from 1,000, the remainder will be ten 
greater than the number itself; what is the number? Ans. 
396- 

99. What is the area of a circle whose diameter is 
I foot I inch? Alls. 132.7326 square inches. 

100. A's income is 16 per cent, of his capital; he is 
taxed 2\ per cent, of his income, and pays $26.04; what 
is his capital? Ans. $6,510. 

loi. The expense of building a public bridge was $1,260.- 
52, which was defrayed by a tax upon the property of the 
town. The rate of taxation was 3] mills on $1, and the 
collector's commission was 3^ per cent.; what was the 
valuation of the property? Ans. $401,920. 

102. A man received $33.25 interest on a sum of money 
loaned 5 years previous at 7 per cent.; what was the sum 
lent? Ans. $95. 

103. A house that cost $8,250, rents for $750 a year; the 
insurance is f^ per cent, and repairs \ per cent, every 
year; what rate of interest does it pay? Ans. 8 per cent. 

104. Bought $860 bank stock at 4 per cent, advance; 
sold at a discount of 2^ per cent.; find the loss. Ans. 
$S5-9o- 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



323 



105. What is the difference between the true and the 
bank discount of $1,375.50 for 60 days, at 6 per cent. ? Arts. 

$ -M- 

106. What per cent, will be gained by buying apples at 
the rate of 3 for i cent, and selling them at 3 cents each? 
Ans. 800 per cent. 

107. Find two numbers whose difference equals 1,427, 
and I of the first equal 'l of the second. A^/s. 12,843 ^.nd 
1 1,416. 

108. Pind the solid contents of a globe whose diameter 
is I foot 3 inches? A/is. i cubic foot, 39-15 cubic inches. 

109. A, B and C bought a farm for ^21,250, of which A 
paid $712 more than B, and $3,551 less than C; what 
sum did each pay? A//s. A, $6,137; B, $5,425; C, $9,688. 

no. At what time between 5 and 6 o'clock is the 
minute hand 14 minutes behind the hour hand? A/is. 12 
minutes after 5 o'clock. 

111. What is the present worth of a debt due in 4 
years 8 months 10 days, the true discount, at 6 per cent., 
being$i6g? A /is. $600. 

112. Divide, 2,331 among A, B, and C, in the ratio of i, 
i, h ^"^- A, 945; B, 756; C, 630. 

113. From a piece of ground 30 rods wide and 50 rods 
long, a lot 25 feet wide and 100 feet long was sold for $275; 
find the value of the remainder at the same rate. A/is. 
$44,646.25. 

114. A man bought copper at 27 cents a pound; it lost 
2 per cent, in casting; at what price per pound must he 
sell the castings to gain 47 per cent.? Aus. 40.^ cents per 
pound. 

115. A man bought land at $30 an acre; how much must 
he ask an acre, that he may abate 25 per cent, from his 
former asking price and still make 20 per cent, on the 
purchase money ? A/is. $48. 

116. A machinist sold 24 grain drills for $125 each; 
on one-half of them he gained 25 per cent., and on the 



324 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

remainder he lost 25 per cent.; did he gain or lose on the 
whole, and how much? Ans. ^200 lost. 

117. A cistern has three pipes; the first will empty it in 
9 hours; the other two are equal to each other in size; if all 
three are left open the cistern will be filled in 6 hours; how 
long -would it take the second or third alone to fill it. Ajis. 
7 J hours. 

118. If 3 gallons of brandy, at ^3 a gallon, and 5 quarts 
of alcohol, at 40 cents a gallon, be mixed with \ gallon of 
water, for what must the mixture be sold a gallon to gain 
37 per cent. .'' Ans. $2.74. 

119. Area of a circle 19,635 square feet; find the radius. 
A71S. 2 feet 6 inches. 

120. Debt $245, discount $105, rate 8 per cent.; find 
the time. Ans. 9 years, 4 months, 15 days. 

121. The parallel sides of a trapezoid are 37^ feet and 
381 feet, and are 16^ feet apart; find the area. Ans, 
627 square feet. 

122. A horse costing ^156.25 was sold for ^256.25; what 
per cent, was gained? Ans. 64 per cent. 

J 23, Principal 1^336, rate 10 per cent., amount $560; find 
the time. Aiis. 6 years, 8 months. 

124. A can do a piece of work in 6 days, A and B can 
do it in 3I days, and A, B and C in 2\ days; how long 
would it take A and C to do it? Ans. 4 days. 

125. To a certain number its fifth was added, and one- 
fifth of the result being added to the original number 
gave 6,076; find the number. Ans. 4,900. 

126. Find the area of a triangle whose sides are 10, loi 
and 14J. Ans. 52I. 

I 27. What number is that whose eighth exceeds its tenth 
by 14 less than its twelfth? Ans. 240. 

128. What sum must I lend for 5 years 6 months, 
at 8 per cent., to receive on settlement ^957.24. Ans. 
$664.75. 

129. I gave A -jy^ of my money, and B ^^ of the re- 



WRITTEN ARITHME TIC. 325 

mainder; if B received 18 cents more than A, how much 
had I at first? Ans. $36.48. 

130. Sold for a man 320 acres of land at $2,561 per acre, 
and sent him $779; what per cent, commission did I 
charge.'' Ans. 5 per cent. 

131. A man can do a piece of work in 45 days; if his son 
can work § as fast, how long will it take both to do it.'' 
Ans. 27 days. 

132. Divide $5,000 between A and B, so that A's share 
may be $400 less than twice B's. Ans. A's, $3,200; B's, 
$1,800. 

133. Mix 2] pints at 37 cents a pint, with 7 pints at 74 
cents, and find the value of i pint of the mixture. Ans. 65 
cents per pint. 

134. A globe 6 inches in diameter weighs 64 pounds; 
what will be the weight of another globe of the same 
material, the diameter being i foot 9 inches? Ans. i t., 
7 cwt., I qr., 19 lbs. 

135. Find the bank discount of a note of $825.50, pay- 
able in 3 months, rate at 6 per cent. A)is. $12.79. 

136. If \ of a number be subtracted from 1 of the num- 
ber, the remainder will be 6 less than \ of the number; 
what is the number? Ans. 180. 

137. What must be paid for a draft on London for 
;^256 los, at 10 per cent, premium? Ans. $1,254. 

138. What is the equated time on the following debts: 
$180 due in 4 months, $540 due in 7 months, $280 due 
in 10 months? Ans. 7 months and 9 days. 

139. If a certain number be diminished by its \, and 
\ of the remainder be added to the first number, the sum 
will be 18.24; required the number. Ans. 11.52. 

140. If 2 ounces of silver, worth $1.10 an ounce, are 
melted with 2 ounces of gold worth 94 cents a pwt., what 
is the compound worth per ounce? Ans. $9.95. 

141. Two men are 90 miles apart and travel towards 
each other, A starting 1 hour before B; A goes 9 miles 



v: 



326 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTIOM BOOK. 

in 2 hours, B 11 miles in 4 hours; how far will each travel 
before they meet? Ans. A 57^1 miles, B 32^1 miles. 

142. What date is 7 months 15 days before July isth, 
1 86 1? Ans. November 30, i860. 

143. By selling at :t,2> cents a pound twice as much is 
gained as by selling at 29 cents a pound ; what per cent, is 
gained by selling at 32 cents a pound ? Ans. 28 per cent. 

144. What per cent, of | is §.? Ans. 88|. 

145. In how many years will the error of the Julian 
Calendar involve the loss of a day.? Ans. i28| years. 

146. At what time between 12 and i o'clock do the hour 
and minute hands of a clock point in directions exactly 
opposite? Ans. 12 o'clock 32 j\ minutes. 

147. Suppose A, B and C to start from the same point 
and to travel in the same direction round a circular island 
73 miles in distance, A at the rate of 6, B of 10 and C of 
16 miles per day; in what time will they be next together? 
Ans. 36^ days. 

148. A blacksmith agreed to shoe a horse for i mill for 
the first nail in his shoe, 2 mills for the second nail, and so 
on ; the shoes contain 32 nails ; how much was he to receive ? 
Ans. $42,949,672.95. 

149. Sold a horse for $37.05, losing 81 per cent.; what 
was the loss? Ans. $157.95. 

150. The mainmast of a ship is 95 feet long, the dia- 
meter of the base is 3|- feet, that of the top 2\ feet; what 
is its solidity? Ans. 677.73475 feet. 

151. A club spent £2 12s. id.; on settling, each paid as 
many pence as there were individuals in the party; how 
many pounds were there .in each? Ans. 78I pounds, 
II 7| pounds. 

152. A grocer divided a barrel of flour into two parts so 
that the smaller contained § as much as the other; how 
many were there in the party? Ans. 25 persons. 

153. A man having spent \ and ?j of his money, had 
;^48| left; how much had he at first? Ans. ;^292. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 327 

154. If \ of a ton of chalk cost £'^, what will | of a ton 
cost? Ans. £\. 

155. A man was hired 50 days, receiving 75 cents tor 
every day he worked, and forfeiting 25 cents for every day 
he was idle; he received $27.50; how many days did he 
work? Ans. 40 days. 

156. A gentleman paid $18.90 among his laborers; to 
each boy 6 cents, to each woman 8 cents, and to each man 
16 cents; there were three women for each boy, and two 
men for each woman; how many men were there? Ans. 90. 

157. A man paid $82.50 for a sheep, a cow, and a yoke 
of oxen; for the cow 8 times, for the oxen 24 times as 
much as for the sheep; what did he pay for each? 
Ans. $2.50, $20, and $60. 

158. A, B and C commence trade with $3,053.25, and 
gain $610.65; ^'s stock -f B's is to B's + C's, as 5 to 7 ; 
and C's stock — B's is to C's ■\- B's, as i to 7 ; what is 
each one's part of the gain? Ans. A's gain, $135.70; 
B's, $203.55; <^'s, $271.40. 

159. There is a windlass, the wheel of which is 60 inches 
in diameter, and the axis, around which the rope coils, is 
6 inches in diameter; how many pounds on the axle will be 
balanced by 240 pounds at the wheel? Ans. 2,400 pounds. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

THEORY AND PRACTICE OF 
TEACHING. 



1. W/iat is it to educate a human being aright 1 

It is to direct the mind, the thoughts, the feelings, the 
instincts, into the channel of truth, morality, enterprise, 
determination and economy. 

2. What is economy 1 

It is the careful utilization of one's forces, and may 
relate to mind, strength, money, or any of the departments 
of mind or nature by which the greatest attainments can 
be acquired with the least expense of those forces. 

3. What is political ecotwifiyl 

It is the utilization of the forces of government, the 
revenues, and the establishing of those laws of economy 
by which the greatest good may be distributed among the 
people. 

4. What are some of the principles of a true political 
economy 1 

To administer the laws without fear or favor, to prevent 
monopoly, to encourage thrift, to destroy the weeds of 

329 



330 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

indolence and vice, to teach the principles of self-reliance, 
of co-operation, of manliness, and the grand and noble 
elements of truth and virtue. 

5. Do individuals have itislificts? 

We are taught that reason is the great faculty by which 
man becomes the image of his Creator, and that instinct is 
nature's gift to the lower orders of creation. To us this 
teaching, although grand and noble in thought and pur- 
pose, does not make the true distinction between man and 
the brute. 

Man, although endowed with the power of reason, often 
displays another element of his being. He instinctively 
laughs, cries, mistrusts, is warned by some influence, and 
in many ways receives impressions which, like the in- 
stincts of animals, work without knowledge or reason. 
The dividing line between reason and instinct cannot 
easily be determined. 

6. What should he the greatest accomplishment of all human 
beings 1 

To strive to control the passions; to speak with purity 
of language; to rise above the vulgar and indifferent, and 
to be noble in thought, deed and purpose. 

7. Hoio can these accomplishments be acquired? 

By the right cultivation of the mind while young. "As 
the twig is bent, so the tree is inclined." 

8. How can ice estimate a ?iation's place in the scale of 
civilization ? 

We can judge it by the history of its schools, the 
universal distribution of the same general knowledge. 
Knowledge is the lever that controls the progress of the 
world. It is the sword of success, the armor of defence, 
and the power that prevails. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 331 

g. What docs the theory of teaching embrace? 
School economy, methods of instruction, methods of 
culture and the history of education. 

1 o. Of U'tiat does school economy treat? 
The best modes of organizing the school and of utilising 
the means of instruction. 

11. Define methods of instruction. 
Means of imparting knowledge. 

I 2. What do you understand by 7?tethods of culture ? 
The study of the physical and mental character of man 
by which his faculties may be developed and strengthened. 

13. Of7ohat should we treat in the history of education? 

We should compare the past with the present, and show 
the growth of education and the advantages which mark 
its progress. 

14. To tahat must the American people give credit for the 
wonderful development of the country's industries, and its arts 
and sciences? 

To free education. 

1 5. IVhat should lae take into consideration in 7na king prep- 
arations for the school? 

There should be a suitable location, properly graded, 
drained and shaded. The house should be built for com- 
fort, health and pleasure. The furniture, apparatus, 
records and studies should be carefully arranged and 
selected. The whole should be homelike and attractive. 

16. What does a suitable location embrace? 
Convenience of access; suitability of grounds and sur- 
roundings; healthfulness of neighborhood, and beauty. 

17. What should be done for the school grounds? 

They should be thoroughly drained, dry, level, sodded, 



332 COMMON- SCHOOL QUEST/OIV BOOK. 

ornamented with shade trees, neatly fenced, and supplied 
with pure water. 

1 8. IV/iai care should you exercise over the school-house, 
the furniture, the apparatus and the grouuds'i 

The teacher should consider the whole as his own, and 
be thoughtful, vigilant and mindful of the responsibility 
which has been placed upon him. 

19. Should the teacher go to his boarding-place for dinner t 

Under no consideration should he leave the school 
grounds, as his presence is required to keep peace, order, 
prevent teasing, protect property and strive to impress 
upon pupils the importance of being ladies and gentlemen. 

20. State the objects of graded schools. 

They economize the labor of instruction; lessen the 
cost; make teachers more effective; promote good order 
in school; prompt the ambition of pupils; provide instruc- 
tion in the higher branches of learning; and remove the 
necessity of children's leaving home to obtain a good 
education. 

21. Ho7v are schools graded t 

Into the primary, the grammar and the high school. 

22. What branches are taught in the higher departitient of 
these graded schools .? 

The high-school course embraces algebra and higher 
mathematics, rhetoric, political economy, history, phys- 
iology, and the studies of nature, business and language. 

23. Upon 7vhat should the size of a school-house depend! 

Upon the number of pupils in attendance. An un- 
graded school, to be taught by one teacher, should contain 
at least nine hundred square feet. A house designed for 
50 to 80 scholars and one recitation room, fifteen hundred 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 



Ill 



square feet. One for 80 to 120 scholars an4 two recita- 
tion rooms, two thousand square feet. 

24. Describe a suitable school-house for rural discricts. 

It should be rectangular in form, the door entering at 
the south end, while the north end should be without 
entrance or windows. The main room should be from 
twelve to sixteen feet high. The house should contain an 
apartment for clothing and necessaries. It should be well 
lighted, warmed and ventilated. 

25. How should a school-house be luarmed? 

Provide a good stove, pipe and chimney. Surround the 
stove with a tin casing made to extend from the floor to 
about one foot above the top of the stove. There should 
be a door in the casing for putting in fuel; and a trunk 
for the conveyance of fresh air should start outside of the 
building, run under the floor and communicate directly 
with the door. The object of the tin casing and the trunk 
must be apparent to all, as the former will prevent the 
burning of clothing and the latter will supply a pure 
current of air upon which combustion depends. 

26. How should a school-room be ventilatedl 
Ventilation should be regulated by the lowering of the 

windows from the top instead of raising the bottom sash, 
especially in cool weather. This will prevent a direct 
draft upon the heads of the pupils. Openings in the ceil- 
ing and doors will also be a means of relieving the heated 
pressure. 

27. What should be the furniture and equipment of a 
school-room 1 

The desks should be of modern approval and set so as 
to enable all pupils to pass to and from their seats without 
creating confusion. There should be a library of reference 
books; a complete dictionary; a geographical gazetteer; a 



334 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

biographical dictionary; a popular encyclopedia; sets of 
historical and physiological charts; outline maps. 

28. How should the teacher'' s desk lye arranged! 

It should embody a plain business office desk, with 
drawers, shelves, closets and book-rack. 

29. With ivhat apparatus should schools he suppliedl 

A set of cards for teaching the alphabet, pronunciation, 
spelling, and elementary reading, with a stand to hang 
them upon ; letter-blocks, and a chart of elementary sounds; 
writing charts; drawing cards and material; a numerical 
frame, and sets of square and cube root blocks; a globe, a 
set of outline maps, and a Tellurian; charts of history; a 
case of minerals and curiosities; engravings, and a ther- 
mometer. 

30. What should be the temperature of a school-room ? 

In our estimation it should be 72° Fahr., although many 
claim that this temperature is too high; we must remem- 
ber that the moving teacher cannot judge by his own 
feelings what would necessarily please the children. 

31. Of 7vhat use are school-records? 

To aid the teacher in his work; to give information to 
parents and school officers; to furnish educational sta- 
tistics; to exert a beneficial influence upon the pupils. 

32. What should be the first step in the organization of a 
school? 

To produce a good impression. The language should 
be mild, but interesting. There should be no show of 
superiority in power or knowledge. The teacher should 
arrange so as to obtain their confidence and respect, 
holding at the same time a deep interest for the instruction 
gf those placed in his charge, 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 



335 



33. Give an outline of work prelimi?iary to the organization 
of a schooH 

The young teacher should consider well his adaptation 
to a particular school before engaging it. He should study 
the difficulties which he might encounter; he should lay 
his plans before the school officers and ask their advice; 
the contract should be made in writing, and if possible, 
the teacher should make the acquaintance of parents before 
opening of school. 

34. What benefits 7vill arise by formitig these acquaint- 
ances ? 

It will convince the people of an interest in the school, 
and draw out their sympathies and general interest. It will 
assist in forming calculations on how to organize; and it 
will give a better chance for the study of human character. 

35. JVhat should be the progratfime for the first day at 
school] 

Furnish something from the beginning that will interest; 
establish order in every movement; inquire how studies 
have formerly been arranged and how conducted. Mention 
the great principle of order, as though other rules were 
far inferior. Do not impose upon the pupils stipulations 
that this shall or that shall not be done. Be moderate in 
demands, but impress upon their minds the necessity of 
walking and studying in an orderly manner, and of keeping 
the school-room pleasant and quiet. 

36. How can you prepare a programme for every dafs 
work ? 

By the advice and consent of the pupils form a system 
of work; arrange the studies systematically; be prompt in 
the recitations, in study and in exercise. 

37. What are the cmploymctifs of a school? 
Study, recitations and exercise. 



336 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

38. What are the objects of study 1 
Knowledge, discipline, aspiration and efficiency. 

39. By what principles should incentives to study be tested? 

They should be continuous, and arise from the nature of 
the subject and the circumstances connected with learning. 

40. IVhat incentives are often used to create ambition and 
interest! 

Prizes; merit-marks; emulation; fear of punishment; 
shame and ridicule. 

4 1 . Should such artificial means be employed? 

Some condemn and some allow. One bad feature is 
that it often creates jealousies and ill-feelings. As an illus- 
tration, the author will mention a circumstance which 
occurred in 1872 while teaching a district school. The 
term was within two weeks of completion, and by request 
a class of thirty-two scholars was organized for spelling, 
each taking his place according to the number of a ticket 
drawn, there being thirty-two numbers. A record was kept 
of the position drawn and compared the last day with the 
position then held. The contest was exciting, as each was 
striving to hold his own and to get above his neighbor. 
The one drawing ticket No. i was a very poor speller, and 
day by day found her making her way toward the foot, 
until she was so near that position that school became 
unbearable, and she took her books home the day before 
the term was out. 

42. What are the proper incentives to study ? 

The approbation of teacher, parents and friends; desire 
for an honorable position in the school and in society; the 
pleasure of overcoming difficulties; the gratification of 
curiosity; hope for success in life; enjoyment of knowledge, 
and prospect of future rewards. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 



337 



43. What are the objects of education^ 

The development of the faculties, the acquisition of 
knowledge and its wise application to the uses of life. 

44. What are the objects of recitation J 

To test knowledge, to acquire power of speech and of 
explanation, and the development of expression generally. 
It gives confidence and demands a careful study of the 
subject under discussion. It induces thought and quickens 
perception. 

45. Hotv should the recitation he conducted? 

It should cover the general points in the lesson by brief 
and comprehensive statements, and the lesson preceding 
should be carefully reviewed. 

46. What is necessary for a good recitation ? 

Alive, intelligent teacher; recitation seats; black-boards; 
apparatus; reference books; a call bell; ventilation and 
proper temperature. 

47. What preparation should the teacher make for the reci- 
tation ? 

He should have a thorough knowledge of the subject, 
and depend upon a general discussion rather than on quot- 
ing the words of the book. 

48. Hoja would you teach grannnarl 

Of all studies grammar is most open to general explana- 
tion. Books should be used only as a source from which 
to draw knowledge or suggestion. No fixed plan of recita- 
tion should be followed. The elements of grammar should 
be given first and carefully illustrated. Definitions should 
be learned only as applied. There should be no rotation, 
no fixed laws of advancement. Analyzing should be intro- 
duced as soon as we have asked the first question. We 
should teach from observations, simple at first, until the 
main principles are thoroughly comprehended. 



338 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

49. Ho7V should geography be taught? 

Much as you would grammar. Give lessons which will 
compare one section of the earth or the country with 
another. It is not necessary to be confined to one book, 
as the same principles are embodied in all of them. Have 
a variation of topics. Call for the various productions of 
South America and the particular countries where each is 
produced. This is enough for one lesson. Better have a 
full knowledge of a little than fail in big attempts. Follow 
with other questions of interest concerning the same part 
of the world. The author once conducted a large class 
without a book for his reference, but in the class there were 
eight different geographies. The plan worked admirably, 
although a case of necessity. 

50. What is a good plan for studying history? 

On this subject the teacher should be thoroughly informed. 
He should map out the points of greatest interest, and as 
the class advances give the subdivisions. Do not be afraid 
to call up a subject at the beginning, the middle, or the 
end. Review is the great secret of success. 

51. Why is it necessary to take exercise ? 

Because it conduces to health, strength, and the ability 
to study. 

52. Define school government. 

It is a proper organization of order, thought and action. 
It is the means of developing a love for study and improve- 
ment. 

53. Under what heads may school go^^ertutietit be embraced? 
School ethics, retributions, legislation and administra- 
tion. 

54. Define ethics. 

The science which treats of human rights and duties. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 339 

55. To 7uhat does school ethics rehitel 

To the rights and duties of persons connected with the 
school. 

56. Who are the important factors in the school? 

The teacher, the general school-officers, the communities 
that found and support schools, and the pupils. 

57. What may be considered some 0/ the most important 
qualifications of the teacher? 

Common sense, knowledge, teaching power, government, 
and love of the work. 

58. What may be considered the school-duties of pupilsl 

Their duties to themselves, to one another, to the school 
property, to the teacher, to the school-officers, to visitors, 
to society, and to God. 

59. What is discipline ? 

A close or thorough application to some particular sub- 
ject or subjects. In school life the term is often applied 
to the correction of particular errors and faults. 

60. What are the general features of school government? 
Force, authority, and love. 

61. What may he considered proper penalties? 

Privation of recitations, of recess, or of position in class, 
reproof, reports to parents, suspension, expulsion, bodily 
punishment, withholding favors, special restrictions or re- 
quirements. 

62. What may be considered improper penalties? 

Threatening, scolding, asking for excuses, whipping in 
anger, compulsory study, and any physical or mental tor- 
ture beyond the absolute demand of the case. 



340 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

63. What actions of the teacher should be specially de- 
nounced! 

Any sudden or violent action, as throwing rulers or 
slapping the head. Care should be taken not to punish 
for offences done beyond the jurisdiction of the school- 
yard. 

64. What should every teacher dol 

Convince his pupils by his conduct that he is their friend; 
take special care that the school-house and appendages are 
kept in good order; be accurate, punctual, cheerful; study 
the art of aptly illustrating a difficult subject; teach hon- 
esty and morality, and strive at all times to win the esteem 
of his pupils. 

65. What errors should the teacher avoid? 

He should guard against prejudices; rjde no "hobbies"; 
never lose patience while reasoning with parents; avoid 
wounding the feelings of a dull scholar; never compare 
one child with another; avoid making excuses to visitors; 
have nothing to do with other business in school hours; 
not attempt to teach too many things; not allow pupils to 
direct their own studies. 

66. What is good education ? 

The cultivation of the nobler sentiments of man; the art 
which commands understanding, that subdues his passions; 
that extends the power of reason and begets a pure con- 
science. 

67. What is teaching? 

The communication of knowledge — giving instruction. 

68. What is learning? 

The acquisition of knowledge — being instructed. 

69. Who 7vill be successful iti teaching? 

Those who can comprehend human character, who can 
control their passions, and who have a love of the work. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 341 

70. Who zvill fail to be successful teachers 1 

Those who teach because of the wages, and at the same 
time have their minds on other matters of business. A 
teacher must not divide his thoughts and feelings. Teach- 
ing is a business, or profession, that requires the whole 
response of the faculties and will admit of no delays or 
thoughtless acts. 

71. How are the faculties of the mind divided? 
Into the intellect, the sensibility and the will. 

72. What faculty comes first in the natural order of devel- 
opment? 

The intellect. 

7 3. Hoia is the intellect developed? 
By the acquisition of knowledge. 

74. What are the sources of knoivledge? 
The senses and the reason. 

75. What is empirical knozvledge? 

The knowledge of experience, derived through the 
senses, which includes all we know by seeing, hearing, 
touching, tasting, smelling, and through the emotional 
feelings. 

76. What is that kno7vledge called which is derived through 
reason ? 

Rational knowledge. 

77. What does this knowledge include? 

All that comes from the power of study and thought. It 
is the development of the mind and understanding. 

78. What is the difference between teaching and talking? 

Teaching communicates knowledge by a course of rea- 
soning, while talk is familiar or unrestrained conversation. 



342 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

7g. What is a remedy for 7vhtspering? 

Whispering usually originates from a lack of interest. 
Produce a love for school and its advancement and whis- 
pering will be easily controlled. 

80. What benefits arise from the practice 0/ music? 

Music softens the thoughts and inspires deep and sacred 
feelings. 

81. What are the purposes of examifiationsl 

To test the knowledge of the pupil and determine 
whether or not he has made real progress in his 
studies. 

82. What relation does the school hold to the state? 

It is the agent appointed by the state for preventing 
ignorance, raising the standard of moral and literary 
culture, and increasing the general prosperity. 

83. What conditions does teaching presuppose? 

A certain capacity on the part of the pupil, knowledge 
and skill on the part of the teacher, and information to 
be imparted and acquired. 

84. What are the practical points to he attaified by an edu- 
cation ? 

It should induce each person to be more industrious, 
more ambitious, more trustworthy, more active and sys- 
tematic, more cheerful, more far-sighted, more economical 
as producers or preservers of property. 

85. What does educatioti do for a people? 

It tends to make them more orderly, more submissive to 
good laws, more independent in political thought, more 
charitable and more refined, and creates a higher plane of 
civilization. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 



343 



86. How should pupils he dealt with at the beginning of 
their school experience? 

They should be received kindly, and every effort made 
to obtain their confidence. 

87. Hoiii may ive secure a full, prompt and regular attend- 
ance ? 

By making the school-room pleasant and attractive; by 
preserving good order; by genuine interest on the part of 
the teacher. 

88. What benefits arise by reciting in concert ? 

It stimulates the timid to overcome their diffidence; it 
cultivates the voice, and produces uniformity of expression. 

89. How should a word be pronounced for spellifig? 
Exactly as it should be pronounced in reading. 

90. What are some of the most common evils from which 
our schools suffer! 

Lack of interest on the part of parents and others con- 
cerned; frequent change of teachers; diversity of class- 
books; ill-qualified teachers; defective supervision. 

9 1 . What should form the foundation for a system of teach- 
ing? 

The capability of the pupil, the educational means to be 
employed, and the manner of performing the work. 

92. What is meant by language lessons? 

A simple means of expressing the fundamental principles 
of some line of knowledge. 

93. What is method? 

The way of performing an act. 

94. How many methods are there in teaching? 

Six: the text-book, oral, Socratic, topical, discussion and 
lecture methods. 



344 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

95. What is the Socratic method 0/ instruction? 

A system of questioning by which the pupil is made to 
work out his own problems step by step. 

96. When should a pupil commit to memory? 

Not until the subject is thoroughly understood. If it 
cannot be understood it will be folly to commit it to 
memory. 

97. What is the great end 0/ school training? 

Mental development; the direction of thought towards 
the practical pursuits of life; the dispersion of ignorance 
and superstition, and the encouragement of a better mode 
of living. 

98. Should a teacher confine himself to the text-book durifig 
recitation ? 

He should use the book as a guide for conducting the 
recitation, but under no consideration depend upon it for 
the interest of the exercise.. As a general rule, a book- 
teacher is an uninteresting human machine, a mere tele- 
phone that only communicates what the sentences contain. 

99. Hoia much review work is necessary? 

This cannot be measured. Review work is too impor- 
tant to be limited, and should be continued as much as 
circumstances will allow. 

1 00. How should your class be placed 7vhen reciting? 
They should be brought as closely together as possible, 

and in a position as convenient to the apparatus of the 
school-room as practicable. 

1 01. What should a person do ivho contemplates teaching 
for the first time? 

He should lay out plans in accordance with the best 
efforts which he can recall in his experience as a scholar, 
or from other observations. 



THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TEACHING. 345 

102. How do you classify the eletnents of pedagogics t 
The physical, the intellectual, and the practical. 

103. What other names are sometimes applied to these 
elements? 

Gymnastics, didactics, and pragmatics. 

104. Of lohat does gymnastics treat 1 

Of athletic exercises — the training of the muscular 
system. 

105. Of what does didactics treat? 
The art or science of teaching. 

106. Of 7vhat does pragmatics treat? 
The science of business. 

107. How is intelligence divided? 

Into perception, conception, and thinking. 

1 08. What is perception ? 

The direction of the moral conduct; it is most sensitive 
in youth. 

log. What is conception? 

The faculty of comprehending an idea. 

no. What is thinking? 

The faculty of calculation, of planning, of reasoning. 

111. What are the elements of success in teaching? 

Executive power, self-control, thorough knowledge, and 
the faculty of imparting such knowledge. 

112. Should a pupil be required to report on his own 
conduct? 

He should not; it is a strong incentive to report incor- 
rectly and might lead to untruthfulness. 



346 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

113. What important branch of study is often neglected in 
our schools? 

Spelling. 

114. What common branches should receive special 
attention ? 

Reading, spelling, mental arithmetic, and writing. 

115. What constitutes good reading? 

A clear, distinct utterance, interspersed with proper 
emphasis and expression. 

116. Why do you regard mental arithmetic as 7vorthy of 
special attention ? 

Because it requires the use of language to demonstrate 
it; is a wholesome exercise for the mind; and it cultivates 
the memory in a practical and useful way. 

117. Hotel should primary instruction be given? 
Largely by oral explanation. 

118. Hojo should parents talk to their children in infancy? 
Their language should be as simple and as correct as 

possible. They should not exaggerate or deceive. What- 
ever is said should be the unqualified truth. 

iig. What is kindergarten instruction? 

The teaching of young children by the use of objects, 
solids, surfaces and outlines. It is a method in which the 
eye conveys the idea, rather than the thought. 

120. What does the theoty and practice of teaching embrace? 
The whole science of education, training the mind, 

developing thought, and inducing mental activity. 

121. Give the names of so?ne of the most important educa- 
tiottal reformers ? 

Aschan, Montaigne, Ratich, Milton, Locke, Rousseau, 
Pestalozzi, Arnold, Mann, Huxley, Spencer, and many 
others. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



ON 



BOOKKEEPING. 



1. What IS bookkeeping'! 

Bookkeeping is the art of recording business transactions 
in a systematic manner to show the true condition of a 
business. It is the science of accounts. 

2. What is a business transaction ? 

A business transaction is, strictly, an exchange of equal 
vakies, or regarded as such. 

3. What is a debtor'i 

A debtor is one who receives vaUies. 

4. What is a creditor I 

A creditor is one from whom value is received. 

5. State tvhat an account is. 

An account is a collection of all debits and credits 
involved in any business transaction, arranged under some 
title or heading. 

6. Define debits and credits. 

Debits are entries against debtors. Credits are entries 
in favor of creditors. 

7. What is the proper title for an accounts 

It is the name by which the person or thing is known. 

347 



348 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



Day Book 

Lowell^ Mass., Oct. i, 1897. 



I 


Smith, Brown & Co., 


Cr. 








By Merchandise, per Invoice, 




4000 














2 


A. B. COMSTOCK, 

To 10 yards Broadcloth @ $5.00, 


Dr. 

$50.00 








" Linings, etc.. 


10.00 


60 










5 








3 


E. E. Adams, 

To I yard Satin 


Dr. 

$2.00 








" Trimmings, 


1.50 


3 






50 


4 


S. G. RiPLEV, 

To 10 yards Cloth @ $4.00, 
" 50 ■■ Cambric @ 13c., 
" 20 •• Cambric @ 12c., 
"15 •' Drilling @ 25c., 
" 30 " Satine @ 33c., 


Dr. 

$40.00 
6.50 
2.40 

3-75 
9.90 








" 6 " Novelty Goods @ 75c., 


4-5° 


67 






05 




Cr. 








4 


By Cash, 




50 




4 


S. G. Ripley, 


Cr. 








By Cash on Account, 




' 7 


50 



BOOKKEEPING. 



349 



Day Book — Continued 



14 

A. B. COMSTOCK, 

To 10 yards Cheviot @ $1.63, 
" 25 " Sheeting @ 12c., 
" 20 " Novelty Goods @ 20c. 



17 

Smith, Brown & Co., 
To Cash on Account, 



•7 



S. G. Rll'LEY, 

To 15 yards White Duck @ 20c. 
"ID " Brown do. @ 30c., 
" 6 pairs Hose @ 75c., 



A. B. COMSTOCK, 

To 6 yards Drilling @ 25c., 
" I Cap, 
" I pair Hose, 



27- 

A. B. COMSTOCK, 

By Cash on Account, 



27- 



30 

E. E. Adams, 

By Cash in full of Account, 



Dr. 

^6.30 
3.00 
4.00 



Dr. 



Dr. 

$3.00 
3.00 
4-5° 



Dr. 

$1.50 
1. 00 
0.75 



Cr. 



E. E. Adams, Dr. 

To 13 yards French Cambric @ 25c., $3-25 

" 14 " Silk @ $1.50, 21.00 

" Trimmings, 10.00 



Cr. 



23 



25 



34 



34 



35 o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

8. How many atid what sides has ati account] 

Two sides, the left hand or debit side, and the right 
hand or credit side. 

9. What does each side contain ? 

The debit side contains the sums for which the account 
has become indebted to' the business. The credit side 
contains the sums for which the business has become 
indebted to the account. 

10. What does each side show? 

The debit side shows resources and losses. The credit 
side shows liabilities and gains. 

1 1 . What are resources, assets, or effects t 

Property belonging to a person, firm or corporation is 
thus termed according to certain conditions. 

1 2. What are liabilities .? 

All the debts and obligations of a business or corporation. 

13. What is the balance of an account i 
The difference between the two sides. 

14. If the balance is on the debit side, what is shown? 
Either a resource or a loss. 

15. If the balance is on the credit side, what is shown? 
Either a liability or a gain. 

16. Hoii) are accounts classified? 

As real or financial, representative or business. 

17. Define real accou/ifs. 

Real accounts are those which represent resources, or 
liabilites, such as cash, notes receivable, notes payable, 
and personal accounts. 



BOOKKEEPING. 



351 



iS. Define representative accounts. 

Representative accounts are those that represent gains 
or losses, as merchandise, real estate, etc. 

19. What t7vo systems of bookkeeping are there? 
Single entry and double entry. 

20. What adva?itage has one over the other? 

The main distinction is that while in single entry a 
record is kept of resources and liabilities, in double entry, 
a similar and additional record is kept of gains and losses. 
In single entry an account is kept with but one party to 
the transaction, either the debtor or creditor. In double 
entry an account is kept with both parties. 

2 I. What books are necessary in single entry? 

Day book, journal, cash book, and ledger. 

22. For ivhat is the day book used? 

To record business transactions as they occur. 

23. What particulars of a business transaction should be 
recorded? 

The date, the transaction, the name of the person, firm 
or corporation, nature of payment, items with price. 

24. Illustrate. 

June I, 1898, Bought of John Arms, for my note at 60 
days, 100 bbls. flour @ ^5. 

25. What will be shown at any time by a cash book properly 
balanced? 

The amount of cash on hand. 

26. Hoiv often, in practice, should the cash balance be 
verified? 

At the close of each business day. 

27. Jf the cash book is correctly kept, how will the debit and 
credit sides compare ? 

The debit side will usually exceed the credit side. If 



352 



COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



c 





O 




^ 




h 




^ 


i-l 


^ 






•-4 


•^ 




f^" 




k 




•-^ 



^ 



- 


- 


OS 
00 


O 






> 

o 














o 
o 
o 


o 
o 

o 


rr 






II 



U pq 



"2 O 









N \0 


S 




N N 


1 


By Cash, 
" Balance, 


t^ o 










O \r\ 




1^ 


O ro ro 
\0 M 


00 


vS 




- "H N 


To Merchandise, 
To Balance, 




" 


00 Q - - 




> 

o 



BOOKKEEPING. 



353 






i 








37 
37 










II 




J3 

«3 

<A 
U 

m 


^ 


o ! 

ro 




ro ^ 


« o 








O lO 






tti 


ro Tf 
ro 


ro 

1 










MM 




.2 

c 

u 

4> 

o 








V 
Q 


ON o - 

5 o - 







L; 



^ 



O 1^ 
»o o 


to 

to 




O r-, O t^ 1 

1 






" " ll 


By Cash, 
" Balance, 

• 


00 o o 

M CO 




ON u - 

'SO"" 








lo O 
O "^ 


>o 


lO 

O 






O 

N 


il 


To Merchandise, 
To Balance, 


00 r> 


- 


O^ u - 

<2 O - 




> 





354 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

the credit exceeds the debit it shows that the account at 
the bank has been overdrawn, or that some account On the 
debit side has been omitted, or that more has been entered 
on the credit side than has been paid out. 

28. Give particulars as to use of ledger. 

The ledger is the final book of entry. It contains a 
record of all the debits and credits in every business trans- 
action. These debits and credits are arranged under 
appropriate heads, and give, in a condensed form, a state- 
ment of financial standing. 

29. Give abbreviations used in bookkeeping for the follow- 
ing terms: at, account, debtor, creditor, merchandise, the same. 

@, a/c, Dr., Cr., Mdse., Do. or ditto. 

30. How is an account closed? 

An account is closed when its debtor and creditor sides 
are made equal in amount. 

31. What is the object of closing an accountl 

To keep it from becoming too long, or too large, and 
also, when there is a balance, to separate it from the rest 
of the account, so that when it is closed, and the balance 
brought down, the account may begin again with but one 
sum. 

32. Rule paper in proper form for day book, cash book, 
and ledger, single entty. Make entries of the following items, 
and balance cash book atid ledger. 

Lowell, Mass., Oct. i, 1897. Invested cash, ^2,500. 
Paid for advertising, ^8, Bought of Smith, Brown & Co., 
New York, on account, merchandise, per invoice, ^4,000. 
Received cash for sales this day, $115.25. 

Oct. 4. Sold A. B. Comstock, on account, 10 yards 
broadcloth @ $5 ; linings, buttons, etc., ^lo. Paid for 
postage, $2.50. 

Oct. 5. Sold E. E. Adams, on account, one yard satin, 



BOOKKEEPING. 355 

^2; trimmings, $1.50. Received cash for sales tliis clay, 
^88.75. 

Oct. 8, Sold S. G. Ripley, 10 yards cloth @ $4; 50 
yards cambric @ 13 cents; 20 yards cambric @ 12 cents; 
15 yards drilling @ 25 cents; 30 yards satine @ 2,2^ cents; 
6 yards novelty cloth @ 75 cents. Received cash on 
account, $50. 

Oct. lo. Paid cash for coal, $10. S. G. Ripley paid 
cash on account $7.50. 

Oct. 14. Sold A. B. Comstock, on account, 10 yards 
black cheviot @ $1-63; 25 yards sheeting @ 12 cents; 
20 yards novelty goods @ 20 cents. Paid cash for postage, 

Oct. 17. Paid Smith, Brown & Co., on account, $2,000. 
Sold S. G. Ripley, on account, 15 yards white duck @ 20 
cents; 10 yards brown do. @ 30 cents; 6 pairs hose @ 75 
cents. 

Oct. 22. Sold A. B. Comstock, on account, 6 yards 
drilling @ 25 cents; i cap, %\\ i pair hose, 75 cents. 
Paid cash for rent, ^50. 

Oct. 27. Received cash, on account, of A. B. Comstock, 
%2t^. Sold E. E. Adams, on account, 13 yards cloth @ 25 
cents; 14 yards silk @ J^i.50; trimmings, $10. 

Oct. 30. Received o E. E. Adams cash, to balance 
account, % 

33. What books are used in double entry 1 

Day book, journal, ledger, cash book, sales book, invoice 
book, bill book, pass book, and time book. 

34. What is the use of the journall 

It is the intermediate book (but usually united with the 
journal) between the day book and the ledger. It contains 
a classified list of all debits and credits previously recorded 
in the day book. Its use is to facilitate the transfer of 
debits and credits to the ledger. 



356 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

35. What term is applied to class if yifig debts a/id credits? 
Journalizing. 

36. What is posting? 

The transferring of the debits and credits of the journal, 
cash book, etc., to the ledger. 

37. What is the use of the invoice book? 

To record goods bought, from whom purchased, and on 
what terms. 

38. What does the sales book contain ? 

A record of all merchandise sold, and the terms of the 
sale. 

39. /Y^r what is a bill or note book used? 

To record all notes received and acceptances issued to 
others, by the business. 

40. What is gaiti ? 

There is gain when property produces more than it costs. 

4 1 . What is loss ? 

There is loss when property costs more than it produces. 

42. If the debits and credits of a ledger agree is it positive 
proof of the correctness of the ivork? 

It is not. The items may have been posted to wrong 
accounts, or the debits and credits may have been reversed, 
and still, the work, though wrong, may balance. 

43. What is a notes receivable account? 

An account of notes and bills due the firm. 

44. What is a notes payable account? 

An account of notes and bills issued to other parties by 
the firm. 

45. What is merchandise? 

Goods, wares, or anything bought and sold. 



BOOKKEEPING. 



357 



46. What arc personal accoimisl 

Accounts with persons, firms, or corporations. 

47. What is an investment? 

A certain amount of money, or its equivalent in property, 
put into a business. 

48. What is a net ifivestnient? 

It is the amount of the investment after withdrawals 
have been made. If no withdrawals it is the total invest- 
ment. 

49. Defi?ie capital. 

Capital is the whole investment of a business or of an 
individual. 

50. What is insolvency? 

It is the condition of a business that cannot pay its 
debts. The liabilities exceed the resources. 

5 1 . Fortniilate a general rule for determining the debits and 
credits in any business transaction. 

Debit whatever is received, and credit whatever is given 
out, or sold. This is the law of bookkeeping. 

52. IVhcn should the proprietor of a business be debited, and 
when credited? 

He should be debited for what he draws from the 
business, and for his share of the losses. He should be 
credited for investments, when made, and for his share of 
the gain. 

53. When should cash account be debited, and 7vhe?i 
credited? 

It should be debited for all money received, and credited 
for all money paid out. 

54. When should notes receivable account be debited, and 
when credited? 

It should be debited for the notes, drafts, etc., 



358 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

received, and credited when they are paid, or otherwise 
disposed of. 

55. When should notes payable account be debited^ and 
when credited^ 

It should be debited for all notes and acceptances 
redeemed, and credited when they are issued. 

56. When should merchandise be debited, andtchen credited? 
Debit merchandise bought; credit what it produces. 

57. Why are all persons ivhom the Jirtn owes, creditedl 
To show how much the firm owes each person; but the 

merchandise or thing received is debited. 

58. Why is all property sold, credited! 
To show how much is sold. 

59. Why is cash, deposited or paid out, creditedl 
To show how much is paid out. 

60. Why are all gains credited under appropriate titles 1 
To show the amount gained.* 

61. Hoiv are resources shouni on the ledger! 

By an excess of the debit side of financial accounts. 

62. How are liabilities shoivn on the ledger I 

By an excess of the credit side of financial accounts. 

63. Ifo7e.> are gains shown on the ledger? 

By an excess of the credit side of business accounts. 

64. How are losses shoivn on the ledger? 

By an excess of the debit side of business accounts. 

65. Ho7v ascertain the rvalue of 7nerchandise u7isold? 
By taking an inventory. 

*Every account of a transaction is both Dr. and Cr., but only one 
term is used in summarizing. 



BOOKKEEPING. 



359 



66. What is an inventory 7 

A detailed list, with cost-prices of property, goods, etc., 
on hand. 

67. What is the object of closing a ledger 1 

To ascertain both the present condition of a business, 
and its progress. Its present condition is shown by a list 
of its resources and liabilities. Its progress is shown by a 
list of its gains or losses. 

68. What class of accounts is closed into loss and gain 1 
Business accounts. 

69. What class of accounts is closed into the balance 
account 7 

Financial accounts. 

70. What is a trial balance 1 

A test of the correctness of ledger account. 

7 I. What does a balafice sheet contain t 

A systematic arrangement of facts for the purpose of 
showing, at a glance, the condition of a business. 

7 2. Rule paper and arrange the following items to sho7v the 
use of day book, journal and ledger in double entry : 

New York, Sept. i, 1897. Bought of James Monroe, on 
account, 5000 barrels of flour @ ^10. 

Sept. 2. Sold Andrew Jackson, for cash, 100 barrels of 
flour (a) ^10.50. 

73. What is a receipt? 

A receipt is a written or printed pcknowledgment of 
the acceptance of money, or whatever is specified therein. 



360 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



I. Day Book 

New York, September i, 1897. 



Bought of James Monroe, on Account, 
500 bbls. Flour @ $10.00 



Sold Andrew Jackson, for Cash, 
too bbls. Flour @ $10.50, 



5000 



1050 



2. Journal 

New Y'ork, September i, 1897, 



Dr. 



Cr. 



Merchandise, 

To James Monroe, 



Df 



Cash, 

To Merchandise, 



Dr. 



5000 



1050 



5000 



1050 



Dr. 



3. Ledger 

MERCHANDISE 



Cr. 



1897 
Sept. 



To J. Monroe, 



I 


5000 




.897 

Sept. 


2 



By Cash, 



1050 



Dr. 



JAMES MONROE 



Cr. 









1897 

Sept 


I 



By Mdse., 



5000 



Dr. 



CASH 



Cr. 



1897 
Sept. 



To Mdse., 



I 


1050 











BOOKKEEPING. 



361 


























10 


10 


I 







IT) 





LO 








N 


" 1 




CO 


N 





„ 








M 


■* 
















u-> 




00 
p< 
«= 1 












c 






II 












^ 










^ 



















bo 


















c 








PQ 




























tfi 






1) 


cy 




« 






> 




"rt 


to 

rt 


XI 


S 








"O 











c 




c< 






< 


;i. 


U 




en 


ClS 


M 






>> 


















M 


' 


' 


' 












„ 


M- 





•<r 


r^ 


N 


^ 
















~ 


r) 


ro 


























CO 


























LO 


10 








• 


"1 


LO 


m 







N 


r-. 





w-> 





r-^ 


c» 


N 







lO 


00 





r^ 


to 


t^ 


■* 


N 







« 


00 


10 




N 


ro 


M 


lO 




lo 














00 


I-^ 




















*ft 




_^_^ 














^ 
















^ 




ll 

















. 


T) 






0) 










f- 


C 




4^ 






<u 






rt 




c 
£ 


c 

0! 

4: 


. 


S" 

S 


: 


b 


U 


■a 
< 


J3 





> 


■J 









K 


w 








s 




c« 




< 


u 


U 
























h 


* 


' 


"• 


" 


" 


" 


H 




- 


- 


iri 


00 












l-l 


t-. 


















> 


a\ 


•J 


4 


« 


« 


. 


« 


s* 


























z; 



362 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

74, Write a receipt for re?it iti proper form. 



$jo.oo Albany, N. K, June /, i8gg. 

Received from James L. Foote, the sum of 
Thirty and j,jq Dollars, on account of rent of 

prem^ises-, for the month ending 

May J/, i8gg. 

Walter Penniman. 



75. What is a promissory note 1 

It is a written promise to pay to the order of a certain 
party, or to bearer, a stated sum of money, at a specified 
time. 

76. What is a joint note? 

A joint note is one which two or more persons jointly 
promise to pay. Each person signing a joint note is liable 
for only his share. 

77. Write a non-interest bearifig joint note. 



$65^!-^ Yojtkers, N. K, Aug. 8, i8gg. 

Sixty days after date we promise to pay 
to the order of Arthur W. Chippejidale, 
Sixty -five and ^j Dollars, at the Vonkers 
National Bank. Value received. 

William C. fones. 
No. 42. Due, Oct. 7, 'gg. 

Horace M. Chase, 



BOOKKEEPING. 363 

78. What is a Joint and several notef 

It is one which two or more persons jointly and severally 
promise to pay. Each person signing such a note is held 
liable for the whole amount, if the others fail to pay their 
shares. 

79. What is a 7iegotiabIe notel 

One that may be bought and sold, or negotiated. It is 
made payable to the bearer, or to the order of the payee. 

80. What is an indorsement.^ 

An indorsement makes the indorser, or the one who 
writes his name on the back of the note, liable unless he 
adds "without recourse" for the payment of the note, if 
the maker fails to pay it when due. 

81. What is an indorsement in fuli'i 

It is one in which the indorser limits the payment of the 
note to some particular party. 

82. What is meant by the renewal of a note? 

When the maker of a note can not pay it when it matures, 
oftentimes the holder consents to a renewal by receiving a 
new note for such a sum as when discounted will net the 
amount due on the old note. 

83. What is a draft? 

A draft is an order from one bank or mercantile house 
to another to pay a specified sum of money to a third 
party. 

84. Give terms applied to the ferson 70 ho iv rites the draft, 
the one to whom the draft is made payable, and the one on 
whom the draft is drawn. 

Drawer, drawee, payee. 

85. What is a bill of exchange! 

A request, or order, from one bank or commercial 
house to another for the payment of money to a third 



364 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

person named or to his order. It is frequently called a 
draft. 

86. What is a check .? 

A written order for money, drawn on a bank, banker, or 
bank cashier, payable on demand without interest, to the 
person named therein, or to his order, or to bearer. The 
word is now generally spelled "cheque." 

87. How does one certify a bank check 1 

By stamping, or writing across its face, Good, when 

properly indorsed, for % . 

Cashier or Teller. 

88. Of^vhat use is a certified bank check? 

It guarantees the genuineness of the signature of the 
maker, and also that there are sufficient funds on deposit 
to the credit of the drawer to pay the face of the check. 

8g. What is a certificate 0/ deposit? 

A written instrument issued by a bank certifying that 
the person named therein has deposited a certain sum of 
money to the credit of himself, or some other person, 
payable when said certificate, properly indorsed, is 
returned. 

90. What is a clearing house? 

A place where bankers meet and make daily settlements 
with each other, by paying and receiving the difference 
between their accounts which arises from the checks drawn 
by the depositors of the various banks. 

91. Is the bank debited or credited ivhen a check is drawn 
on it? 

Credited. 

92. Is cash debited or credited, when cash, or its equivalent 
is received? 

Debited. 



BOOKKEEPING. 



365 



93. What is meant by the accepta7ice of a bill of draft 1 

It is a promise made by the drawee, when the bill is 
presented, to pay it at maturity. The draft then becomes 
equivalent to a promissory note. 

94. What is a protest] 

A statement in writing, made by a notary public, at the 
request of the holder of a note, notifying the maker and 
the indorser of its non-payment when due. 

95. What is a bill] 

A bill is a written statement from the creditor to the 
debtor, specifying the nature and amount of the debt and 
when incurred. 

96. Make a bill in proper form, and receipt it. 



Medford, Mass., May 11, 18 gg. 
John J Ft Hi am Jay 

Bought of JVhite & SinitJi. 


May 

u 


2 

6 
9 


joo bbls. Flour @ $6.^0, 

SO " " @ $S-90, 

JOO " " @ $9.00, 

Received Payment, 

White & Smith. 


%6so 

295 
goo 

1184.5 


00 
00 
00 
00 







97- 



What is an account current? 



An account current is a running, or unsettled account. 
It is sometimes used to show only the debtor side of the 
account, each party rendering to the other an account of 
his debits only. 



366 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

98. Write a draft in proper form. 



H 
CO 
pa 
H 
O 

Ph 

O 

125 



Boston, Mass., — '. — 18 g — 

Pay to the 



order o/Zbc BcrJ^ebivc IRational IBank 

. Dollars, 

Value received, and charge the same to 

account of 

To > 



s 



99. What are days of grace 1 

The time allowed (three days) by law after the maturity 
of a bill before it must be paid. It is not allowed in every 
State. 

IOC. What is a due bill? 

A written or printed acknowledgment of indebtedness, 
signed by the debtor. 

ID I. Write a due bill in proper fonn. 



$60.00 Boston, Mass., Dec. 4, i8gg. 

Due to Edgar J. Thomson, on dema7id. 

Sixty Dollars, with interest from date 

at 6 per cent, U7itil paid. 

Williafu Burt. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



ON 



DRAWING 



1. What is the aim of drmvingl 

The aim of drawing is to secure culture through the 
senses by which we apprehend the forms of things. 

2. What are the ends to be secured] 

A sensitiveness to beauty, an intelligent appreciation of 
beautiful things, the power to make them beautiful, and to 
reyeal beauty to others. 

3. How can such ends be secured? 

A course in drawing must be shaped upon the broadest 
lines; beginning with the simple ideas and crude tastes of 
the child, it should develop his latent powers to the utmost. 

4. Ifi early education which should precede, the study of 
forfu or of color? Why? 

Color. The element of interest must be brought into 
this study, and it is believed that color is more interesting 
than form. Moreover, it is believed that children notice 
masses of color before they pay attention to form. 

5. Should the study begin with objects? If so, laith what 
objects, natural or artificial? 

It should begin with natural objects. Plant forms are 
the best. 

367 



368 COMMON SCHOOL QUEST/ON BOOK. 

6. What apparatus is necessary in the study of color? 
A prism, pigments, colored paper, brush, colored cray- 
ons, etc. 

7. What are the ends to be worked for in the tirst study 
of color? 

The habit of observing color, refinement of the color sense, 
appreciation of harmonious coloring, intelligent appreciation 
of natural beauty and power to express it, appreciation of 
beauty in ornament and power to express it. 

8. As the study of color progresses, what points should be 
introduced? 

The spectrum should be studied with the tints and 
shades of the seven standard colors, scales of tones, groups 
of analogous colors, analogous harmony, complementary 
colors, effects of juxtaposition, etc. 

9. Upon what is form study based, and how applied? 

Upon the study of geometrical solids and all that per- 
tains to them, surface, lines, etc. By studying forms in 
nature and the arts similar to these type forms. 

I o. Considered with reference to perspective elements, ivhat 
should be the first results of form study? 

A habit of imaging clearly the shapes of things, knowledge 
of space relations, appreciation of the phenomena of 
appearance, and power to express them correctly. 

II. Give illustration of pictorial drawing? 




DRA WING, 369 

I 2 . What is the object of pictorial drawing in its early stages ? 
The power to draw freely and effectively, and apprecia- 
tion of the elements of composition. 

1 3. Defi?ie free-ha7id draioing. 

It is drawing produced by the hand and guided by the 
eye without the use of any auxiliary instruments. 

14. State how a decorative drmving differs from a picture. 

It differs in that its purpose is to give pleasure by beau- 
tifying the object to which it is added, while the purpose of 
a picture is to give pleasure in itself. 

1 5. Mention points to be remembered in decorative design. 
Beauty is the ultimate aim in decorative design. Fitness 

to purpose is an underlying principle of decoration. That 
which is used for decoration should not be of more import- 
ance than the object decorated, and should not detract 
from the usefulness of the object. 

16. Define unit of design. 

A part repeated to form a design is called a unit of that 
design. 

1 7. What are the sources of fnaterials for decorative design 1 
Geometrical figures and natural forms. 

18. Define conventionalization. 

Keeping the general characteristics of a natural form, 
omitting details and accidents of growth, is called conven- 
tionalization. 

19. What are the elementary principles of arrangement for 
decorative purposes 1 

Symmetry, repetition, and alternation. 

20. Give illustration of arrangement of natural unit in 
decorative design. 



370 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

2 1. In (irawing frovi ohjecis, should mechanical directions 
he follojvedl 

It is better to sketch and critically compare with the 
object again and again rather than to follow detailed 
directions. . . 

2 2. How much practice should there he in drawing 
geometric forms 7 

Practice should be given until the figures and their 
details can be drawn from memory. 

23. Illustrate the drawing of an ohject involvitig the oval. 




24. What is perspective drawing? 

Perspective drawing is the representation of an object 
presenting the same appearance as the object itself. 

25. IVhy does the appearance of an object differ from the 
reality 1 

Because of its position and distance from the observer. 
Position affects the apparent form of an object and dis- 
tance the apparent size. • 

26. State the prificiple of perspective.. 

Lines parallel to the picture plane retain their direction 
in perspective. Lines not parallel to the picture plane 
appear to converge as they recede from the eye. Ail 
horizontal lines not parallel to the picture plane vanish at 
the level of the eye. 



DRA WING. 



37^ 



27. What is the vanishhig pointl 

The point toward which any set of parallel lines con- 
verges. 

28. What is fore-shortettitig? 

It is the representation of objects pointing more or less 
directly toward the spectator standing away from a plane 
perpendicular to the spectator's line of sight, but shown in 
such a manner as to convey to the mind the impression 
of their just length. 

2 9. Give illustration involving one set of retreating parallels. 




30. Upon what does unity in a group depend! 

Upon the relations between objects as to kind, size, posi- 
tion. Upon emphasis of principal object and subordina- 
tion of details. Upon concentration of interest by means 
of leading lines and action or movement. 

31. Upon what docs the harmony of a group depend/ 
Upon the balance of one mass with another or upon the 

relations of its principal lines. 

32. What is composition in drawingl 

It is the choice and arrangement of objects for the pur- 
pose of a,rranging them pictorially with special reference to 
beauty of effect. 

33. Give meafiing of light and shade as applied in 
drawing? 

It is the result produced by representing in a drawing 



372 



COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



the effect of light, shade, and shadow. Light is usually 
assumed to come from above and the left. In this case 
the shadows would be on the right side and the lower part 
also. 

34. What is a vieiv 7 

It is a drawing showing the facts of form. 

35. Illustrate by a view in light and shade. 




36. Define constructive drawing. 

Constructive drawing is that branch of the subject which 
gives the facts of objects, and from which objects may be 
constructed. 

37. Give example of working and pictorial drawing and 
developed patterti of cylinder. 





38. What is a bilateral form ? 

It is one having an axis of symmetry, that is, one that 
may be divided into two parts that balance. 



DRAWING. 373 

39. Illustrate bilateral fortn. 




40. Define style hi drawi?ig. 

Style means character. Every style depends upon what 
is peculiar to it, never on what it has in common with 
other styles. 

41. IV/iat are the leadwg styles of historic ornamefit? 

[ Egyptian I Byzantine 

Ancient } Greek Mediaeval J Saracenic 

( Roman ( Gothic 

Modern | Renaissance. 

42. Mention some of the characteristics of Greek style. 
Estheticism, artistic finish, simplicity, conventional- 
ization. 

43. What are the ^'peculiarities of the Saracenic stylet 
Rigid exclusion of symbolism, geometric symmetry and 

gorgeous color effects. 

44. What is meant by the Renaissancel 

It is the style that has prevailed during the last five 
centuries. It is a re-birth of classic styles and estheticism. 

45. What is necessary to an intellige?it appreciation of the 
works of art? 

The study of the best pictures. 



574 



COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



46. What is industrial drawing in its broadest sense? 

It includes mechanical and free-hand outline drawing, 
light and shade, and color, from both artificial and natural 
objects, and structural, decorative, and pictorial designs. 
The scope of modern manufacture allows no element in 
drawing to be eliminated. 

47. Give sketch 0/ outdoor perspective. 







QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO 

AND THEIR EFFECTS UPON THE HUMAN SYSTEM. 



1. Ho7V and by 7vhom was alcohol discovered! 

It is said that Paracelsus, a chemist of the fourteenth 
century, accidentally discovered alcohol, and upon testing 
its power boasted of having found the essence of life, the 
power to cure the weak, and the great benefactor of man- 
kind. 

2. What is alcoholf 

A liquid obtained from the fermentation and distillation 
of fruits and grains. 

3. What must be the condition of fruits or grains to /produce 
alcohol? 

They must pass into a stage of decomposition or rot. 
This occurs only where sugar or starch is one of the 
ingredients. 

4. What are the chemical properties of alcohol? 

It will not freeze; it burns without smoke; it readily 
dissolves gums and oils and forms various mixtures; it is 
used in preserving meats, in perfumery, in thermometers, 
.in varnishes, in spirit lamps, in medicines, and in the 
practice of various arts. 

375 



376 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

5. Ho7v does alcohol preserve meats, insects or animalsl 
It absorbs the water in them and prevents decay. 

6. What are the beverages most largely composed of 
alcohol? 

Whiskey, brandy, rum and gin. These are the principal 
forms of distillations, although scores of mixtures are 
formed. 

7. What are some of the beverages not so largely composed 
of this fluid? 

Wine, beer, ale and cider. 

8. What is the difference bet7veefi alcohol and whiskey? 

Alcohol is the pure spirit, too strong for human drink, 
while whiskey is alcohol doctored to meet the taste. 

9. What is intoxication ? 

Drunkenness, paralysis of the brain, a condition of 
mental stupor. 

I o. What is the differe?ice between food and alcohol? 

Food nourishes and sustains the body; alcohol excites 
the nervous system, clouds the intellect, poisons the blood 
and injures the body. 

II. What is the difference betiveen fermentation and 
distillation ? 

Fermentation is a simple process of nature in the juices 
of fruits and grains. Distillation is the process of taking 
out the alcohol found in fermentation. 

I 2. What is a still, and hoia does it work? 

A boiler in which a liquid containing alcohol is placed. 
The alcohol rises in a vapor, which is carried by a tube 
through a cask of cold water and condensed, passing out 
of the tube in a liquid form stronger than the one boiled. 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO. 377 

13. What is the worm of the stilll What is the 7vorm- 
tub? 

The worm is the tube before mentioned which, in pass- 
ing through the cold water, is coiled spirally, like a worm, 
in order to have a greater surface for cooling. The worm- 
tub is the cask holding the tube or worm. 

14. What are malt liquors 1 

Those manufactured from malt and hops; they are beer, 
ale and porter. 

15. How is malt made? 

By placing a quantity of wet barley in a warm room and 
allowing it to sprout, after which it is dried in a furnace 
and ground. 

16. What parts of the body are affected by the use of 
alcohol? 

The stomach, the heart, the liver, the lungs, the muscles, 
the blood, the brain, the skin, the bones — in fact, every 
part of the body. 

17. Gij'e the circulation of alcohol in the body. 

After being taken into the stomach the organs reject it 
as of no use in nourishment, and it is absorbed by the 
veins and carried to the liver, which in turn forces it on to 
the heart; thence it is driven to the lungs, and by the 
action of the atmosphere a large proportion is drawn off 
with the breath and the body is relieved from the poison 
which it could not use, but a part of this fiery fluid which 
does not escape is carried by the blood to the brain, where 
it produces excitement, madness and stupefaction. 

18. Is there any nourishment in alcohol? 

None whatever. Its immediate effect is to quicken 
pulsation and arouse the vital forces of the body. 



378 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

19. How does this Jluid assist in restoring the loiu pulsa- 
tion of an invalid 1 

It quickens immediately the vital forces, and by the use 
of medicines or nourishments the system is sustained; 
otherwise the excitement would die out and the system 
would fall to a lower standard than before taking the 
stimulation. 

20. What does alcohol do to the stomach 1 

It prevents the proper action of the gastric juice on the 
food taken for nourishment. 

2 1 . What experiment will prove this assertion 1 

Take some of the juice from the stomach of a calf which 
has just been killed, and mix alcohol with it, and you will 
notice a chemical action upon the pepsin, which prevents 
its work upon the food. In other words, the food is pre- 
served until the stomach can throw it off and begin diges- 
tion. 

22. How is this proved by actual experience in man? 
Some men were paid their week's wages just after dinner 

on Saturday. They got drunk and remained so until the 
next day at noon. On coming back to consciousness they 
were very sick, and an emetic was given to them which 
brought up their Saturday's dinner just as it had gone into 
their stomachs. The food had been preserved by the 
alcohol, and relief could come only by vomiting. 

23. Why do some people take a glass of liquor before 
eating? 

Simply to gratify their taste. The plea of improving 
the appetite is only an excuse to cover up a practice in 
which they wish to indulge. 

24. What disease is liable to attack the person who con- 
tinues drinking alcoholic beverages? 

Dyspepsia. 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO. 



379 



25. What effect do contagious diseases have upon habitual 
drinkers, and 7vhy? 

The mortality is especially great in cases of cholera and 
yellow fever. The reason is that the body is not in con- 
dition to battle with disease. The stomach, kidneys, liver, 
and lungs are weak, the blood is poisoned and the reagent 
force of the constitution wrecked. 

26. What causes the redness of the nose and skin 'i 

The skin is called into greater action to throw off a part 
of the alcohol taken into the system. The pores and 
blood-vessels of the skin become larger in this exertion, 
and the quantity of blood gives the color. 

27. What does alcohol do to the heart 1 

It overworks it, makes it tired, loads it with fat and 
weakens the power of action. 

28. What does it do to the blood-vessels? 

It stimulates the circulation, hurries the blood in its 
course, stretches the small arteries and makes them unfit 
for work, 

29. IIo7U docs it act upon the lungs? 

It causes them to work too fast, heats and inflames 
them, hardens the walls of the air-cells, and prevents the 
air from purifying the blood. 

30. How does it affect the brain ? 

Parts of the nerves, spinal cord and brain are composed 
of a white substance called albumen; when alcohol comes 
into contact with this substance it absorbs the water and 
thickens the albumen, which action paralyzes these organs 
so that they lose their power of action, the limbs cannot 
carry the body, and the brain refuses to understand. 

31. Why does a drunken man have imperfect vision? 
The nerves of the eye are strained by the excitement and 

stupor, and do not report to the brain a correct vision. 



380 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

32. How does alcohol injure the liver "i 

By hardening and preventing its action in removing the 
-waste matter which should be carried off. 

33. How does it affect the kidneys 'i 

They become fatty and waxlike, and this condition leads 
to dropsy and other forms of degeneration. 

34. Hoio does it injure the mind? 

Whatever injures the brain weakens the power of thought 
and destroys the intellect. 

35. Hoza do 7ve kno70 that alcohol is a poisoni 

If taken in sufficient quantities it almost immediately 
produces death. In such cases the animal has all the 
appearance of poisoning. Nature declares that it is a 
poison, although by habitual but moderate use the system 
becomes accustomed to its presence, holding in check the 
slow fire which is impairing the constitution, producing a 
poisoned blood, diseased kidneys, indigestion and the slow 
destruction of the mind, the brain, the heart and the 
nerves. 

36. Do habitual drinkers crave the taste of liquors? 

It is often the case that the first glass in the morning is 
hard to swallow; it is nauseating to the stomach, and can 
be endured only by bracing the physical powers. The 
drink is taken for the effect, no longer for the pleasure of 
the palate. There is a demand for something to arouse the 
sinking forces, to stimulate, to overcome the deadness of 
the heart and to produce a new excitement. 

37. Does alcohol protect from cold? 

It imparts warmth only by imagination. No new heat 
is infused into the system, but by quickened pulsation the 
blood is forced rapidly over the body, and whatever heat 
is imparted to the outer surface is at the general expense 
of the internal heat; and when the pulsation returns to its 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO. 



381 



normal rate the body has lost more heat and has become 
weaker than it would have been if the excitement had not 
been given. 

38. What is the experience 0/ sailors in cases of ship-wreck 
and great exposure? 

Those who take liquor under these circumstances do not 
withstand the cold as well as those who refuse to drink. 

39. Jfo7ci could alcohol be used under such circumstances 
and become a benefit to those exposed? 

By turning it into their boots or against the parts liable 
to freeze. This would be a means of outward protection 
by which the internal forces would not be disturbed. 

40. Knotaing the evil effects of drink, luhy do people con- 
tinue to harbor its presence, protect its sale and defend its 
influence? 

This is a mystery which has still to be explained, but the 
fact remains that the influence of liquor is increasing, its 
effects are more dangerous, and its power more grasping. 
It is not, however, in as general private use in homes and 
residences as it was some generations ago. Again, wines 
9,nd beer have taken the place of the more potent liquids. 

TOBACCO. 

41. When was tobacco discovered and johen introduced to 
the people of civilization? 

It was discovered by Columbus in 1492. It was taken 
to Spain in 1496; to France in 1560; to England in 1586. 

42. What is the difference in effect betiveen alcohol and 
tobacco ? 

One excites, while the other soothes the nerves and often 
produces sleep. 

43. What poisonous elements are fou/id in tobacco smoke? 
Carbonic acid, carbonic oxide, ammonia and nicotine. 



382 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

44. What is the effect of carbonic acid? 
It causes sleepiness and headache. 

45. What is the effect of carho?iic oxide 1 

It causes trembling of the muscles and heart. 

r 

^ 46. What effect does atnmonia produce? 

It bites the tongue and makes too much work for the 
salivary glands. 

47. What is nicotine? 

It is a very poisonous element, strong in odor and bitter 
to the taste, and is the principal pain-soothing and sleep- 
producing element of tobacco. It is a narcotic. 

48. What effect does nicotine produce? 

It produces weakness, nervousness, dizziness, nausea, 
faintness, loss of strength, and stupor, and, if taken in 
large quantities, convulsions and death. 

49. Give some of the actions of tobacco on the human 
body. 

It taints the saliva; injures the sense of smell, taste, 
sight and hearing; causes "smokers' sore throat;" injures 
the stomach, causing dyspepsia, etc. ; often takes away 
the appetite for wholesome food; irritates the air-cells of 
the lungs; causes palpitation of the heart; weakens the 
muscles, causing trembling; injures the eyes and stupefies 
the brain and nerves. 

50. Give some account of its action on the mijid. 

It makes the memory poor; lessens the power to think; 
weakens the will; makes people grow in selfishness and 
impoliteness; often leads to bad company; and some- 
times causes insanity. 

51. What mode of using tobacco is most injurious? 

The habit of smoking cigarettes, because they contain 



ALCOHOL AND TOBACCO. 383 

an inordinate amount of nicotine, refuse matter and often 
opium or narcotic extracts. 

5 2 . What is opiiun ? 

It is the juice obtained from the seed-vessel of the white 
poppy before it is ripe. When dried, it is somewhat dark 
in color and bitter to the taste. 

53. Is it dofigerous to use] 

It is the most dangerous of drugs when used habitually, 
as few can resist its influence when once the system has 
become accustomed to it. Its first effects are pleasant and 
exhilarating, but it afterward produces a misery which can 
be relieved only by another potion; thus the habit becomes 
a cruel and unrelenting slavery. 

54. What are Ian da7iu77i and morphine? 

They are products of opium, and should be used only 
under the orders of a physician. 

5S* What is hashish] 

A powerful narcotic, prepared from the hemp plant 
grown in hot countries. It is used extensively among the 
people of warm climates, and is a terribly exciting poison. 

56. What is the areca nut, and where is it found? 

It is the seed of a kind of palm, and resembles a nutmeg. 
It is mixed with quick-lime and wrapped in a betel-leaf, 
which grows on a vine belonging to the pepper family. 
The mixture reddens the saliva and lips and blackens the 
teeth. It is chewed by millions of people in India. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



ON 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 



1. What is a Cotisfitution? 

The established form of government of a state, kingdom 
or country. 

2. What is a preamble! 

A formal and explanatory introduction. 

3. What are legislative poivers, and 7vhere are they vested 
in the United Statesl 

The right to make laws; this right is vested in a Congress 
of the United States. 

4. What is the Senate? 

The upper branch of Congress. 

5. What is the House 0/ Representatives? 

The House of Representatives is the lower branch of 
Congress. 

6. How are Senators and Representatives elected, and for 
how long a term ? 

Senators are elected by the legislatures of the States for a 
term of six years, each State being entitled to two Senators; 
Representatives are elected by the people for a term of :wo 
yeai^, each State being represented according to its popu- 
lation. 

385 



386 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

7. How old must a Representative be, and how long a 
citizen of the United States I 

Twenty-five years old, and seven years a citizen. 

8. What is an elector t 

A citizen entitled to vote. 

9. What is a census 1 

An official enumeration of the people, with the statement 
of their property, pursuits, age, etc. 

10. Ho7v often is it taken, and what i?nportant purpose 
does it serz'e ? 

It is taken once in ten years, and each census furnishes 
a new basis of apportioning the number of Representatives 
to the several States. 

11. If vacancies happen in the representation of any State, 
hoii) are they filled! 

By the executive authority of the State. 

1 2. What is a 7vrit of election ? 

A writing issued to an officer or officers to give notice of 
an election to be held. 

13. IIo7iii does the House of Representatives organize itself 
for work ? 

By electing a speaker and other officers. 

14. What sole power has this branch of Congress? 
That of impeachment. 

15. What is itnpeachmentl 

An accusation or charge brought against a public officer 
for misconduct in office. 

16. Into hojif via?iy classes are the Senators divided? 
Three, one class being elected every two years. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 387 

17. Who is preside/if of the Senate i Can he vote? 

The Vice-President of the United States presides over 
the Senate, and may vote only when the Senate is equally 
divided. 

18. Should a vacancy occur in the Senate, 7C'hat is to be 
done / 

The executive of the State may make a temporary 
appointment, until the next meeting of the legislature. 

19. Hoio old must a Senator be, and hoia long a citizen of 
the United States 1 

Thirty years of age and nine years a citizen. 

20. Who becomes president of the Snate 7vhen the Vice- 
Preside tit is absent? 

The Senate elects one pro tenpore. 

21. What sole power belongs to the Senate? 
That of trying all impeachments. 

22. Hoiv may the President of the United States be pun- 
ished for misdemeanor in office? 

He may be impeached by the House of Representatives, 
and tried by the Senate, the Chief Justice presiding. The 
conviction shall be by the concurrence of two-thirds of the 
Senators present. 

23. What Judgment can the Senate declare against a co?i- 
victed President? 

His punishment cannot extend beyond removal from 
office, and disqualification to hold any office of honor, trust 
or profit under the United States. 

24. Jf an officer is removed from office by an impeaclmient 
trial, is he subject to the conmion law? 

He is liable and subject to indictment, trial, judgment, 
and punishment, according to law, if the offence is criminal. 



388 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

25. What is a judgviefit? IV/iat is an indictment? 

A judgment is the sentence pronounced by the judge or 
court by whom a person is tried. An indictment is a writ- 
ten accusation of crime made by a grand jury. 

26. What are an oath and ati affirtnation] 

An oath is a solemn declaration, made with an appeal to 
God as to the truth of what is stated. An affirmation is a 
solemn declaration, made by one who is unwilling to take 
an oath. 

27. What officers does the Senate choose? 
All its officers except its president. 

28. What is the meaning of pro tempore? 
"For the time being." 

29. Who appoints the times, places, a?id tnanner of holding 
elect io?is of Senators and Representatives? 

They are prescribed in each State by the legislature 
thereof; but Congress may at any time by law make or 
alter such regulations, except as to the places of choosing 
Senators. 

30. If disputes arise in election returfis, hoxv are they to be 
decided? 

Each house is judge of the elections, returns, and quali- 
fications of its own members. 

3E. How 7nany does it require to do business? 

A majority; but a smaller number may compel the 
attendance of absent members, in such manner and under 
such penalties as each house may provide. 

32. What p07oer has each house over its metnbers? 
It may punish them for disorderly behavior, and, with 
the concurrence of two-thirds, expel a member. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 389 

33. Ca7i either house adjourn at pleasure? 

Not for more than three days, without the consent of 
the other house. 

34. Must each house keep a record {or Journal) of its 
proceedings / 

It must, in the form of a journal, which shall be printed 
unless secrecy is required. 

35. When shall the yeas and tiays be entered on the 
journaU 

When one-fifth of those present require it. 

36. When shall Congress assemble? 

On the first Monday in December; but it may be con- 
vened by the President, when necessary, or Congress may 
adjourn from time to time. 

37. How do meffibers receive compensation] 

The amount is fixed by law ; and it is paid out of the 
treasury of the United States. 

38. May a metnber be arrested while Congress is in 
session 1 

Only for felony, treason, or breach of the peace. 

39. Hoiu is the privilege of free speech preserved to fnem- 
bers of Congress 1 

No member may be questioned in any other place as to 
any speech or debate in Congress. 

40. Can a person hold ati office under the United States 
and be a member of Congress? 

He can not. 

41. Where shall bills for raising revenue originate? 
In the House of Representatives. 

42. What is revenue, and what is a bill? 

Revenue is the income of government, arising from taxes, 



390 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

duties, etc. A bill is a formal writing presented to 
a legislature for enactment into law. 

43. Hoiv does a bill become a latv'i 

By passing both houses of Congress, and receiving the 
sanction of the President, or by being retained by him, 
without action, for ten days; but if returned within ten 
days, Sundays excepted, with his objections, it does not 
become a law, unless reconsidered and passed by a two- 
thirds vote of both houses. 

44. What question does not require the sanction of the 
President? 

The question of adjournment, except in case of disagree- 
ment between the two houses with respect to the time of 
adjournment, when the President may adjourn them to 
such a time as he shall think proper. 

45. What are the poivers of Congress? 

According to Section 8 of the Constitution, "The 
Congress shall have power to lay and collect taxes, duties, 
imposts, and excises, to pay the debts and provide for the 
common defense and general welfare of the United States, 
but all duties, imposts, and excises shall be uniform 
throughout the United States; to borrow money on the 
credit of the United States; to regulate commerce with 
foreign nations, and among the several States, and with the 
Indian tribes; to establish a uniform rule of naturalization, 
and uniform laws on the subject of bankruptcies throughout 
the United States; to coin money, regulate the value 
thereof, and of foreign coin, and fix the standard of weights 
and measures; to provide for the punishment of counter- 
feiting the securities and current coin of the United States; 
to establish post-offices and post-roads; to promote the 
progress of science and the useful arts, by securing for 
limited times to authors and inventors the exclusive right 
to their respective writings and discoveries; to constitute 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 



391 



tribunals inferior to the Supreme Court, to define and punish 
piracies andfelonies committed on the high seas, and offenses 
against the law of nations; to declare war, grant letters of 
marque and reprisal, and make rules concerning captures 
on land and water; to raise and support armies, but no 
appropriation of money to that use shall be made for a 
longer term than two years; to provide and maintain a 
navy; to make rules for the government and regulation of 
the land and naval forces; to provide for calling forth the 
militia to execute the laws of the Union, suppress insurrec- 
tions, and repel invasions; to provide for organizing, 
arming, and disciplining the militia, and for governing such 
part of them as may be employed in the service of the 
United States, reserving to the States respectively the 
appointment of the officers, and the authority of training the 
militia according to the discipline prescribed by Congress; 
to exercise exclusive legislation, in all cases whatsoever, 
over such district (not exeeding ten miles square) as may, 
by cession of particular States, and the acceptance of Con- 
gress, become the seat of government of the United States, 
and exercise like authority over all places purchased by the 
consent of the legislature of the State in which the same 
shall be, for the erection of forts, magazines, arsenals, dock- 
yards, and other needful buildings; and to make all laws 
which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into exe- 
cution the foregoing powers and all others vested by this 
Constitution in the government of the United States, or any 
department or officer thereof." 

46. What is meant by the law of fiations? 

The law of nations, the accepted or universal laws of all 
nations. 

47. What are letters of marque and reprisal? 

Written authority from the government to seize the 
property of an enemy, especially vessels and cargoes. 



392 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

48. What are duties, imports^ and excises 1 

A duty is a tax levied on imports. Imports are goods 
brought from other countries. Excises are taxes on 
anything made, used, or sold. 

49. What is the militia / 

The organization of citizens of a State liable to military 
duty and enrolled for service. 

50. Over what district may Congress exercise exclusive 
legislation ? 

The District of Columbia. 

51. What are forts, magazifies, arsenals, and dockyards? 

A fort is a place of military defense. A magazine is a 
store where ammunition is kept. An arsenal is a repository 
for arms and military stores. A dockyard is a place con- 
taining all kinds of naval stores and timber. 

52. What is the writ of habeas corpus, a?id when cati it 
be suspended? 

The writ of habeas corpus is a legal process for delivering 
a person from false imprisonment, and can be suspended 
only in cases of treason or when the public safety requires it. 

53. What is a bill of attai^ider] 

A special act of the legislature inflicting capital punish- 
ment upon persons supposed to be guilty of high crimes, 
without process of law, and involving forfeiture of his 
estates and the permanent dishonor of his name. It is not 
allowed by the Constitution of the United States. 

54. What is an ex post facto /aw? 

A law making an act criminal which was not such when 
committed, or increasing its penalty in like manner. This 
is not allowed, either. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 393 

55. May a tax or duty be laid on articles exported from 
any State 1 

No. 

56. How about titles of nobility and the receiving of 
presents 1 

No title of nobility shall be granted by the United States; 
and no person holding an office of profit or trust under 
them shall, without the consent of Congress, accept of any 
present, emolument, office or title of any kind whatever, 
from any king, prince or foreign state. 

57. May any State enter into any treaty, alliance, or 
confederation 1 

No. 

58. May a State engage in warl 

Not unless in imminent danger from invasion. 

59. What are the States forbidden to do in regard to 
imposts ? 

No State may, without an act of Congress, lay any imposts 
or duties on imports or exports, except what may be abso- 
lutely necessary for executing its inspection laws. 

60. In whom is the executive power of the United States 
vested? 

In a President. 

61. Who is eligible to this office? 

Any citizen born in the United States, thirty-five years 
of age, and fourteen years a resident. 

62. How are the President and Vice-President elected? 

By Electors chosen by the people. The Electors meet 
in their respective States and vote by distinct ballots for 
President and Vice-President. These votes are sealed and 
transmitted to the seat of government of the United States, 
directed to the president of the Senate. The president of 



394 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

the Senate, in the presence of the Senate and House of 
Representatives, opens all the certificates, and the votes are 
then counted; the person having the greatest number of 
votes for President shall be President, if such number be a 
majority of the whole number of Electors appointed; and 
if no person have such majority, then from the persons 
having the highest number, not exceeding three, on the 
list of those voted for as President, the House of Represent- 
atives shall choose immediately, by ballot, the President. 
The person having the greatest number of votes as Vice- 
President shall be the Vice-President, if such number be a 
majority of the whole number of electors appointed, and, if 
no person have a majority, then from the two having the 
highest numbers on the list the Senate shall choose the 
Vice-President. 

63. SHpposi?ig ihe House of Representatives fail to elect a 
President when the right of choice devolves upon it, who shall 
act as President l 

The Constitution provides that the Vice-President shall 
act as President in the case of the death or other disability 
of the President. 

64. What may Congress determitie in regard to the time of 
choosing the Electors 1 

Congress may determine the time of choosing the 
Electors, and the day on which they shall give their vote, 
which day shall be the same throughout the United States. 

65. Ho7v is the President compensated for his services? 

The President shall, at stated times, receive for his serv- 
ices a compensation which shall neither be increased nor 
diminished during the period for which he shall have been 
elected, and he shall not receive within that period any other 
emolument from the United States, or any of them. 

66. What oath must he take before he enters upon the 
execution of his office 1 

"I do solemnly swear (or afiirm) that I will faithfully 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 



395 



execute the office of President of the United States, and 
will, to the best of my ability, preserve, protect, and defend 
the Constitution of the United States." 

67. Who is com7na?ider-in-chief of the army atid navy? 
The President. 

68. What offenses is he not permitted to pardon 'i 
Cases of impeachment. 

69. What especially high privileges does he enjoy 1 

He has the right, with the advice and consent of the 
Senate, to make treaties, provided two-thirds of the Senators 
present concur, and with the advice and consent of the 
Senate he shall appoint ambassadors, ministers, judges, and 
officers of the United States, and all appointments which 
shall be established by law. 

70. Jf a vacancy in an appointive office occurs during 
a recess of Congress, how is if filed ^ 

By an appointment by the President. 

71. What is the President'' s message l 

A paper addressed to Congress, stating the condition of 
the country, and proposing such measures as he may judge 
necessary and expedient. 

72. For what crimes can the Fresidetit, Vice-President^ 
and all civil officers of the United States be i7npeached'i 

Treason, bribery, and other high crimes and misde- 
meanors. 

73. What is treason] 

Treason against the United States shall consist only in 
levying war against them, or in adhering to their enemies, 
giving them aid and comfort. 

74. What is bribery? 

Bribery is giving money or some other valuable consider- 



396 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

ation to procure desired legislation, a judicial decision, or 
other official action. 

75. /// tvh^t is the judicial power of the United States 
vested? 

In a Supreme Court and such inferior courts as Congress 
may from time to time establish. 

76. How long do the Judges of the Supreme Court hold 
office ? 

During life or good behavior. 

77. 2^0 what cases does their poioer extend? 

To all cases arising under the Constitution, the laws of 
the United States, and cases that cannot be settled in the 
Supreme Court of any State. 

78. I?i 7vhat cases has the Supretne Court original juris- 
dictiofi ? 

In all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers 
and consuls, and those to which a State shall be a party. 
In other cases the Supreme Court has appellate jurisdiction, 
or jurisdiction by an appeal from the lower courts. 

79. Where shall a criminal be tried? 

In the State where the crime is committed. 

80. If the crime is not comtnitted in the United States, 
where must the trial be held? 

At such a place or places as Congress may by law have 
directed. 

81. What crimes are not tried by Jury? 
Crimes subject to impeachment. 

82. What power declares the punishment of treason ? 
Congress; but no person shall be convicted of treason 

unless on the testimony of two witnesses to the same overt 
act, or on confession in open court. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 



397 



83. What is meant by '■'■No attainder of treason shall work 
corruption of blood or forfeiture, except during the life of the 
person attainted'''' 1 

That the relatives of the person convicted shall not be 
denied any rights because of his conviction. 

84. What credit shall be given in each State to the acts oj 
every other t 

Full faith and credit must be given in each State to the 
public acts, records, and judicial proceedings of every other 
State. 

85. Cati a person charged with crime in one State be taken 
from another State! 

Only on demand of the executive authority of the State 
where the crime was committed. 

86. How are new States adfnitted i?ito the Uniofi? 
By consent of Congress. 

87. IIo7v can tiew States be formed? 

From Territories having 30,000 inhabitants, or from 
States or parts of States with the consent of those 
States. 

88. What power has Congress in regard to the territory and 
other property belonging to the United States? 

It has power to dispose of, and make all needful rules 
and regulations respecting it. 

89. What shall the Uiiited States guarantee to every State 
in the Union? 

A republican form of government and protection. 

go. What is the supreme law of the land? 

The Constitution and laws of the United States. All 
government officers and representatives are bound by oath 
to support it. 



398 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

91. Are religious tests perfuittedl 

No religious test shall be required as a qualification to 
any ofifice or public trust under the United States. 

92. How may the Constitution be amended] 

By two-thirds vote of both houses of Congress, or by the 
action of the legislatures of two-thirds of the States, ratified 
in either case by three-fourths of all the States. 

93. How many amendments have been made to the Consti- 
tution, and when ivere the first ten adopted! 

Fifteen; the first ten were adopted at the first session of 
Congress. 

94. What did Congress grant in the first atnendment to the 
Constitution 1 

Freedom of religion, of speech, of the press, and the right 
of the people peaceably to assemble and petition the 
government for a redress of grievances. 

95. What privilege 7vas given the States in the second 
amendment? 

The right of the people to keep and bear arms. 

96. What is the law respecting the quartering of soldiers 
ifi a?iy house in the time of peace! 

No soldier shall, in the time of peace, be quartered in any 
house without the consent of the owner, nor in time of war, 
save in a manner to be prescribed by law. 

97. What rights are secured to the people in the fourth 
amendment? 

The right to be secure In their persons, houses, papers, 
and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures. 

98. Can a person be twice put in Jeopardy of life or limb? 

No. 



CrVIL GOVERNMENT. 



399 



99. Can a person he compelled to be a witness against 
himself "i 

He can not. 

100. What is the law respecting the taking of private 
fyropertyl 

If taken for public use, the owner shall have just com- 
pensation. 

1 01. By the sixth amendment, 7vhat rights shall the 
accused enjoy in all critninal prosecutions I 

The right to a speedy and public trial, by an impartial 
jury; to be confronted with the witnesses against him; to 
have compulsory process for obtaining witnesses in his 
favor, and to have the assistance of counsel for his defense. 

102. When shall the right of trial by jury be presen^edl 
In suits at common law, where the value in controversy 

shall exceed twenty dollars. 

103. What must not be required, or imposed, or itiflicted, 
by the eighth amendment^ 

Excessive bail must not be required, or excessive fines 
imposed, or cruel and unusual punishment inflicted. 

104. By the tenth amendment, zahat po7vers are reserved 
to the States respectively, or to the people? 

The powers not delegated to the United States by the 
Constitution, or prohibited by it to the States. 

105. What does the thirteenth ametidment prohibitl 
Slavery or involuntary servitude, except as a punishment 

for crime, whereof the party shall have been duly convicted. 

106. By the fourteenth amendtnent, who is forbidden to 
hold certain offices? 

Persons who have held office under the United States, or 
any State, and have been engaged in insurrection or 
rebellion against the same, or given aid or comfort to the 



400 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

enemies thereof. But Congress may, by a vote of two-thirds 
of each house, remove such disability. 

107. What is said of the public debtl 

The validity of the public debt of the United States, 
authorized by law, shall not be questioned. Any debt or 
obligation incurred in aid of insurrection or rebellion against 
the United States, or any claim for the loss or emancipation 
of any slave, shall be held illegal and void. 

108. What does the fifteenth amendment provide! 

That the right of the citizens of the United States to vote 
shall not be denied or abridged by the United States or by 
any State on account of race, color or previous condition 
of servitude. 

log. What two important measures were passed by the 
48th and 4gth Congresses to remedy a possible defect in the 
Constitution 1 

A law providing rules for counting the Electoral vote, 
and a Presidential succession law. 

no. What is the laiv in regard to the Presidential 
sticcession ? 

"In case of removal, death, resignation, or inability of 
both the President and Vice-President, a member of the 
Cabinet shall, in the following order, act as President until 
the disability is removed or a President elected: The Sec- 
retary of State, Secretary of the Treasury, Secretary of War, 
Attorney General, Postmaster General, Secretary of the 
Navy, Secretary of the Interior; provided, that whenever 
the powers or duties of the office of President of the United 
States shall devolve upon any of the persons named therein, 
if Congress be not then in session, or if it would not meet 
in accordance with law within twenty days thereafter, it 
shall be the duty of the person upon whom the said powers 
and duties shall devolve, to issue a proclamation convening 
Congress in extraordinary session, giving twenty days' 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 



401 



notice of the time of meeting." This act was approved 
January 19, 1886. 

III. What legislation has since been enacted to facilitate 
the work 0/ the Supreme Court of the United States 1 

An act of Congress, passed early in 1891, required the 
President to appoint an additional judge in each of the nine 
United States circuits. This judge, with the circuit judges 
and the Judge of the Supreme Court for that district, con- 
stitute a Circuit Court of Appeals, empowered to pass 
finally upon certain classes of cases, thus relieving the 
Supreme Court of the United States of much of its purely 
routine business. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



ON 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND 
HYGIENE. 



1 . What is physiology ? 

The science of the organic functions of animals or plants. 

2. Shoja the value of knowing physiology. 

By a proper knowledge of this subject strength may be 
preserved, and life saved or lengthened. In case of acci- 
dents, as of poisoning, drowning, or any bodily injury, this 
knowledge may be of great value to us in relieving sickness 
and distress. 

3. Into 7vhat two classes are all bodies in fiature divided? 
Into organic and inorganic bodies. 

4. Define organic bodies. 

They are those bodies which possess organs on whose 
actions depend their growth and perfection, like animals 
and plants. 

5. Defifie inorganic bodies. 

They are devoid of organs, or instruments of life, like 
the minerals. 

6. What is anatomy! 

The science of the structure of animal bodies. 

403 



404 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

7. What is hygiene? 

That branch of medicine which treats of the preservation 
of health. 

8. What law is impressed on all aninial beingsl 
The law of continual change. 

9. What is the difference between food and living fleshl 
Food is the material we eat, changed by the action of 

the system into living flesh. 

10. Ho7V are plants nourished 2 

By the inorganic elements found in the earth and air 
around them. This material is received in the form of a 
liquid or a gas, already prepared for their use. 

11. How are animals flourished? 

By the organic materials of vegetables or of other 
animals. 

12. What do anifnals ahaays possess? 

A stomach or digestive cavity, in which the food is pre- 
pared before it can be absorbed by the machinery of 
the body. 

13. What functions are peculiar to animals alone? 
Sensation and voluntary motion; these are, therefore, 

called animal functions. 

14. What organs cotistitutc the digestive apparatus? 

The mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach, pancreas and 
intestinal canal. 

1 5. What differe?ices are there in the teeth of the carnivorous 
and the herbivorous animals? 

The carnivorous animals have sharp front teeth, long, 
sharp and pointed canine teeth, and grinders with high 
and sharpened points. The herbivorous have short, blunt 
and strong front teeth and small canine teeth, but their 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 405 

molars are very large, broad and flat, with slightly raised 
lines on their surface. . - 

16. How inatiy teeth has man, and how dividedl 
Sixteen in each jaw: four incisors in the centre; one 

canine next to the incisors on each side; /then two bicus- 
pids and three molars. I 

17. Ofiohat are teeth composed? 

Of soft bone within, but with a cover of very hard 
enamel which admits of an exquisitely fine polish. 

18. IIoio are the teeth set in the jaw 1 

With long fangs, so that they may not easily be started 
from their places. 

1 9. What are salivary glands ? 

Glands which empty their fluid into the mouth. Their 
function is to secrete fluid to moisten the food during mas- 
tication, and assist digestion. 

20. Where are the salivary gla?ids situated? 

The two larger ones, called parotid glands, are situated 
between the ear and upper part of the jaw. Two smaller 
ones, called submaxillary, are situated about half way be- 
tween the symphesis, or centre. Smaller ones still, called 
sublingual, are underneath the tongue. 

21. Describe the pharynx, or second chamber 0/ the mouth. 
It is separated from the mouth by the palate. Four 

passages open out of it: one leads forward to the mouth; 
a second, upward to the nose; a third, downward to the 
lungs; and a fourth, backward to the stomach. 

22. What is the epiglottis ? 

A small valve placed over the mouth of the trachea, 
admitting air, but excluding all foreign substances. 

23. Describe the cesophagus. 

It is a soft, muscular tube, extending from the pharynx 



4o6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

to the stomach, and is about nine inches in length, and 
somewhat less than one inch in diameter. It is composed 
principally of two muscular coats; the fibres of one run 
lengthwise of the tube, and the fibres of the other pass 
around it in a circular manner. 

24. How does food Ji?id its way to the stomach? 

Upon being forced back in the mouth to the pharynx, 
its presence causes the muscles of the pharynx to contract 
upon it. This is the act of swallowing, and is beyond the 
control of the will. The circular fibres of the muscles of 
the oesophagus seize upon the morsel of food, and contract- 
ing, force it downward until it reaches the stomach. 

25. Describe the stomach. 

It is an oval sac, situated below the diaphragm on the 
same plane with the liver, and lies mostly on the left side 
of the spine. It has two openings: an upper, or cardiac 
orifice, where the oesophagus enters, and a lower, or pyloric 
orifice, which enters into the duodenum. It is composed 
of three coats: an outer, or serous coat, which is the same 
as that which lines the whole abdomen ; a middle, or mus- 
cular coat, composed of two layers of fibres, longitudinal 
and circular, the contraction of which moves the food 
about the stomach during digestion ; and an inner or 
mucous coat, containing the gastric tubules, which secrete 
the gastric juice. 

26. By 7vhat is food dissolved in the stomach ? 
By a powerful fluid called the gastric juice. 

27. Describe the process of digestion in the stoniach. 

The presence of food in the stomach causes the gastric 
juice to be secreted. The muscles of the stomach move 
the food about, which causes the gastric juice to be thor- 
oughly intermingled with it. The gastric juice reduces 
the food to a pulpy mass, usually within three or four 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE, 



407 



hours, and it is then passed out of the stomach at the 
pyloric orifice. 

28. Of 7ii'hat is gastric juice composed? 

It is composed of an acid supposed to be lactic or hydro- 
chloric acid, and an organic substance called pepsin. 

29. Name the fluids of the body. 

The blood, chyle, lymph, saliva, gastric juice, pancreatic 
juice, synovia, mucus, and serum. Eile, sweat, and urine 
are excretions. 

30. Name the solids of the body. 

The bones, teeth, cartilages, ligaments, muscles, nerves, 
vessels, viscera, membranes, skin, hair, and nails. 

31. GiTC the list of chemical elements in the huma/i body. 
Oxygen, hydrogen, carbon, sodium, potassium, chlorine, 

nitrogen, sulphur, phosphorus, calcium, magnesium, fluor- 
ine, silicon, iron, and manganese. 

32. Into 70 hat classes of substances are these elements 
divided? 

Into metallic and non-metallic substances. 
T,7,. Which are the fnetallic substances? 
Potassium, sodium, calcium, magnesium, iron, and man- 
ganese. 

34. Gii'e the arrangement of the parts of the body. 

They are arranged into fibres, fasciculi, tissues, organs, 
apparatuses, and systems. 

35. Define a fibre. 

It is a thread of exceeding fineness, and may be round 
or flattened. 

36. Define a fasciculus. 

It is the term applied to several fibres united. 



4o8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

37. What is meafit by a tissue? 

The term tissue is applied to several different solids of 
the body. 

38. Define an organ. 

An organ is an instrument composed of tissues, and 
designed for action. 

39. What is the action 0/ an organ called? 
It is called its function or use. 

40. Give an example of an organ and its functions. 

The liver is an organ, and the secretion of bile its 
function. 

41. Defi7ie an apparatus. 

An apparatus consists of a number of different organs 
for the performance of some office. The teeth, mouth, 
stomach, intestines, etc., belong to the digestive apparatus. 

42. Define a system. 

It is a connected series of similar parts, such as the 
muscular or nervous system. 

43. To what can every organ of the body be reduced? 

To a few tissues, as the cellular, osseous, muscular, 
mucous and nervous. 

44. What tissue is the primary form? 

The cellular or areolar tissue is regarded as the primary 
form of all others. 

45. Ho7v is the cellular tissue formed? 

By the crossing or interlacing of minute fibres, inter- 
woven in every direction, so as to form a web-like membrane 
with innumerable small spaces, which communicate with 
each other. 

46. Where is the cellular tissue formed? 

In every part of the system, except in compact portions 
of bone, teeth and cartilage. 



PHYSIOLOGY, AT^J ATOMY AND HYGIENE. 409 

47. What is the chief use of this tissue? 

To connect together organs and parts of organs which 
require a certain degree of motion on each other. 

48. What is its chief characteristic? 

It possesses great power of elasticity. 

49. What different names have been given to cellular tissue ? 
Different ones, according to its position in the body. 

Where it is not exposed to the air it is called the serous 
membrane, from a fluid in it called serum. In the lining 
of the respiratory passages and of the alimentary canal it 
is called mucous membrane. Where it forms a covering 
for the body, it is called the dermoid membrane, or skin. 

50. Describe the osseous tissue. 

In composition and arrangement of matter, it varies at 
different periods of life, and in different bones. In some 
instances the bony matter is disposed in plates, while in 
other instances the arrangement is cylindrical, and again 
it is spongy, or porous. 

51. Describe the muscular tissue. 

It is composed of many fibres that unite to form 
fasciculi, each of which is enclosed in a delicate layer of 
cellular tissue. 

52. Describe the nervous tissue. 

It consists of soft, pulpy matter, enclosed in a sheath 
called neurilema, and consists of two substances, the one a 
pulpy matter, gray in color, and called cineritious (ash- 
colored), while the other is of a fibrous character and white 
and called medullary (marrow-like). 

53. What are the chief divisions of the economy of the 
human system, for convenience of discussion! 

Osteology, an account of the bones or framework of the 
system; Myology, an account of the muscles or the moving 



41 o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

power of the system; Splatichnology, an account of the 
nutritive organs; A?igio/ogy, an account of the circulating 
system of the arteries and veins; Fnc urn ono logy, an account 
of the respiratory, vocal, and calorific organs; Chorology^ 
the secreting system; Neurology, the history of the nervous 
system ; and The inlets of the soul, the senses. 

54. What is hutigerl 

A sensation of want of more nutriment in the body. It 
is caused by the action of the blood on the terminal 
branches of the nerves in the mucous coat of the stomach. 

55. What are the relative positions of the stomach, lungs, 
liver and diaphragm? 

The lungs lie within the Y\'alls of the thorax, separated 
from the abdomen by a broad muscle, the diaphragm. 
Under the right lung, below the diaphragm, lies the liver, 
and to the left the stomach. 

56. To 7vhat substance is all food 7'educed in the stomach? 
A pulpy substance, called chyme. 

57. Does the stomach digest fatty articles of food? 

It does not; they are digested by the pancreatic and 
intestinal juices. 

58. What is the temperature of the stotnach? 
About 100° F. 

59. Can food he digested artificially ? 

It can. If food be thoroughly mixed with hydrochloric 
acid and pepsin, and kept at an equal temperature of 100°, 
it will be reduced in a few hours to a homogeneous mass 
somewhat resembling chyme. 

60. What three kinds of food do we need? 
Nitrogenous, carbonaceous and mineral food. 

61. What is 7iitrogenous food? 

That which contains much nitrogen. The most common 
forms are whites of eggs, lean meat, gluten and caseine. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 411 

62. What is carbonaceous food? 

That which contains much carbon ; it consists of two 
kinds, the sugars and the fats. 

63. Name the mineral matters which should be contained 
in our food? 

Limited quantities of iron, sulphur, magnesia, phos- 
phorus, salt and potash. 

64. Could a person live on one kind of food alone? 

He could not. A person fed on starch would have 
nothing of which to make muscle, and if the diet was con- 
tinued he would die of nitrogen starvation. 

65. State the five evil results of rap id and umaise eating. 
A lack of saliva with the food; resistance of the coarse 

pieces to the action of the digestive fluids; the dilution of 
the gastric juice; the overcrowding of the stomach and the 
over-stimulation of the digestive organs. 

66. Why should care be bariished from the table? 

Care or grief restrains digestion. The nervous action 
holds the nourishing organs of the system back. But with 
merriment and pleasant thoughts the opposite is the case. 

67. Will a regular ivutine of food be beneficial? 

By a regular routine of food the appetite becomes in- 
different, and long continuance generally produces a sick- 
ness from disgust. 

68. What are the principal causes of dyspepsia? 
Overtaxing the digestive organs. This may come from 

too much food, irregularity of eating, drinking strong 
drinks, etc. 

6g. What is the best remedy for a bilious man ? 

Work. Not to the point of physical prostration, but to 
such an extent that the body demands nourishment and 
the muscles to be recruited. Nature will then build her- 
self up to supply this demand. 



412 



COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 



70. What is the pyloric valve? 

It is no real valve, but simply a narrowing or contrac- 
tion of the pyloric end of the stomach. 

71. How long does it take our chief articles of food to 
digest? 



ARTICLES 



Apples, hard, sour. 
Apples, sweet, mellow 

Barley 

Beef, fresh, rare . 
Beef, steak .... 
Bread, wheat, fresh . 
Cake, sponge . 
Cheese, old .... 
Codfish, salt, dry . 
Ducks, wild. 
Eggs, fresh .... 
Eggs, fresh .... 
Eggs, fresh, whipped. 

Milk, new 

Mutton, fresh . 
Oysters, fresh . 
Oysters, fresh . 
Pigs' feet, soused. 
Pork, fat and lean. 
Pork, salted. . . 
Potatoes, Irish. 
Potatoes, Irish. 

Rice 

Sausage 

Soup, barley . 
Soup, oyster. 
Tripe, soused . 
Trout, fresh. 
Veal, fresh .... 
Venison, steak. 



CONDITION 








Hrs. 


Mill. 


Raw. 


2 


.SO 


Raw. 


I 


30 


Boiled. 


2 




Roasted. 


,^ 




Fried. 


4 


. , 


Baked. 


^ 


30 


Baked. 


2 


30 


Raw. 


3 


?>o 


Boiled. 


2 




Roasted. 


4 


.^0 


Boiled, hard. 


s 


.^0 


Roasted. 


2 


20 


Raw. 


I 


30 


Raw. 


2 


IS 


Roasted. 


3 


'S 


Raw. 


?> 




Stewed. 


,s 


.so 


Boiled. 


I 




Roasted. 


5 


'S 


Raw. 


?, 




Boiled. 


^ 


so 


Roasted. 


2 


SO 


Boiled. 


I 




Broiled. 


,s 


20 


Boiled. 


1 


SO 


Boiled. 


?, 


SO 


Boiled. 


I 




Fried. 


I 


,So 


Fried. 


4 


.SO 


Broiled. 


I 


35 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 



413 



72. What does organic food comprise'? 

Nitrogenous substances; fats; compounds of carbon and 
hydrogen, such as sugar or starch. 

73. W/iat does inorganic food comprise? 

Inorganic food comprises water and alkalies, such as salt, 
phosphates, etc. 

74. What is Ihe first work of the stomach in digestion? 

To get rid of the greater part of the fluid which has 
been swallowed with the food. 

75. Into what organ does the chyme pass from the 
stomach ? 

Into the duodenum. 

76. Describe the intestinal cafial. 

It is composed of three coats, arranged in a manner 
similar to the stomach, and for similar purposes, the mucous 
coat secreting the intestinal juice, which aids digestion. 
It is divided into the large and small intestines; the small 
intestine is subdivided into the duodenum, jejunum, and 
ileum; and between the ileum and the large intestine is a 
perfect valve, which allows nothing to pass back that has 
once entered the large intestine from the ileum. 

77. What is the pancreas? 

A long, narrow gland, situated immediatly below and 
behind the stomach. 

78. What is the office of the pattcreas? 

It secretes the pancreatic juice, which is emptied into the 
duodenum, and digests the fatty parts of food. 

79. What are the lacteal absorbents ? 

Numberless minute tubules in the intestinal mucous 
membrane, which take up by absorption the nutriments, 
and convey them to the blood. These tubules join together, 



414 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

forming other tubules, which again join, and this continues 
until all are united in the thoracic duct. 

80. What is the lacteal duct? 

The duct into which all the lacteal absorbents empty; it 
is sometimes called the thoracic duct. It passes upward 
along the spine, and empties into the left subclavian vein. 

8 1 . What is called the lacteal system ? 

The lacteal absorbents, the tubes which they form by 
joining together, and the lacteal duct. 

82. Hcnv is the digested food disposed? 

In the duodenum it is divided, part entering the blood- 
vessels, and the rest the waste. 

83. What is chyle? 

Food reduced to a whitish-colored fluid, and ready to be 
absorbed by the lacteals. 

84. When is a neiv supply of 7iutrime?it 7ieeded? 

When the lacteal absorbents have consumed the chyle 
and carried it into the veins, and the blood can no longer 
meet the demands of the wasting flesh. 

85. Will the stomach bear sudden changes in the time of 
eating? 

Not without some complaint. One's appetite returns at. 
established periods; then his stomach craves food, and the 
gastric juice is ready to flow and dissolve it. 

86. When does the body sustain labor and exposure best? 
When it is best nourished. 

87. Why do growing youths or convalescents require jnore 
food than adults or persons in health ? 

In order to meet the new conditions and supply the new 
wants of the system. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIEAE. 



415 



88. What is the common error in regard to eatinsrl 

o o 

That to please the palate, food not easily digested may 
safely be eaten, and more than the system requires. 

89. When afiy organ of the body is in action, what chaftges 
occur? 

The nervous force of the part is increased, and the circu- 
lation of the blood quickened, to supply the waste and sup- 
port its powers. 

90. What is the office of the liver? 

To form the bile, the elements of which are separated 
from the blood. 

91. Where is the bile emptied? 

Through a duct into the duodenum. It serves to keep 
the intestinal contents in a healthy condition. 

92. Where is the spleen? 

On the left side of the spine. 

93. What is the office of the spleen? 

It is a ductless gland, and its office is not accurately 
known. 

94. What is fatigue? 

A waste of the particles of the system by exercise greater 
than the new materials supplied by the blood. 

95. Whatisrjst? 

The restoration of the materials wasted by fatigue. 

96. What a?e the diffierent temperaments of men ? 

The nervous, the sanguine, the bilious and the lymphatic. 

97. Describe persons of nervous temperament. 

Those in whom the nervous system predominates, who 
are easily elated or depressed, whose mental actions are 
performed with rapidity. 



41 6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

98. Describe persons of a sanguine temperament. 

Those in whom the circulatory system predominates; 
who are strong, but at the same time active; who are bold 
and resolute, and always hopeful. 

99. Describe persons with the bilious temperament. 
Those in whom the physical system predominates; who 

are strong in mind and body, but not quick; who are calm, 
steady and persevering. 

100. Who have the lymphatic temperament? 

Those in whom the lymphatic system predominates — 
who are indisposed to exertion and unexcitable. 

10 1. How does childhood differ from age? 

In childhood the blood flows rapidly, the muscles are 
easily stimulated to action, the nervous system is irritable, 
and the feelings and passions are readily quickened. In 
age, all the powers, feelings, and passions are in an opposite 
direction. 

102. Does this differetice require a modificatioJi of diet? 
The elastic period requires a mild and soothing diet, 

while the inactive period needs more stimulating food. 

103. What two things ought to be considered in all kinds 
of food? 

Their digestibility, and the quantity of nutriment con- 
tained in them. 

104. What are the natural effects of stimulation? 

When any part of the body is rubbed with pepper, mus- 
tard, or spirits, it creates an irritation; the blood flows to 
the place more abundantly; there is greater action and 
quicker life; but these effects soon cease, and then the skin 
is pale, the circulation is more languid, for unusual action 
of the muscles causes fatigue. 

105. What is the effect of alcohol? 

It is quick in action, both in excitement and in exhaus- 



PHYSIO LOG 1 ; ANA TO MY AND HYGIENE. 4 1 7 

tion. To a healthy stomach it must be injurious, for it 
gives merely temporary strength ; it only quickens the 
action and expenditure of power already existing, leaving 
the stomach to fall below its natural standard. 

106. What becomes of the chyle "i 

It is taken up by the lacteal absorbents, carried through 
the lacteal tubes to the thoracic duct, and thence emptied 
into the left subclavian vein near the heart. 

107. What constitutes the apparatus for the circulatio7i of 
the blood? 

The heart, arteries, capillaries, and veins. 

108. Describe the heart. 

It is a hollow, muscular organ of conical form, placed 
between the lungs, lying more in the left then in the right 
cavity of the chest. It is about five inches in length, three 
inches and a half in breadth, and two inches and a half in 
thickness; and weighs from eight to twelve ounces. It is 
divided by a septum into two lateral halves; and a trans- 
verse constriction divides each half into two cavities, the 
upper cavity on each side being called the auricle, and the 
lower the ventricle. 

109. JFhat is the beating' of the heart? 

When the heart contracts, to send the blood out, the 
apex is thrown forward and strikes against the ribs of the 
left side, near the breast bone, where the beating is very 
easily felt. 

no. J/o7ci do the valves of the heart act? 

In the passage-ways of the heart valves are placed, which 
open to allow the blood to pass downward, but close to 
prevent its passing upward. 

III. How many sets of blood-vessels are there? 
Three: the arteries, the veins, and the capillaries. 



41 8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

112. Describe tJie arteries. 

They are tubular vessels, which serve to convey the 
blood from both ventricles of the heart to every part of 
the body. They are composed of three coats; internal 
middle and external. The middle coat consists of mus- 
cular and elastic fibres principally, which make the larger 
arteries very elastic. 

113. Describe the actioti of the veins. 

The veins return the blood from the capillaries to the 
heart, communicating very freely with one another. 

114. Describe the capillaries. 

They are minute terminal branches of the arteries, and 
pervade nearly every tissue of the body in a vast net-work. 

115. What is the difference between the pulmonary and the 
systemic circulation ? 

In the pulmonary circulation the blood is conveyed to 
the lungs to be purified, and then brought back to the 
heart; in the systemic circulation the blood is carried to 
every part of the system, and returned by the veins to the 
heart. 

116. Explain the circulatiofi of the blood. 

By a contraction of the heart the blood is forced from 
the left ventricle through the aortic valves into the aorta, 
and through all the arteries of the body, to the upper and 
lower extremities and the internal organs. From these 
various points it enters the capillaries, where all the 
changes in the system are produced; and is then taken up 
by the veins, and returned as venous blood to the right 
auricle of the heart. From the right auricle it passes 
through a valvular constriction into the right ventricle; 
from the right ventricle it is forced through valves into the 
pulmonary arteries, which carry it to the lungs; and from 
the lungs it is returned to the heart through the pulmonary 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 419 

veins, entering the left auricle of the heart, and passing to 
the left ventricle, the point of beginning. 

1 1 7. What IS the aorta 1 

The largest artery in the systemic circulation. It passes 
upward from the heart at first, describes a curve, and goes 
downward, passing through the diaphragm and along the 
spinal column. The curved part is called the arch of the 
aorta; between the arch and the diaphragm it is called the 
thoracic aorta, and below the diaphragm the abdominal 
aorta. 

118. Where are the carotids'? 

Arteries carrying blood upward along the neck; the left 
carotid arises from the arch of the aorta; the right from 
the arteria innominata, a large vessel springing from the 
aorta. 

I ig. What do the subclavians do? 
They carry blood to the arms. 

120. JVhere are the subclavians? 

The left subclavian arises from the arch of the aorta; 
the right from the arteria nominata. 

121. What arteries supply the stomach ivith blood? 

The gastric artery, arising from the coeliac, which arises 
from the abdominal aorta; also a branch from the splenic 
artery, and one from the hepatic. 

122. How is the liver supplied? 

The liver is supplied by the hepatic artery, a branch of 
the coeliac axis. 

123. How are the kidneys supplied? 
By the renal arteries. 

124. How is the spleen supplied? 

By the splenic artery, the third branch of the coeliac axis. 



420 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

125. Hoiv is the intestinal canal supplied! 

By the superior and inferior messenteric arteries. 

126. Hoit) is the heart supplied! 

By the coronary arteries, small branches from the aorta. 

127. What are the chief divisions of the aorta ? 

The subclavian, carotid, cceliac, hepatic, renal and 
splenic, here the aorta branches off to go to the extremities, 
the two branches which pass through the groins are called 
the inguinal arteries, and where they enter the thighs, the 
femoral arteries. 

128. What is the vena cava? 

There are two vessels by this name, one called the 
superior and the other the inferior vena cava. The 
superior vena cava is formed by the junction of the two 
innominate veins, which in turn are formed from the 
subclavian and jugular veins. The inferior vena cava is 
formed from the junction of the two iliac veins, which are 
supplied by the femoral and other veins. Both vessels 
empty into the right auricle of the heart. 

129. What are the na?nes of the larger branches of the vena 
cava 1 

The jugular, subclavian, and inguinal veins. 

130. How are the arteries or veins arranged in respect to 
each other? 

The arteries begin at the heart, and end in all the parts 
of the body, in minute tubes. The veins, on the contrary, 
begin in the flesh of all parts of the body at the connecting 
link (the capillaries), and end in one large trunk, the vena 
cava, at the heart. 

131. Hoiv does the blood pass through the heart? 

By the contraction of the heart, which forces the blood 
from one chamber to another; first, from the right auricle 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 421 

to the right ventricle, then to the lungs, and then back to 
the heart, passing through the left auricle and left ventricle. 

132. Hoiv do the pulmonary arteries and pub7ionary veins 
differ 1 

The pulmonary arteries convey venous blood from the 
heart to the lungs, where it is purified, and then returned 
to the heart by the pulmonary veins as arterial blood. 

133. Where are the largest arteries situated I 

Deep in the flesh, where they are protected from injury. 
Some of them approach the surface, and their pulsation can 
be felt at the wrist, at the sides of the neck and on the 
temple. 

134. Where are the largest veins situated? 

Their great trunks are placed near the great arteries, but, 
being less liable to injury, their branches are situated 
nearer to, and more of them on, the surface, than the 
arterial branches. 

135. What prevents the blood in the veins frotn floiving 
backward? 

Valves placed at proper intervals on the inner coat of 
the veins. The long veins are the best supplied, and some 
veins have no valves. 

136. Ho7a does venous blood differ from arterial? 

Venous blood is of a dark purple color, loaded with the 
waste particles of the system. The arterial blood is of a 
bright scarlet color, purified of all waste matter, rich in 
oxygen and nutritious elements. 

137. What action have the lungs upon the blood? 

The venous blood is purified by means of the air in the 
lungs, which gives up its oxygen, and absorbs the carbon 
and other impurities. 



422 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

138. What causes the blood to circulate ifi the veins? 

The action of the heart, which is like a pump. When 
the arterial blood is forced out, it leaves a vacuum for the 
venous blood to flow in. The pressure of the muscles on 
the veins by contraction has a share in it, also, and perhaps 
a power from behind, or capillary force, in the capillaries. 

139. How much blood is there in a man of average size? 
It is estimated to be twenty-eight pounds. 

140. In 7vhat time does it circulate through the system? 
The left ventricle of the heart, in a man of average size, 

will contain about two ounces. Every time the heart beats 
this cavity is filled and emptied. In ordinary health the 
heart will beat about seventy-two times a minute; there- 
fore, in three minutes, an amount of blood equal to the 
whole will pass through the heart or the system. 

141. What circumstances luil I affect the rate of circulation? 

The heart will beat faster when we are standing'than 
when we are sitting, and faster when sitting than when 
lying down. The pulsation is more rapid in the morning 
than in the evening. All exercise increases the force of 
circulation. 

142. Ho7v do mental states affect the circulation? 

When the mind is excited with anger, hope, merriment 
or love, the blood flows more freely, and a person is capable 
of greater exertions. The depressing passions have the 
opposite effect. 

143. Where is the living fesh made? 
In the capillaries. 

144. What materials of the body are obtaiiied frofn the 
blood? 

All the tissues — the bone, muscle, brain, skin, fat, hair and 
nails, the tears, the saliva, and the perspiration. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 423 

145. For what purpose is the circulation of the blood? 

To carry nutrition to the body and absorb the dead 
particles of the flesh. 

146. What do the elements of the blood contain? 

The elements of animal blood contain red and white 
corpuscles; animal fibrine; water; albumen. The first two 
form the clot, the remaining two the serum. The blood 
contains dissolved within it three gases: carbonic acid, 
oxygen, and a small quantity of nitrogen. 

147. Give the use of the corpuscles of the blood. 

The red corpuscles are supposed to convey oxygen from 
the lungs to the tissues, while the white are the agents 
which repair the body. This is shown in the healing of a 
large wound, as the white are then most abundant. 

148. What law fnust be observed in regard to eating if 
health is preserved? 

When exercise is light, eat but little, and at no time eat 
to excess. 

149. Ho7v are the wasted particles of the body disposed of ? 
They are thrown out of the system by the lungs, skin, 

kidneys, liver and intestines. 

150. What elements are selected by the nutritive organs to 
form fat? 

Seventy-nine parts of carbon, ii| parts of hydrogen, and 
9I parts of oxygen. 

151. What elements are required to form hair ? 

Fifty parts of carbon, 6 of hydrogen, 1 7 of nitrogen, and 
26 of oxygen and sulphur. 

152. What to for^n muscle? 

Fifty-one parts of carbon, 7 of hydrogen, 15 of nitrogen, 
21 of oxygen, and 4 of other matters. 



424 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

153. Describe the lungs. 

The lungs are placed, one in each of the lateral cavities 
of the chest, separated from each other by the heart; they 
are conical in shape. The right lung is larger than the 
other, and has three lobes; the left lung has two. The 
weight of both lungs is about forty-two ounces; the color, 
in young persons, is a pinkish white, but it becomes mot- 
tled with dark spots as age advances. The substance of 
the lungs is of light, spongy texture. Passing through it 
in every direction from the trachea are a great number 
of bronchial tubes, which grow smaller as they subdivide. 
Each tube ends in a minute vesicle or air-cell. 

154. Describe the air-cells. 

The air tubes begin at the back part of the mouth and 
nostrils with a single cylinder, which leads through the 
neck to the chest; but in the lungs they are divided and 
subdivided into smaller and smaller tubes, and at the 
minute termination of these tubes are found the air-cells. 
These cells are separated from the myriads of minute 
arteries only by a membrane, so thin that gases can pass 
through it, and the blood itself is almost in contact with 
the air, thus becoming purified and in condition to nourish 
the system. 

155. Ho7v is voice producedl 

The larynx is the organ of voice, and is the upper part 
of the trachea, where small cords, called vocal cords, 
stretch across it. Voice is produced by the air rushing 
over the vocal cords. 

156. Compare the liaigs atid heart, giving three points in 
common and three points of difference. 

The three points in common are: both operate by expan- 
sion and contraction; both are involuntary organs — that 
is, on ordinary occasions they act independently of the will; 
both are indispensable to the maintenance of life. The 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 425 

three points of difference are: the lungs contain air, the 
heart blood; the lungs contain air-cells, the heart is 
divided into compartments; the lungs purify the blood, the 
heart propels it through the body. 

157. Describe the spine. 

The spinal column is composed of twenty-four vertebras, 
the sacrum and the coccyx, and is a little more than two 
feet in length. The vertebrae are separated from one 
another by a thick piece of elastic cartilage, which saves 
the body from jars. Twelve of the vertebrae in the tho- 
racic region support the twelve ribs on each side. 

158. Describe a vertebra. 

It is somewhat circular and flattened on the sides with 
tooth-like projections which match one with another. 
Each vertebra has a spinous process extending backward. 
Through the centre of each vertebra the spinal cord passes. 

159. How are the boties of the spinal colunui divided? 
Into seven cervical or neck bones; twelve dorsal or back 

bones; and five lumbar or loin bones. 

160. What is the pelvis? 

It is a bony cavity at the lower part of the spine, com- 
posed of the sacrum, the coccyx, and the two innominates 
or hip-bones. 

161. What is the sternum? 

A flat, sword-shaped bone, consisting of three pieces, 
which forms the front part of the thorax, and supports the 
ribs by means of its cartilages. 

162. What is the coccyx? 

A small bone at the lower extremity of the sacrum. 

163. Describe the ribs. 

The ribs are curved, and join the spine behind and the 
sternum in front. The lower five are called false ribs, 



426 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

because their connection with the sternum is not so close 
as that of the others. 

164. What bones compose the skull 2 

The skull consists of the cranium and the face; the cra- 
nium is composed of eight bones, the face of fourteen. 

165. What are the hones of the arm and forearm i 

The humerus is the bone of the arm, and the radius and 
ulna are the bones of the forearm. 

166. What are the bones of the wrist! 
Eight small bones, arranged in two layers. 

167. What are the bones of the hands 2 

Five metacarpal bones and fourteen phalanges. 

168. Name the bones of the lower extremities. 

In the thigh, the femur; in the leg, the tibia and fibula; 
in the ankle, seven small bones; in the foot, five metacar- 
pal bones and fourteen phalanges; at the knee, the patella 
or knee-pan. 

169. Ho7a many kinds ofj'oitits are there? 

Four: the hinge joint, as in the elbow; the ball and 
socket joint, as in the shoulder and thigh; a combination 
of the hinge joint with a rotary movement, as in the neck; 
and a joint with a sliding movement, as between the clavi- 
cle and sternum. 

170. How are the joints held together! 
By ligaments. 

171. What is the clavicle ? 

It is the collar bone, extending between the sternum 
and shoulders. 

172. Where is the scapula ? 

The scapula, or shoulder-blade, is a broad, flat, triangu- 
lar bone which forms part of the shoulder joint. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 427 

173. What peculiarity is there about the neck-joints 1 
Between the head and the first vertebra is a hinge joint, 

and between the first and second vertebrae is a joint with 
a rotary movement, formed by a tooth-like projection from 
the second vertebra, which serves as an axis for the first to 
play upon. The two joints combined give the various 
movements to the head. 

174. Ho7o is tJie fe7}iur joined to the pelinsl 
By a ball and socket joint. 

175. What peculiarity is there alwut the e/bo7C' and lorist 
joints t 

A rotary movement is given to the hand by the rotation 
of the radius in a fibrous socket at the elbow, and a corre- 
sponding movement at the wrist between the ulna and the 
hand. 

176. Describe the hip joint. 

The femur, or thigh bone, has almost a globular head at 
its upper extremity, which is fitted into a very deep socket 
called the acetabulum, in the side bone of the pelvis. 

177. Describe the shoulder joint. 

The head of the bone of the upper arm is less than half 
a ball, and is fitted into a very shallow socket in the upper 
corner of the scapula or shoulder-blade. 

178. Hoio many bones are in the human body? 

Two hundred and four, besides the patellse, or knee-caps. 

179. What three uses ha^e the bones? 

To protect the delicate organs; to serve as levers on 
which the muscles may act to produce motion ; to preserve 
the shape of the body. 

180. Of 7vhat is a bone made? 

Of two-thirds earthy and one-third animal matter. Fhe 



428 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

earthy matter is principally carbonate and phosphate 
of lime. 

1 8 1. What is the structure of a bone? 

A dense, hard tissue, like ivory, forms the outside shell, 
and a porous or cancellated tissue is always found on the 
inside. 

182. What are the rickets? 

A disease caused by lack of mineral matter in the bones, 
which become soft and under the weight of the body are 
distorted. 

183. What is a feloji? 

A felon is a swelling of the finger or thumb, generally of 
the last joint. It is caused by an accumulation of matter 
beneath the periosteum and next to the bone. 

184. What is the cause 0/ bow-tegs? 

Bowlegs in children are caused by their standing on 
their feet before the bones of the lower limbs are strong 
enough to bear their weight. 

185. What is a dislocation? 

The forcing of a joint from its socket. This is done by 
breaking or straining the tissues of the joint. 

186. Describe the three leve?'-actions of the body. 

The movements of the head; raising the body on tiptoe; 
lifting the hands from the elbow. 

187. I?i what state do bones exist at first? 
As cartilage. 

188. How are they converted into bone? 

By nature's deposit of phosphates and carbonate of lime. 

189. What is the strength of the huma?i bone? 

When used as levers they are 22 times as strong as 
sandstone, 3^ times as strong as lead, or twice as strong as 
oak timber. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 429 

190. Define ossification. 

The growth of bone from the cartilage. 

191. What is the only bone in the body cotnp/ete/y hard at 
birth ? 

The petrous, which contains the organs of hearing. 

192. What are the chief uses of cartilage 1 

To give smooth surfaces to the joints, reducing friction 
and serving as a cushion in shocks; to fasten bones to- 
gether without destroying freedom of movement, as it acts 
between vertebra; to serve as a firm yet not unyielding 
framework, as in the larynx and trachea; and to adapt itself 
to all purposes where firmness, toughness, elasticity and 
strength are required. 

193. What is the membrane called 7vhich iuTCsts the 
bones ? 

The periosteum. It is a firm, whitish-yellow in color, 
and encloses the vessels which convey nutriment into the 
bones. It is this membrane to which the ligaments and 
tendons are attached, as they cannot be fastened to the 
bone itself. 

194. Into hotu many groups are the bones of the body 
divided? 

For convenience of study, into four: the bones of the 
head, of the trunk, of the upper extremities and of the 
lower extremities. 

195. Where are the sytiovial membranes situated? 
In joints. 

196. What is the fu7iction of a synovial membrane? 
To secrete a liquid which lubricates the joint. 

197. When is a joint said to be sprained? 

When a ligament, or some fibres of a ligament are 
badly stretched or torn. 



43© COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

198. What are the muscles? 

The active organs of locomotion. They are formed of 
bundles of reddish fibres endowed with the property of 
contractility. 

199. How many kinds of muscles are there? 

Two: those under control of the will, called the muscles 
of animal life; and those over which the will has no 
control, called muscles of organic life. 

200. IVhat is the use of muscles? 

To produce all the motions of the body. 

201. Hotv matiy muscles are there? 
About 527; the number varies. 

202. How are the tnuscles under the control of the will? 
Through the nervous system. Every muscle of animal 

life is supplied with nerves through which the mind exer- 
cises its influence. 

203. What is St. Vitus' s dance? 

A disease of the voluntary muscles, causing spasmodic 
motions. 

204. What is lock-Jaw? 

A disease in which there are spasms and a contraction 
of the muscles, usually beginning in the lower jaw. It is 
sometimes caused by a very trivial injury, as cutting the 
foot, running a fish-hook into the finger, a bruise or the 
like. 

205. Is the heart a muscle? 
It is a muscle of organic life. 

206. Ho7C' do 7c>e breathe? 

Principally by means of the diaphragm, which by con- 
tracting produces a vacuum in the lungs, and air rushes in 
to fill the space. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 431 

207. Describe the diaphragm. 

It is a flat muscle, a flexible partition which divides the 
chest from the abdomen and separates the respiratory 
from the digestive organs. Its edges are attached to the 
back-bone, to the lower edge of the lower ribs, to the breast- 
bone, and to the lower part of the chest. It forms an arch, 
upon the upper surface of which the lungs rest, while in the 
hollow below lie the liver and stomach. When the 
diaphragm is at rest its upper point reaches as high as the 
fourth rib; but when it is in action it is drawn down to 
below the seventh rib. 

208. Explain 1 he process of inspiratioti. 

The muscles on the sides of the chest raise the ribs and 
extend their circle forward and outward; the diaphragm 
draws down its arch and thus enlarges the chest; and, the 
lungs having room for expansion, the air is pressed into 
them to fill the vacuum left by the enlarging chest. 

209. Explaiii the process of expiration. 

After the chest is thus sufficiently expanded, the muscles 
of the ribs and the diaphragm relax. The action of other 
muscles carries the ribs downward ; at the same time, the 
muscles which coxier the abdomen press upon its contents, 
and force them against the diaphragm; this yielding to the 
pressure, rises and presses upon the lungs, which retreat 
before it, and the air is expelled. 

210. What is the cause of squintingl 

Most cases of squintin- are caused by long sightedness, 
the muscles being strained in the effort to obtain distinct 
vision. 

211. What is coughing'} 

A spasmodic action of the muscles of expiration forcing 
the air out violently through the mouth. 



432 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

2 12. What is sneezitigl 

It is the same action as coughing, only the mouth is 
closed, and the air rushes through the nose. 

213. What are sighing and snoring? 

Sighing is a prolonged inspiration, followed by an 
audible expiration. Snoring is caused by the air passing 
through both nose and mouth, the palate in the meantime 
producing a vibration of the air. 

214. What are laughing and sobbing? 

Laughing and sobbing are much alike as regards the 
action of the muscles. The sounds are produced by short, 
rapid contractions of the diaphragm. 

215. What are ya7o?iing and hiccoughing? 

Yawning, or gaping, is like sighing, only the mouth is 
open wide to take in the deep inspiration. Hiccoughing is 
caused by a contraction of the diaphragm and a constric- 
tion of the glottis. 

216. What is the effect of breathing the same air several 
times? 

It poisons the system, the expired air being loaded with 
waste matter and carbonic acid. 

217. I?i hoio ma?iy ways is the air unfit for respiration? 

Three: by being deprived of oxygen; by being loaded 
with carbonic acid; by being filled with waste matter from 
the lungs, skin, etc., or other poisonous materials. 

218. How much fresh air ought to be supplied to each 
person per tnitiute ? 

About four cubic feet. 

219. How much air 7vill the lungs hold? 
About 384 cubic inches. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 433 

220. What effect has ati ill'Ve7itilated school-room upon 
children^ 

They grow dull and sleepy from the action of the 
poisonous matter in the air. 

221. How should ice ventilate our bed-roo7ns and school- 
houses 1 

The windows should be opened in such a manner as to 
admit fresh air without its blowing directly upon the 
sleeper or student. This is usually accomplished best by 
lowering the top sash and at the same time lowering the 
curtain, otherwise the obstruction would throw the current 
downward. Ventilation through the ceiling is advisable, 
and can easily be arranged at time of building. 

222. What is the average number of respirations per 
minute 1 

Eighteen. 

223. What animals are most active a?id which are most 
sluggish ? 

Those which breathe the most are the most vigorous, 
lively, and active, while those which breathe least are the 
most sluggish, stupid and feeble. 

224 How does consumption waste the Jlesh and strength? 

In this disease the lungs are more or less filled with 
tubercles and abscesses; the air-vessels are to some extent 
closed, so that the air cannot penetrate them and reach 
the blood to purify it; therefore, lacking pure blood, the 
system is not well nourished, the muscles grow thin and 
weak, and the body gradually wastes away. 

225. What are bronch itis, pleurisy and pneumonia 1 

Bronchitis is an inflammation of the mucous membrane 
of the bronchial tubes. This inflammation causes a secre- 
tion of mucus, and consequent coughing. Pleurisy is an 
inflammation of the pleura. Pneumonia is an inflamma- 
tion of the lungs, affecting chiefly the air-cells. 



434 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

226. Hotv may a constitutio7ial tendency to consumption 
be warded off in youth ? 

By plenty of pure air, exercise, and a careful diet. Rich 
pastry, unripe fruit, salted meat and acid drinks should be 
avoided. A certain quantity of fat should be eaten at 
each meal. 

227. What is the 7-ule for prevention and cure of a cold? 
Keep the blood upon the surface. 

228. What is the first step to be taken in the cure of a 
disease? 

To obey the laws of health which have been violated. 
Medicine is not taken to destroy a disease, but to hold it in 
check while nature repairs the injury, and again brings the 
system into harmonious movement. 

229. Why does sleep sometimes fail to refresh? 
For want of sufficient air. 

230. What is carbonic acid? 

A gas known by many as "damps" or "dead air;" it is 
often found in wells and vats. It is heavier than air, and, 
therefore, falls like water to the bottom of a vessel or 
room. 

"231. What is a common source of danger from carbonic 
acid? 

A pan of coals is sometimes left burning in an ill- 
ventilated sleeping-room. The gas sinks, but as more is 
produced it keeps filling more and more space till it gets 
up to the sleeper's head, is inhaled, and suffocation is the 
result. 

232. How does drowning produce death? 

The water taken into the mouth, nose and ears prevents 
the access of air to the respiratory organs, and the sufferer 
dies of suffocation. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 435 

233. What 7iecessity is common to all animals? 

Good air, though in different degrees. Every animal, 
from the highest to the lowest, must sustain life by its 
breath. 

234. What reciprocal offices do animals and vegetables 
perfot m ? 

The animal uses oxygen and gives out carbonic acid; 
while, on the other hand, the plant uses carbonic acid and 
gives out oxygen. 

235. What is the temperature 0/ the human body? 
98° to 100° F. 

236. What is the origin 0/ heat in living bodies? 

The union of the carbon of the food and the oxygen of 
the air. This produces heat in much the same way that 
heat is produced by sensible combustion. 

237. Into what classes are animals divided in relation to 
heat? 

Into the warm-blooded, including man, birds, quad- 
rupeds, etc., whose heat is always of the same degree; 
and the cold-blooded, including snakes, oysters, fishes, 
worms, toads, turtles, etc., the heat of which is but little 
higher than that of the medium wherein they live. 

238. What prevents any considerable increase of temper- 
ature in the healthy body? 

Perspiration. 

239. What is insensible perspiration? 

The moisture which is absorbed by the air as fast as 
formed. 

240. What is sensible perspiration? 

The moisture which is exuded too fast to be immediately 
absorbed, and is left in small drops on the skin. 



436 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

241. Which best protects from cold, alchohol or foodl 
Food. Alcohol stimulates the stomach and excites the 

nervous system. It supplies carbon and hydrogen to the 
flame; but these soon burn out, and the body is afterward 
cooler than it otherwise would have been. Food alone 
can sustain a permanent heat. 

242. Which warms most,Jlesh or bread? 

Flesh, since it contains more carbon and hydrogen. 

243. Why is more fat required for food in a cold climate 
than in a warm otiel 

Because it supplies more carbon, and gives more heat. 

244. Of what use is fat to the body? 

It gives form to the body, and acts as a powerful non- 
conductor of heat. It collects around the joints and be- 
tween the muscles and prevents irritation by friction. 

245. What is 7ioticeable of fat? 

It does not accumulate within the cranium, the lungs, or 
the eye-lids. 

246. What are the oil glands? 

Clusters of tiny sacs, secreting an oil which flows along 
the ducts to the roots of the hair, and thence oozes out 
upon the cuticle. 

247. Describe the ski?i. 

It is composed of two layers — the derma, or true skin, 
and the epidermis, or cuticle. On the surface of the 
derma are the sensitive papillae, and within or beneath it 
are the sweat glands, hair-follicles and sebaceous glands. 
It is a dense and thick membrane, composed of firm and 
strong fibres, and is almost filled with minute blood- 
vessels. 

248. Name the three uses of the skin. 

The skin is used to protect, to exhale, and to -absorb. 



PHYSIOLOGY, AS ATOMY AND HYGIENE. 437 

249. What is the cuticle i 

The cuticle, or scarf-skin, is a thin layer for the purpose 
of protecting the derma. 

250. What part of the blood flows through the skin] 
A large proportion. 

251. Describe the hair. 

It is an outgrowth from the skin. It has a root which 
is bulbous, and a shaft which is hollow. The hollow 
ceases near the point. 

252. Describe the nails. 

They also are outgrowths from the skin. They are 
flattened, elastic structures of a horny nature, and are 
firmly connected with the cutis. 

253. Where is the seat of color in the skin ? 

In the pigment cells, or the rete mucosum, which are 
situated in the innermost and last-formed layer of the 
cuticle. The contents of these cells give the different 
shades to the various races of mankind. 

254. What proportion of the 7vaste of the body passes 
through the skin ? 

About five-eighths. 

255. What connection exists between the internal organs 
and the skin 1 

A most intimate connection. As the blood finds its 
way freely through it, it serves to relieve internal organs 
when the circulation is disturbed. 

256. What is the office of the skin 1 

It protects the body, regulating its heat by means of 
the sweat follicles, and throwing out much waste matter. 

257. Name the organs which carry off waste matter from 
the body. 

The skin, lungs, kidneys, liver and intestines. 



438 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK'. 

258. Name the organs whieh bring fresh material to the 
body. 

The stomach and intestines particularly; sometimes the 
skin. The lungs bring oxygen. 

259. Describe the minute structure of the perspiratory 
organs. 

The perspired fluid is formed by the inner skin and con- 
veyed to the surface through minute tubes which are 
attached to the glands. There are 3,528 of these little 
tubes on each square inch in the palm of the hand, and 
2,800 on each square inch throughout the whole body, 
making seven millions of perspiratory tubes on a man of 
average size. 

260. Of what does the fiervous system consist? 
The brain, spinal cord and nerves. 

261. Describe the general outlitie of the brain. 

It is divided into two principal parts, the cerebrum and 
cerebellum. The first is divided by a deep fissure into two 
lateral halves, called hemispheres. The under part of the 
cerebellum is divided in the same way. The cerebrum is 
much the larger part of the brain, and occupies the anterior 
part of the skull. Its surface is indented with many con- 
volutions. The outer part, of a gray color, is called the 
cortical substance. The inner part, of a light color, is 
called the medullary substance. The cerebrum is separated 
from the cerebellum by a strong fibrous tissue. 

262. How is the brain protected? 

By three membranes which cover it. The inner and 
middle membranes are very delicate, and give the brain a 
soft cushion to lie between it and its bony enclosure. The 
outer membrane is thick and very strong, and would 
hold the brain in its position, even if the skull were 
removed. 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 439 

263. What peculiarity has the brain in regard to the sefise 
0/ fee ling? 

It has no feeling of its own, although capable of recog- 
nizing the sensations of all other parts of the body. 

264. Describe the sense of feeling. 

The nerves of sensation are spread over the whole body. 
Feeling is most delicate in the point of the tongue and the 
tips of the fingers. The surface of the skin is covered with 
minute conical projections called papillae. Each of these 
contains its tiny nerve, which receives the impression 
and conveys it to the brain, where perception is pro- 
duced. 

265. Describe the sense of taste. 

The sense of taste is located in the papillae of the tongue 
or palate. The papillae start up when tasting, as you can 
see by placing a drop of vinegar on another person's 
tongue, or on your own before a mirror. These small, 
hair-like projections absorb the liquid to be tasted and 
convey it to the nerves. 

266. Describe the orgafi of sfnell. 

The nose, the seat of this sense, is composed of cartilage 
covered with muscles and skin, and connected with the 
skull by small bones. The nostrils open at the back into 
the pharynx, and are lined by a continuation of the mucous 
membrane of the throat. The olfactory nerves enter 
through a sieve-like, bony plate at the roof of the nose, 
and are distributed over the inner surface of the two olfac- 
tory chambers, 

267. What large nervous trunks have their origifi in the 
brain 1 

The olfactory, optic, facial, auditory, pneumogastric and 
other nerves, nine in all. Some authors divide the seventh 
and eighth pair, and make three more nerves. 



440 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK, 

268. Where is Ihe spinal cord? 

It extends from the brain through the whole length of 
the spinal column. It gives off thirty pairs of nerves, 
which divide and subdivide until they reach every part of 
the body. 

269. How many kinds ef nerves are there? 
Two: motor and sensory. 

270. What three things are necessary for sensation? 

The nerves upon which the impression is made, the 
trunk which conveys the impression, and the brain which 
receives and perceives it. 

271. Js ihe action of the different organs modified by the 
nerves? 

Yes. The amount of blood they receive is regulated by 
the nerves. 

272. £>o the arteries have ?ierves? 
They do. 

273. If the fierve which governs the action of the heart 
should be severed, what would the heart do ? 

It would cease beating. 

274. When will motion be lost and feeling remain? 
When the motory nerve is severed. 

275. When will feelifig be lost atid motion remain? 
When the sensory nerve leading to any part is severed. 

276. What is refiex action? 

A sudden action occurring without thought or medita- 
tion, as we start at a sound, jump from sudden danger, or 
wink at a flash of light or threatened blow. 

277. Wh at are day-drea m s ? 

Beautiful imaginings whence all disagreeable things are 



FHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 441 

excluded; delightful reveries, more commonly known as 
"building air-castles." 

278. Describe the eye. 

It is the organ of sight, set in a deep, bony socket, con- 
taining two humors — the aqueous, a transparent fluid in 
the anterior part, and the vitreous, transparent and jelly- 
like, situated in the posterior portion, and forming the 
greater part of the eye. Between these two humors is the 
crystalline lens, a double convex lens. 

279. What is the sclerotic coat? 

A dense, fibrous coat, covering the whole eye except in 
front, in which the cornea is placed, a transparent and 
strong tissue. 

280. What is the choroid coat? 

The middle coat, containing a black pigment which 
absorbs such rays of light as are not needed for vision. 

281. Where is the retina? 

A delicate nervous membrane, lining the inner surface 
of the choroid coat. The images of external objects are 
received upon it. Behind, it is continuous with the optic 
nerve. 

282. What is the iris? 

It is a thin, circular-shaped curtain suspended behind 
the cornea, in the aqueous humor, and connected at its 
circumference with the choroid coat. A small opening in its 
centre, which admits the rays of light, is called the pupil. 

283. Describe the lids. 

They are composed of cartilages adapted to the shape of 
the eye, the skin without, and the lining membrane within. 
One circular muscle surrounds the open part of the eye, 
and closes the lids when it contracts. Another muscle, 
attached to the upper eyelid by one end, and to the bone 
of the socket by the other, opens the eye. 



442 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

284. Where is the fluid prepared zohich moistens the eyes? 
In the lining membrane of the lids. 

285. What are the lachrymal glands and the nasal duct? 

The lachrymal glands secrete the tears, and are in the 
upper and outer part of the orbit. The tears clean the eye 
of any particles of foreign matter, and, upon reaching the 
inner corner of the eye, pass through the lachrymal canal 
and nasal duct into the nose. The nasal duct is a mem- 
branous canal, about three-quarters of an inch in length, 
extending from the inner corner of the eye into the nose. 

286. What mo7<es the eyel 

The eye is rolled by a set of muscles peculiar to itself. 
They are attached by one end to the bony socket, and by 
the other to the eyeball. By their contractions they roll 
the eye in every direction; and by their cooperation both 
eyes are directed to a single object. 

287. Describe the optic nerre. 

It passes from the base of the brain forward through the 
socket and into the eyeball. After passing the outer and 
middle coats, it is spread upon their inner surface and forms 
the retina, which receives the rays of light. 

288. IIo7v is vision produced? 

The light is reflected from objects, and passes through 
the transparent cornea and the pupil into the ball. The 
humors and the lens refract it, and give the rays such a 
direction that they fall upon the retina, where they form 
the image of the object. This impression is carried along 
the optic nerve to the brain, and there perception occurs 
and the object is seen. 

289. What care should be taken in regard to the direction 
of the light 7vheti one is at work? 

Care should be taken that the light should not fall so that 



PHYSIOLOGY, ANATOMY AND HYGIENE. 443 

it is reflected directly into our face; if possible it should 
come from behind. 

290. Hoto does the eye change as 07ie grows old? 

The lens loses its convexity in some degree, and the rays 
of light are not concentrated at short distances upon the 
retina; the person becomes far-sighted. 

291. What is the differetice between a short-sighted man 
and one 7vho is lofig-sighted? 

In one who is near-sighted the lenses are too convex; 
in one who is long-sighted the lenses are not convex enough. 

292. Why are some persons cross-eyed? 

Because the muscles which govern the movement of the 
eyeball do not act in harmony: one muscle is more powerful 
than another, and draws the eye to one side. 

293. What does the organ 0/ hearifig include? 

The external ear, the internal ear, and the passage 
between them. 

294. Describe the external ear. 

It is composed principally of stiff cartilage; and its shape 
is that which is best adapted to catch sounds and transmit 
them to the internal ear. The canal leading inward is 
about an inch in length, and is covered with hair and wax 
to protect it from insects. A thin membrane, the covering 
of the drum of the ear, is stretched across the canal, and 
separates it from the internal ear. 

295. Describe the internal ear. 

It consists of a cavity filled with air behind the mem- 
brane of the drum, and three small bones which reach from 
the membrane to the labyrinth, where the auditory nerve 
is spread out in many filaments to receive impressions of 
sound. 



444 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

296. What is the eustachian tube? 

A canal passing from the internal ear to the back part 
of the mouth, and serving as a vent to the air in the drum 
of the ear. 

297. How is sound produced? 

The pulsations of air pass along the external canal and 
cause the membrane of the drum to vibrate, which trans- 
mits the vibrations by the air and three small bones to the 
labyrinth, where, in some unexplained manner, the filaments 
of the auditory nerve receive the impression; this is con- 
veyed to the brain, and we hear. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

PARTICIPLES AND INFINITIVES 



1. JV/iai construction have infinitives and participles 1 

All infinitives and participles have the construction and 
use of the noun, the adjective, or the adverb. 

2. When has an ififinitive the construction of a noun? 
When used as subject of a verb, or in apposition with a 

noun; as a noun in the absolute case; as the object of a 
verb or preposition, 

3. Illustrate by example. 

To play is natural. To do good is conducive to happiness. 
To lie; oh, how base! They love to laugh. What went ye 
out for to seel 

4. When has the i}ifi?iitive the construction of an adjective 1 
When used to limit or modify the meaning of a noun. 

5. Give examples. 

A desire to play is natural. He gave orders to march. 
This rule is to be observed — adjective in the predicate. 
This tO'be-observed rule is, or exists. 

6. When has the infinitive the construction of an adverb 1 
When used to limit the meaning of a verb, adjective, 

adverb, or other infinitive. 

445 



446 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

7. Give exatnples. 

They came to see\ i, e., for the purpose of seeing. They 
were anxious to go. That horse is strong enough to draw 
any load. I wish to go to town to trade to-day. 

8. Have infinitives case] 

They have not. Case belongs alone to nouns and 
pronouns. 

9. Has the itifinitive ahvays a subject! 
It has, but not always expressed. 

10. What is the subject of '■'■X.o go," in "I wished to go 
home"? 

The subject of "to go" is "I," understood; the meaning 
evidently is, I wished that I might go home. 

11. In what case is the subject of the infinitive ? 

In the objective case, except when its subject is, or refers 
to, the same person or thing as the subject of the finite 
verb, or when the subject is any word but a noun or pronoun. 

12. Has the participle always a subject] 
It has, either expressed or implied. 

13. Ifi what case is the subject the participle] 

Usually in the possessive case; sometimes in the ob- 
jective; as: There is no harm in children's playing by the 
river (subj. poss.). There is no harm in children playing 
by the river (subj. obj.).* 

14. What is the rule for the constructioji of participles] 
They are to be used ifi all cases like the infinitive. 

1 5. /;/ tJie sentence^ " 2"o be honest with you, I was in 
error,^^ parse "to be." 

To be: verb; irreg., intrans., act., pres., infin., with the 

* This is much disputed, many claiming that the possessive pronoun 
"their," understood, is the subject of "playing," in the second sentence. 



PARTICIPLES AND INFINITIVES. 



447 



construction of an adverb limiting the verb confess, under- 
stood — [I confess] (in order) to be honest, etc. 

1 6. In what viannei do 7oe determine whether the itifijiitive 
has the construction of a noun, an adjective, or an adverb? 

First, and mainly, by the sense or meaning; when the 
infinitive has the construction of an abverb, the words "in 
order" can be placed immediately before the infinitive 
without destroying the sense; as: They came [in order] 
to see. When it has the construction of an adjective it 
can be changed to its present participle, placed immediately 
before the word it limits, and make good sense; as: He 
asked for money to spend, i. e., spending-money. I want a 
place to study, i. e., studying-place. 

17. How do we determine what is the subject of the 
hifinitive, whett that is not apparent, as in " He was eager to 
depart'"? 

Change the infinitive to its equivalent subordinate clause, 
and the subject will appear. He was eager to depart, i. e., 
that he might depart. He is the subject. Be so good as to 
go, i. e., th.7it you should go. John was told not to go, i. e., 
that/(V/;^ should not go. 

18. In the se/itence, '■'■To die is gain,''' what is the subject 
of "to die"? 

Person, understood. Expanded, That any person should 
die is gain. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



WRITING. 



1. Define writing. 

The art of expressing thought in legible characters; in 
the broadest sense, the use of a form for the conveyance of 
meaning. 

2. What are the principal subjects to 7vhich attention 
should be given in teaching or leartmig the art of writing? 

Position; manner of holding pen; movement; form; 
rate; spacing and shading. 

3. How many positions are commendable, and what are 
they? 

Four: the "left," the "front," the "right-oblique" and 
the "right." 

4. Describe the '■'•left'''' position. 

One sits or stands with the left side inclined toward the 
desk, the left arm lying on the book or paper, the weight of 
the body supported mainly by the left side and right arm, 
the book or paper at right angles to the desk. 

5. Under what circumstances is the left position generally 
used, and with advantage ? 

When writing in large books, or when it is impossible or 
inconvenient to turn the paper obliquely. 

449 



450 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

6. Describe f/ie '■'■fi-otiV position. 

One sits or stands directly facing the desk, near it, but 
not leaning over it ; the forearms both on the desk and 
nearly at right angles to each other, the left holding in 
place the book or paper, which should be inclined so that 
the lines meet the right forearm at right angles. 

7. What particular advatitage has the frotit position? 
The weight of the body is not thrown to either side; 

hence this position is best adapted to resist fatigue of the 
bodily muscles. 

8. Describe the " right-oblique^' position. 

One sits or stands with the right side inclined toward 
the desk, the right forearm resting wholly on the desk, the 
left partly so and the copy placed obliquely on the desk. 
The weight of the head and shoulders is thrown on the 
left side. 

g. Describe the '■'■ right"" position. 

One sits or stands with the right side turned to the desk 
but not in contact with it, the right forearm as well as the 
copy being on the desk parallel with its edge, and the copy 
held in place by the fingers of the left hand. 

10. What special caution should be kept iti vieav ifi each 
and all of the before-nietitioned positions? 

To keep the body erect and by no means to permit the 
head to drop forward over the paper. 

1 1. Describe the manner of holding the pen. 

The manner most common among business men and 
taught in most of our commercial colleges, is that rec- 
ommended by Mr. Spencer: holding the pen between 
the first two fingers and thumb, the holder crossing the 
forefinger in front of the knuckle-joint and the second 
finger at the root of the nail; the end of the thumb touch- 
ing the holder opposite the lower joint of the first finger; 



WRITfNG. 



451 



the other fingers separate from the first two at the middle 
joint and curved so that the ends of the nails rest upon 
the paper. 

12. What is mcafit by fnovement? 

The proper motion of the muscles of the shoulder, arm 
and hand in writing. 

13. Ho7o many kinds of 7novement are usually employed 
ifi writing I 

Two: the combined and the whole-arm. 

1 4. Describe each. 

The combined movement is the motion of the muscles of 
the forearm and fingers together, resting upon the elbow 
and the nails of the third and fourth fingers; this is used in 
ordinary writing. ■ The whole-arm movement is a motion 
of the muscles of the whole arm and shoulder, resting upon 
the nails of the third and fourth fingers and upon the point 
of the pen; this is used in making large capitals and 
flourishes, and in blackboard exercise. The wrist joint 
should in all cases be kept free. 

15. What is mea7it by form ? 

The exact shape and appearance of a character, repre- 
senting a thought preconceived in the mind. 

16. In what manner does a careful study of ioxva. aid in 
makitig a good petiman 1 

The mind directs the action of the muscles, and, as 
writing is a result of muscular action, the mind must have 
a clear, concise and ready conception of what it wishes the 
muscles to do before the action can be realized. 

17. What is a line? 

The path left by a point moving in any direction. 

18. How matiy kinds of lines are used in tvriting? 

Two: straight and curved. A straight line is the path 



452 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

of a point moving in but one direction; a curved line is 
the path of a point constantly changing its direction. 

1 9. How many kinds of curves are used in writing] 

Two: right and left. A right curve bends to the right 
of a straight line connecting its extremities, while a left 
curve bends to the left. 

20. Def fie horizontal, vertical and oblique lines. 

A horizontal line is one parallel to the horizon; a 
vertical line is one at right angles to the horizon; an 
oblique line is one which is neither horizontal nor vertical. 

21. When are lines parallel? 

When they are equi-distant from each other throughout 
their entire length. 

22. What is meant by the base line, the head line, and 
the top line? 

The line upon which the letter rests is the base line. 
The line, real or imaginary, which bounds the height of the 
small letters, or those but one space in height, is the head 
line. The line which bounds the height of the extended 
letters, or those three spaces in height, is the top line. 

23. What is an angle? 

The space between two lines meeting in a point. 

24. How matiy ki?ids are Jised in writing? 

Two: right and acute. A right angle is formed by one 
right line meeting another perpendicularly. An acute angle 
is one smaller than a right angle. 

25. What is a degree? 

A 360th part of the circumference of a circle. 

26. What is meant by a slant o/j2° or of jo° ? 

If from the centre of a circle a vertical and horizontal 
line be drawn to meet the circumference, and the smaller of 



WRITING. 453 

the two arcs thus made be divided into ninety equal parts 
or degrees, a line drawn from the centre of the circle to a 
point on this arc 52° from where the arc meets the 
horizontal line, is said to be on a slant of 52°. One drawn 
similarly from a point 30° above the horizontal is said to 
have a slant of 30°. 

27. What is meant by a ftiain slant and a connecting 
slant} 

A main slant is a slant of 52°, so called because the main 
or downward strokes of written letters have this slant. A 
connecting slant is a slant of 2,0°, so called because it is 
generally used in upward or connecting strokes. 

28. In how many uniys are the strokes of the pen united tn 
forming letters 1 

Three: by angular juncture, as in the upper part of the 
small /,■ by short curves, as at the base of the small /,• and 
by oval turns, as in the large O. 

29. What are the units for measuring the height and width 
of letters 1 

The height of the small /, commonly called a space, is the 
unit of height. The horizontal distance between the two 
straight lines in the letter u is the unit of width. 

30. What letters are hut one space in height i 
a, c, e, /, m, «, 0, u, v, w and x. 

31. What is the height ofx and s ? 
One and one-fourth spaces. 

32. A part of7vhat other letter has a similar height? 
The final part, or small oval of the letter k. 

33. What is the height of\., d and p ? 
Two spaces. 

34. Hoic far do p and q extend beloiv the line? 
One and one-half spaces. 



454 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK: 

35. What letters extend two spaces beloio the line? 
Jy <?■. / y and z. 

36. What letters extend three spaces above the line? 
/>, /, //, k, I, and all the capitals. 

37. What is meant />y principles? 

Lines of a certain and established form, by combinations 
of which all letters may be formed. 

38. What is the object of the study and practise of 
principles, as such, when learnifig to tvrite? 

I. To simplify the forms of letters. 2. To teach both 
mind and muscle this simplified form. 3. To give a stand- 
ard for uniformity. 4. To educate the taste to more 
pleasing proportions in the parts of letters. 

39. /// what other way may ive assist the mind in obtain- 
ing a true idea or picture of the form of letters? 

By analysis. 

40. What is fneant by the attalysis of letters? 

To analyze a letter is to name the separate principles 
employed in its construction, and to state their position 
and manner of connection. 

41. Where should we begi?i a?id end in forming the small 
letters? 

We should begin on the base line always, and end one 
space above the base line. 

42. What capitals should begin three spaces above the base 
line ? 

A, E, M, N, O. 

43. Which should begin on the base litie? 

C, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, Q, S, U, V, W, X, Y, Z. 



WRITING. 



455 



44. Which are begu?i less than three spaces above the base 
line? 

B, F, P, R, T, which begin two and one-half spaces 
above the base line. D begins two spaces above. 

45. What is meant by spacing? 

Leaving a proper distance between letters, words or 
sentences. 

46. What distance should be allowed between letters in a 
word? 

One and one-fourth spaces. 

47. To what distance is the connecting line carried in 
writing letters rvith a, d, g or q .? 

Two spaces from the last straight line of the connecting 
letter. Write the words, name, cinque, and notice the 
required distance from the bottom of the downward stroke 
of ;/ to the connecting point of a and q. 

48. When an oval is joined to a straight lifie, as in on, 
frotn what point is the measurement taken? 

From the middle of the oval to the straight line of the 
following letter. 

49. When an oval is joi7ied to an oval, as in 00, ho7v is 
the measurement taken ? 

From the middle of first oval to the left side of second 
oval. 

50. What distance is allowed between a capital and the 
first curve 0/ the sfnall letter followitig it, inhere the capital 
does not Join with the small letter? 

One-fourth space, recrossing from the base of the capital 
letter. 

51. What distance is allowed between capitals used as 
initial letters? 

One space. 



456 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

52. What distance is allowed between words f 
Two spaces. 

53. What distance is allojved when the follozviTig word 
begins tenth a capital? 

The extreme left point of the capital should be one and 
one-half spaces from the last downward stroke of the 
preceding word. 

54. When one itwrd ends tmth a right curve atid the next 
begins ivith a left, or vice versa, tvhat space is lejtl 

Between the straight lines, two and one-third spaces; 
between the curves, one and one-third spaces; between the 
final downward stroke of the first and the beginning of the 
curve for the next word, one and one-half spaces. 

55. What distance is allowed between sentences 1 
Three spaces. 

56. What distance is allowed hettveen fguresl 
One-third of a space. 

57. What is meant by shading? 

A proper use of light and heavy strokes, the latter 
formed by a gently-increasing pressure upon the points of 
the pen, which is held and moved so that the pressure is 
constantly alike on both points, until the middle of the 
stroke to be shaded is reached, and the pressure then 
released as gently as it was increased until the stroke is 
complete. 

58. What letters should not ordinarily be shaded? 

All the letters only one space high except a, which 
should receive a slight, shade on the first downward curve. 

59. Where should the shade occur in t and d? 

The heaviest shade should be at the top of the last 
downward stroke. 



WRITING. 



457 



60. How should -^ be shadedl 

The shade should begin at the base line and gradually be 
increased to the end of the downward stroke. 

61. How should i be shade dl 

Only on that part of the downward stroke which is 
below the line. 

62. Where should the shade occur in b and 1, h and k .'' 

In b and /, on the lower half of the first downward stroke 
In // and k^ on the last downward stroke only. 

63. When two or more letters requiring similar shading 
occur together^ what rule should be observed! 

The last should receive but half as much shade as the 
first one. 

64. Which capital letters should be shaded on the first 
curz>e and 7vhich on the second] 

A, C, D, E, O, Q, on the first ; H, Z, Q, U, V, W, Y, on 
the second. 

65. Which should receive shade on the capital stem? 
A, B, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, T. 

66. What letters receive shading beloia the base line? 
/and/ only. 

6 7 . What are figures ? 
Characters to represent numbers. 

68. How are figures formed? 

The same as letters, from a combination of straight and 
curved lines according to set principles. 

69. What is the height ofi figures? 

One and one-half spaces, except the 6, which is two 
spaces in height. 



458 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

70. On what slant are figures writtenl 
A slant of 52°. 

71. How far do the figures 7 and g extend below the linel 
One and one-half spaces. 

72. What is the width of the figures') 

They are all one space in width, measured at the widest 
part, except the i and o; the o is but one space in width. 

73. Where is the stroke begun formi7ig the figures 1 
At the upper extremity. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 



ON 



TEST PROBLEMS. 



1. The sum of two 7i umbers is 12, and their difference is 
equal to ^ of the greater. What are the numbers? 

The half sum of two numbers plus the half difference 
equals the greater. 

The half sum minus the half difference equals the less. 
Let 2J?= difference. 
6 i- x= greater. 
6 — x = less. 
2A.' = 6 -(- .r 

3 Ans. Greater 7^. Less 4|. 

2. A farmer made a mixture of barley, oats and peas, 
using 2 bushels of barley as often as j of oats and i of 
peas; the ivhole number of bushels iti the mixture was J2. 
How many bushels of each hind did he usel 

Let X — No. bushels peas. 
2X^^ No. bushels barley. 
5x=No. bushels oats. 

8.^ = 32. Ans. 4 bushels peas, 8 bushels barley, 
20 bushels oats. 

3. A farm rents for 6 per cent, more this year than last. 
This year it rents for $1,060. What was the rent last year? 

Let x = rent last year. 

X ~f~ 6jc 

== 1060. Ans. * 1,000. 

100 *^ 

459 



46o COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

4. A steamer whose i-egular speed is twelve miles per hour 
in still water, can make a trip up stream in 7 hours a?id 
down in j* hours. At what rate does the river flow 1 

Let X = rate of river. 

Then 7 (12 — a) = 5 {\2 -\- x). Ans. 2 hours. 

5. A can do a piece of work in 6 days, B in 4. days. In 
what time can they both do it, working together 1 

Let .r= time required by both. 

Then -^ -\ = 1, Ans. 2? days. 

64 

6. What time is it when \ of the time past noofi equals \ 
of the time to midnight? 

Let a: = time past noon. 

12 — x = time to midnight. 

X 12 — X 

Then — = . Ans. Half-past 4 o'clock p.m. 

3 5 

7. What fraction is that which if i be added to the fium- 
erator the fraction will be \ but if i be added to the denom- 
inator the fraction laill be \ ? 

Let X = numerator of fraction. 
J- = denominator. 

Then ^ = I and — ■ — = \. Ans. ^. 

y ■* j'+ I •* ^'^ 

8. Divide the number n into tivo such parts that the 
greater, increased by a, shall equal the less, increased by b. 

Let X — greater ; ;/ — x — less. 

Then x -\- a =^ [n — .r) + b. 

. _ 7i-\-b — a . n -\- a — b 

Ans. Greater less 

2 2 

9. A says to B : <' Give me one dollar and I shall have 
twice as much money as you.'''' B says to A: '■'■No; you 



TEST PROBLEMS. 461 

give me one dollar and I shall have just as much money as 
you.'" Hotv many dollars have each? 

Let :r = A's money ; y — B's money. 

Then x-\- i — 2{y — i) and x— 1 =y -f- i. 

Ans. A's = $y. B's = $5. 

I 10, What h the length of one edge of that cube which 
contains as many solid units as there are linear units in the 
diagonal through the opposite corners? 

Let X — length of edge. 
^ ^x'^ = the. dizgowdl. 

x^^^Vt^x-. Ans. V3. 

11. The sum of two nufnbers is loo, and the difference of 
their square roots is 2. What are the numbers? 

Let .r = greater ; y — less 
Then x ^ y — 1 00 and s/ x — Vj- = 2. 
Square second equation and subtract. Ans. 64 and 36. 

1 2. What number is that consisting of tzuo digits, units and 
tens, 7ohich is equal to three times the sum of its digits, and if 
4S be added to the number, the order of the digits will be 
reversed? 

The local value of the digit in tens' place being ten 
times that in units' place, if we let x = units and j' = tens 
the number will be loy + x. Then 107 ^x= t^{x -\- y) and 

iojj' + ^ + 45 = io.r+7. Ans. 27. 

13. fames is ' as old as fohn; 5 years ago he was \ as 
old; how old is each? 

Let X — James's age ; y = John's age. 
Then x = -- and x - 5 =-- 5 ^^^^ James 10, John ^o. 

3 ^ »J o 



462 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

14. What two numbers are tJiose whose product is j6, and 
the difference of their squares is 6j 1 

Let jtr = one number andj' the other. 
Then xy=^T,6 and x"—y-= 65. 

Find value of x' in each equation and compare. 

Ajis. 9 and 4. 

15. Divide the number 2000 into two such parts that the 
greater shall be to the less as g to 7. 

Let ^1? = greater number andj' the less. 
Then x -f J— 2000 and a":j': : 9 : 7 or 9^^= 'jx. 

Multiply first equation through by 7 and subtract. 

Ans. 1 125 and 875. 

16. There is a fish whose head is g in. lojig; the tail is as 
long as the head and \ the body ; a?id the body is as long as 
the head and tail together. IVhat is the length of the fish ? 

Let X — length of body and 9 -f ijc = length of tail. 
Then 9 + 9 -|- ^.v = .r, or jc = 18 -f \x. Ans. 72 inches. 

17. A shepherd was met by a band of robbers who 
plundered him of \ of his fiock and \ of a sheep over; he 
afterwards fnct a second band rvho took \ of the remainder 
and ^ of a sheep over; and a third ba?id took i of the last 
remainder and J of a sheep over, when he had but 23 sheep 
left. H07o tna?iy sheep had he at first] 

Let i2.r = number he had at first, 
gx — i = first remainder. 
6x — \= second remainder. 
Z^~% — third remainder. 
3X— 1 = 25. Ans. 103. 

( y/a + \^F ) Wa — \^~b ) 

18. Simplify 73— — -^ ^3 

{\^a + \^b ) {Va — Vb ) 
In both numerator and denominator we have the pro- 
duct of the sum and difference of two quantities. Ans. 
Va + Vb. 



TEST PROBLEMS. 



463 



19. A tree 80 feet high is broken during a storm; the 
upper part clinging to the stump strikes the ground ^o feet 
from the foot of the tree. Hoio long is each part? 

Let X — upper part and 80 — x = lower part. 
Then x'^— 42'- = (80 — x^. Ans, Upper part 50 feet. Lower 
30 feet. 

20. A picture 12 feet by 18 feet is set in a frame of uniform 
width containing the same area as the picture. What is the 
width of frame? 

Let ^ = width of frame. 

Then 2^x + ^6x + ^x^= 216, 

Transpose, unite and complete the square. 

A?is. 3 inches. 

21. To find the area of a scalene triangle whose sides are 
a, b atid c. 

From the vertical angle let fall a perpendicular to 
the base b. 

Let A = the segment adjacent to the side c; 

b — x = the segment adjacent to the side a; 

Then will c"^ — x^ = perpendicular. 

Also d^ — {b — x)^ = perpendicular. 

Then will c~ — x'^ = d^ — (b — x)-- 

After finding the perpendicular multiply the base /', by 
i the perpendicular. 

22. Jdo7iJ are the above problems solved arithmetically? 

Add the three sides and divide this sum by 2. Sub- 
tract each side separately from the half sum. Multiply 
the several remainders and the half sum together and 
determine the square root of the result. 

23. Ho7v many strokes do the clocks of Venice, which go on 
to 24 o'clock, strike in a day? 

n 24 

J = — {a ^- b). s ^ — X (i -|- 24). Ans. 300. 



464 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

24. A company of travelers at a hotel incurred a bill of 
$12. /ft/iere had been tivo more in the company each would 
have been charged jo cents less. How many were there in the 
company? 

Let X — number in the company. 

1200 1200 

Then • ^o = — ; — . 

.V -^ xi-2 

Divide both members by 30. Clear of fractions 
and complete the square. Ans. 8. 

25. 7Vie sum of three fiumbers in arithmetical progression 
is 2y, and the product of the extremes is 77. What are the 
fiutnbers? 

The formulas will not apply in this problem so let 
_>'= common difference. 

Then x —y = first ; x = second, and x -\- y = third. 
3.v=2 7, A' = 9, ;t:2— y ==77. Ans. 7,9,11. 

26. A tract of land in the form of a square is surrounded 
by a board fence, four boards high, each board i6\ feet long ; 
the number of acres in the tract equals the number of boards in 
the fence. How many acres of land are there? 

Let .V = side of the square in rods. 

x^ 
Then— r— = number of acres. 
160 

i6x = number of boards, each board being 16J feet 

x'' 
or I rod long. Then — r- = i6a:. 
^ 160 

After finding .v, square it and divide by 260. 

Ans. 40960. 



27. A boy being asked how many fish he had, replied: 
T I fish are 1 fish more than | of the number. How many 

had he? 

Let X — the number. 

Then |^ + 7 = n. Ans. 10. 



21 



TEST PROBLEMS. 465 

28. A man purchased a house ivith jo doors, giving $1 /or 
the first door, $2 for the second, $4 for the third, and so on. 
What did the house cost him ? 

1 = ar"-', 1= Kr2^ 

rl — a 

Substitute / in J' — . Ans. $1,02^. 

r— I If o 

29. A man holds an endowment policy payable in jo years, 
and \ of the time past equals \ of the time to come. How 
much time has passed I 

Let X = time passed; 30 — x = time to come. 

X ^o — ^ 

— =— . Ajis. 10 years. 

2 4 

30. One kind of wine is 40 cents a quart, and another 24 
cents. Hozv much of each fnust be taken to make a quart 
worth 28 cents? 

Let .a: = the amount required at 40 cents 
and 7 = the amount required at 24 cents. 
Then x + y= i and 40^::+ 24y= 28. 

Ans. \ at 40 cents, and 3. at 24 cents. 

31. A farmer has two flocks of sheep, each containing the 
same number. From one he sells jg and frotn the other gj, 
a7id thefi fnds Just twice as 7}ia?iy ifi one flock as in the other. 
Hotv many did each flock originally contain ? 

Let .r = original number in each flock. 
Then .r — 39 = 2(a: — 93). Ans. 147. 

32. A man being asked his age, replied: If to my age you 
add its half, and third, and then deduct JO, the result is roo. 

What was his age'l 

Let X =■ his age. 

Then x -\- • — i 10= 100. Ans. 60 years old. 

2 3 



466 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTIOM BOOK. 

33. A viercha7it has sugar at g cents and ij cents a pound, 
and he wishes to make a fnixture of 100 pouiids that shall be 
worth J 2 cents a pound. H070 many pomids of each quality 
must be taken? 

Let x= number of pounds at 9 cents, 
and _j'= number of pounds at 13 cents. 
Then x -\- y= 100, and g.r +137= 1,200. 

Ans. 25 lbs. at 9 c, and 75 lbs. at 13 c. 

34. A mail 7i.<as hired for a year for %ioo and a suit of 
clothes; but at the end of eight vionths he left, and received 
his clothes and $60 in mofiey. What was the value of the 
suit of clothes ? 

Let X = value of clothes. 

100 + A- 60 + A- 

1 hen — = — - — . Ans. $20. 

12 8 *^ 

35. Determine the jth root of ^ii_^ 2^84.1 by means of 
logarith?ns, kfioicifig that the logarithm of jir_5 2284.1-=. 
7-493497' 

7.493497 "^ 5 =^ 1.498699, and by reference to the table 
of logarithms 1.498699 is the logarithm of 31.52. 

Ans. 31.52. 

36. A ma?i sold a horse for $420, thereby gai?iing 2^ per 
cent. What was the cost of the horse? 

Let X = cost of horse. 

2KX 

Then x -\ — ^— = 420. Ans. ^336. 

37. 7'wo men commenced trade together. The first put in 
$40 more tha?i the second; a?id the stock of the first was to the 
stock of the second as ^ to 4. What to as the stock of each? 

Let ;c = what the first put in. 

Then rf — 40 = what second put in. 

Then :v: :r — 40 : : 5 : 4. Ans. $200, and $160. 



TEST PROBLEMS. 467 

38. A man traveled j6 miles in a eertain nianher of hours ; 
if he had traveled l mile more per hour lie 7vould have 
required j hours less to perform his Jourtiey, How many 
miles did he t?-avel per hour? 

Let .T = number of miles traveled per hour. 

Then x = -^ — . Ans. x miles. 

X ^ x+ 1 -^ 

39. A person after spending $100 more than \ of his 
income, had remai?iitig $jj more than ^ of it. What ivas his 
income! 

Let X = his income. 

X X 

Then x = 100 + - + 35 + -. Ans. 450. 
5 ^ 

40. A hoy engaged to carry 100 glass vessels to a certain 
place, and to receive j cents for every one he delivered, and to 
forfeit g cents for ei^ery one he broke. On settlement he 

received 240 cents. Hoio many did he break? 

Let X = number he broke, and 
100 — X = number he delivered. 
Then 3 jc — 9(100 — -r) = 240. Ans. 5. 

41. The shadoia of a tree measures 42 feet; a staff 40 
inches long casts a shadow 18 inches at the same time. What 
is the height of the tree? 

Let X = height of the tree. 

Then 42 : — •.-.x:—. Ans. 98 i feet. 
^12 12 ^ ^ 

42. Divide $j6o in the proportion of 2, ^ and 4. 

Let 2X = first ; 2>^ = second and ^x = third. 
Then 9;*; =360. Ans. ^80, ^20, $160. 



468 COMMOM SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

43. What is the length of the sides of a rectangular field 
whose length is three times its breadth and contains an area 
of J 0,8 00 square rods. 

Let ;r= length, and 3X the breadth. 

Then 3^:^ = 10,800. Ans. Length 180, breadth 60. 

44. If 6 oranges and 7 lemons cost jj cents and 12 
oranges and 10 lemons cost j^ cents, ivhat is the price of one 
of each 1 

Let a:= price of one orange, and j'= price of a lemon. 
Then dx + 7^' = 33 and 1 2 .v -f lov =: 54. 

Ans. Oranges 2 cents; lemons 3 cents. 

45. Divide the nu7nber 20 into two such parts that the 
product of their squares shall equal g2i6. 

Let X = the greater and y = the less. 

Then x -{- y= 20 and x'-}^ = 9216. 

Determine the square root of both members of the 
second equation and compare with the first. Ans. 12 
and 8. 

PROBLEMS OF PURSUIT. 

46. A sets out from a certain place and travels at the 7-ate 
of / miles in ^ hours; and 8 hours afterwards B sets out 
from the same place, in pursuit, at the rate of ^ miles in j 
hours. Hoiv long before B laill overtake A? 

Let a: = number of hours before B will overtake A. 

ex Tx i;6 

Then — = — . Ans. 42 hours. 

3 5 5 

47. The hour and mifiute hands of a clock are together at 
12 0^ clock. Whefi are they next together? 

Let x= distance traveled by hour hand. 

I 2a:= distance traveled by minute hand. 

There being 12 spaces for the minute hand to gain 
on the hour hand, i2X~ x=\2. Ans, i hour, 5 min., 
2 7y\ sec. 



TEST PROBLEMS. 



469 



48. At zvhat time betjveen 2 and j o'clock laill the hour 
and f?tif lute hands of a clock he together] 

Let x^= distance traveled by hour hand. 

\2 x= distance traveled by minute hand. 
The minute hand must gain two revolutions on the 
hour hand. 

Then \2x — x=- 24. Ans. 2 hours, 10 min., 54/Y sec. 

49. What time between 2 and j 0^ clock 7i.iill the hour and 
minute hands be at right angles to each otherl 

Let X = distance traveled by hour hand. 
i2.r = distance traveled by minute hand. 

After the hands are together between 2 and 3 o'clock, 
the minute hand must gain three more spaces on the hour 
hand. 

Then \2X — x-=2'j. Ans. 2 hours, 27 min., 16/^ sec, 

50. At what time betiveen 5 and 6 o'clock ze.nl I the two 
hands of a clock be in the same straight line? 

Let X = distance traveled by hour hand. 

1 2 j; = distance traveled by minute hand. 
Here five revolutions and six spaces must be gained. 
Then i 2a: = x()6. Ans. 6 o'clock. 



QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS 

ON 

PARLIAMENTARY RULES 



1 . W/iaf are Parliamentajy Rules ? ■ 

A code of regulations under which a body of persons 
may be assembled for deliberation, and governed while 
conducting this work. 

2. From what source did we derive these recognized rules? 
From the British Parliament. 

3. Why were they taken from the rules governing the 
British Parliametitl 

They have been adopted in this country because of the 
early relationship between England and the United States. 
These rules have remained unchanged in the English Par- 
liament for several hundred years, and have become a 
recognized source of authority among all English-speaking 
people. 

4. Are these rules bindiftg upon all people in their 
assemblies? 

Not binding in the sense of rendering an assemblage 
liable to punishment for not following them; but universal 
custom, in course of time, comes to have substantially the 
force of law, and the general parliamentary rules are sup- 
posed to be followed as a matter of course except when 
legislative bodies specifically resolve otherwise, 

47 » 



472 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

5. Arc ihe ru/es often cha7iged or ignored? 

Not in popular assemblies. In the legislative bodies of 
our Federal and State governments different systems of 
particular rules have been adopted, yet these are founded 
on and embrace all the essential rules of the common par- 
liamentary law. Each legislature, therefore, provides itself 
with a legislative manual, which becomes the standard 
authority for the government of that body. 

6. IV/ien such a legislative tnanual is adopted by any 
particular legislature^ does it become authority for the next 
legislature following it ? 

It does not. Each legislature is free to adopt the rules 
of its predecessor or to create new ones. 

7. Would it be possible to establish a system of rules which 
would unify those of Congress and other legislative assemblies? 

It would not. Each body has certain local interests to 
consider or certain policies to promote, which require that 
it should make its own rules for self-government. 

8. Who is ircognized as the most eminent single authority 
on parliame7itary practice ? 

Luther S. Gushing, author of Cushing's Manual; but his 
original work has been modified and changed by several 
annotators and editors. 

9. How is a popular assembly made into an organized 
body? 

Organization is effected by any person requesting the 
meeting to come to order, and suggesting that some one be 
nominated for presiding officer. Such nomination being 
made, he puts the question for a vote of the assembly. 
Should this nominee be rejected, other nominations are 
made, until a choice is effected, whereupon the officer 
elected takes the chair, and proceeds in the same manner 
to complete the organization of the assembly by helping it 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 473 

to choose a secretary and such other officers as may be 
deemed necessary. 

10. Does this election of officers constitute the permanent 
organization of the assembly I 

Not necessarily, although in all meetings where people 
are called together for a special purpose, no further organi- 
zation is customary, but should permanency be desired, 
these first officers are regarded as only temporary, to 
govern until a permanent organization is effected and 
other officers elected to take their places. 

11. Hoio is the nc7v organization usually takeii up and 
acted upon 1 

By selecting a committee on permanent organization, 
who report such articles for government as may have been 
suggested by the assembly or by individuals thereof, or 
derived from their own judgment. Such report is adopted 
or rejected, as the assembly may deem proper. 

12. Under such circumstances, is it usual to proceed in the 
election of permanent officers in the satne manner as in the 
election of tefnporary ones? 

It is not. A committee is usually selected, who, after 
consultation, recommend the election of certain individuals 
as qualified to fill permanently the different offices required. 

1 3. By what name is the presiding officer recognized 1 

In organized societies or legislative bodies as "presi 
dent" or "speaker"; in political conventions, school meet- 
ings, or any ordinary popular assembly, as "chairman": 
in a secret society, by whatever name may be the pleasure 
of that society. 

14. What name is applied to the recording officer? 
"Secretary" or "clerk." 



474 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

15. Who are e?ititled to participate in the proceedijigs of a 
meeting? 

When the assembly is in response to a call for the whole 
people, all are entitled to vote; in political conventions or 
caucuses, those who are recognized as electors or delegates 
of the party concerned ; in school meetings, electors of the 
school district; in societies or associations, members in 
good standing. 

1 6. How are these electors^ delegates or members recognized! 

Usually a committee is appointed to examine the creden- 
tials presented by the persons who claim a right to take 
part. 

17. What are credentials! 

Certificates of qualification. In Congress, certificates of 
membership are given by the executive authority of the 
State which each member assumes to represent; in the 
State legislatures, from county or parish officers; in political 
conventions, from state or local party authorities, according 
to circumstances. 

18. When are the credentials or certificates of membership 
examified and acted npoii 1 

The proper time for this investigation is after the tem- 
porary and before the permanent organization. 

19. When rival claims are presetited^ what is the pro- 
cedure ? 

The committee reports the claims, and all persons in 
interest are entitled to a hearing, the decision being left 
with those whose rights are not in controversy. 

20. £>o the contesting me tubers have the privileges of other 
members during the discussion of rights? 

They do not. After being heard, it is their duty to 
withdraw ; or if, by the courtesy of the assembly, they are 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



475 



permitted to remain, they have no further right to discuss 
or vote. 

21. Is it necessary that the president and clerk shall be 
members of the assembly? 

As these officers have merely to preside over and record 
the proceedings of an assembly, it is not necessary that 
they shall, in all cases, be members of the assembly. In 
legislative bodies, the clerk is seldom or never a member; 
and in the United States Senate and most State senates, 
the president is not a member. 

2 2. In inost societies, what are the officers? 

President, vice-president, secretary and treasurer. To 
these may be added one or more vice-presidents, one or 
more secretaries, and such other officers or committees as 
the association desires. 

23. When an assembly has rightfully appropriated a room 
or place for its sessions, hoza can it protect itself from disor- 
derly or improper cofidtict of any member or any person not 
entitled to be present? 

By employing sufficient force to remove such person or 
persons from the meeting. 

24. What authority has an assembly to employ such force? 

This protection is guaranteed by the Constitution of the 
United States, and all strictly necessary resorts to force 
are recognized as just. 

25. When a person becomes disorderly, is he subject to 
prosecution ? 

Yes, according to the extent of his offense. 

26. Ifoiu is the Judgment, opinion, sense or will of a 
deliberative assembly expressed? 

According to the nature of the subject, by resolu- 
tion order or vote. When it commands, it is an order; 



476 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

opinions are expressed by resolution ; questions are decided 
by vote. 

27. What object was in view 7vhen the various ways of 
disposing 0/ a proposition or niotiofi 7vere adoptedl 

As all questions are liable to be imperfect in form, 
objectionable in part, and not presented at the desired 
time, it was necessary that various ways should be invented 
by which the question could be retained, perfected, pre- 
sented when desired, or postponed from time to time, at 
the will of the assembly. 

28. What is a quorum? 

A sufficient number of members for the transaction of 
business. 

29. What number constitutes a quorum .? 

Usually, in councils, legislative bodies or associations, a 
rule is adopted determining this point; but in the absence 
of any other rule, a majority of all members is necessary to 
constitute a quorum. 

30. What is the duty 0/ the presiding officer in regard to a 
quoru7n ? 

He should not take the chair until he is satisfied that a 
quorum is present; if notice be taken, at any time in the 
course of the proceedings, that a quorum is not present, it 
becomes the duty of the presiding officer to ascertain by 
count the number present ; should a quorum be lacking, 
the assembly must cease to transact business. 

31. Why is it necessary that a certain number should con- 
stitute a quorum! 

In order to secure fairness of proceeding, and to prevent 
hasty action, or action agreed to by so small a number of 
the members as not to command proper respect. 



PARLrAMENTARY RULES. 



477 



32. What names are given to the codes of general rules, 
apart from mere procedure, by which organized assemblies are 
goi'cnied? 

Constitution and by-laws. 

33. JIo7c< are changes made in the rules of any organ- 
ization 1 

By some method prescribed in the Constitution or by- 
laws; when there is no prescribed rule, it is proper for the 
assembly to act at any time upon an amendment the same 
as on any other question; for the suspension of a rule, 
however, there must -be unanimous consent. 

34. When adopted rules are disregarded or infritiged upon, 
whose duty is it to take notice thereof 1 

Any member has the right to report such offense and 
require that the presiding officer enforce the rule without 
debate or delay. 

35. Suppose it is not the 7vish of the assembly that a par- 
ticular rule be enforced] 

It matters not; so long as one member insists upon its 
execution, it must be done. It is then too late to alter, 
repeal or suspend the rule. 

36. How may atiy futu}-e e?iforcenient of distastef til rules 
be avoided! 

By amending them at the proper time. 

37. If there is no specific provision for ametidment or 
repeal of rules, wheti can changes be made? 

At any time when it is the will of the assembly to amend 
or repeal. 

38. May a rule be dispensed with or suspended ivhere there 
is no express provision on this subject 1 

It may not, except by general consent. 



478 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

39. What is meant by the term '■'■general consent,^^ as used 
in pari iafnentary practice 1 

The unanimous opinion of the assembly. 

40. Jn taking a vote, does it always require a majority to 
pass the question ? 

In all the common transactions of the people, a majority 
rules; but in legislative bodies, on some particular points 
such as the entering of the yeas and nays upon the record, 
one-fourth or one-fifth of the members present may carry 
the question, while other subjects may require a two-thirds 
vote, as in impeachment trials or the repassing of acts 
which have been vetoed. 

41. Whe/i an assetnbly is not likely to finish its business at 
one sitting, johen would be the most appropriate time to arrange 
for reassembling? 

It would be more satisfactory in all cases to decide this 
matter before the time to close has arrived. The calm 
judgment of the assembly would be better expressed then, 
as impatience is often manifested when the motion to 
adjourn is made. 

42. Ifi the election of officers, why is it necessary that 
absolute majorities should be required I 

As all officers of a deliberative assembly are removable 
at the pleasure of the assembly, it is not reasonable to* 
suppose that persons elected by a minority could retain 
their offices when opposed by a majority. It is essential 
in the transaction of business that they should possess the 
confidence of the members, which they cannot be said to 
do unless they have the suffrages of at least a majority. 

43. What are the duties of a presiding officer I 

To open the assembly at the prescribed hour; to announce 
in its proper order the business to be transacted; to receive 
and submit all proper motions and propositions offered by 



PARL /A ME NT A RY RUL ES. 



479 



the members; to put to vote all regular questions presented 
for action, and to announce the results; to enforce order 
and decorum, and to restrain the members, when engaged 
in debate, from the violation of the rules of courtesy; to 
receive all communications, and announce them to the 
assembly; to sign his name to all acts, orders and proceed- 
ings of the assembly, when necessary; to decide all points 
of order or practice when called upon to do so; to name 
the members who are to serve on committees when no other 
provision has been made for their appointment; and, in 
general, to obey the commands of the assembly, declare its 
will, and stand as its representative. 

44. In the absence of the president atid vice-president, ivhose 
duty is it to preside? 

It then becomes the duty of the secretary to open the 
meeting and conduct the proceedings until a president or 
chairman is chosen. 

45. Does the presiding officer thus chosen have the same 
power conferred upon him as the regular presidents 

He does; the only difference being that he does not hold 
power beyond this particular session. 

46. What is an officer pro tempore? 

An officer appointed to fill, for the time being, the place 
of an absent one. 

47. /// addressi?ig an assembly, does the presidifig officer 
rise / 

To state a motion, or put a question, he should rise, but 
he may read sitting. 

48. What is the duty of the recording officer? 

To take note of and record all the business transactions 
of the assembly; but he is not required to take minutes of 
words used in debate, or of things proposed or moved 
without coming to a vote. It is also his duty to read al] 



480 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

papers or communications; to call the roll of the assembly; 
to notify committees of their appointments and the business 
referred to them; to sign, if necessary, with the president, 
all acts or orders of the assembly; and to hold and protect 
all papers and documents, letting none be taken from the 
table without permission of the assembly. 

49. What posiiiofi should the secretary or clerk assume 
while readiftg, or while calling the assembly? 

He should stand, unless disabilities prevent. 

50. What is iJicant by calling the assembly! 

Calling, by name, each member, whose duty is to respond 
by expressing his choice for or against the question before 
the assembly. This mode of obtaining the opinion of an 
assembly is often adopted in conventions where nominations 
for offices are made. It is quicker than a ballot. 

51. What are the rights and duties of members of a?iy 
assembly 1 

Every member is entitled to the same rights in the busi- 
ness transactions of the assembly; he is entitled to the 
respect of all other members while debating or recommend- 
ing any proposition. It is the duty of every member to 
act the part of a gentleman in manners and language, and 
to avoid, as far as possible, any unnecessary noise and 
confusion. 

52. /// cases of irregular or disorderly conduct, what should 
be done? 

It is the privilege of every member to report such conduct, 
and it is the especial duty of the presiding officer to take 
notice of and call the attention of the assembly to it, naming 
the guilty person. The latter is entitled to a hearing, 
if he wishes to explain his conduct. It is then his duty to 
withdraw from the assembly, unless permission be granted 
him to remain, but not to take further action, as no man is 
entitled to sit as his own judge. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 481 

53. What punishment can be ififlicted upon a member for 
willfully violating the rules of the assembly l 

Only such as relates to his rights in the assembly. He 
may be debarred from taking any action for a stated time; 
or he may be expelled, or subjected to any prohibition which 
the assembly desires. 

54. What misdetneanors are called high breaches of 
decorum ? 

Assault by one member upon another, threats, challenges, 
affrays, etc. 

55. Whe?i a member desires to speak, whether in debate or 
for the i?itroduction of busifiess, hoav shall he proceed 1 

He must rise in his place and address the presiding officer 
by his title; the presiding officer then calls the member by 
his name, which carries permission to proceed with his 
business. 

56. When t7vo or more persons rise at the same time, or 
nearly so, to address the assembly, how shall the presiding 
officer decide 7vho shall speak frstl 

He should give the floor to the member whose voice he 
first heard. 

57. Should this decision be called in question, what must 
be done? 

The presiding officer must refer his decision to a vote of 
the assembly, and be guided thereby. 

58. What are cotnmunications? 

They are of two kinds: those which convey information 
of some general character, and those which contain a 
request for some action on the part of the assembly. The 
latter class embraces orders, resolutions or votes. 

59. What are motions o> questions? 

Propositions drawn up by any member and introduced 



482 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

for action in the assembly; but a motion must in all cases 
be sanctioned or seconded by another member. 

60. How is a petitiivi prepared for presentation^ 

A petition should contain a carefully constructed state- 
ment of what is desired, and be signed by the petitioner 
himself, except when sickness prevents or he is attending 
in person. In no case, however, should the petitioner 
present his own prayer to the assembly; it should be 
presented by some other member to whom it is entrusted. 

61. What is the duty of the member presenting a petition'! 

He should first inform himself of the nature and sub- 
stance of the petition. If, in his judgment, it contains 
nothing intentionally disrespectful to the assembly, he 
should rise in his place with the petition in his hand and 
inform the assembly that he has a certain 1 etition, stating 
the substance of it. Then he, or some other member, 
should move that it be received. This motion being- 
seconded, the question is put whether the assembly will 
receive the petition or not. 

62. IVhat deviation is usually practised from this regular 
method of proceeding? 

The presiding officer usually, taking for granted that 
there are no objections to its reception, orders it sent up to 
the clerk, or secretary, and it is then read, by which means 
it is brought before the assembly to be disposed of as 
business; but should objections be made to this deviation, 
the presiding officer must require a motion of reception to 
be regularly made and seconded, or the subject must be 
dropped without further action. 

63. When petitions or other similar subjects are before the 
assembly for action, ho7v are they usually disposed of 1 

By being immediately considered or assigned to some 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 483 

future time, or ordered to lie on the table for examination 
and consideration by the members individually. 

64. When any question is ordered to lie o?i the table, when 
does it agaiti come before the asse7nbly1 

Not until the members require it. 

65. Whenever a membef' introduces a proposition of his 07vn 
for consideration by the assembly, ho7i> caft he obtain the action 
of the assembly i 

He must put it into proper form and move that it be 
adopted; if it receives the second of any member, it comes 
before the assembly for action. 

66. As motions are usually made orally, 7i.'hat indulgence 
is extended to the mover by the presiding officerl 

It does not require that the motion be presented in 
writing. If otherwise presented, he is justified in refusing 
to receive it, except a motion for adjournment, or that a 
matter lie on the table, or some similar routine motions, 
always made in the same form. 

67. When a ^notion is made and receives no second, does it 
command further attention from the assembly i 

It does not, and no notice should be taken of it by the 
presiding officer. To this rule exceptions occur, such as 
where the presiding officer has to enforce decorum, or where 
it is necessary to proceed with some order of the assembly. 
Sometimes a special rule is passed requiring more than one 
second on particular subjects. 

68. When is a motioti in the possession of the assembly 1 
After it has been made and seconded, and stated by the 

presiding officer. 

69. After a motion has been stated by the presiding 
officer, can the mover withdraw it from the assembly? 

He cannot, except by special leave of the assembly, for 
it no longer belongs to him. 



484 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

70. IV/ieti a 77iotion has been made and seconded^ hut not 
yet stated by the p?-esidi?ig officer^ can it be withdrawal or 
modified t 

The mover may withdraw or modify it, either of his own 
accord, or on the suggestion of some other member, or of 
the presiding officer, and without any motion or vote for 
the purpose. 

7 1 . What is the duty of the presidifig officer in regard to 
stating a motion wheji called upon to do so by a?iy member? 

Whenever a member desires a motion stated for his infor- 
mation, it becomes the duty of the presiding officer to 
observe the request. 

72. While one motion is before the assembly, can another 
motion be made and acted upon ? 

Not unless it is one which by its nature has priority of 
the question under consideration. 

73. Are members allowed to make remarks 7i'hen there is 
no question before the house 1 

When the remarks relate to some business not yet moved 
as a question, yes; but the presiding officer should be 
careful to check all observations which may tend to excite 
debate, it being a general rule that no debate can be allowed 
to take place on any question not actually pending. 

74. When a proposition is ?nade, and the assembly is not 
willing to give it attention at that time, ho2v is it disposed oft 

For this purpose resort is had to the previous question, 
indefinite postponement, postponement to some future time, 
or laying on the table; or, if the motion is not in a satis- 
factory form, reference to a committee. 

75. While a tnotion is under debate, what motion may be 
entertained? 

To adjourn; to lay on the table; for the previous ques- 
tion; to postpone to a day certain; to commit; to amend; 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



485 



and to postpone indefinitely. These several motions have 
precedence in the order in which they are arranged here. 

76. By what ?iame are these questions disti?iguisheil frovi 
the principal niotioji ? 

They are called subsidiary questions. 

77. Ifo7v would you define subsidiary questions.-' 

As questions which relate to the principal motion, and 
are used to enable the assembly to dispose of it in the most 
appropriate manner. These motions are sometimes used 
also to destroy the principal question, and even to dispose 
of one another. 

78. How are subsidiary questions classifiedl 

Under four heads. 

First, if the question is considered useless or inexpedient, 
and the assembly desires to suppress it either for a time or 
altogether, the previous question and indefinite postpone- 
ment are used. 

Second, when more information is wanted, or time for 
examination and reflection, or the assembly has other mat- 
ters more deserving of its present attention, motions to 
postpone to some future day or time, and to lay on the 
table, are used. 

Third, when the form is defective, or more careful, 
deliberate consideration should be given the subject than 
can be conveniently by the assembly, a motion to refer to 
a committee is most proper. 

Fourth, when alterations are desired, the motion to 
amend is used. 

79. What is the previous question? 

A motion intended to suppress debate and bring the 
question to a vote, or to remove it from before the assembly. 
Its form is: "Shall the main question now be put?" If the 
previous question is lost, the question under debate is 



486 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

considered suppressed for the day; but if it is carried, then 
the question is put immediately, without further debate. 

80, What is the result 0/ an indefinite postponement ? 

To suppress a motion entirely. An indefinite postpone- 
ment is equivalent to a dissolution. 

■ 81. When should motions to postpotie be madel 

When the members individually want more information 
than they possess, or where there is something else which 
they desire to dispose of first. 

82. If (I subject is postponed, when fnay it be taken up 
again ? 

Whenever it may suit the convenience of the assembly. 

83. What subsidiary tnotion is usually made when it is the 
desire of the assembly to postpone a question until the subject 
under consideration may suit their conveniefice better than 
when presented? 

To lay the question on the table. This question is not 
debatable. 

84. When a subject has been laid on the table, hoiv may it 
be recalled? 

By a motion and vote, at any time when the assembly 
pleases; although, when any matter has been thus disposed 
of, it is generally understood that it will not again become 
a subject on the same day, unless such intention is so 
specified when the motion to table is made. 

85. In 7vhat fortn should a motion be made ivhen it is 
desired to proceed with a niatter lahich has been ordered to lie 
on the table? 

"I move that the assembly do now proceed to consider 
[here naming the matter or subject]." 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 487 

86. Suppose a question 7vhen ordered to lie on the table is 
never recalled, 7i>hat becomes of it? 

It remains as dead. Hence the motion to table is often 
used to suppress a question under debate. 

87. What is a motion to commit? 

A motion to refer to a committee, or, if the subject has 
been in the hands of a committee, a motion that it be 
"referred back," or "recommitted." 

88. What authority has the committee thus appointed! 

It must follow the instructions of the assembly. If no 
particular instructions are given, then the committee must 
re-frame the matter, but it cannot change the subject. 

89. Can more than one comtnittee be appointed to perfect 
any proposition ? 

Different parts may be committed to different com- 
mittees. 

90. What are ^notions to afnend? 

To unite with the subject matter of a proposition some 
points or propositions not therein contained. 

91. What is the division of a question ? 

When a proposition is composed of two or more parts, 
which are so far independent of each other as to admit of 
a division into several questions, and it is supposed that 
the assembly will approve of some of these parts but not 
all of them, a division may be made on a separate motion 
for that purpose. 

92. When a motion is thus divided, 7vhat becomes of it? 

It becomes a series of questions, to be considered and 
acted upon each by itself as an independent matter, in the 
order in which the mover has divided the proposition. 

93. Are these questions open to amendment? 
They are, the same as any other propositions. 



488 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

94. What ?itust be the conditioti of a proposition to admit 
of a division t 

Its points must be so distinct and self-sufificient that if 
one or more of tiiem be taken away the others will not be 
affected by the division. 

95. In legislative bodies, what is the mode of presetiting 
afid acti>ig upon propositions knoivn as filling blanks? 

They are presented in regular form, but blank in regard 
to time, number, or amount, which the mover desires to 
have filled by the assembly; they include such matters as 
the time of postponement, the number of which a com- 
mittee shall consist, the amount of fine to be imposed, etc. 

96. In fillifig blanks ifi a ^notion, does it require separate 
action for each blank filed, and are such motions amend- 
ments! 

The blanks are to be filled by regular motions, which are 
not considered as amendments but as original motions, to 
be made and decided before the principal question. 

97 When several propositions are made for filling blanks 
which relate to time or number, which proposition must be 
taken up first I 

The greatest or farthest, and the assembly proceeds so 
on down to the least or nearest. 

98. Whefi the propositions relate to limitation — as the 
a?nount of tax to be raised, the rate of interest, on what day 
the session of a legislature shall be closed by adjournment, or 
the like, which proposition must be taken up first? 

The least or nearest, and the assembly proceeds so on 
up to the greatest or most remote. 

99. When are the terms addition, separation and trans- 
position used i?i legislative assemblies? 

They are used whenever a matter presented for action 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



489 



contains more than one proposition, which might be better 
embraced in one; or when a proposition should be sepa- 
rated into parts; or when a paragraph or section requires 
to be transposed. But these modes of disposing of a propo- 
sition ought to be referred to a committee. 

100. After 1X71 amendment has beeii stated l>y the presiding 
officer, can the mover change iti 

He cannot; the same rule controls the amendment as 
the original question. 

loi. IVhefi an amendment is proposed, and the mover of 
the original questioti signifes his consent to it, what digression 
is often practised! 

The amendment is incorporated with the original mo- 
tion, and action taken on the whole at once. 

102. After a question or an amendment has been seconded, 
can the fnover 7vithdraw it? 

Only by general consent. Such motions, not coming to 
a vote, need not to be recorded. 

103. In how many ivays may the form of a question be 
affected by amcndnientst 

In any one of three ways: by inserting or adding certain 
words; by striking out certain words; or by striking out 
certain words and inserting or adding others. 

104. As all fortns of amendment are subject to certain 
general rules, ho7V are these rules classified! 

As First, Second, Third, Fourth, Fifth. 

105. What are these! 

Rule First. — ^When a proposition consists of several 
sections, paragraphs or resolutions, the natural order of 
considering and amending it is to take up the paragraphs 
in the order in which they occur; and after a latter part has 



490 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

been amended, it is not in order to alter or amend any for- 
mer part. 

Rule Second. — There can be no amendment of an 
amendment to an amendment. Whenever a proposed 
amendment to an amendment does not meet the require- 
ments of the assembly, notice should be given by the one 
who desires to amend, that, if rejected, he shall move it 
again in the form in which he desires to have it adopted. 

Rule Third. — Whenever a proposed amendment has 
been adopted or rejected by the assembly, the subject in 
question cannot afterward be altered or amended. In this 
rule, let it be observed that whenever an amendment has 
been voted upon by the assembly, it cannot again be 
amended; but before the proposed amendment has been 
brought to a vote, it is susceptible to change under Rule 
Second. 

Rule Fourth. — Whatever amendment is disagreed to 
by the assembly cannot again become a question. 

Rule Fifth. ^ — When a proposed amendment is an in- 
fringement on one already adopted, this is fit ground for its 
rejection by the assembly, but not for its suppression by 
the presiding officer as out of order. 

1 06. In Rule Fifth, if the proposition is ft for refection 
by the assembly, why may it not be suppressed by the presiding 
officer 1 

The object is to guard against the possibility of the pre- 
siding officer's suppressing an important modification, 
which might embarrass instead of subserving the will of 
the assembly. 

107. When an amendment is made by striking out a 
particular paragraph or certain words, and the amendment is 
rejected, can it again be tnoved to strike out the same ivords or 
a part of them ? 

The same words, or a part of them, if used with other 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



49 r 



words and forming a different proposition, can be struck 
out the same as if no rejection had been made. The same 
rule is applicable to words which have been struck out and 
restored in connection with other words, providing the 
second proposition is substantially different from the first. 

1 08. When an amendmefii to an amendment has been 
moved^ how shall the presiding officer proceed in stating the 
question 1 

By putting the amendment to the amendment first; then 
the amendment ; and, last, the original question as amended. 

109. In the third form 0/ amending, by striking out and 
inserting, what is the mode of proceeding! 

As the form is a combination of the other two, it may 
be divided into these two forms by a vote of the assembly. 
If the motion is divided, the question first to be decided is 
on striking out; if this is carried, the question of inserting 
follows. Should the question for striking out be lost, then 
of course there can be no question for inserting. When 
the motion to strike out and insert is made as one question, 
and is lost, the same motion cannot be made again, but it 
may be moved to strike out the same words and insert 
nothing; to insert other words; to insert the same words 
with others; to insert a part of the same words with others; 
to strike out the same words with others, and insert the 
same; to strike out a part of the same words with others 
and insert the same; to strike out other words, and insert 
the same; and to insert the same words without striking 
out anything: provided, in all cases, that these new propo- 
sitions are really different from the original motion. 

1 1 o. When a motion to strike out and insert is carried^ 
what changes can be made? 

As the words struck out, or a part of them, cannot be 
inserted, or the words inserted, or a part of them, cannot 
be struck out, it becomes necessary, if changes are desired. 



492 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

either to insert the words struck out, or a part of then-;, 
with other words; or to strike out the words inserted, or 
a part of them, with other words. 

111. What is the manner of stating a question uiJiich is 
required to be amended by striking out, or inserting, or striking 
out and inserting other words ? 

The passage to be amended should first be read; tlien 
the words proposed to be struck out, or inserted, or struck 
out and inserted; and lastly, the whole passage as it will 
stand if the amendment is adopted. 

112. Can an afne7idtnent be fnade 7vhich will destroy the 
entire original motion? 

It can. Although the presumptive object of an amend- 
ment is for improvement, not destruction. If the assembly 
so wills, a bill may be amended by striking out all after 
the enacting clause and inserting a new bill wholly differ- 
ent in effect. 

113. Jn deliberative assemblies, 7vhat motion can be made 
to take the place of a regular question 1 

Any one of a class known as privileged questions. 
These are of three kinds: first, motions to adjourn; sec- 
ond, those which relate to the rights and privileges of the 
assembly or of its members; and third, motions for the 
order of the day. 

114. Is a motion for adjounwicnt ahuays in orderl 

Commonly. But there are exceptions to this rule. 
When the assembly is voting by ayes and noes, or a 
member is speaking, it is not in order. 

I I 5. To entitle this motion to precedence over a/iy before 
the assembly, how must it be given t 

Simply as a motion to adjourn, without the addition of 
any particular day or time. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



493 



1 1 6. Can a motiofi to adjourn be amended! 

When it is the object of the motion to supersede a 
question already proposed, it does not admit of amendment; 
but if made when there is no other business before the 
assembly, it may be amended like other questions. 

117. When an assembly is adjourned JuitJiout any par- 
ticular day or ti?ne, 7a/ie?t does it tneet again? 

At the next regular day, as provided by a rule or by its 
own by-laws. But the adjournment, from time to time, of a 
meeting not organized for the transaction of business, is 
equivalent to a dissolution, 

118. IV/ien a question is interrupted by adjourntnent, and 
before any 7'ote /las been taken upon it, does it stand be/ore the 
assembly at the next day of meetingt 

Ordinarily it must be brought forward again in the usual 
way; but if the question has been stated by the presiding 
officer, it stands before the assembly. 

119. To what are o^&s\\ox\% of privilege assumed to relate? 
To the rights and privileges of the assembly, or of its 

individual members, such as a disturbance of the assembly 
by members or strangers, or a quarrel between members. 
The settlement of such rights or privileges supersedes the 
question pending, and must be first disposed of. When 
settled, the question interrupted is to be resumed at the 
point where it was suspended. 

120. /f7;a/ rtr^ ///^ orders of the day .'' 

When one or more subjects have been assigned for a 
particular day by an order of the assembly, they become 
the order of the day. 

121. When must the demajid for the orders of the day be 
entertained? 

Whenever a proposition, except a motion to adjourn, or a 
question of privilege, is presented for the action of the 



494 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

assembly, and does not relate to the orders of the day. In 
that case a motion to proceed with the business ordered 
will supersede the question before the assembly. 

12 2. When the demand for orders of the day is met affirm- 
atively, how does the assembly proceedi 

The orders must then be read and gone through with in 
the order in which they stand. Should an order be assigned 
to a particular hour, a motion to proceed to it is not a 
privileged motion until that hour arrives; but if no hour is 
fixed, the orders are for the entire day and every part of it. 

123. What becomes of the original motion when interrupted 
by the orders of the day i 

It is removed from the assembly the same as an inter- 
ruption by an adjournment. See No. 118. 

124. If the question is decided in the negative, what busi- 
ness can the assembly act upon 1 

It can continue with the business which was before it 
when interrupted, and is entitled to dispose of this before 
the orders of the day can again be moved. 

125. If the business relating to the orders of the day is not 
disposed of on the day assigned, 7vhat becomes of ill 

It is no longer an order of the assembly; and, if acted 
upon afterwards, it must come up as any other business. 

126. What are incidental questions? 

Such as arise out of other questions, and are entitled to 
be decided before the questions which give rise to them. 

127. Ho7V are incidental questions divided I 

Into five classes: first, questions of order; second, 
motions for the reading of papers, etc.; third, motions 
for leave to withdraw a motion; fourth, motions to suspend 
a rule; and fifth, motions to amend an amendment. 



PAR LI A MENTAR Y R ULES. 



495 



128. What is the duty of the presidhig officer in relation to 
questions of order? 

To enforce the rules and orders without question, debate 
or delay. 

129. Can the presiding officer be questioned in regard to his 
decision of a breach of order or departure from rule? 

He can. Questions may arise in which there is no 
breach of order or violation of rules; and these must be 
decided before a case can arise for the enforcement of the 
rules. 

130. What is an appezl from the decision of the chair? 
Whenever the decision of the presiding officer is not 

satisfactory, any member may object to it, and have the 
question decided by the assembly. Such a question is 
debatable, and to be decided like any other. 

131. When an appeal is fnade, how does the presiding 
officer state it to the assembly} 

"Shall the decision of the chair stand as the decision of 
the assembly?" 

132. When an appeal is before the assembly, is the presid- 
ing officer entitled to express his ozvn opinion ? 

He is entitled to take part in the debate then, although 
on ordinary occasions he is prohibited from doing so. 

133. What is the rule in regard to reading papers? 
Where papers are laid before an assembly for its action, 

every member has a right to have them read once at the 
table before he is compelled to vote upon them. When, 
therefore, a member calls for a reading, no question should 
be raised; but if a member desires a repetition of the 
reading, or of some other paper, book or document on the 
table, or of his own speech prepared beforehand in writing, 
and objection is made, he must obtain leave of the assembly 
by motion and vote. 



4g6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

134. Why must the consent of the assembly be obtained in 
such cases? 

Because of the delays and interruptions which would 
ensue if members were allowed to use the time of the 
assembly for such purposes. 

135. When, in the course of a debate or other proceeding, 
the reading of a paper is called for and objection is 7nade, how 
must the assembly proceed! 

A new question, to decide whether the paper shall be 
read or not, can be made, which takes the place of the 
other, as incidental to it. 

136. When a motion has been regularly made, and the 
presiding officer has put the question formally to the assembly ^ 
can it be loithdraivn 1 

Only by unanimous vote of the assembly. 

137. What is the suspension of a rule? 

When a proposition is debarred from action of the 
assembly by some special rule, such rule may be removed 
for the time by a vote for the suspension of the rule. 

138. In the suspension of a rule, does a majority vote 
decide 1 

In most legislative bodies it requires two-thirds or three- 
fourths, according to the code of rules adopted; but if no 
provision is made, the only mode of suspending or dispens- 
ing with a rule seems to be general consent. 

139. JIo2v is an amefidtnent of an amendment to be treated i 
Like any other incidental question, the sub-amendment 

superseding the amendment until decided. 

140. Which of the subsidiary questions admit of no 
amendment l 

The previous question, and the motion to lay on the 
table. 



PAR LI A MENTAR Y R UL ES. 



497 



141. Why do these questions fiot admit 0/ amendf/ient? 

Parliamentary usage has fixed the form of the previous 
question, "Shall the main question now be put?" which 
calls for immediate action ; consequently, no change can be 
made. The motion to lay on the table, usage has decided 
not susceptible to amendment, as it is already as simple as 
can be. 

142. When the previous question is moved, can a?iother he 
made to prevejit its action / 

The subsidiary motion to lay on the table will supersede it. 

143. If the previous question is decided jiegativety, is the 
main question then subject to amend?nent, cofnmitment, or 
postponemefit? 

As the adverse vote has taken the main question out of 
the possession of the assembly for the day, nothing remains 
before it to amend, commit or postpone. 

1 44. If 07a are questions 0/ postponement classed^ 
As indefinite, or to a day certain. 

145. Can such questions be amended? 

When the postponement is indefinite, it can be amended 
to a day certain; and when it is to a day certain, to some 
other day; or an amendment may be offered to this amend- 
ment, if still a different day is desired. 

146. When the aftiendtnent postponiftg to some other day is 
rejected, ho7ti can a change of day be obtained! 

The substituted day may be moved as an independent 
question. 

147. If the motion for postponet7ie7it is decided in the 
negative, what other means cati be resorted to for suppressing 
debate? 

The previous question; or motions to commit or to amend. 



498 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

148. If a motio7i for comtnitmcfit is decided i?i ths 
affirmative, can the previous question, or a motion for post- 
ponc7nent, be used thenl 

If the motion to commit is decided in the affirmative, 
the question is thereby removed from before the assembly, 
and consequently there is no ground for the previous 
question or postponement. 

149. I/o7ci may a motion to commit, or recottimit, be 
amended t 

By the substitution of one kind of a committee for 
another, or by changing the number of members of the 
committee. 

150. What motion supersedes all the other subsidiary 
questions / 

To lay on the table. 

151. 0/ the subsidiary questions, ivhich ca?i be superseded 
by others] 

The amendment question. This motion can be super- 
seded by postponement to a day certain, or by a com- 
mitment. 

152. By 7vhat irasoning are the fnotions for postpofiement 
to a day certain and committnent allon'cd to supersede a pro- 
posed ame?idment? 

In either case the proposed amendment is not sup- 
pressed, but referred to a committee for careful deliberation. 
In case there was urgent business, a long debate might 
delay, hence the right to postpone to a day certain. 

153. How shou/d business be brought be/ore an assembly? 
In its regular order. In permanent organizations of an 

assembly or society, a settled order of business is usually 
adopted, and whatever business is to be transacted comes 
under that order; but in assemblies where no definite 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



499 



system has been established, subjects are taken up when 
appropriately presented. 

154. IV/wn two or mote subjects are to he cotisidered, and 
no priority has I>eeJi gii<en to one over the other, avhich should 
conniiand the atfeution of the assembly firstl 

They are left to the discretion of the presiding officer, 
unless the assembly, by express action, decides to take up 
a particular subject. 

155. Wheu any paper ivhieh consists 0/ several distinct 
propositions is presented for the action of the assembly, inhat is 
the most appropriate manner of proceeding? 

The entire paper should first be read by the secretary or 
clerk, then by the presiding officer by paragraphs, pausing 
at the end of each distinct article for amendments if de- 
sired, and, when the whole paper has been thus scrutinized, 
the presiding officer puts the final question on agreeing to 
or adopting the whole paper as amended or unamended. 

156. IVhers a paper begins 7viih a preamble or title, is it 
proper to proceed first with this? 

No. The preamble or title is postponed until the rest 
of the paper is disposed of. 

157. When a paper has been referred to a C07nmittee and is 
reported back to the assembly, how is it taken up for consider- 
ation ? 

The amendments only are first read, in course, by the 
recording officer. The presiding officer then reads the 
first and puts it to vote, then the second, and so on until 
the whole is adopted or rejected, no amendments being 
made, except an amendment to an amendment, until all 
the amendments reported by the committee have been dis- 
posed of, when an opportunity is offered by the presiding 
officer to the assembly for amendments to the body of the 
paper; and when the whole has been thus acted upon, the 



500 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

entire paper is put to vote on a question of agreeing to or 
adopting it as the resolution of the assembly. 

158. When the resolutiotis or articles have been thus agreed 
upon, hoTO is the final question entered on the record of the 
assembly / 

As the order, resolution, etc., of the assembly, and not as 
the report of the committee accepted. 

159. When the paper referred to a committee is reported 
back in a new draft, which is often done when numerous 
changes are made, hoza is the nejv draft considered] 

As an amendment, and is to be first amended, if neces- 
sary, and then put to vote as an amendment reported by 
the committee; or, the new draft may first be accepted as 
a substitute for the original paper, and then treated as 
such. 

160. Give an example of h 02a questions may grow out of 
each other? 

First, a proposition is moved. Then comes a motion to 
amend. This is followed by a motion to commit. The 
debate results in a question of order. Out of this flows a 
question of privilege and rights of members in debate. 
Finally, an attempt is made to dispose of the matter by a 
motion to lay on the table. 

161. In a case like this, we hai^e six questions before the 
assembly at one tifne; hoiv are they to be disposed? 

The regular course of proceeding requires the motion to 
lie on the table to be put first; if it is carried, the whole 
matter is removed from the assembly; if it is lost, the 
question of privilege must then be settled; then the ques- 
tion of order; then the question of commitment; if this is 
lost, the question of amendment is in order; and last of all, 
the main question. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 501 

.162. When is a proposition in order for any member to 
discuss it? 

After it has been moved and seconded, and stated to the 
assembly by the presiding officer. Until this is done, it is 
not before the assembly. 

163. What proceeding is sometimes alloived for the sake of 
speedily disposing of business? 

A member moves a principal question, and at the same 
time calls for the previous question, or that the resolution 
lie on the table. 

164. Under such circumstances^ what may the presiding 
officer do to preserve the right of debate to the assembly'^ 

He may take no notice of the subsidiary question, but 
propose the principal one in the usual manner. 

165. When a ntefnber has obtained the floor, what right 
belotigs-to him? 

The right to express his opinion on the subject under 
consideration. 

166. Can he be iiiterrupted in his speech by any other 
member, tnoving an adjournment, or demanding the orders of 
the day, or makifig any other privileged motion? 

He cannot parliamentarily — that is by right — be inter- 
rupted except by a call to order, and when this question is 
decided he is entitled to be heard through. When any 
matter of privilege affecting the assembly itself or any 
of its members, of which the assembly ought to have 
instant information — such as obstructing the passage-way 
to the hall, a quarrel between members, or a suggestion 
that it has become necessary to have lights — this affords 
sufficient cause for interruption until the assembly is again 
in condition to have the speaker proceed. 



^o2 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

\(i1. Wheti a member has t/ie/Ioo/; afid calls are made for 
an adjoitnunent, or the orders of the da\\ or for the question, 
ho7i) are such calls to be considered! 

As breaches of order; for no motion can be made with- 
out members rising, addressing the chair, and being recog- 
nized by the presiding officer. 

1 68. How shall a metnber address himself to the presiding 
officer ivhen he wishes to call attention to some poijit of order 
or privilege or to the or-ders of the assembly'^ 

"Mr. President, I rise to a point of order." He should 
then proceed with the statement of his point. 

169. When the time arrives for proceeditig with the orders 
of the day, can a man be interrupted while speaking, and new 
subjects presented? 

He can; for if the debate or consideration of that sub- 
ject were allowed to proceed, it might continue through the 
day and thus defeat the order. 

170. After a motion has been made, seconded and proposed, 
to who7n is it custotnary to give the floor on opening the 
debate ? 

To the mover of the question, in preference to others, if 
he rises to speak; also, on resuming debate after adjourn- 
ment, it is customary to give the floor to the mover of the 
adjournment if he desires it. 

171. When t7s.io or more members claitn the floor, to whom 
should the presiding officer give the preference! 

He should prefer the one who is opposed to the measure 
in question; but in all these cases the decision of the pre- 
siding officer may be overruled by the assembly. 

172. Has a member the right to discuss a subject before it 
is moved? 

If he states that he intends to conclude with a motion, 



PAkLtAMENTARV RULES. 



5^3 



and informs the assembly what that motion is, he may be 
allowed to speak. But if he speaks upon a subject not 
known to be, or to be about to become, a motion before 
the house, he is liable to be called to order. 

173. Is the discussion of a subject., 7iot already fno7'ed, 
indulged in by the metnbers? 

Often, when the subject to be brought before the assem- 
bly is not definitely understood, the expression of opinion 
is free. This, at least, is allowed when no member raises 
an objection. If objection is made, the subject must come 
regularly before the meeting. 

174. When a member desires io address the assembly for 
the purpose of discussion, or to make a motion, how should he 
proceed? 

He should rise in his place, address the presiding oflficer 
as "Mr. Chairman," or "Mr. President," and if he is in 
order, the presiding officer will respond by calling the 
speaker by name. Thus the assembly receives notice who 
it is that speaks, and may give its attention accordingly. 

175. What is the duty of a speaker in regard to ?nentioning 
a member then present? 

To refer to him by some expression, or in some manner, 
without using his name, the object being to guard against 
the possibility of exciting personal feeling. 

176. When the presiding officer rises to speak, at the satne 
time as another member, what shall be the duty of that 
member? 

To sit until the presiding officer has been heard. 

177. How long is a member permitted to speak on any 
subject? 

As long as he has the floor and keeps within the rules. 
See No. 184. 



504 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

178. What are ihe general rules in regard to speakmgl 

No person is to use indecent language against the pro- 
ceedings of the assembly, or to reflect on any of its prior 
determinations, unless he means to close his remarks with 
a motion to rescind such determination. No member is at 
liberty to digress from the matter of the question. Every 
member should clearly express his points of argument, or 
the presiding ofhcer may mistake them for digressions. 
Care should be taken in discussion that the speakers follow 
the particular question instead of the general question; at 
one time it may be an amendment, at another a motion to 
postpone, and again a question on ordering the previous 
question. 

179. Does the introductio7i of a subsidiary motion restrain 
debate on the general question ] 

Sometimes it happens that the subsidiary motion in- 
volves in itself the merits of the original proposition, in 
which case the debate embraces both. 

180. When a member is called to order for departifig from 
the subject under consideratiofi, what privilege may be extended 
to him ? 

By an affirmative vote of the assembly he may continue, 
but in the absence of such express privilege he must aban- 
don the objectionable course of his remarks and return to 
the subject under debate. 

181. Ifo7t' many times can a member speak on the same 
subject ufider debate ? 

No member can speak, without permission of the 
assembly, more than once to the same question, but he may 
address upon the same subject as often as it is presented 
in the form of a different question ; as when it is proposed to 
refer it to a committee, or when subsidiary or incidental 
questions arise in the course of the debate. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 505 

182. On 7i<hat points may a member speak a second time in 
I he same debate? 

To clear a matter of fact, or explain some material part 
of his speech, but carefully keeping within that line, and 
not falling into the discussion of the matter itself. 

183. IV/iat is the meaning of the phrase '■'■to clear a matter 
offact^n 

To explain a statement made by a member, but which 
was not so put as to give the hearers a thorough compre- 
hension of it. * 

184. When a tnember wishes to fnake an explanation while 
another is speaking, and the speaker yields the floor for an 
explanation, has tlu speaker the right to the Jloor after the 
explanation has beeti given 1 

He has not. In yielding the floor he relinquishes it 
altogether. 

185. What 7nethods do assemblies adopt to prevent a 
continuation of long and unprofitable debates? 

Limiting the time allotted to each speaker; or adopting 
beforehand a special rule in reference to a particular 
subject, providing that debate shall end at a specified time 
and that all motions or questions pending in relation to it 
shall then be decided. Besides these methods resort is 
often had to the previous question. 

186. When an assembly refuses to support the presidifig 
officer in his efforts to maifitain order and decorum, 7vhat will 
he be justified in doing? 

In permitting every kind of disorder without censure. 

187. When disorderly words are used by one speaker, per- 
sonally offetisive or insulting to another, or to the assembly, 
how may his misconduct be checked? 

By a member or members rising and calling him to order, 



5o6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

the objecting party repeating the words used exactly as he 
conceives them to have been spoken, in order that they 
may be reduced to writing by the recording officer. If 
t'le presiding officer thinks there is no foundation for decid- 
ing the language disorderly, he will prudently delay giving 
orders to the clerk to record them, until a further expression 
of the assembly, either by vote or calling out, is obtained. 

1 88. If offensive words are not technically noticed at the 
time spoken, or immediately after the speaker has fnished, has 
any member the tight to censure the member before the 
assembly ? 

Such censure, if offered, is not to be recorded, or any 
action taken thereon. 

189. Sometimes it occurs that a member while speaking 
does not commatid the attention of the assembly; that his right 
to be heard is disregarded by improper disturbances, whispering, 
talking, and other evidences of contempt or indifference. What 
is the mostprudetit course for him to pursue 1 

To submit himself to the pleasure of the assembly, and 
to sit down; for it scarcely ever happens that the mem- 
bers of any assembly are guilty of this piece of ill manners 
without some excuse. 

190. What is the order, resolution or vote of the assembly 1 
An order is a command of the assembly; a resolution 

expresses its opinion or purpose; the term vote may be 
applied to the result of every question decided by the 
assembly. 

191. In stating a question to an assembly, is it necessary 
for the presidijig officer to give it in the precise form proposedl 

When the proposition is long, as is usual with a petition, 
report, or the like, the form in which it is usually presented 
to the assembly is, "Shall the petition [or the report] be 
received ? " 



PARLTAMENTAKY RULES. 



507 



192. Jn matters of trifling importatice, such as receiving 
petitions and reports, xinthdrawing motions, reading papers, 
etc., what form is often used in disposing of them? 

No objection being heard, the formality of taking a vote 
is dispensed with, and the matter declared to be accepted; 
but should any member object, the presiding officer shall 
consider everything that has passed as void, and at once 
go back and take the matter up in regular form. 

193. What is the form used by the presiding officer in 
putting a question to the assembly 1 

"As many as are of the opinion that [repeating the words 
of the question] say 'aye'; as many as are of a different 
opinion, say 'no.'" 

1 94. Jf the presiding officer is unable to decide the vote, or, 
after deciding according to his judgment, any fnember rises and 
questions the vote, what must be done? 

The members must be requested to form a division, either 
in two separate parties, or by rising in their seats, or by 
roll-call. 

195. -If the assembly is equally divided on any question, 
hoia shall it be decided? 

By a vote from the presiding officer. 

196. Js it the duty of the presiding officer to give the casting 
vote? 

It is; but in doing so he may, if he pleases, give his 
reasons. 

197. When the expression of the assembly is taketi by 
actual count, to whotn does this duty belofig? 

The presiding officer appoints tellers for each division, 
and the members are required to rise and remain standing 
until counted. 



5o8 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

igS. Jn legislative assemblies, hcnv is the question taken 
by vote 1 

The method generally pursued in this country is the roll- 
call. The clerk is ordered to call the name of each mem- 
ber, who rises in his place and answers "Yes," or "No," 
and the clerk notes the answer as the roll is called. He 
then reads over, first the names of those who answered in 
the affirmative, and then the names of those who answered 
in the negative, so that if he has made any mistake, or any 
member has given inadvertently a wrong answer, correction 
may be made. The clerk then counts the number on each 
side, and reports the result to the presiding officer, who 
declares it to the assembly. 

199. After the affinnative side has been put, and voting 
begun, is the quest io7i open to debate! 

It is not a full question until the negative is reached: 
consequently it is in order for any member to rise and 
speak, make motions for amendments or otherwise, and 
thus renew the debate. In such a case, the question must 
be put again on the affirmative. 

200. What objects can be accomplished by such an interrup- 
tion 1 

The votes of members may be recorded who were not in 
the room when voting began; or those who have already 
voted may have changed their minds, and this gives them 
an opportunity to change their votes. 

201. When a question is taken by ayes and noes, the 
negative and affirmative taken at the same time, why can there 
be no opening of the debate, as in other cases? 

Because the question becomes full, both sides being acted 
upon at the same time. 

202. When, during a division, a question is raised concerning 
the right of any member to vote, how is it settled? 

The presiding officer must decide it without debate, his 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



509 



act to be subject to revision and correction by the assembly 
after the division is over. The presiding officer may, if 
he please, receive the advice of members in regard to the 
objection, which they are to give sitting, in order to avoid 
even the appearance of a debate. 

203. Suppose, in coufiting the assetnbly on a division, it 
appears that there is not a quorum present, ivhat shall be 
done i 

Proceedings must be suspended until a quorum is 
obtained, whether on the same or some future day, when 
the question must be taken up at that precise point. 

204. What is a motion for reconsideration! 

A question by which a matter, which has been acted 
upon, shall again come before the assembly in precisely the 
same condition as it was before being considered. 

205. Who has a right to make a motion to reconsider? 

In legislative bodies special rules regulate this; but where 
an assembly is subject to no special rule concerning this, 
it is the privilege of any member to move a reconsideration. 

206. Of what use are cotnmittees? 

To reduce to a convenient shape matters which require 
care to construct, or to conduct an investigation; or it may 
prepare for quick consideration any business which cannot 
be as conveniently discussed in the assembly session. 

207. What are the powers of a co7fimittee1 

It depends upon the general authority and particular 
instruction given it by the assembly at the time of its 
appointment. A vote taken in committee is as binding as 
a vote of the assembly. A committee has full power over 
what may be committed to it, except that it is not at liberty 
to change title or subject. j- 



5IO COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

208. What names are applied to the different kinds of 
committees? 

Select Committees, Standing Committees, and Committee 
of the Whole. 

209. What is a select co?nmittee ? 

A committee especially selected to transact any business 
arising on a particular occasion. 

2 I o. What is a standing committee? 

A committee appointed beforehand for the consideration 
of all matters of kindred nature which may arise during 
the session. A standing committee continues in existence, 
while a select committee is dissolved after the particular 
business for which it was appointed is transacted. 

211. How is a committee selected and appointed? 

First it is decided what number of members the com- 
mittee shall contain. The members may then be appointed 
by the presiding ofificer, selected by ballot, or chosen by 
nomination and vote of the assembly. 

212. Ho7v is a committee elected by ballot? 

The same as in other elections: the members may be 
elected singly or all together, as ordered. 

213. How by nominatio?i and vote? 

The names of the members proposed are put to question 
singly, and approved or rejected by the assembly, by a vote 
taken in the usual way. 

214. When a subject is referred to a committee not yet 
named, what custom is usually followed in the selection of 
the committee? 

No members are placed upon it who are directly opposed 
to the body of that subject, but rather those who are 
supposed to approve it. 



rARLIAJMENTARY RULES. 



511 



215. What is the duty of the secretary in regard to com- 
mittees? 

To make out a list of the members, together with a 
certified copy of instructions under which they are to act, 
and to give the papers to the person first named on the com- 
mittee, if convenient; if not convenient, then to any other 
member of the committee. 

216. Who is the chairman of a comtnittee? 

Usually the first person named on the committee, but 
this is a matter of courtesy, every committee having the 
right to select its own chairman, who presides over it and 
makes the report of its proceedings to the assembly. 

217. When and 7vhere does a conwiittee fneet for the trans- 
action of business] 

Whenever and wherever its members decide. But if 
directions on this point have been given by the assembly, 
the committee cannot regularly sit at any other time or 
place than in accordance with its instructions. Sometimes 
these instructions are to sit immediately and make its 
report forthwith; but no committee has a right to sit while 
the assembly is in session, unless so ordered. 

218. Can a committee transact business without the attend- 
ance of all its 7n embers? 

Unless some particular number has been designated by 
the assembly, a majority constitutes a quorum to do 
business. 

219. Jf a cotnmittee fails to meet at the particular time 
ordered by the assembly, what is the result? 

The committee is closed, and cannot act without being 
newly directed to sit. 

220. Jf disorderly words are spoken in a cotnmittee, ivhat 
is to be done? 

They must be written down and reported to the assembly 



512 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

for its consideration. A committee cannot punish disorderly 
conduct of any kind, but must report it. 

2 2 1. What is the difference in the action of a committee on 
a paper originatifig 7vith it and on one j-ef erred to it? 

Where a paper is referred to a committee, it proceeds to 
the question of amendment; while a paper originating with 
it may be amended, as in the case of a paper referred, but 
at the close the question is put as to agreeing to the paper 
as a whole, as amended or unamended. 

2 2 2. If a committee is opposed to the whole paper j-ef erred 
to it, can it reject the paper 1 

It cannot. If in its judgment the paper cannot be made 
good by amendment it has no authority to reject, but 
must report back to the assembly, and there explain its 
opposition. 

223. What should be the appearance of a paper originating 
with a committee a?id reported to the assembly? 

It should be in a clear draft, fairly written, without 
erasing or interlining. 

224. How should a committee treat a paper referred to it? 
It is not at liberty to erase, interline, blot, disfigure or 

tear it in any manner, but must report all amendments in a 
separate paper, stating the exact parts to be amended and 
the words to be inserted. If the amendments agreed to 
are many and minute, it may report them all together in 
the form of a new draft. 

225. When a committee has fnished its work, what is 
fiext in order? 

A motion and vote that the committee rise, and that the 
chairman, or some other member, make its report to the 
assembly. 

226. How is the report of a committee made? 

The chairman, or the member appointed to make the 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



513 



report, rises in his place and informs the assembly that the 
committee to which was referred such a subject or paper 
has, according to order, had the same under consideration 
and has directed him to make a report thereon, which he is 
ready to do when the assembly shall please. The person 
offering the report, or any other member, can then move 
that the report be now received. The assembly then 
decides whether it will receive the report at that time, or 
fix some time in the future for its reception. 

227. If the report is deferred to some future time, 70/1 at is 
the ma7ifier of disposing of it then] ' 

When the time arrives the chairman reads the report in 
his place, and delivers it, together with all the papers 
connected with it, to the clerk or secretary, who reads it 
again. It then lies on the table until it suits the conve- 
nience of the assembly to take it up for consideration. 

228. If the report is of a paper with amendments, what is 
the method of proceedingt 

The chairman reads the amendments in their connection 
with the paper, showing the alterations made therein and the 
reasons assigned by the committee for its action; while in 
the reading of the report at the clerk's table the amend- 
ments only are read. 

229. Is a 7notio)i and vote necessary in accepting a I'eport] 

It is usually dispensed with, although if any objection is 
made, or if the presiding officer sees any informality in the 
report, he should decline receiving it without a motion and 
vote. 

230. When a report is of considerable length, liow is it 
usually presetited to the members i 

It is printed, and each member given a copy. This 
renders the reading of the papers by the clerk unnecessary. 



5 14 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

231. When is a co77imittee dissolvedl 

When the report has been made and received, the com- 
mittee is dissolved, and can act no more without new 
power; but if the report is not received the committee is 
not discharged, but may be ordered to sit again, and a 
time and place for such session appointed accordingly. 

232. What is meant by recommitting a subject ? 

When any subject has once been in the hands of a 
committee, and the report made upon it is not satisfactory 
to the assembly, it may again be committed to the same 
committee or referred to some other. 

233. Does the previous action of a committee have any 
bearing upon a subject recommitted? 

None whatever, the whole question being again before 
the committee as if nothing had occurred there in relation 
to it. 

234. In how 7na?iy forms may the report of a committee be 
presefttedi 

In three. First, it may contain merely a statement of 
facts, opinions or reasoning in relation to its subject 
without any general conclusion; second, it may contain a 
statement of facts, etc., with a general conclusion; or third, 
it may present a resolution, or a general conclusion, with- 
out any introductory part. 

235. When the report of a committee is accepted, how is it 
treated by the assembly 1 

It is adopted, as though it had been originally done by 
the assembly without the services of a committee. 

236. Do the terms accepting ^z//// adopting have the same 
meaning? 

Practically, yes; though strictly the term "accepting" 
should be used when the report contains merely a state- 
ment of facts, reasoning or opinion, and the term "adopting" 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



515 



when the report conckides with the resolutions or propo- 
sitions. 

237. What is a committee of the whole? 

The whole assembly resolved into a committee. 

238. Hoiv is an assembly rcsoh'ed into a conunittee of the 
whole I 

The presiding officer puts the motion that the assembly 
"do now resolve itself into a committee of the whole, to take 
under consideration (naming the matter before the com- 
mittee);" If this is decided in the affirmative, he declares 
the result, and names some member to act as chairman of 
the committee; if objection is made, the chairman is 
chosen by nomination and vote. The chairman takes a 
seat at the secretary's table, and the presiding officer finds 
a seat elsewhere. 

239. What number is required to constitute a quorum of a 
committee of the 2a hole? 

The same number required to constitute a quorum of the 
assembly. 

240. If at any time the fiuniber present falls belotv a 
quorum, what is the duty of the committee? 

On motion, the chairman rises, and the presiding officer 
resumes the chair. The chairman then informs the 
assembly of the cause of the dissolution of the committee, 
but can make no report of business transacted. 

241. Who acts as clerk in recording the business trarisacted 
by a committee of the 7vhole? 

In legislative bodies it becomes the duty of the assistant 
clerk. 

242. How are the records of this co?nmittee kept? 

The same as those of any committee, and only the report 
to the assembly is to be recorded in the journal of the 
assembly. 



5i6 COMMON SCHOOL QUESTION BOOK. 

243. What is the difference hetiveen the proceeditigs of the 
asseftibly and 0/ the committee 0/ the whole] 

In the committee of the whole the previous question 
cannot be moved; the committee cannot adjourn; every 
member may speak as often as he pleases, providing he can . 
obtain the floor; the committee cannot refer any matter to 
another committee; the presiding officer of the assembly, if 
a member of it, has a right to take part in the proceed- 
ings the same as any other member; and, in case of a 
breach of order, the committee cannot punish offenders, 
but must write down the incident and report it to the 
assembly. 

244. Ho7ii may an improper discussion be avoided^ which 
i?i the assembly can be governed by the previous question! 

It may be moved that the committee rist; and if it is 
apprehended that the same mode of discussion will be 
attempted on returning again to tht committee, the 
assembly can discharge the committee and proceed itself 
with the business. 

245. Jf the business of the com7nittee is fiot concluded at 
the usual time for the assembly to adjourn, or if the committee 
has other reasons for 7iot continuifig, hoiv shall it proceed! 

A motion should be made that the committee rise, 
report progress, and ask leave to sit again. If this motion 
prevails, the presiding officer resumes the chair of the 
assembly, and the chairman informs him that the commit- 
tee has, according to order, made some progress thereon, 
but for want of time asks leave to sit again. The presiding 
officer thereupon puts the question of giving the committee 
leave to sit again, and designating the time when the 
assembly will again resolve itself into a committee. If the 
request is not granted, the committee is dissolved. 

246. What is a sub-committee? 

A committee appointed by a committee for the purpose 
of expediting its business. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



sn 



247. /s iJie fonnartly of a motion and ijnestioii eTer omitted 
in relation to the titne of receiving a report? 

By general consent, it is. If the assembly is ready to 
receive it at the time, the members cry out, "Now! Now!" 
If it is not ready, some other time is proposed, as "To- 
morrow," or "Monday," and that is fixed by general 
consent; but any objection necessitates an agreement by 
motion and vote. 

248. J FA at special duty should be i?n posed upon every 
presiding officer in the discharge of business? 

He should give the closest attention to the proceedings 
of the assembly, and especially to what is said by the 
speakers. By so doing, confusion will be prevented, 
offensive language checked, and harmony assured. His 
attention, interest, and impartial acts will inspire confidence, 
create union of feeling, and impress upon each member the 
necessity of transacting business for the benefit of all. 



Commencement Parts. «' Efforts " for all occasions. Orations, 
addresses, valedictories, salulatories, class poems, class mottoes, 
after-dinner speeches, flag days ti.aional 
holidays, class-day exercises. Models for 
every possible occasion in high-si hi dI and 
college career, every one of th - " eftorts " 
being what some fellow has stood on his 
feet and actually delivered on a similar 
occasion— not what th^compilerwo?//;/ say 
\( he should happen to be called on for an 
ivy song or a response to a toast, or what 
not ; but what the fellow himself, when his 
turn came, rfirfiay.' $1.50. 

New Dialogues and Plays. Life-like 

episodes from popular authors like Steven- 
son, Crawford, Mark Twain, Dickens, 
Scott, in the form of simple plays, with 
every detail explained as to dress, make- 
up, utensils, furniture, etc., for school-room V„ 
or parlor. $1.50. 

College Men's 3-Minute Declamations. 

Up-to-date selections from live men likeChauncey Depew, Hewitt, 
Gladstone, Cleveland, President Eliot (Harvard) and Carter 
(Williams) and others. New material with vitality in it for prize 
speaking. Very popular. $1.00. 

College Maids' 3-Minute Readings. Up- to date recitations 
from living men and women. On the plan of the popular College 
Men's Declamations, and on the same high plane. $1.00. 

Pieces for Prize Speaking Contests. $1.00. Nearly ready. 

Acme Declamation Book. Single pieces and dialogues. For 
boysand girls of all ages; all occasions. PaDer,30cts.; cloth, 50 cts. 

Handy Pieces to Speak. Single pieces and dialogues. Primary, 
20 cts.; Intermediate, 20 cts.; Advanced, 20 cls. All three for ^o cts. 




Pros and Cons. 



Complete debates of the affirmative and nega- 
tive of the stirring questions of the day. A de- 
cided hit. This is another book invaluable not 
only to high-school and college students, but 
also to every other peison who aspires to con- 
verse engagingly on the topics of the day. Our 
foreign policy, the currency, the tariff, immi- 
gration, high license, woman suflTrage, penny 
postage, transportation, trusts, depmtment 
stores, municipal o\v:iership of franclii'-es, 
government control of telegraph. Both sides oi 
these and many other questions completely de- 
bated. Directions (or organizinji and conduct- 
ing a debating society, with by-laws and par- 
liamentary rules. $I.50> 

New Parliamentary Manual By 

H. C. Davis, compiler of " Cfunmencenient 
Parts." 75 cents. Nearly Keady. 

Ten Weeks Courss in Elocution ( Nor- 
mal Reader). With numerous anc* varied selections for iUustration 
and practice. $1.25. 




Character Building. Inspiring suggestions. $i.oo. 

Mistakes of Teachers corrected by common sense (the famous 
Preston Papers). Solves difficulties not explained in text-books 
which daily perplex the conscientious teai her. $1.00. 

Best Methods of Teaching in Country Schools (Lind's), $i .25. 
Page's Theory and Practice of Teaching. With Questions 

and Answers. Paper, SO CtS. Cloth, $1.00. 

Psychology Simplified for Teachers. Gordy's well-known 

"New Psychology." Familiar talks to teachers and parents on 
how to observe the child-mind, and on the value of child-study in 
the successful teaching and rearing of the young. With Ques- 
tions on czch 'Lesson. $1.25. 'Jweniy-sixlh thousand! 

The Perceptionalist. Hamilton's Mental .Science, rev. ed. $2. 

Smith's New Class Register, l he best of record books. 5octs. 

Likes and Opposites. ^Synonyms and their Opposites. soots. 

Letter Writing. Newhandy rules forcorrectcorrespondence. 75c. 

Punctuation. Hinds & Noble's new Manual. Paper, 25 cts. 

New Speller. Hinds & Noble's new graded lists of 5000 words 
which one must know how to f pell. 23 CtS. 

Craig's COMMON SCHOOL Questions 7vith Answers. $1.50. 

Henry's HIGH SCHOOL Questions W//^ ^«jw«-j. $1.50. 

Sherrill's New Normal Questions zoith Answers. $1.50. 

Quizzism and its Key (Southwick). $1.00. 

Moritz' 1000 Questions. For the Entrance Examinations to 
the New York High Schools, the New York Normal College, the 
College of the City of New York, St. Francis Xavier's College, 
West Point, Annapolis, and the Civil Service. 30 cents. 

Answers to same. 50 cents. 

Recent Entrance Examination Questions. For the New York 

Normal College, the College of the City of New York, St. Francis 
Xavier's College, Columbia College, the High Schools, Regents' 
Exam's, West Point, Annapolis, and the Civil Service. 30 cents. 

Answers to same. 50 cents. 

How to Prepare for a Civil Service Examination, with recent 

Examination Questions and the Answers. 560 pages, $2 00. 

Abridged Edition, without questions and answers , SO Ceats. 
How to Become Quick at Figures. Enlarged Edition, gi.oo. 
Bad English, llumiliating " Breaks" corrected. 30 cts. 
Composition Writing Made Easy. Fe?j successful. Five 

Grades, viz.: A, B, C. D. E. 20 cts. each. All Jive for -js cts. 

1000 Composition Subjects. 25 cents. 

U. S. Constitution in German, French, and English, parallel 
columns, -with explanatory marginal Notes. Cloth, 50c ; paper, 25c. 

Bookkeeping Blanks at 30 cts. per set. Five Blank- Books to 
the set. Adapted for use with any text-book— Elementary, Prac- 
tical, or Common School Used everywhere.— Price, 30 cts. per set. 

Object Lesson Cards (Oliver and Boyd). 48 Cards, 13 x 20 
inches. $28.00. 

Lessons on Morals (Dewey) 75 cents. In preparation. 

Lessons on Manners (Dewey) 75 cents. In preparation. 



Dictionaries: The Classic Series. Half morocco, $2.00 each. 

Especially planned and carefully produced to meet the require- 
ments of students and teachers in colleges, and high schools. 
Up to the times in point of contents, authoritative while modern 
as regards scholarship, instantly accessible in respect to arrange- 
ment, of best quality as to typography and paper, and in a binding 
at once elegant and durable. Size 8x5^ inches. 

French-English and Eng'ish-French Dictionary, 1122 pages. 

German-English and Eiig.-Ger. Dictionary, 11 12 pages. 

Italian-English and English-Italian Diet., 1187 pages. 

Latin-English and English-Latin Dictionary, 941 pages. 

Greek-English and English-tireek Diet., 1056 pages. 

English-Greek Dictionary Price $1.00. 

Dictionaries: The Handy Series. " Scholarship modern and 

accurate; and really beautiful print." Pocket edition. 

Spanish-English and Englifh-Spanish, 474 pages, $1 00. 

Italian-English and English Italian, 428 pages, $1.00. 

New-Testament Lexicon. Entirely ne2u. Ji.oo. 

Up-to-date in every respect — typogiaphically, and lexico- 
graphically. Contains a fine presentation of the Synonyms 
of the Greek Testament, with hints on discriminating usage. 

Liddell & Scott's Abridged Greek Lexicon, $1.20. 

White's Latin-English Dictionary, $1.20. 

White's English-Latin Dictionary, $1.20. 

White's Latin-English and Eng.-Lat. Diet., $2.25. 

Completely Parsed Caesar, Book I. Each page bears inter- 
linear translation, /;/(»ra/ translation, parsing, grammatical refer- 
ences. All at a glance withiait turning a leaf . $1.50. 

Caesar's Idioms. Complete, with English equivalents. 25 cts. 

Cicero's Idioms. As found in "Cicero's Orations." 25 cents. 

Shortest Road to Caesar. Successful elem. Latin method. 75Cts. 

Hossfeld Methods: Spanish, Italian, German, French, ^i.oo 
each. Keys for each, 35 cts. Letter Writer for each, $1.00 each, 

German Texts, with Footnotes and Vocabulary : — Wilhelm 

Tell, Neffeals Onkel.Minna v. Barnh elm, Nathan derWeise, Emilia 
Galotti, Hermann und Dorothe . Six volumes, 50 CtS. each. 

Brooks' Historia Sacra, with ist Latin Lessons. Revised, 

with Vocabulary. Price SO cents. This justly popular volume, 
besides the Epitome Historiae Sacrae, the Notes, and the Vocabu- 
lary, contains 100 pages of elementary Latin Lessons, making It 
practicable for the teacher, without recourse to any other book, 
to carry the pupil quickly and in easy steps over the ground pre- 
paratory to a profitable reading of the Epitome Historise Sacrae. 

Brooks' First Lessons in Greek, -with Lexicon. Revised 
Edition. Covering sufficient ground to enable the student to 
read the New Testament in the Greek. Price SO Cts. 

Brooks' New Virgil's JEneid, with Lexicon. Revised Edition. 
Notes, Metrical Index, Map, Que^^tioiis for Examinations. $1.50. 

Brooks' New Ovid's Metamorphoses, u<itk Lexicon. Expur- 
gated and adapted formixed classes. With Notes, and Questions 
for Examin itions. Price reduced to $1.50. 

Hinds & Noble's Hebrew Grammar, $i.oo. 



Psvcftology a$ an Hia In teaching 

That scientific teaching is impossible without a 
knowledge of Psychology is no longer a debated 
question. But there is an important question in this 
connection which has not yet been answered : WHAT 
BOOK shall the hundreds of thousands of earnest 
teachers study who have not had the advantages of a 
college training? 

1. Do they need a book which they can understand — 
a book whose apt illustn'\tions bring abstract truths 
within the range of universal comprehension ? 

2. Do they need a book which makes it clear that 
there are questions which it does not attempt to 
answer, questions that no elementary text-book can 
hope to answer, and which will thus stimulate them to 
further study and further investigation ? 

3. Do they need a book which is constantly raising 
questions about their minds and the minds of their 
pupils — a book which will make them students of their 
own minds and the minds of their pupils in spite of 
themselves ? 

4. Do they need a book which is itself from beginning 
to end a perfect sample of the inductive method of 
teaching, beginning with the simple and the known 
and going to the complex and unknown ? 

5. Do they need a book which thousands of teachers 
have declared was the first to interest them in the 
study of mind? 

If so, there is one book that will fully satisfy their 
needs. That book is Gordy's New Psychology. 

If you wish to see for yourself whether it possesses 
all of these characteristics send for a copy. It will cost 
you nothing if you do not like it. If you wish to keep 
it the price is $1.25. 

HINDS & NOBLE 

4^J3-J4 Cooper Institute - - New York City 



Best Methods of Teaching 
in Country Schools 

By G. Dallas Lind 



This work is not the fine-spun theory of a college pro- 
fessor, but the practical ideas of a country teacher, fresh 
from the country school-room. 

It is not a mass of " glittering generalities," but sug- 
gestions in detail as to how to teach and manage an un- 
graded school, drawn from long experience and careful 
observations. 

1. // tells how the teacher should conduct himsdf in rela- 
tion to his patrons and to society in general. 

2. It tells what qualifications are necessary for a good 
teacher. 

3. It tells how to apply for a school. 

4. It describes in detail the most approved and appli- 
cable methods of teaching all the branches studied in a 
country school. 

5. It gives some very practical hints about apparatus and 
school architecture. 

6. It will give you new insight into your work. 

7. It will lead you to see and realize more pleasure and 
happiness in your teaching than you have ever been able to get 
out of it before. 

8. It will give you the essential principles of practical 
teaching. 

9. It xvill tell you just what to do and how to do it, so that 
rour work 7vill not ojily be enjoyable, but profitable. 

No book has ever been published containing so many 
helpful suggestions of vital interest to Teachers of 
Country Schools. 

Teachers of Town and City Schools will also derive 
much benefit from reading the Chapters on the Methods 
of Teaching, Reading, Spelling, Arithmetic. Geography, 
General Historv. Physiology. Algebra, Natural Science, 
Morals and Manners. 



A sample copy will be sent, postpaid, to any teacher for 
$1.00 (regular price $1.25). 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers 
4-5-6-I2-J3-I4 Cooper Institute New York City 



3 



Pedagogical Knots Untied 

Preston Papers 

A book brimming over with new thoughts — new ideas. 
A recital of actual schoolroom experiences in wliich all 
the common and uncommon Pedagogical difficulties are 
met and remedied. 

Written by a teacher of many years' experience whose 
heart and soul and life are absorbed in her work. 

It will stimulate you to renewed exertion. It is full of 
practical hints and suggestions which will help to solve 
the problems (not found in textbooks) which daily con- 
front and perplex the busy, conscientious teacher. 

It treats exhaustively of the important subjects of 

Government Environments 

Punishment Health 

Responsibility "Whispering 

Examinations Manners 

Prize Giving Dress 

Management Overwork 

It shows the best way to teach Geography, Grammar, 
Penmanship, Spelling, Reading, Primary Arithmetic, 
and Composition. 

It contains chapters on Teachers' Reports, the School 
Museum, and Teachers' Examinations. 

This book will help lighten teachers' labors. Reading 
Circles are introducing it in every State. Would you like 
to see a copy ? We will send it prepaid and allow you to 
return it if you wish to. 

Price to Teachers, $.80 {Regular Price, $1.00). 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers 

4 5-13-14 Cooper Institute - - New York City 

School Books 0/ All rublishtrs at One Store 



© Book$ for your Cibrary O 

No Private School, High School or College Library 
is complete without having on its shelves one or more of 
the following books for its students to refer to. 

Teachers are ordering many of these books for their 
own personal use. 

Mistakes in Teaching (Preston Papers) fi.oo 

Craig's New Common School Question Book, with Answers "i 50 

Henry's New High School Question Book, with Answers 1.50 

Gordy's New Psychology 1.25 

Mackenzie's Manual of Ethics 1.50 

Lind's Best Methods of Teaching in Country Schools 1.25 

Page's Theory and Practice of Teaching i.oo 

Character Building (Coler) 1.00 

A Ten Weeks' Course in Elocution (Coombs^ 1.25 

Commencement Parts (Valedictories, Orations, Essays, etc.) 1.50 

Pros and Cons (Doth Sides of Important Questions Discussed). . . 1.50 

Three Minute Declamations for College Men. i.oo 

Three Minute Readings for College Girls i.oo 

Pieces for Prize Speaking Contests (Craig & Gunnison) i.oo 

New Dialogues a.id Plays (Gunnison) 1.50 

Classic French-English, English-French Dictionary 2.00 

" German-English, English- German Dictionary 2.00 

" Italian-English, English-Italian Dictionary 2.00 

" Latin-English, English-Latin Dictionary 2.00 

" Greek-English, English-Greek Dictionary 2.00 

Handy Spanish-English, English-Spanish Dictionary 1.00 

" Italian-English, English-Italian Dictionary i.oo 

Shortest Road to Caesar (Jeffers) 75 

How to Prepare for a Civil Service Examination 2.00 

How to Become Quick at Figures i.oo 

Likes and Opposites (Synonyms and Antonyms) 50 

Hinds & Noble's New Letter Writer 75 

Quizzism and Its Key (South wick) i.co 

We will send postpaid, subject to your approval, 
any of the books on this list upon receipt of the price. 
Mention " Books for your Library " when you write us. 

HINDS & NOBLE, PubUshers 
4-5-6-I2-I3-H Cooper Institute New York Qty 



LB oL '09 



'^/-v^^ 






^oo^ 



xV- 



\' <!- 






■^/- .'^ 



■V 



i'? 









x^- .\' 



.^^^^ 









<H -n^. 



'-^A >^^ 



■>^ '^, 



^'t^ '^-t. 



o^' 



-^.s:^ 



.S<: 



•^^ 



*SKO>"i^ 






< . 'i »* s^ a' 



o-^ 






..-^ 



'^' 






\^ -^ 



• is ■- 



"^A V^ 



^->*^ '^ri. 



v^,^' : 



.#' 



o>' 



^f. .V 






■^" 



